Home

IFS NS3550-24T/4S User Manual - Surveillance

1. B Manage Your Server EN Command Prompt t Component Services Computer Management m Control 4 Configure Your Server Wizard om oe Data Sources ODBC ETE Adminis at Distributed File System DAS him Domain Controller Security Policy Help an Eim Domain Security Policy Event Viewer HyperTerminal Internet Authentication Service Ethereal 3 a E Accessories 3 e Internet Explor Startup a Internet Explorer HE Microsoft NET Framework 1 1 Wizards a i we 4 a Windows Catalog Windows Update Internet Information Services 115 Manager Licensing Manage Your Server Bee FT he Microsoft MET Framework 1 1 Configuration Outlook Express Network Load Balancing Manager Remote Assistance Performance Administrative Tools Remote Desktops F IxChariot b Routing and Remote Access F Ethereal All Programs Services 3 a lan B Terminal Server Licensing Log ds 1 Terminal Services Configuration He Start E F a Terminal Services Manager Figure 4 11 15 Windows 2003 AD server Setting Path EEDE 9 13 PM 226 NS3550 24T 4S User Manual 5 Enter Active Directory Users and Computers create legal user data the next right click a user what you created to enter properties and what to be noticed New Object User x Create im ca test po Users First name test Initials Last name Full mame test
2. AAA Link Aggregation 4 ports aggregate up to 4Gbps Figure 4 5 1 Link Aggregations The Link Aggregation Control Protocol LACP provides a standardized means for exchanging information between Partner Systems that require high speed redundant links Link aggregation lets you group up to eight consecutive ports into a single dedicated connection This feature can expand bandwidth to a device on the network LACP operation requires full duplex mode more detail information refer to the IEEE 802 3ad standard Port link aggregations can be used to increase the bandwidth of a network connection or to ensure fault recovery Link aggregation lets you group up to 4 consecutive ports into a single dedicated connection between any two the Switch or other Layer 2 switches However before making any physical connections between devices use the Link aggregation Configuration menu to specify the link aggregation on the devices at both ends When using a port link aggregation note that e The ports used in a link aggregation must all be of the same media type RJ 45 100 Mbps fiber e The ports that can be assigned to the same link aggregation have certain other restrictions see below e Ports can only be assigned to one link aggregation e The ports at both ends of a connection must be configured as link aggregation ports e None of the ports in a link aggregation can be configured as a mirror source port or a mirror target port
3. NotAccessable Forwarding l E ae Static MAC Table Change Change Change View Only Change View Only and Filtering Static Static Multicast Table Change Change Change View Only Not Accessable Not Accessable Multicast Table IGMP IGMP Snooping View Only Not Accessable Not Accessable Snooping System Configuration View Only pepr Accessable payaman Accessable Spanning Tree PerPort Configuration View Only Not Accessable Accessable Not Accessable Accessable DHCP Relay amp Opt 82 DHCP Relay amp Opt 82 Change Change Change View Only Change View Only LLDP Configuration Change Change Change View View Only Change View View Only TOS DSCP Port l l Change Change Change View Only Not Accessable Not Accessable Configuration Power Over PoE Configuration Change Change View only View Only View Only View Only l Master Admin level has permission to set up user names and passwords for all levels of Admin IT and Security Il IT Admin level has permission to set up user names and passwords for all levels of IT LE Security Admin has permission to set up user names and passwords for all levels of Security 451 APPENDEX C GLOSSARY A ACE ACL ACE is an acronym for Access Control Entry It describes access permission associated with a particular ACE ID There are three ACE frame types Ethernet Type ARP and IPv4 and two ACE actions permit and deny The ACE also contains many detailed differ
4. Default Setting 20 373 374 NS3550 24T 4S User Manual Example Set STP maximum hops in 25 SWITCH gt stp maxhops 25 STP MaxAge Description Set or show the CIST MSTI bridge maximum age Syntax STP MaxAge lt max_age gt Parameters lt max_age gt STP maximum age time 6 40 and max_age lt forward_delay 1 2 Default Setting 20 Example Set STP maximum age time in 10 SWITCH gt stp maxage 10 STP FwdDelay Description Set or show the CIST MSTI bridge forward delay Syntax STP FwdDelay lt delay gt Parameters lt delay gt MSTP forward delay 4 30 and max_age lt forward_delay 1 2 Default Setting 15 Example 375 Set STP forward delay value in 25 SWITCH gt stp fwddelay 25 STP CName Description Set or show MSTP configuration name and revision Syntax STP CName lt config name gt lt integer gt Parameters lt config name gt MSTP Configuration name A text string up to 32 characters length Use quotes to embed spaces in name lt integer gt Integer value Default Setting Configuration name MAC address Configuration rev 0 Example Set MSTP configuration name and revision SWITCH gt stp cname 9f_IGSW 24040T 1 STP BPDU Filter Description Set or show edge port BPDU Filtering Syntax STP bpduFilter enable disable Parameters enable disable enable or disable BPDU Filtering for Edge ports
5. Show LACP Status Syntax LACP Status lt port_list gt Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports Example Show LACP status of port1 4 SWITCH gt lacp status 1 4 Port Mode Key AggrID Partner System ID Partner Port Disabled 1 Disabled 1 3 Disabled 1 398 4 Disabled 1 LACP Statistics Description Show LACP Statistics Syntax LACP Statistics lt port_list gt clear Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports clear Clear LACP statistics Example Show LACP statistics of port1 4 SWITCH gt lacp statistics 1 4 Port Rx Frames Tx Frames Rx Unknown Rx Illegal NS3550 24T 4S User Manual LLDP Command LLDP Configuration Description Show LLDP configuration Syntax LLDP Configuration lt port_list gt Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports Example Show LLDP configuration of port1 4 399 SWITCH FIldp configuration 1 4 LLDP Configuration Reinit Delay 2 Port Mode Port Descr System Name System Descr System Capa Mgmt Addr CDP awareness Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Disabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Disabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Disabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Disabled LLDP Mode Description Set or show LLDP mode Syntax LLDP Mode lt port_list gt enable disa
6. This section has the following items El IEEE 802 10 VLAN Enable IEEE 802 1Q Tag based VLAN group a IEEE 802 1Q Tunneling Enables 802 1Q QinQ Tunneling a Private VLAN Creates removes primary or community VLANs IEEE 802 1Q VLAN In large networks routers are used to isolate broadcast traffic for each subnet into separate domains This Managed Switch provides a similar service at Layer 2 by using VLANs to organize any group of network nodes into separate broadcast domains VLANs confine broadcast traffic to the originating group and can eliminate broadcast storms in large networks This also provides a more secure and cleaner network environment An IEEE 802 1Q VLAN is a group of ports that can be located anywhere in the network but communicate as though they belong to the same physical segment VLANs help to simplify network management by allowing you to move devices to a new VLAN without having to change any physical connections VLANs can be easily organized to reflect departmental groups such as Marketing or R amp D usage groups such as e mail or multicast groups used for multimedia applications such as videoconferencing 107 VLANs provide greater network efficiency by reducing broadcast traffic and allow you to make network changes without having to update IP addresses or IP subnets VLANs inherently provide a high level of network security since traffic must pass through a configured Layer 3 link to reach a differen
7. A port must be a member of both a VLAN and a Private VLAN to be able to forward packets By default all ports are VLAN Unaware and members of VLAN 1 and Private VLAN 1 A VLAN unaware port can only be a member of one VLAN but it can be a member of multiple Private VLANs The Private VLAN Membership Configuration screen is shown in Figure 4 6 7 Private VLAN Membership Configuration Port Members ort embers Delete evan 0 x 2 3f4f5 o 7 5 9 x0 1a 2 13 14 15 16 17 a9 s9 20 2i 2 za za Figure 4 6 7 Private VLAN Membership Configuration Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object e Delete e VLAN ID e Port Members e Adding a New VLAN Description To delete a VLAN entry check this box The entry will be deleted on all switch units during the next Save Indicates the ID of this particular VLAN A row of check boxes for each port is displayed for each VLAN ID To include a port in a VLAN check the box To remove or exclude the port from the VLAN make sure the box is unchecked By default no ports are members and all boxes are unchecked Click to add a new VLAN ID An empty row is added to the table and the VLAN can be configured as needed Legal values for a VLAN ID are 1 through 4095 The VLAN is enabled on the selected switch unit when you click on Save TA The button can be used to undo the addition of new VLANs 122 NS3550 24T 4S User Manual Buttons _ Addl new Private VLAN Gi
8. NS3550 24T 4S User Manual WEB CONFIGURATION This section introduces the configuration and functions of the Web Based management About Web based Management The Managed Switch offers management features that allow users to manage the Managed Switch from anywhere on the network through a standard browser such as Microsoft Internet Explorer The Web Based Management supports Internet Explorer 7 0 It is based on Java Applets with an aim to reduce network bandwidth consumption enhance access speed and present an easy viewing screen Es By default IE7 0 or later version does not allow Java Applets to open sockets The user has to explicitly modify the browser setting to enable Java Applets to use network ports Note The Managed Switch can be configured through an Ethernet connection make sure the manager PC must be set on same the IP subnet address with the Managed Switch For example the default IP address of the Managed Switch is 192 168 0 100 then the manager PC should be set at 192 168 0 x where x is a number between 1 and 254 except 100 and the default subnet mask is 255 255 255 0 If you have changed the default IP address of the Managed Switch to 192 168 1 1 with subnet mask 255 255 255 0 via console then the manager PC should be set at 192 168 1 x where x is a number between 2 and 254 to do the relative configuration on manager PC Managed Switch PC Workstation vith LE Browser PEN FRIAS UTP ade ZA
9. Object e Delete e Group Name Security Model e Security Level e Read View Name e Write View Name Buttons Add ney access SIVE Click to save changes Figure 4 3 8 SNMPv3 Accesses Configuration Page Screenshot Description Check to delete the entry It will be deleted during the next save A string identifying the group name that this entry should belong to The allowed string length is 1 to 32 and the allowed content is the ASCII characters from 33 to 126 Indicates the security model that this entry should belong to Possible security models are any Accepted any security model v1 v2c usm v1 Reserved for SNMPv1 v2c Reserved for SNMPv2c usm User based Security Model USM Indicates the security model that this entry should belong to Possible security models are NoAuth NoPriv None authentication and none privacy Auth NoPriv Authentication and none privacy Auth Priv Authentication and privacy The name of the MIB is view defining the MIB objects for which this request may request the current values The allowed string length is 1 to 32 and the allowed content is the ASCII characters from 33 to 126 The name of the MIB is view defining the MIB objects for which this request may potentially SET new values The allowed string length is 1 to 32 and the allowed content is the ASCII characters from 33 to 126 Click to add a new access entry Reset Click to undo any changes made loc
10. Parameters lt msti gt STP bridge instance no 0 7 CIST 0 MSTI1 1 lt priority gt STP bridge priority 0 16 32 48 224 240 Default MSTI Bridge Priority CIST 128 MST1 128 MST2 128 MST3 128 MST4 128 MST5 128 MST6 128 MST7 128 Example Set MST1 priority value in 48 SWITCH gt stp msti priority 1 48 STP MSTI Map Description Show up or clear MSTP MSTI VLAN mapping configuration Syntax STP Msti Map lt msti gt clear Parameters lt msti gt STP bridge instance no 0 7 CIST 0 MSTI1 1 Clear Clear VID to MSTI mapping Example Add MST1 priority value in 48 SWITCH gt stp msti priority 1 48 3 9 STP MSTI Add Description Add a VLAN to a MSTI Syntax STP Msti Add lt msti gt lt vid gt Parameters lt msti gt STP bridge instance no 0 7 CIST 0 MSTI1 1 lt vid gt VLAN ID 1 4095 Example Add MST1 in vlan1 SWITCH gt stp msti add 1 1 STP Port Configuration Description Show up STP Port configuration Syntax STP Port Configuration lt port_list gt Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all Port zero means aggregations Example Show STP status of Port SWITCH gt stp port configuration 1 Port Mode AdminEdge AutoEdge restrRole restricn bpduGuard Point2point 1 Enabled Enabled Enabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Auto STP Port Mode Description Set or show the STP enabling for a port 380 NS35
11. any lt dport gt Destination UDP TCP port range 0 65535 or any tcp TCP keyword lt tcp_flags gt TCP flags fin syn rst psh ack urg 0 1 any permit Permit forwarding default deny Deny forwarding lt rate_limiter gt Rate limiter number 1 15 or disable lt port_copy gt Port number for copy of frames or disable lt logging gt System logging of frames log log disable lt shutdown gt Shut down ingress port shut shut_disable Security Network ACL Delete Description Delete ACE Syntax Security Network ACL Delete lt ace_id gt Parameters lt ace_id gt ACE ID 1 128 Example Delete ACE 1 SWITCH gt security network acl delete 1 354 NS3550 24T 4S User Manual Security Network ACL Look up Description Show ACE default All ACEs Syntax Security Network ACL Look up lt ace_id gt Parameters lt ace_id gt ACE ID 1 128 Example Look up ACE 1 SWITCH gt security network acl lookup 1 Security Network ACL Clear Description Clear all ACL counters Syntax Security Network ACL Clear Example Clear all ACL counters SWITCH gt security network acl clear Security Network ACL Status Description Show ACL status Syntax Security Network ACL Status combined staticidhcp upnplarp_inspectionlip_source_guard conflicts Parameters combined Shows the combined status 355 static Shows the static user configured status dhc
12. button to start over The page includes the following fields Object Description e Port The port number for which the status applies Click the port number to see the status for this particular port e VLANID The VLAN ID of the entry e MAC address The MAC address of the entry e IP Address The IP address of the entry Buttons Auto refresh Check this box to enable an automatic refresh of the page at regular intervals Refresh Refreshes the displayed table starting from the Start from MAC address and VLAN input fields Clear Flushes all dynamic entries ke Updates the table starting from the first entry in the MAC Table i e the entry with the lowest VLAN ID and MAC address gt gt Ea Updates the table starting with the entry after the last entry currently displayed 253 Dynamic IP Source Guard Table Entries in the Dynamic IP Source Guard Table are shown on this page The Dynamic IP Source Guard Table is sorted first by port then by VLAN ID then by IP address and then by IP mask The Dynamic IP Source Guard Table screen is shown in Figure 4 13 6 Dynamic IP Source Guard Table Start from VLAN and IP Address 0 0 0 0 and IP Mask 9 0 0 0 with entries per page Auto Refresh Figure 4 13 6 Dynamic IP Source Guard Table Page Screenshot Navigating the ARP Inspection Table Each page shows up to 999 entries from the Dynamic IP Source Guard table default being 20 selected through the entries
13. e MAC address The MAC address of the entry e Port Members The ports that are members of the entry Buttons Auto refresh Check this box to enable an automatic refresh of the page at regular intervals Refresh Refreshes the displayed table starting from the Start from MAC address and VLAN input fields ear Flushes all dynamic entries kee Updates the table starting from the first entry in the MAC Table i e the entry with the lowest VLAN ID and MAC address gt gt Updates the table starting with the entry after the last entry currently displayed MAC Table Learning If the learning mode for a given port is grayed out another module is in control of the mode so that it cannot be changed by the user An example of such a module is the MAC Based Authentication under 802 1X Each port can do learning based upon the following settings Port security is a feature that allows you to configure a switch port with one or more device MAC addresses that are authorized to access the network through that port When port security is enabled on a port the Managed Switch stops learning new MAC addresses on the specified port and when it has reached a configured maximum number Only incoming traffic with source addresses already stored in the dynamic or static address table will be authorized to access the network through that port If a device with an unauthorized MAC address attempts to use the switch port the intrusion w
14. lt engineid gt Engine ID the format may not be all zeros or all ffH and is restricted to 5 32 octet string Example Set the SNMP trap security engine ID SWITCH gt security switch snmp trap security engine id 800007e501 7f000011 327 Security Switch SNMP Trap Security Name Description Set or show SNMP trap security name Syntax Security Switch SNMP Trap Security Name lt security_name gt Parameters lt security_name gt A string representing the security name for a principal default Show SNMP trap security name Example Set the SNMP trap security name SWITCH gt security switch snmp trap security name 12345678 Security Switch SNMP Engine ID Description Set or show SNMPv3 local engine ID Syntax Security Switch SNMP Engine ID lt engineid gt Parameters lt engineid gt Engine ID the format may not be all zeros or all ffH and is restricted to 5 32 octet string Default Setting 800007e501 7f000001 Example Set 800007e5017f000002 for SNMPv3 local engine ID SWITCH gt security switch snmp engine id 800007e501 7f000002 Security Switch SNMP Community Add Description 328 NS3550 24T 4S User Manual Add or modify SNMPv3 community entry The entry index key is lt community gt Syntax Security Switch SNMP Community Add lt community gt lt ip_addr gt lt ip_mask gt Parameters lt community gt Community string lt ip_addr gt IP address a b c d
15. normally 48 NS3550 24T 4S User Manual System Information The System Info page provides information for the current device information System Info page helps a switch administrator to identify the hardware MAC address software version and system uptime The screen is shown in Figure 4 2 1 system Information Contact Name NS3550 24T 45 Location MAC Address 90 30 4f 22 64 5e AC Power OFF Power Status OC Powerl OFF DC Power ON Temperature PP 5 f2 56 System Date 1970 01 01 Thu 00 00 29 0000 System Uptime Od 00 00 29 Software Version Betal10426 Software Date 2011 04 26 17 02 30 0800 Auto Refresh Figure 4 2 1 System Information Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Contact The system contact configured in Configuration System Information System Contact e Name The system name configured in Configuration System Information System Name e Location The system location configured in Configuration System Information System Location e MAC Address The MAC Address of this switch e Power Status Indicate DC power supply input of this switch e Temperature Indicate main chipset temperature e System Date The current GMT system time and date The system time is obtained through the configured SNTP Server if any 49 e System Uptime The period of time the device has been operational e Software Version The software version of the switch e
16. 0 Source QUES Power Source Alarm 2 DOO GND DC POWER ON CAUTION manual datore coonec t DC Input Range 36V 72V DC Figure 2 14 Wiring DOO and DO1 to Open Detector 36 3 NS3550 24T 4S User Manual SWITCH MANAGEMENT This chapter explains the methods that you can use to configure management access to the Managed Switch It describes the types of management applications and the communication and management protocols that deliver data between your management device workstation or personal computer and the system It also contains information about port connection options This chapter covers the following topics Requirements Management Access Overview Administration Console Access Web Management Access SNMP Access Standards Protocols and Related Reading Requirements E Workstations of subscribers running Windows 98 ME NT4 0 2000 XP 2003 Vistsa MAC OS9 or later Linux UNIX or other platform compatible with TCP IP protocols AB Workstation installed with Ethernet NIC Network Interface Card E Serial Port connection Terminal e Above PC with COM Port DB9 RS 232 or USB to RS 232 converter E Ethernet Port connection e Network cables Use standard network UTP cables with RJ45 connectors Above Workstation installed with WEB Browser and JAVA runtime environment Plug in It is recommended to use Internet Explore 7 0 or above to access Managed Switch 38 N
17. Description Delete the selected policy Syntax LLDPMED policy delete lt policy_list gt Parameters lt policy_list gt List of policies to delete Example Delete the policy 1 SWITCH gt lldpmed policy delete 1 LLDPMED Policy Add Description Adds a policy to the list of polices Syntax LLDPMED policy add voice voice signaling guest voicelguest_ voice signalinglsoftphone voice lvideo conferencing streaming_videolvideo_si gnaling tagged untagged lt vlan_id gt lt I2_priority gt lt dscp gt Parameters voice Voice for use by dedicated IP Telephony handsets and other similar appliances supporting interactive voice services These devices are typically deployed on a separate VLAN for ease of deployment and enhanced security by isolation from data applications voice_signaling Voice Signaling conditional for use in network topologies that require a different policy for the voice signaling than for the voice media guest_voice Guest Voice to support a separate limited feature set voice service for guest users and visitors with 406 NS3550 24T 4S User Manual their own IP Telephony handsets and other similar appliances supporting interactive voice services guest_voice_signaling Guest Voice Signaling conditional for use in network topologies that require a different policy for the guest voice signaling than for the guest voice media softphone_voice Softphone Voice for use by softph
18. Disable v Disable Disable Disable Disable v Disable v Disable w aa w Drake w Drake w Liisable Disable Lisable Disable Diable w Diable w Disable w Diable w Lisable w Lisable w Lisable w Disable w Drake w Disable w Lisable w Drake Lisable w Disable Disable Disa SAVE Refresh lt lt JI E lt E no I 2 4 O eS O GO O O O 0O O O O 0 CO A 4 lt ele 4 I 4 4 4 lt 4 4 ele 4 4 4 4 ele 4 4 lt lt 4 4 4 in Ez qn y ee gt 4 4 4 ale 4 4 4 lt 4 Y lt A 4 i O la O a O a O The page includes the following fields al Figure 4 10 4 ACL Ports Configuration page screenshot Object Description e Port The logical port for the settings contained in the same row e Policy ID Select the policy to apply to this port The allowed values are 1 through 8 The default value is 1 e Action Select whether forwarding is permitted Permit or denied Deny The default value is Permit 193 Rate Limiter ID Port Copy Logging Shutdown Counter O 5 Save Click to save changes Et eg r Click to clear the counters Select which rate limiter to apply to this port The allowed values are Disabled or the values 1 through 15 The default value is Disabled Select which port frames are copied to The allowed values are Disabled or
19. Figure 4 4 5 Port Mirror application The traffic to be copied to the mirror port is selected as follows e All frames received on a given port also known as ingress or source mirroring e All frames transmitted on a given port also known as egress or destination mirroring Mirror Port Configuration The Port Mirror Configuration screen is shown in Figure 4 4 6 94 NS3550 24T 4S User Manual Mirror Configuration Port to mirror to Disabled i I E f 4 I E Ri lt I E E lt I E E lt al E ay a FI Ea E lt FI Ea a lt E E E E EE EEE i i i a y i 4 aL 4 Figure 4 4 6 Port Mirror Configuration Page Screenshot 95 The page includes the following fields Object Buttons Save Port to mirror to Switch to mirror to Port Mode Click to save changes Description Frames from ports that have either source or destination mirroring enabled are mirrored to this port Disabled option disables mirroring Frames from ports that have either source rx or destination tx mirroring enabled are mirrored to this switch The logical port for the settings contained in the same row Select mirror mode Rx only Frames received at this port are mirrored to the mirroring port Frames transmitted are not mirrored Tx only Frames transmitted from this port are mirrored to the mirroring port Frames received are not mirrored Disabled N
20. LLOP Parameters Port Mode CDP aware Port Description System Name System Description System Capabilities Management Address Tate lt 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 l 4 4 4 4 4 4 SEE ANA NA A A A 4 3 F lt bie f ee fefe fefe eh ek hh fefe fefie feji fe 4 El El E El El El El El El E El El El E El El E El El E El El El lt El E E El El E El El El E El El E E El El E El El E E El El ta E E El El E E El El E El El E E El El E El El ES E El El El E E El El El El El El E El El E E El El E El El E El El El a E E El El ll E El El E El El El E El El E El El ES E El El x Figure 4 14 1 LLDP Configuration Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields LLDP Parameters Object Description e Tx Interval The switch is periodically transmitting LLDP frames to its neighbors for having the network discovery information up to date The interval between each LLDP frame is determined by the Tx Interval value Valid values are restricted to 5 32768 seconds Default 30 seconds This attribute must comply with the following rule Transmission Interval Hold Time Multiplier lt 65536 and Transmission Interval gt 4 Delay Interval e Tx Hold Each LLDP frame contains information about how long the information in the LLDP frame shall be considered valid The LLDP information valid period is set to Tx Hold multiplied by Tx I
21. Range If you want to filter a specific TCP UDP source range filter with this ACE you can enter a specific TCP UDP source range value A field for entering a TCP UDP source value When Specific is selected for the TCP UDP source filter you can enter a specific TCP UDP source value The allowed range is 0 to 65535 A frame that hits this ACE matches this TCP UDP source value 191 e TCP UDP Source Range e TCP UDP Destination Filter e TCP UDP Destination Number e TCP UDP Destination Range e TCP FIN e TCP SYN e TCP PSH e TCP ACK e TCP URG m Ethernet Type Parameters When Range is selected for the TCP UDP source filter you can enter a specific TCP UDP source range value The allowed range is 0 to 65535 A frame that hits this ACE matches this TCP UDP source value Specify the TCP UDP destination filter for this ACE Any No TCP UDP destination filter is specified TCP UDP destination filter status is don t care Specific If you want to filter a specific TCP UDP destination filter with this ACE you can enter a specific TCP UDP destination value A field for entering a TCP UDP destination value Range If you want to filter a specific range TCP UDP destination filter with this ACE you can enter a specific TCP UDP destination range value A field for entering a TCP UDP destination value When Specific is selected for the TCP UDP destination filter you can enter a specific TCP UDP destination value The
22. Security Switch SNMP Trap Authentication Failure enable disable Parameters enable Enable SNMP trap authentication failure disable Disable SNMP trap authentication failure default Show SNMP trap authentication failure mode Default Setting enable Example Disable SNMP trap authentication failure SWITCH gt security switch snmp trap authentication failure disable Security Switch SNMP Trap Link up Description Set or show the port link up and link down trap mode 324 NS3550 24T 4S User Manual Syntax Security Switch SNMP Trap Link up enable disable Parameters enable Enable SNMP trap link up and link down disable Disable SNMP trap link up and link down default Show SNMP trap link up and link down mode Default Setting enable Example Disable SNMP trap link up SWITCH gt security switch snmp trap link up disable Security Switch SNMP Trap Inform Mode Description Set or show the SNMP trap inform mode Syntax Security Switch SNMP Trap Inform Mode enable disable Parameters enable Enable SNMP trap inform disable Disable SNMP trap inform default Show SNMP inform mode Default Setting enable Example Disable SNMP trap inform mode SWITCH gt security switch snmp trap inform mode disable 325 Security Switch SNMP Trap Inform Timeout Description Set or shows the SNMP trap inform timeout usecs Syntax Security Switch SNMP Trap Inform Timeout lt
23. Set private value for SNMP trap community SWITCH gt security switch snmp trap community private Security Switch SNMP Trap Destination Description Set or Show the SNMP trap destination address Syntax Security Switch SNMP Trap Destination lt ip_addr_string gt Parameters lt ip_addr_string gt IP host address a b c d or a host name string Example Set SNMP trap destination address for 192 168 0 20 SWITCH gt security switch snmp trap destination 192 168 0 20 Security Switch SNMP Trap IPv6 Destination Description Set or Show the SNMP trap destination IPv6 address Syntax Security Switch SNMP Trap IPv6 Destination lt ipv6_addr gt 323 Parameters lt ipv6_addr gt IPv6 address is in 128 bit records represented as eight fields of up to four hexadecimal digits with a colon separate each field For example four hexadecimal digits with a colon separate each field For example fe80 215 c5ff fe03 4dc7 The symbol is a special syntax that can be used as a shorthand way of representing multiple 16 bit groups of contiguous zeros but it can only appear once It also used a following legally IPv4 address For example 192 1 2 34 Example Set SNMP trap IPv6 destination address for 2001 0001 SWITCH gt security switch snmp trap ipv6 destination 2001 0001 Security Switch SNMP Trap Authentication Failure Description Set or show the SNMP authentication failure trap mode Syntax
24. WEB HTTPS interface snmp SNMP interface telnet TELNET SSH interface default Show configured and current mode Example Add access management list from 192 168 0 1 to 192 168 0 200 via web interface SWITCH gt security switch access add 1 192 168 0 1 192 168 0 200 web Security Switch Access IPv6 Add Description 315 Add access management IPv6 entry Syntax Security Switch Access lpv6 Add lt access_id gt lt start_ipv6_addr gt lt end_ipv6_addr gt web snmpltelnet Parameters access_id gt entry index 1 16 lt start_ipv6_addr gt Start IPv6 address IPv6 address is in 128 bit records represented as eight fields of up to four hexadecimal digits with a colon separate each field For example fe80 215 cbff fe03 4dc7 The symbol is a special syntax that can be used as a shorthand way of representing multiple 16 bit groups of contiguous zeros but it can only appear once It also used a following legally IPv4 address For example 192 1 2 34 lt end_ipv6_addr gt End IPv6 address IPv6 address is in 128 bit records represented as eight fields of up to four hexadecimal digits with a colon separate each field For example fe80 215 c5ff fe03 4dc7 The symbol is a special syntax that can be used as a shorthand way of representing multiple 16 bit groups of contiguous zeros but it can only appear once It also used a following legally IPv4 address For example 192 1 2 34 web WEB
25. CDP is an acronym for Cisco Discovery Protocol DEI is an acronym for Drop Eligible Indicator It is a 1 bit field in the VLAN tag DES is an acronym for Data Encryption Standard It provides a complete description of a mathematical algorithm for encrypting enciphering and decrypting deciphering binary coded information Encrypting data converts it to an unintelligible form called cipher Decrypting cipher converts the data back to its original form called plaintext The algorithm described in this standard specifies both enciphering and deciphering operations which are based on a binary number called a key DHCP is an acronym for Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol It is a protocol used for assigning dynamic IP addresses to devices on a network DHCP used by networked computers clients to obtain IP addresses and other parameters such as the default gateway subnet mask and IP addresses of DNS servers from a DHCP server The DHCP server ensures that all IP addresses are unique for example no IP address is assigned to a second client while the first client s assignment is valid its lease has not expired Therefore IP address pool management is done by the server and not by a human network administrator Dynamic addressing simplifies network administration because the software keeps track of IP addresses rather than requiring an administrator to manage the task This means that a new computer can be added to a network withou
26. Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 208 Network Access Overview This page provides an overview of the current NAS port states for the selected switch The Network Access Overview screen is shown in Figure 4 11 5 Admin State Force Authorized Force Authorized Force Authorized Force Authorized Force Authorized Force Authorized Force Authorized Force Authorized Force Authorized Force Authorized Force Authorized Force Authorized Force Authorized Force Authorized Force Authorized Force Authorized Force Authorized Force Authorized Force Authorized Force Authorized Force Authorized Force Authorized Force Authorized Force Authorized 1 a 3 4 a 5 f a J 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 14 16 13 20 21 2A 23 2d NS3550 24T 4S User Manual Network Access Overview Auto refresh LJ Port State Last ID QoS Class Port YLAN ID Globally Disabled Globally Disabled Globally Disabled Globally Disabled Globally Disabled Globally Disabled Globally Disabled Globally Disabled Globally Disabled Globally Disabled Globally Disabled Globally Disabled Globally Disabled Globally Disabled Globally Disabled Globally Disabled Globally Disabled Globally Disabled Globally Disabled Globally Disabled Globally Disabled Globally Disabled Globally Disabled Globally Disabled Figure 4 11 5 Network Access Overview Page Screenshot The page inc
27. Description Set or show the port VLAN link type Syntax VLAN LinkType lt port_list gt untagged tagged 302 NS3550 24T 4S User Manual Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports untagged VLAN Link Type Tagged tagged VLAN Link Type Untagged default Show VLAN link type Default Setting Un tagged Example Enable tagged frame for port2 SWITCH gt vlan linktype 2 tagged VLAN Q in Q Mode Description Set or show the port Q in Q mode Syntax VLAN Qinqmode lt port_list gt disablel man customer Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports disable Disable Q in Q VLAN Mode man Q in Q MAN Port Mode customer Q in Q Customer Port Mode default Show VLAN QinQ Mode Example Set port2 in man port SWITCH gt vlan ging 2 man VLAN Ethernet Type Description Set or show out layer VLAN tag ether type in Q in Q VLAN mode Syntax VLAN Ethtype lt port_list gt man dot1q Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports man Set out layer VLAN tag ether type MAN dot1q Set out layer VLAN tag ether type 802 1Q default Show VLAN out layer VLAN tag ether type 303 Default Setting N A Example Set out layer VLAN tag Ethernet type for port 10 in man Ethernet type SWITCH gt vlan ethtype 10 man VLAN Add Description Add or modify VLAN entry Syntax VLAN Add lt vid gt lt port_list gt Parameters
28. Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Immediate Leave MVR Group Description Show the MVR group Syntax MVR Group MVR Status Description Show the MVR status Syntax MVR Status 422 MVR Mode Description Set or show the MVR mode Syntax MVR Mode enable disable Parameters enable Enable MVR mode disable Disable MVR mode default Show MVR mode Default Setting disable Example Enable MVR mode NS3550 24T 4S User Manual SWITCH gt mvr mode enable MVR Port Mode Description Set or show the MVR port mode Syntax MVR Port Mode lt port_list gt enable disable Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports enable Enable MVR mode disable Disable MVR mode default Show MVR mode Default Setting disable Example Enable the MVR port mode for port 1 4 SWITCH gt mvr port mode 1 4 enable MVR Multicast VLAN Description Set or show MVR multicast VLAN ID Syntax MVR Multicast VLAN lt vid gt Parameters lt vid gt VLAN ID 1 4095 default Show current MVR multicast VLAN ID Default Setting 100 Example Set VLAN 1000 for MVR multicast VLAN ID SWITCH gt mvr multicast vlan 1000 MVR Port Type Description Set or show MVR port type Syntax MVR Port Type lt port_list gt source receiver Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports source Enable source mode receiver Disable receiver
29. Factory The Managed Switch supports multiple VLAN tags and can therefore be used in MAN applications as a provider bridge aggregating traffic from numerous independent customer LANs into the MAN Metro Access Network space One of the purposes of the provider bridge is to recognize and use VLAN tags so that the VLANs in the MAN space can be used independent of the customers VLANs This is accomplished by adding a VLAN tag with a MAN related VID for frames entering the MAN When leaving the MAN the tag is stripped and the original VLAN tag with the customer related VID is again available This provides a tunneling mechanism to connect remote costumer VLANs through a common MAN space without interfering with the VLAN tags All tags use EtherType 0x8100 or 0x88A8 where 0x8100 is used for customer tags and 0x88A8 are used for service provider tags In cases where a given service VLAN only has two member ports on the switch the learning can be disabled for the particular VLAN and can therefore rely on flooding as the forwarding mechanism between the two ports This way the MAC table requirement is reduced VLAN Port Configuration The VLAN Port Configuration screen is shown in Figure 4 6 2 113 VLAN Port Configuration Mode EEE 30210 y Ingress Acceptable oa Set out layer YLAN Filtering Frame Type Link Type Q in Q Mode tag ether type mo 4 Mm M E WwW PJ O O o o o O O O O 0 O o o 0 o O O 0 O o o o
30. LI LI LI L LI LI d LI LI Pi The page includes the following fields Object Description e Router Port Specify which ports act as router ports A router port is a port on the Ethernet switch that leads towards the Layer 3 multicast device or IGMP querier If an aggregation member port is selected as a router port the whole aggregation will act as a router port The Switch forwards IGMP join or leave packets to an IGMP router port a Auto Select Auto to have the Managed Switch automatically uses the port as IGMP Router port if the port receives IGMP query packets E Static The Managed Switch always uses the specified port as an IGMP 154 NS3550 24T 4S User Manual Router port Use this mode when you connect an IGMP multicast server or IP camera which applied with multicast protocol to the port None The Managed Switch will not use the specified port as an IGMP Router port The Managed Switch will not keep any record of an IGMP router being connected to this port Use this mode when you connect other IGMP multicast servers directly on the non querier Managed Switch and don t want the multicast stream be flood to uplink switch throught the port that connected to the IGMP querier e Fast Leave Enable the Fast Leave on the port e Throttling Enable to limit the number of multicast groups to which a switch port can belong Buttons Save Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally a
31. RDI is an acronym for Remote Defect Indication It is a OAM functionallity that is used by a MEP to indicate defect detected to the remote peer MEP 462 NS3550 24T 4S User Manual A router port is a port on the Ethernet switch that leads switch towards the Layer 3 multicast device In 1998 the IEEE with document 802 1w introduced an evolution of STP the Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol which provides for faster spanning tree convergence after a topology change Standard IEEE 802 1D 2004 now incorporates RSTP and obsoletes STP while at the same time being backwards compatible with STP S Samea Samba is a program running under UNIX like operating systems that provides seamless integration between UNIX and Microsoft Windows machines Samba acts as file and print servers for Microsoft Windows IBM OS 2 and other SMB client machines Samba uses the Server Message Block SMB protocol and Common Internet File System CIFS which is the underlying protocol used in Microsoft Windows networking Samba can be installed on a variety of operating system platforms including Linux most common Unix platforms OpenVMS and IBM OS 2 Samba can also register itself with the master browser on the network so that it would appear in the listing of hosts in Microsoft Windows Neighborhood Network SHA is an acronym for Secure Hash Algorithm It designed by the National Security Agency NSA and published by the NIST as a U S Federal Informat
32. SWITCH gt _ Figure 5 2 Show IP Information Screen a Configure IP address 3 On Switch gt prompt enter the following command and press lt Enter gt As show in Figure 5 3 Switch gt ip setup 192 168 0 101 255 255 255 0 192 168 0 253 1 The previous command would apply the follow settings for the Switch IP 192 168 0 101 276 NS3550 24T 4S User Manual Subnet Mask 255 255 255 0 Gateway 192 168 0 253 VLAN ID 1 pal COM1 115200baud Tera Term YI File Edit Setup Control Window Resize Help Username admin Password Login 1n progress SWITCH gt 1p configuration IP Configuration Disabled 192 168 060 166 200 200 209 0 192 168 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 S Proxy Disabled IPyv6 AUTOCONFIG mode Disabled IPv 6 Link Local Address fe8B 230 4fff fe88 645e IPv Address 192 1668 0 100 IPv Prefix 96 1 SHITCH gt 1p setup 192 168 0 101 255 255 255 0 192 168 0 253 1 SWITCH gt Figure 5 3 Set IP Address Screen 4 Repeat Step 1 to check if the IP address is changed If the IP address is successfully configured the Managed Switch will apply the new IP address setting immediately You can access the Web interface of The Managed Switch through the new IP address If you do not familiar with console command or the related parameter enter help anytime in console to get the help description You can change these settings if desired after you log on This management method is ofte
33. Security Network Psec Port Description Show MAC Addresses learned by Port Security Syntax Security Network Psec Port lt port_list gt Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports Example Show MAC address learned on port 1 SWITCH gt security network psec port 1 NS3550 24T 4S User Manual MAC Address VID State Added Age Hold Time 337 Security Network Limit Configuration Description Show Limit Control configuration Syntax Security Network Limit Configuration lt port_list gt Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports Example Show Limit Control configuration SWITCH gt security network limit configuration Port Security Limit Control Configuration Disabled Disabled Port Mode Limit Action Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled 338 NS3550 24T 4S User Manual Security Network Limit Mode Description Set or show global enabledness Syntax Security Network Limit Mode enable disable Parameters enable Globally enable port security disable Globally disable port security default Show current global enabledness of port security limit control Default Setting disable Example Enable th
34. Security Switch SNMP View Look up lt index gt Parameters lt index gt entry index 1 64 Example Look up SNMPv3 view entry SWITCH gt security switch snmp view lookup Idx View Name View Type OID Subtree 1 default_view included 2 snmpv3_viwe included 1 Number of entries 2 334 NS3550 24T 4S User Manual Security Switch SNMP Access Add Description Add or modify SNMPv3 access entry The entry index key are lt group_ name gt lt security_model gt and lt security_level gt Syntax Security Switch SNMP Access Add lt group_name gt lt security_model gt lt security_level gt lt read_view_name gt lt write_view_name gt Parameters lt group_name gt A string identifying the group name that this entry should belong to lt security_model gt any Accepted any security model v1 v2c usm v1 Reserved for SNMPv1 v2c Reserved for SNMPv2c usm User based Security Model USM lt security_level gt noAuthNoPriv None authentication and none privacy AuthNoPriv Authentication and none privacy AuthPriv Authentication and privacy lt read_view_name gt The name of the MIB view defining the MIB objects for which this request may request the current values lt write_view_name gt The name of the MIB view defining the MIB objects for which this request may potentially SET new values Example Add SNMPv3 access entry SWITCH gt security switch snmp access add group_snmpv3 usm authp
35. System name or clear to clear System name is a text string drawn from the alphabet A Za z digits 0 9 minus sign No blank or space characters are permitted as part of a name The first character must be an alpha character and the first or last character must not be a minus sign Example To set device title Switch gt System name NS3550 24T 4S LAB System Contact Description Set or show the system contact Syntax System Contact lt contact gt Parameters 280 NS3550 24T 4S User Manual lt contact gt System contact string Use clear or to clear the string No blank or space characters are permitted as part of a contact only in CLI Default Setting empty Example To set device contact Switch gt System contact NS3550 24T 4S Test System Location Description Set or show the system location Syntax System Location lt location gt Parameters lt location gt System location string Use clear or to clear the string In CLI no blank or space characters are permitted as part of a contact Default Setting empty Example To set device location Switch gt System location 9F LAB System Timezone Description Set or show the system timezone offset Syntax System Timezone lt offset gt Parameters lt offset gt Time zone offset in minutes 720 to 720 relative to UTC Default Setting 0 Example To set timezone Switch gt system timezone 0 281 System P
36. TACACS Authentication Server Configuration Figure 4 11 7 Authentication Server Configuration Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Port State These setting are common for all of the Authentication Servers Object Description e Timeout The Timeout which can be set to a number between 3 and 3600 seconds is the maximum time to wait for a reply from a server If the server does not reply within this timeframe we will consider it to be dead and 215 e Dead Time continue with the next enabled server if any RADIUS servers are using the UDP protocol which is unreliable by design In order to cope with lost frames the timeout interval is divided into 3 subintervals of equal length If a reply is not received within the subinterval the request is transmitted again This algorithm causes the RADIUS server to be queried up to 3 times before it is considered to be dead The Dead Time which can be set to a number between 0 and 3600 seconds is the period during which the switch will not send new requests to a server that has failed to respond to a previous request This will stop the switch from continually trying to contact a server that it has already determined as dead Setting the Dead Time to a value greater than 0 zero will enable this feature but only if more than one server has been configured RADIUS Authentication Server Configuration The table has one row for each RADIUS Authentication S
37. The 802 1s Multiple Spanning Tree protocol MSTP uses VLANs to create multiple spanning trees in a network which significantly improves network resource utilization while maintaining a loop free environment 117 Select VLAN Users from this drop down list Auto refresh E Check this box to enable an automatic refresh of the page at regular intervals Refresh Click to refresh the page immediately VLAN Port Status for User Static This page provides VLAN Port Staus The VLAN Port Status for User Static screen is shown in Figure 4 6 5 VLAN Port Status for User Static o ware Ingress Filtering Frame Type x Tag onflicts Port PYID VLAN Aware Ingress Filtering Frame Type Tx Tag UYID Conflict 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Untag this Untag this Untagq this Untagq this Untagq this Untagq this Untagq this Untag this Untag this Untag this Untag this Untag this Untag this Untag this Untag this Un
38. When introduced in 1999 WEP was intended to provide confidentiality comparable to that of a traditional wired network Wikipedia WiFi is an acronym for Wireless Fidelity It is meant to be used generically when referring of any type of 802 11 network whether 802 11b 802 11a dual band etc The term is promulgated by the Wi Fi Alliance WPA is an acronym for Wi Fi Protected Access It was created in response to several serious weaknesses researchers had found in the previous system Wired Equivalent Privacy WEP WPA implements the majority of the IEEE 802 111 standard and was intended as an intermediate measure to take the place of WEP while 802 11i was prepared WPA is specifically designed to also work with pre WPA wireless network interface cards through firmware upgrades but not necessarily with first generation wireless access points WPA2 implements the full standard but will not work with some older network cards Wikipedia WPA PSK WPA PSK is an acronym for Wi Fi Protected Access Pre Shared Key WPA was designed to enhance the security of wireless networks There are two flavors of WPA enterprise and personal Enterprise is meant for use with an IEEE 802 1X authentication server which distributes different keys to each user Personal WPA utilizes less scalable pre shared key PSK mode where every allowed computer is given the same passphrase In PSK mode security depends on the strength and secrecy of the passphra
39. aggregation member ports Each link aggregation may consist of up to 16 member ports Any quantity of link aggregations may be configured for the device only limited by the quantity of ports on the device To configure a proper traffic distribution the ports within a link aggregation must use the same link speed 98 NS3550 24T 4S User Manual Static Aggregation Configuration This page is used to configure the Aggregation hash mode and the aggregation group The aggregation hash mode settings are global whereas the aggregation group relate to the currently selected unit as reflected by the page header Hash Code Contributors The Aggeration Mode COnfiguration screen is shown in Figure 4 5 2 The page includes the following fields Aggregation Mode Configuration Hash Code Contributors Source MAC Address Destination MAC Address IP Address TEP UDP Port Number Figure 4 5 2 Aggregation Mode Configuration Page Screenshot Object Source MAC Address Destination MAC Address IP Address TCP UDP Port Number Description The Source MAC address can be used to calculate the destination port for the frame Check to enable the use of the Source MAC address or uncheck to disable By default Source MAC Address is enabled The Destination MAC Address can be used to calculate the destination port for the frame Check to enable the use of the Destination MAC Address or uncheck to disable By default Destination
40. are needed for a particular method The switch simply encapsulates the EAP part of the frame into the relevant type EAPOL or RADIUS and forwards it When authentication is complete the RADIUS server sends a special packet containing a success or failure indication Besides forwarding this decision to the supplicant the switch uses it to open up or block traffic on the switch port connected to the supplicant Overview of MAC Based Authentication Unlike 802 1X MAC based authentication is not a standard but merely a best practices method adopted by the industry In MAC based authentication users are called clients and the switch acts as the supplicant on behalf of clients The initial frame any kind of frame sent by a client is snooped by the switch which in turn uses the client s MAC address as both username and password in the subsequent EAP exchange with the RADIUS server The 6 byte MAC address is converted to a string on the following form xx xx xx xx xx xx that is a dash is used as separator between the lower cased hexadecimal digits The switch only supports the MD5 Challenge authentication method so the RADIUS server must be configured accordingly When authentication is complete the RADIUS server sends a success or failure indication which in turn causes the switch to open up or block traffic for that particular client using static entries into the MAC Table Only then will frames from the client be forwarded on the sw
41. atl ig n on00 a Pas 2 wod a Pag 2 omo a be 2 wd a Cue he Ga Figure 4 15 3 Remote IP Ping Test Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Port The logical port for the settings e Remote IP Address The destination IP Address 272 NS3550 24T 4S User Manual e Ping Size The payload size of the ICMP packet Values range from 8 bytes to 1400 bytes e Result Display the ping result Cable Diagnostics This page is used for running the Cable Diagnostics Press to run the diagnostics This will take approximately 5 seconds If all ports are selected this can take approximately 15 seconds When completed the page refreshes automatically and you can view the cable diagnostics results in the cable status table Note that Cable Diagnostics is only accurate for cables of length 7 140 meters 10 and 100 Mbps ports will be linked down while running cable diagnostic Therefore running cable diagnastic on a 10 or 100 Mbps management port will cause the switch to stop responding until VeriPHY is complete The ports belong to the currently selected unit as reflected by the page header The VeriPHY Cable Diagnostics screen is shown in Figure 4 15 4 273 VeriPHY Cable Diagnostics Pen Ar Cable Status Pair A 1 2 Length A Pair B 3 6 Length B Pair C 4 5 Length C Pair D 7 8 Length D Figure 4 15 4 VeriPHY Cable Diagnostics Page Screenshot The page include
42. authenticated to the backend server TX Responses dotixAuthBackendResp 802 1X based onses Counts the number of times that the switch attempts to send a supplicant s first response packet to the backend server Indicates the switch is attempting to communicate with the backend server Possible retransmissions are not counted MAC based Counts all the backend server packets sent from the switch towards the backend server for a given port left most table or client right most table Possible retransmissions are not counted 212 e Last Supplicant Info Selected Counters Object e Selected Counters Port Counters Object e Identity e MAC Address e VLAN ID e State lent NS3550 24T 4S User Manual Information about the last supplicant client that attempted to authenticate This information is available for the following administrative states Port based 802 1 X Single 802 1X Multi 802 1X MAC based Auth Name IEEE Name Description MAC dotixAuthLastEapolF The MAC address of the last supplicant client Address rameSource VLAN ID The VLAN ID on which the last frame from the last supplicant client was received Version dotixAuthLastEapolF 802 1X based rameVersion The protocol version number carried in the most recently received EAPOL frame MAC based Not applicable Identity 802 1X based The user name supplicant identity carried in the most recently received Response Identity EAP
43. authentication users are called clients and the switch acts as the supplicant on behalf of clients The initial frame any kind of frame sent by a client is snooped by the switch which in turn uses the client s MAC address as both username and password in the subsequent EAP exchange with the RADIUS server The 6 byte MAC address is converted to a string on the following form xx xx XX XX XX XX that is a dash is used as separator between the lower cased hexadecimal digits The switch only supports the MD5 Challenge authentication method so the RADIUS server must be configured accordingly When authentication is complete the RADIUS server sends a success or failure indication which in turn causes the switch to open up or block traffic for that particular client using the Port Security module Only then will frames from the client be forwarded on the switch There are no EAPOL frames involved in this authentication and therefore MAC based Authentication has nothing to do with the 802 1X standard The advantage of MAC based authentication over port based 802 1X is that several clients can be connected to the same port e g through a 3rd party switch or a hub and still require individual authentication and that the clients don t need special supplicant software to authenticate The advantage of MAC based authentication over 802 1X based authentication is that the clients don t need special supplicant software to authenticate The disadvan
44. client are dropped If the client does not receive an EAP request identity frame after three attempts to start authentication the client transmits frames as if the port is in the authorized state A port in the authorized state effectively means that the client has been successfully authenticated When the client supplies its identity the switch begins its role as the intermediary passing EAP frames between the client and the authentication server until authentication succeeds or fails If the authentication succeeds the switch port becomes authorized The specific exchange of EAP frames depends on the authentication method being used Figure 4 11 2 shows a message exchange initiated by the client using the One Time Password OTP authentication method with a RADIUS server Authentication Server Client l poa 802 1X Switch RADIUS EAPOL Start EAP Request Identity EAP Response Identity RADIUS Access Request ss PO EAP Request OTP RADIUS Access Challenge lt lt EAP Response OTP RADIUS Access Request i EAP Success RADIUS Access Accept q Port Authorized EAPOL Logoff Port Unauthorized Figure 4 11 2 EAP Message Exchange E Ports in Authorized and Unauthorized States The switch port state determines whether or not the client is granted access to the network The port starts in the unauthorized state While in this state the port disallows all ingress and egress traffic except for 802 1X protocol packets W
45. eg Z O oo gt O O 4 n n Q a 9 Syslog Setting View Only System Log View Only SMTP Setting View Only SNTP Setting View Only O gt Q O D 0 0 D 2 D Z e r gt Q O D 0 0 o o D Z O e gt Q O D 0 i o o D Z O gt Q O D 0p 0 O 25 D Z O R gt Q O D 0p eo a D D Firmware Upgrade Configuration Restore O e Je Q O CD n n A o D Z O gt Q O CD n 10 A S O a o jo r gt Q O O D N Jo mn Wn VD D O Z O gt Q O CD nN n Q o D Z O e gt e O CD n 102 A o D O e gt O O 0D Mm Mm o x D Z O e gt O O 9 Mm Mm o ez iq z O e gt O O iq o e iq Z Z Z Z Z Z Z Z Z Z Z Z O O O O O O O O O O O O e e gt gt O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O D OD D iq D iq 4 OD 9 iq D nm Nm Nm Nm Nm Nm Mm Mm Q Q Q Q Q Q Q Q e e D D D D D D D D iq 9 iq z Z Z O O O e gt gt gt O O O O O O D 9 iq Nm Mm Nm Mm Mm Mm Q Q Q ox e e iq iq iq re gt o Z O re gt Q O CD Yn 0 D D D Z O e gt Q O D 0 gn O D D Configuration Backup Configuration Backup except IP O pe gt Q O D 0 0 O 2 D Z O r gt Q O D 0 gn O o
46. lt vid gt Parameters lt mac_addr gt MAC address xx xx XX XX XX XX lt vid gt VLAN ID 1 4095 default 1 Example Delete Mac address 9c f6 1a XX XX XX in vid1 SWITCH gt mac delete 9c f6 1a XX XX XX 1 MAC Look up Description Look up MAC address entry Syntax MAC Look up lt mac_addr gt lt vid gt Parameters lt mac_addr gt MAC address xx xx XX XX XX XX lt vid gt VLAN ID 1 4095 default 1 Example Look up state of Mac address 9c f6 1a XX XX XX SWITCH gt mac lookup 9c f6 1a XX XX XX 297 MAC Age Time Description Set or show the MAC address age timer Syntax MAC Agetime lt age_time gt Parameters lt age_time gt MAC address age time 0 10 1000000 O disable default Show age time Default Setting 300 Example Set agetime value in 30 SWITCH gt mac agetime 30 MAC Learning Description Set or show the port learn mode Syntax MAC Learning lt port_list gt auto disable secure Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports auto Automatic learning disable Disable learning secure Secure learning default Show learn mode Default Setting Auto Example Set secure learning mode in port1 SWITCH gt mac learning 1 secure MAC Dump Description Show sorted list of MAC address entries 298 NS3550 24T 4S User Manual Syntax MAC Dump lt mac_max gt lt mac_addr gt lt vid gt Parameters lt mac_max gt Maximum
47. system UPnP VLANs Voice VLAN Privilege Levels Configuration Privilege Levels Configuration Configuration Execute Status Statistics Status Statistics Read only The page includes the following fields Object e Group Name Description Read virite m w a fo olele oO L S K S in Sl S lt lt lt ol lt o o x S SS 14 Sl S x 4 Dl x 4 oa o T 4 Sa Figure 4 2 7 Privilege Levels Configuration Page Screenshot t Read only Ga tar fo fm Mead ir a ca Bam haad haad Biaid Meee iha asad a Y e ra a ihai AAA A A A A ES SS TS SS A ST ST STIS Read virite 4 alo lt Sll Sl l AAA m Sl e LS 4 x lt S SS 4 4 118 4 4 4 Sll l l 4 4 4 4 Dl S 115 4 T 4 The name identifying the privilege group In most cases a privilege level group consists of a single module e g LACP RSTP or QoS but a few of them contains more than one The following description defines these privilege level groups in 96 NS3550 24T 4S User Manual details System Contact Name Location Timezone Log Security Authentication System Access Management Port contains Dot1x port MAC based and the MAC Address Limit ACL HTTPS SSH ARP Inspection and IP source guard IP Everything except ping Port Everything except VeriPHY Diagnostics ping and VeriP
48. the VLAN mask from the VLAN table is applied When traffic comes in on an isolated port the private VLAN mask is applied in addition to the VLAN mask from the VLAN table This reduces the ports to which forwarding can be done to just the promiscuous ports within the private VLAN The port settings relate to the currently selected unit as reflected by the page header The Port Isolation Configuration screen is shown in Figure 4 6 6 120 NS3550 24T 4S User Manual Port Isolation Configuration Oo 30 Mm E to Rd Figure 4 6 6 Port Isolation Configuration Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Port The switch interface e PVLAN Port Type Displays private VLAN port types Isolated A single stand alone VLAN that contains one promiscuous port and one or more isolated or host ports This VLAN conveys traffic between the isolated ports and a lone promiscuous port Promiscuous A promiscuous port can communicate with all the interfaces within a private VLAN This is the default setting Private VLAN Membership Configuration In this menu the Private VLAN membership configurations for the switch can be monitored and modified private VLANs can be added or deleted and port members of each Private VLAN can be added or removed Private VLANs are based on the source port mask and there are no connections to VLANs This means that VLAN IDs and 121 Private VLAN IDs can be identical
49. valid or invalid received from the server The number of malformed RADIUS Access Response packets received from the server Malformed packets include packets with an invalid length Bad authenticators or Message Authenticator attributes or unknown types are not included as malformed access responses The number of RADIUS Access Response packets containing invalid authenticators or Message Authenticator attributes received from the server The number of RADIUS packets that were received from the server on the authentication port and dropped for some other reason The number of RADIUS packets that were received from the server on the authentication port and dropped for some other reason The number of RADIUS Access Request packets sent to the server This does not include retransmissions The number of RADIUS Access Request packets retransmitted to the RADIUS authentication server The number of RADIUS Access Request packets destined for the server that have not yet timed out or received a response This variable is incremented when an Access Request is sent and decremented due to receipt of an Access Accept Access Reject Access Challenge timeout or retransmission The number of authentication timeouts to the server After a timeout the client may retry to e Other Info RADIUS Accounting Servers NS3550 24T 4S User Manual the same server send to a different server or give up A retry to
50. 1 15 Change privilege level of MVR group SWITCH gt security switch privilege level group mvr 15 15 15 15 Security Switch Privilege Level Current Description Show the current privilege level Syntax Security Switch Privilege Level Current 310 Default Setting 15 Security Switch Auth Configuration Description Show Auth configuration Syntax Security Switch Auth Configuration Default Setting Authentication Method local Fallback disable Example Show authentication configuration SWITCH gt security switch auth configuration Auth Configuration local Disabled local Disabled local Disabled local Disabled Security Switch Auth Method Description Set or show Auth method Syntax NS3550 24T 4S User Manual Security Switch Auth Method console telnet ssh web none local radius tacacs enable disable Parameters console Settings for console telnet Settings for telnet ssh Settings for ssh web Settings for web none Authentication disabled local _ Use local authentication radius Use remote RADIUS authentication tacacs Use remote TACACS authentication default Show client authentication method enable Enable local authentication if remote authentication fails disable Disable local authentication if remote authentication fails default Show backup client authentication configuration Default Setting Authentication Method local Fallback dis
51. 1 Group Address all zeros if this is a query The IGMP Type codes are shown below Membership Query if Group Address is 0 0 0 0 Specific Group Membership Query if Group Address is Present Membership Report version 2 150 NS3550 24T 4S User Manual Leave a Group version 2 Membership Report version 1 IGMP packets enable multicast routers to keep track of the membership of multicast groups on their respective sub networks The following outlines what is communicated between a multicast router and a multicast group member using IGMP A host sends an IGMP report to join a group A host will never send a report when it wants to leave a group for version 1 A host will send a leave report when it wants to leave a group for version 2 Multicast routers send IGMP queries to the all hosts group address 224 0 0 1 periodically to see whether any group members exist on their sub networks If there is no response from a particular group the router assumes that there are no group members on the network The Time to Live TTL field of query messages is set to 1 so that the queries will not be forwarded to other sub networks IGMP version 2 introduces some enhancements such as a method to elect a multicast queried for each LAN an explicit leave message and query messages that are specific to a given group The states a computer will go through to join or to leave a multicast group are shown below
52. 170 MOS COntrol LISt CG OMmlG URAlOM diss pets ol tal do bl die io ed 171 QoS Control Entry COmiGurati Onn iii dd dia 172 AA A aN al at coe ele et eae ae 173 Bandwidth Contolunidaisida id a dla ia 175 SOM C 10460 A 177 AS A a ed aE e tau pce a R AR eee a a eaten tee 178 OSC P REMAKING ia ao a al ado e an tod do ae cde Ah eta 179 Woice V ANC OnIGUrallON a sa 181 MACS EAN TA e ll ee io edi eee re eee 183 ACCESS COMO SS tildado 184 ACCESS GON MOSES US ica 185 Access Control LISTCONIgUraON AA A A 186 AG ECONO UraniOM eroaa E it a do 187 ACLEROnsS GoOniguratON aera a e lides 193 ACL Rate Limiter CONTIQUTAIN be Saeed dec sixes 194 PUTO MUC ATION nissan iaa 196 Understanding IEEE 802 1X Port Based Authentication ooccconccconccccnccnconcncnncnconononnncnnoncnnoncnnnnnnnonrnnonrnnnnnnrnconanennass 197 Au thenticaton OUT ALON ed A ai 200 Network Access Server Configuratio accio A ia 201 NGIWONCACCESS OVES W ss roo e rorueet 209 Network Access Sal SUS end ea aaa 210 Authentication ever COMUN a a o a ln a ae RN ee a 214 RADIO nes 217 AA o ea br sR ee oe ee enn Ne eee er gee ee creer ee eee ene eee OP 219 Windows Platform RADIUS Server Configuration ccccccccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeeesseeeeeseeeeessaeeeesesaeeeesaeeeesaees 223 8021X TENEN o o ener ere 228 SCPC r a 231 POr EMmMIECORTO gt A AA a e A 231 ACCESS Manage metes usd ia 234 Access Management StatisStiCS oooccccccnnncocononoconcnnoconcnn
53. 4 sl b o El 0 11 12 13 14 15 16 1 15 4 203341 SS CO 0 G A O ee 00 155 CO 1 CO M2 OO MS O E CO E CO ee CO ees O E O OOO G A A A O OO O O O O O O O UU QQ 000005 GOG G GOG 0 GO 0 G0 GOG O O O O E SoS OS COS OES OS Ome CO A0 COS Oe Om COS O O 0000000 OO O O O O O es es O SOS OS OBS ODS CO G OO 0 OO A0 G0 Oe CO eS COS A O Se Se OE OO G G G0 GCO O O O O O O O O A O SOS OS OS ODO G OO 0 ORS CORSO eS CO eS COS O O SO SS OO OS OS OO SO SO 0 OS Om Ome COS OS Oo O O 10 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 18 ZU 21 e 24 8 25 26 Auto Refresh CL Figure 4 4 2 Port Statistics Overview Page Screenshot The displayed counters are Object Description e Port The logical port for the settings contained in the same row e Packets The number of received and transmitted packets per port e Bytes The number of received and transmitted bytes per port e Errors The number of frames received in error and the number of incomplete transmissions per port 90 NS3550 24T 4S User Manual e Drops The number of frames discarded due to ingress or egress congestion e Filtered The number of received frames filtered by the forwarding process Buttons Click to refresh the page immediately Refresh Clear Clears the counters for all ports Auto refresh ql Check this box to enable an automatic refresh of the page at regular intervals Port Statistics Detail This page provides detailed traff
54. AS AAA A E E II A A a A a 56 NTF CORT G UN AUOMN be si ed 58 UPAR CONIA sips se cca cee A A IE 58 PG Pai A apne gates E AE A aetece peste a et peste aetcee goatee eect Majeqtemenenat et senate sanaceane 60 DEC Relay Slat SE Ss Gras ceca Sees costes cates ae laos 62 OS NEG E PO CCC casa ciamtecteac seassaaacat sense uctssacadt E t once de nc E A E E 64 A e Gees 65 Detaled Lodi aia 66 A eer ten Sets Se ctr eae a ene var BST oo a ees ean a ee ee oe a eer eee 67 SMTP CONAGUA ii 67 Web FIMIWareU Parade ai A A A ent ede aE S 69 TEFP EFRNWatre UPA a ai aa 70 Conig rathon AUD oi astos 71 Ccontigura On UDI Ada A A A A A 73 Digital NOUN ORO cats oe get ll li de 74 EUA Mis cs 75 o O O II A eRe eee 77 SYSTEM RODOO Baer rE re eee a AE ee ee ee ee ee 78 Simple Network Management Protocol ccccccsssssseeeeeeeeceeeneeeeeeeeecoeessseeeeeseeeoessseeeeeeeooensnseeeeeeeeoonoessneeeeees 79 SNMP OM Scare E ee rita dea 79 SNMP System Contigua dci 80 SNMP System Information Configuration ccccccccccssccecseseecceeeeecssececsuseecceeeecsegeeessuseecssgeeecseueeeessuseeessagesesseseeessaes 81 SNMP Trap Configuration cccccccccccsesccccseeecceececceeeeeeseecesseeeessueeeeseueeeseeeeeseaeeesseaeeesaaueesseseeeesseuseesaeeesseueeesseasessaaes 81 SINE VS CONQUE ION a a o e e a o o A era ot 83 SNMPv2 Communities COnnGuraliOn A eee ee ee A a 83 SNMEYS Users Conquest o rt oi 83 SNMPv3 Groups Configuration cccccccccccseeceeee
55. Authentication macbased Switch authenticates on behalf of the client default Show 802 1X state Default Setting none Example Show the port 1 security state SWITCH gt security network nas state 1 Port Admin State Port State Last Source Last ID Security Network NAS Reauthentication Description Set or show Reauthentication enabledness Syntax Security Network NAS Reauthentication enable disable Parameters enable Enable reauthentication disable Disable reauthentication default Show current reauthentication mode Default Setting disable Example Enable reauthentication function 344 NS3550 24T 4S User Manual SWITCH gt security network nas reauthentication enable Security Network NAS ReauthPeriod Description Set or show the period between reauthentications Syntax Security Network NAS ReauthPeriod lt reauth_period gt Parameters lt reauth_period gt Period between reauthentications 1 3600 seconds default Show current reauthentication period Default Setting 3600 Example Set reauthentication period in 3000sec SWITCH gt security network nas reauthperiod 3000 Security Network NAS EapolTimeout Description Set or show the time between EAPOL retransmissions Syntax Security Network NAS EapolTimeout lt eapol_ timeout gt Parameters lt eapol_timeout gt Time between EAPOL retransmissions 1 65535 seconds default Show current EA
56. Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 76 NS3550 24T 4S User Manual Factory Default You can reset the configuration of the switch on this page Only the IP configuration is retained The new configuration is available immediately which means that no restart is necessary The Factory Default screen is shown in Figure 4 2 28 Factory Default Are you sure to reset the configuration to Factory Default Figure 4 2 28 Factory Default Page Screenshot Buttons Yes Yes Click to reset the configuration to Factory Defaults No Click to return to the Port State page without resetting the configuration After the Reset button is pressed and the device is rebooted the system will load the default IP settings as following Default IP address 192 168 0 100 Subnet mask 255 255 255 0 Default Gateway 192 168 0 254 The other setting value is back to disable or none To reset the Managed Switch to the Factory default setting you can also press the hardware reset button at the front panel about 10 seconds After the device be rebooted You can login the management WEB interface within the same subnet of 192 168 0 xx E NS3550 24T 4S ifs Console 17 19 a E ACT 10 100 E 4 E 2 3 E Hardware Reset button T System Reboot The Reboot page enables the device to be rebooted from a remote location Once the Reboot button is
57. Current column will show a dash If the Limit Control user module is not enabled on the port the Limit column will show a dash Buttons Retresh Click to refresh the page immediately Auto refresh Check this box to enable an automatic refresh of the page at regular intervals Port Security Detail This page shows the MAC addresses secured by the Port Security module Port Security is a module with no direct configuration Configuration comes indirectly from other modules the user modules When a user module has enabled port security on a port the port is set up for software based learning In this mode frames from unknown MAC addresses are passed on to the port security module which in turn asks all user modules whether to allow this new MAC address to forward or block it For a MAC address to be set in the forwarding state all enabled user modules must unanimously agree on allowing the MAC address to forward If only one chooses to block it it will be blocked until that user module decides otherwise The Port Security Detail screen is shown in Figure 4 12 7 239 Port Security Detail Port 1 Auto Refresh C1 Figure 4 12 7 Port Security Detail Screen Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e MAC Address amp VLAN The MAC address and VLAN ID that is seen on this port If no MAC addresses are ID learned a single row stating No MAC addresses attached is displayed e State
58. D Z e pe gt Q O D 0 gn o En D Z e e gt Q O D 0p 0 O En D Z O me gt Q O D 0 YN a En D Factory Default System Reboot Port Control oo a gt Q O CD Yn 0 a o D Z O ame gt Q O D 0 YN D D D Z O mp gt Q O n n A o D Z O e gt Q O CD n 10 Q o D Rate Control Port Status e gt o Z O gt Q O D 0 YN O Z D Port ay Port Statistics Configuration Port Sniffer Z O e gt Q O CD n 10 A 23 D Z O gt Q O CD nN 102 Q en D ae gt o Z O mm gt Q O D 0 YN a D D Protected Port gt e Z O pn gt O O 4 n n Q a 9 Remote Ping View Only VLAN Operation Mode gt e Z O gt O O 4 n n Q e 9 VLAN Group Z O gt Q O D 0 YN y 22 D Z O R gt Q O 0 0 y SI D VLAN Filter gt e Z O gt Q O O n n Q e 9 gt o Z O gt Q O D 0 0 y D GVRP Setting GVRP Table Z O gt Q O CD n 10 WW 25 O Z O gt Q O Nn n y o D QinQ Port Setting e gt o Z O e gt Q O D 0 YN O D D QinQ Tunnel Setting 450 NS3550 24T 4S User Manual User Level gt Admin Viewer Admin Viewer Admin Viewer Main Function Trunking Aggregator Information View Only Change
59. DHCP Snooping Mode Description Set or show the DHCP snooping mode Syntax Security Network DHCP Snooping Mode enable disable Parameters enable Enable DHCP snooping mode When enable DHCP snooping mode operation the request DHCP messages will be forwarded to trusted ports and only allowed reply packets from trusted ports disable Disable DHCP snooping mode default Show flow DHCP snooping mode Default Setting disable Example Enable DHCP snooping mode SWITCH gt security network dhcp snooping mode enable Security Network DHCP Snooping Port Mode Description Set or show the DHCP snooping port mode 360 NS3550 24T 4S User Manual Syntax Security Network DHCP Snooping Port Mode lt port_list gt trusted untrusted Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports trusted Configures the port as trusted sources of the DHCP message untrusted Configures the port as untrusted sources of the DHCP message default Show flow DHCP snooping port mode Default Setting trusted Example Set untrusted DHCP snooping port mode in port 1 SWITCH gt security network dhcp snooping port mode 1 untrusted Security Network DHCP Snooping Statistics Description Show up or clear DHCP snooping statistics Syntax Security Network DHCP Snooping Statistics lt port_list gt clear Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports clear Clear DHCP s
60. Detailed Log screen is shown in Figure 4 2 15 Detalled System Log Information wy Message Level Info Time 1970 01 01 Thu 00 00 04 0000 Message Switch just made a cold boot Figure 4 2 15 Detailed Log Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e ID The ID gt 1 of the system log entry e Message The message of system logging entry Buttons Retresh Click to refresh the page any changes made locally will be undone kee Updates the system log entries starting from the first available entry ID Updates the system log entries ending at the last entry currently displayed Updates the system log entries starting from the last entry currently displayed gt Updates the system log entries ending at the last available entry ID 66 NS3550 24T 4S User Manual Remote Syslog Configure remote syslog on this page The Remote Syslog screen is shown in Figure 4 2 16 Remote india ee Disable w Figure 4 2 16 Remote Syslog Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Mode Indicates the remote syslog mode operation Possible modes are Enabled Enable remote syslog mode operation Disabled Disable remote syslog mode operation e Syslog Server IP Fill in your remote syslog server IP address Buttons Save Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values SMTP Configu
61. Duplex 100 2 000 000 Full Duplex 95 1 999 999 Trunk 90 1 000 000 Half Duplex 19 200 000 Full Duplex 18 100 000 Trunk 15 50 000 a t Etherne Full Duplex 4 10 000 Trunk 3 5 000 Table 4 7 2 Recommended STP Path Costs Port Type Link Type IEEE 802 1w 2001 Half Duplex 2 000 000 Full Duplex 1 000 000 Trunk 500 000 Half Duplex 200 000 Full Duplex 100 000 Trunk 50 000 Full Duplex 10 000 Trunk 5 000 Table 4 7 3 Default STP Path Costs MSTI Priorities This page allows the user to inspect the current STP MSTI bridge instance priority configurations and possibly change them as well The MSTI Priority screen is shown in Figure 4 7 7 MSTI Configuration MSTI Priority Configuration CST MSTIZ 32768 v io Td 32768 MST 32268 x MSTI Yi v v MSTIS 32768 w 4 oa a Figure 4 7 7 MSTI Priority Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e MSTI The bridge instance The CIST is the default instance which is always active 142 NS3550 24T 4S User Manual Controls the bridge priority Lower numerical values have better priority The bridge priority plus the MSTI instance number concatenated with the 6 byte MAC address of the switch forms a Bridge Identifier e Priority Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values MSTI Configuration This page allows the user to inspect the current STP MSTI
62. Figure 4 11 9 RADIUS Authentication Accounting for Server Overview Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields RADIUS Authentication Servers The statistics map follows closely to those specified in RFC4668 RADIUS Authentication Client MIB Use the server select box to switch between the backend servers to show details Object Description e Packet Counters RADIUS authentication server packet counter There are seven receive and four transmit counters Direction Name RFC4668 Name Description Rx Access radiusAuthClientExtA The number of RADIUS Accepts ccessAccepts Access Accept packets valid or invalid received from the 219 Rx Rx Rx Tx Tx Tx Tx Access Rejects Access Challenges Malformed Access Responses Bad Authenticators Unknown Types Packets Dropped Access Requests Access Retransmissio ns Pending Requests Timeouts 220 radiusAuthClientExtA ccessRejects radiusAuthClientExtA ccessChallenges radiusAuthClientExt MalformedAccessRe sponses radiusAuthClientExtB adAuthenticators radiusAuthClientExtU nknownTypes radiusAuthClientExtP acketsDropped radiusAuthClientExtA ccessRequests radiusAuthClientExtA ccessRetransmission S radiusAuthClientExtP endingRequests radiusAuthClientExtT imeouts server The number of RADIUS Access Reject packets valid or invalid received from the server The number of RADIUS Access Challenge packets
63. Groups The present IGMP groups Max are 128 groups for each VLAN e Port Members The ports that are members of the entry e Querier Status Show the Querier status is ACTIVE or IDLE e Querier Transmit The number of Transmitted Querier e Querier Receive The number of Received Querier e V1 Reports Receive The number of Received V1 Reports e V2 Reports Receive The number of Received V2 Reports e V3 Reports Receive The number of Received V3 Reports e V2 Leave Receive The number of Received V2 Leave 158 NS3550 24T 4S User Manual Buttons Click to refresh the page immediately Retresh Clear Clears all Statistics counters Auto refresh E Check this box to enable an automatic refresh of the page at regular intervals MVR Configuration In multicast VLAN networks subscribers to a multicast group can exist in more than one VLAN If the VLAN boundary restrictions in a network consist of Layer 2 switches Multicast VLAN Registration MVR is a protocol for Layer 2 IP networks that enables multicast traffic from a source VLAN to be shared with subscriber VLANs The alternative would be to use PIM or a similar protocol to route the traffic through a Layer 3 network it might be necessary to replicate the multicast stream to the same group in different subnets even if they are on the same physical network Multicast VLAN Registration MVR routes packets received in a multicast source VLAN to one or more receive VLANs Cl
64. HH HHE E pe del ey ee ll E e de ey el ll E All el ie dl ll E El E El El El 1 8 5 57 5 2lelealelellellel gl 2 HEHH AHH HHE E El El El el El El Bl El gt MEE elelele 2 13 4 lt Elf le ie ll ee Pe E HOU E El El El ARE elll elle AEE E E El El im tw me oc A A T Figure 4 7 6 STP CIST Port Configuration Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Description Object The switch port number of the logical STP port e Port Controls whether RSTP is enabled on this switch port e STP Enabled 140 NS3550 24T 4S User Manual e Path Cost Controls the path cost incurred by the port The Auto setting will set the path cost as appropriate by the physical link speed using the 802 1D recommended values Using the Specific setting a user defined value can be entered The path cost is used when establishing the active topology of the network Lower path cost ports are chosen as forwarding ports in favor of higher path cost ports Valid values are in the range 1 to 200000000 e Priority Controls the port priority This can be used to control priority of ports having identical port cost See above Default 128 Range 0 240 in steps of 16 e operEdge state flag Operational flag describing whether the port is connecting directly to edge devices No Bridges attached Transitioning to the forwarding state is faster for edge ports having operEdge true than for other port
65. IEEE 802 1X is an IEEE standard for port based Network Access Control It provides authentication to devices attached to a LAN port establishing a point to point connection or preventing access from that port if authentication fails With 802 1X access to all switch ports can be centrally controlled from a server which means that authorized users can use the same credentials for authentication from any point within the network IGMP is an acronym for Internet Group Management Protocol It is a communications protocol used to manage the membership of Internet Protocol multicast groups IGMP is used by IP hosts and adjacent multicast routers to establish multicast group memberships It is an integral part of the IP multicast specification like ICMP for unicast connections IGMP can be used for online video and gaming and allows more efficient use of resources when supporting these uses IGMP Querier IMAP A router sends IGMP Query messages onto a particular link This router is called the Querier IMAP is an acronym for Internet Message Access Protocol It is a protocol for email clients to retrieve email messages from a mail server IMAP is the protocol that IMAP clients use to communicate with the servers and SMTP is the protocol used to transport mail to an IMAP server The current version of the Internet Message Access Protocol is IMAP4 It is similar to Post Office Protocol version 3 POP3 but offers additional and more complex
66. IP to exchange the messages between computers The TCP protocol guarantees reliable and in order delivery of data from sender to receiver and distinguishes data for multiple connections by concurrent applications for example Web server and e mail server running on the same host The applications on networked hosts can use TCP to create connections to one another It is known as a connection oriented protocol which means that a connection is established and maintained until such time as the message or messages to be exchanged by the application programs at each end have been exchanged TCP is 464 TELNET TFTP ToS TLV TKIP UDP NS3550 24T 4S User Manual responsible for ensuring that a message is divided into the packets that IP manages and for reassembling the packets back into the complete message at the other end Common network applications that use TCP include the World Wide Web WWW e mail and File Transfer Protocol FTP TELNET is an acronym for TELetype NETwork lt is a terminal emulation protocol that uses the Transmission Control Protocol TCP and provides a virtual connection between TELNET server and TELNET client TELNET enables the client to control the server and communicate with other servers on the network To start a Telnet session the client user must log in to a server by entering a valid username and password Then the client user can enter commands through the Telnet program just as i
67. MAC Address is disabled The IP address can be used to calculate the destination port for the frame Check to enable the use of the IP Address or uncheck to disable By default IP Address is enabled The TCP UDP port number can be used to calculate the destination port for the frame Check to enable the use of the TCP UDP Port Number or uncheck to disable By default TCP UDP Port Number is enabled Static Aggregation Group Configuration The Aggregation Group Configuration screen is shown in Figure 4 5 3 99 Aggregation Group Configuration Port Members PA aaa Normal A 1 e e 240 4 4 4 4 2 J fl 5 E f z OMOoo oc 70 0c o0 Omooo0oco0oo9o Oooo0o0 00000 Omooo0oco0oo o Oooo 70 v0 00c eo0 OMOooog 970 00 0 00 OMOooo c 70 0c eo OMmoooogc 7ooco0o OMOocoo0c co 00 00 OMOooo0c c 0 00 o0 0 e fel e fel e fele fel 10 010 000000000000 Oooo 7c v0 00c e0 OOOO oc 8oO oc o0 OMmOooo c 70 0c o0 Omoooo c 70 0o0co0 Oooo 970 coo 0c o0 hJ Figure 4 5 3 Aggregation Group Configuration Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Group ID Indicates the group ID for the settings contained in the same row Group ID Normal indicates there is no aggregation Only one group ID is valid per port e Port Members Each switch port is listed for each group ID Select a radio button to include a port in a
68. MSTI Ports Configuration This page allows the user to inspect the current STP MSTI port configurations and possibly change them as well A MSTI port is a virtual port which is instantiated separately for each active CIST physical port for each MSTI instance configured and applicable for the port The MSTI instance must be selected before displaying actual MSTI port configuration options This page contains MSTI port settings for physical and aggregated ports The MSTI Port Configuration screen is shown in Figure 4 7 9 amp Figure 4 7 10 NSTI Port Configuration Select MSTI E Figure 4 7 9 MSTI Port Configuration Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields MSTI Port Configuration Object Description 144 NS3550 24T 4S User Manual Select the bridge instance and set more detail configuration e Select MSTI MST1 MSTI Port Configuration MSTI Aggregated Ports Configuration Priority ge Fa bam J ee m EE MSTI Normal Ports Configuration mE mar Fa a tt je pur J Ee Figure 4 7 10 MST1 MSTI Port Configuration Page Screenshot 145 The page includes the following fields MSTx MSTI Port Configuration Object Description e Port The switch port number of the corresponding STP CIST and MSTI port e Path Cost Controls the path cost incurred by the port The Auto setting will set the path cost as appropriate by the physical link speed using the 802 1D recommended v
69. Non Member Leave Group Stop Timer Join Group Send Report Start Timer Leave Group Query Recelves Start Timer Delaying Member Report Recely ldle Member Stop Timer Timer Expried Send report Figure 4 8 4 IGMP State Transitions E IGMP Querier A router or multicast enabled switch can periodically ask their hosts if they want to receive multicast traffic If there is more than one router switch on the LAN performing IP multicasting one of these devices is elected querier and assumes the role of querying the LAN for group members It propagates the service requests on to any doing upstream multicast 151 switch router to ensure that it will continue to receive the multicast service Es Multicast routers use this information along with a multicast routing protocol such as DVMRP or PIM to support IP multicasting across the Internet Note 152 NS3550 24T 4S User Manual IGMP Snooping Configuration This page provides IGMP Snooping related configuration Most of the settings are global whereas the Router Port configuration is related to the currently selected unit as reflected by the page header The IGMP Snooping Configuration screen is shown in Figure 4 8 5 ISMP Snooping Configuration Global Configuration snooping Enabled Unregistered IPMC Flooding enabled y Leave Proxy Enabled d YLAN ID Snooping Enabled IGMP Querier 1 d Figure 4 8 5 IGMP Snooping Configuration Page Scr
70. Q IEEE 802 1Q Tunneling QinQ is designed for service providers carrying traffic for multiple customers across their networks QinQ tunneling is used to maintain customer specific VLAN and Layer 2 protocol configurations even when different customers use the same internal VLAN IDs This is accomplished by inserting Service Provider VLAN SPVLAN tags into the customer s frames when they enter the service provider s network and then stripping the tags when the frames leave the network A service provider s customers may have specific requirements for their internal VLAN IDs and number of VLANs supported VLAN ranges required by different customers in the same service provider network might easily overlap and traffic passing through the infrastructure might be mixed Assigning a unique range of VLAN IDs to each customer would restrict customer configurations require intensive processing of VLAN mapping tables and could easily exceed the maximum VLAN limit of 4096 112 NS3550 24T 4S User Manual Customer A s LAN Customer A s LAN GGGCC UEI CIEMS MoM MM eee Branch Office NS3550 24T 4S MAN Edge Switch MAN Service Provider Domain eerie MAN Edge Switch _ TUPI 8 BRIER RRRER pe sgae Cone Switch Q in Q aay Qin _ VLAN Tag gt _ VLAN Tag _ VLAN Tag rd y ES AN Ta a VLAN lag NS3550 24T 4S MAN Edge Switch Customer B s LAN
71. Seen is disabled e Port State The current state of the port It can undertake one of the following values Globally Disabled NAS is globally disabled Link Down NAS is globally enabled but there is no link on the port Authorized The port is in Force Authorized or a single supplicant mode and the supplicant is authorized Unauthorized The port is in Force Unauthorized or a single supplicant mode and the supplicant is not successfully authorized by the RADIUS server X Auth Y Unauth The port is in a multi supplicant mode Currently X clients are authorized and Y are unauthorized e Restart Two buttons are available for each row The buttons are only enabled when authentication is globally enabled and the port s Admin State is in an EAPOL based or MAC based mode Clicking these buttons will not cause settings changed on the page to take effect Reauthenticate Schedules a reauthentication to whenever the quiet period of the port runs out EAPOL based authentication For MAC based authentication reauthentication will be attempted immediately The button only has effect for successfully authenticated clients on the port and will not cause the clients to get temporarily unauthorized Reinitialize Forces a reinitialization of the clients on the port and thereby a reauthentication immediately The clients will transfer to the unauthorized state while the reauthentication is in progress Buttons Refresh Click to refresh the page Save
72. Server Statistics Object Description e Transmit to Server The packets number that relayed from client to server e Transmit Error The packets number that packet of error sent packets to client e Receive form Server The packets number that received packets from server e Receive Missing Agent The packets number that received packets without agent information options Option e Receive Missing The packets number that received packets which the Circuit ID option was Circuit ID missing e Receive Missing The packets number that received packets which Remote ID option was missing Remote ID e Receive Bad Circuit ID The packets number that the Circuit ID option did not match known the circuit ID e Receive Bad Remote The packets number that the Remote ID option did not match the known Remote ID ID Client Statistics Object Description e Transmit to Client The number of packets relayed packets from server to client e Transmit Error The number of packets that sent error packets to servers e Receive form Client The number of packets received from the server e Receive Agent Option The number of packets received with relay agent information option e Replace Agent Option The number of packets that replaced received packets with relay agent information option e Keep Agent Optin The number of packets that keepped received packets with relay agent information option 62 NS3550 24T 4S User Manual e Drop Agent Option The nu
73. Show 802 1X configuration Syntax Security Network NAS Configuration lt port_list gt Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports Example Show 802 1X configuration of port 1 SWITCH gt security network nas configuration 1 802 1X Configuration 342 NS3550 24T 4S User Manual Disabled Reauth Disabled Reauth Period 3600 EAPOL Timeout 30 300 10 RADIUS QoS Disabled RADIUS VLAN Disabled Guest VLAN Disabled Guest VLAN ID 1 Max Reauth Count 2 Allow Guest VLAN if EAPOL Frame Seen Disabled Port Admin State Port State Last Source Security Network NAS Mode Description Set or show the global NAS enabledness Syntax Security Network NAS Mode enable disable Parameters enable Globally enable 802 1X disable Globally disable 802 1X default Show current 802 1X global enabledness Default Setting disable Example Enable IEEE802 1X function SWITCH gt security network nas mode enable Security Network NAS State Description Set or show the port security state Syntax Security Network NAS State lt port_list gt auto authorized unauthorized single multi macbased 343 Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports auto Port based 802 1X Authentication authorized Port access is allowed unauthorized Port access is not allowed single Single Host 802 1X Authentication multi Multiple Host 802 1X
74. Software Date The software version date of the switch Buttons Auto refresh i i Check this box to enable an automatic refresh of the page at regular intervals Refresh Click to refresh the page any changes made locally will be undone IP Configuration The IP Configuration includes the IP Address Subnet Mask and Gateway The Configured column is used to view or change the IP configuration Fill up the IP Address Subnet Mask and Gateway for the device The screen is shown in Figure 4 2 2 IP Configuration DHCP Client L 192 160 0 100 205 205 255 0 192 160 01 IP DNS Proxy Configuration Figure 4 2 2 IP Configuration Page Screenshot The Current column is used to show the active IP configuration Object Description e DHCP Client Enable the DHCP client by checking this box If DHCP fails and the configured IP address is zero DHCP will retry lf DHCP fails and the configured IP address is non zero DHCP will stop and the configured IP settings will be used The DHCP client will announce the configured System Name as hostname to provide DNS lookup e IP Address Provide the IP address of this switch in dotted decimal notation e IP Mask Provide the IP mask of this switch dotted decimal notation 90 NS3550 24T 4S User Manual e IP Router Provide the IP address of the router in dotted decimal notation e VLAN ID Provide the managed VLAN ID The allowed range is 1 through 4095 e DNS Server Provide the IP add
75. T mode the Cable Diagnostics can run without disruption of the link or of any data transfer m if the link is established in 100Base TX or 10Base T the Cable Diagnostics cause the link to drop while the diagnostics are running After the diagnostics are finished the link is reestablished And the following functions are available Coupling between cable pairs WN Cable pair termination m Cable Length Buttons Start Click to start to transmit ICMP packets Ping This page allows you to issue ICMP PING packets to troubleshoot IP connectivity issues After you press Start 5 ICMP packets are transmitted and the sequence number and roundtrip time are displayed upon reception of a reply The page refreshes automatically until responses to all packets are received or until a timeout occurs The 269 ICMP Ping screen is shown in Figure 4 15 1 ICMP Ping Ping Size Figure 4 15 1 ICMP Ping Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e IP Address The destination IP Address e Ping Size The payload size of the ICMP packet Values range from 8 bytes to 1400 bytes Be sure the target IP Address is within the same network subnet of the switch or you had setup the correct gateway IP address Buttons Start Click to transmit ICMP packets IPv6 Ping This page allows you to issue ICMPv6 PING packets to troubleshoot IPv6 connectivity issues After you press Start 5
76. The number of valid EAPOL Request frames other than Request Identity frames that have been transmitted by the switch These backend RADIUS frame counters are available for the following administrative states Port based 802 1X Single 802 1X Multi 802 1X MAC based Auth 211 Direction Name IEEE Name Description Rx Access dotixAuthBackendAcce 802 1X based Challenges ssChallenges Counts the number of times that the switch receives the first request from the backend server following the first response from the supplicant Indicates that the backend server has communication with the switch MAC based Counts all Access Challenges received from the backend server for this port left most table or client right most table Rx Other dot1xAuthBackendOther 802 1X based Requests Requests ToSupplicant Counts the number of times that the switch sends an EAP Request packet following the first to the supplicant Indicates that the backend server chose an EAP method MAC based Not applicable Rx Auth dot1xAuthBackendAuth 802 1X and MAC based Successes Successes Counts the number of times that the switch receives a success indication Indicates that the supplicant client has successfully authenticated to the backend server Rx Auth dot1xAuthBackendAuth 802 1X and MAC based Failures Fails Counts the number of times that the switch receives a failure message This indicates that the supplicant client has not
77. Type based ACE will not get matched by IP and ARP frames ARP The ACE will match ARP RARP frames IPv4 The ACE will match all IPv4 frames IPv4 ICMP The ACE will match IPv4 frames with ICMP protocol IPv4 UDP The ACE will match IPv4 frames with UDP protocol IPv4 TCP The ACE will match IPv4 frames with TCP protocol IPv4 Other The ACE will match IPv4 frames which are not ICMP UDP TCP e Action Indicates the forwarding action of the ACE Permit Frames matching the ACE may be forwarded and learned Deny Frames matching the ACE are dropped e Rate Limiter Indicates the rate limiter number of the ACE The allowed range is 1 to 15 When Disabled is displayed the rate limiter operation is disabled e Port Copy Indicates the port copy operation of the ACE Frames matching the ACE are copied to the port number The allowed values are Disabled or a specific port number When the Disabled is displayed the port copy operation is disabled e CPU Forward packet that matched the specific ACE to CPU 185 e CPU Once Forward first packet that matched the specific ACE to CPU e Counter The counter indicates the number of times the ACE was hit by a frame e Conflict Indicates the hardware status of the specific ACE The specific ACE is not applied to the hardware due to hardware limitations Buttons Corbined a Select the ACL status from this drop down list Auto refresh Check this box to refresh the page automatically Automatic refres
78. USO la ii AA AAA AAA A 308 SOCcU nit COMMANA azira a aa a a a a 308 Security Switch User Configuratio sss ee ee a 308 SEC gt WIKCI AI SOR ACG tio do cng aden dl a de o dl 309 Security Switch User Delete cccccccceccccssscecceseeeceesececsseeeceaeeesseueeecsegeeeseueeeeseueeessegeeessaueeeeeseuseessegeeessegeeensags 309 Security Switch Privilege Level Configuration cccccsseccccssececceeececseseeecescecsescesseuseesseeeeseueeesseaaueeesseseessaees 309 Security Switch Privilege Level Group ccccccssscccceseecceeececceeseecceueeecseueecssuscecseeeesseseeessuseeessuseeessegeeesseneeesaaes 310 Security Switch Privilege Level Current cccccsseccccseeccceesceccescecceuececseueeeseeuceeseecesseueeessusseeseueeeesseueeesseseeesaees 310 Security Switch Auth Configuration ccccooccncconccncononnnononencnnnnonnnnnrnnnnnnrnnonnnrnnnnnrnnrnnnrnnnnnnrnnnnnnrnrrnnnnnrnrnnnrnrrnaninnnnns 311 Secht SWITCH Att MEINOG e o e o a 311 Security Switch SSH Configuration c202 tanc acetate needles ees eee DR 312 SEGUN SWCD eo leido od a lo ts 312 Security Switch HTTPs Configuration ccccoccnncconcnconononcnnncononnncnnononcnononnnnonrnrnnnrnnrnnnnnnnnnnnnrnnnrnnrnnnnnranrnnnnanannnnas 313 Security WIEST EAT TS Mde o e o o o O 313 Security Witch AIT TRSROQIre Cati dba 313 Security Switch Access Configuration cn ds 314 Security Switch ACCESS Mode cccccccsscccceeeeecceuseeccesececsuseeecaueeecseueees
79. User logon name test mca test pc s User logon name pre Wirndowe Z000 can test Back Lancel Figure 4 11 16 Add User Properties Screen New Object User x Create ir catestpo Users Password Jeseose Confirm password eseese User must change password at next logon M User cannot change password e Password never expires Account is disabled lt Back Cancel Figure 4 11 17 Add User Properties Screen 227 Set the Ports Authenticate Status to Force Authorized if the port is connected to the RADIUS server or the port is an uplink port that is connected to another switch Or once the 802 1X stat to work the switch might not be able to access the RADIUS server 802 1X Client Configuration Windows XP supports 802 1X previously released operating systems windows 98SE ME 2000 an 802 1X client utility is needed The following procedures show how to configure 802 1X Authentication in Windows XP Please note that if you want to change the 802 1x authentication type of a wireless client i e switch to EAP TLS from EAP MD5 you must remove the current existing wireless network from your preferred connection first and add it in again Configure Sample EAP MD5 Authentication 1 Goto Start gt Control Panel double click on Network Connections 2 Right click on the Local Network Connection 3 Click Properties to open up the Properties setting window 3C
80. a VLAN is configured to be a private VLAN communication between ports within that VLAN can be prevented Two application examples are provided in this section e Customers connected to an ISP can be members of the same VLAN but they are not allowed to communicate with each other within that VLAN e Servers in a farm of web servers in a Demilitarized Zone DMZ are allowed to communicate with the outside world and with database servers on the inside segment but are not allowed to communicate with each other 119 A internet Promiscuous Public Servers s oe eS bd NS3550 24T 4S Isolate eo ens ene Access Deny Access Deny Access Deny Private VLAN For private VLANs to be applied the switch must first be configured for standard VLAN operation when this is in place One or more of the configured VLANs can be configured as private VLANs Ports in a private VLAN fall into one of these two groups E Promiscuous ports Ports from which traffic can be forwarded to all ports in the private VLAN Ports which can receive traffic from all ports in the private VLAN E Isolated ports Ports from which traffic can only be forwarded to promiscuous ports in the private VLAN Ports which can receive traffic from only promiscuous ports in the private VLAN The configuration of promiscuous and isolated ports applies to all private VLANs When traffic comes in on a promiscuous port in a private VLAN
81. address length PLN settings 0 ARP RARP frames where the HLN is equal to Ethernet 0x06 and the PLN is equal to IPv4 0x04 must not match this entry 1 ARP RARP frames where the HLN is equal to Ethernet 0x06 and the PLN is equal to IPv4 0x04 must match this entry Any Any value is allowed don t care Specify whether frames can hit the action according to their ARP RARP hardware address space HRD settings 0 ARP RARP frames where the HLD is equal to Ethernet 1 must not match this entry 1 ARP RARP frames where the HLD is equal to Ethernet 1 must match this entry Any Any value is allowed don t care Specify whether frames can hit the action according to their ARP RARP protocol address space PRO settings 0 ARP RARP frames where the PRO is equal to IP 0x800 must not match this entry 1 ARP RARP frames where the PRO is equal to IP 0x800 must match this entry Any Any value is allowed don t care The IP parameters can be configured when Frame Type IPv4 is selected Object e IP Protocol Filter e IP Protocol Value e IP TTL e IP Fragment Description Specify the IP protocol filter for this ACE Any No IP protocol filter is specified don t care Specific If you want to filter a specific IP protocol filter with this ACE choose this value A field for entering an IP protocol filter ICMP Select ICMP to filter IPv4 ICMP protocol frames Extra fields for defining ICMP paramete
82. and the Age Out counter is incremented Click to refresh the page immediately lear Gear Clears the local counters All counters including global counters are cleared upon reboot Auto refresh Check this box to enable an automatic refresh of the page at regular intervals 268 NS3550 24T 4S User Manual Network Diagnostics This section provide the Physical layer and IP layer network diagnostics tools for troubleshooting The diagnostic tools are designed for network manager to help them quickly diagnose problems between point to point and better service customers Use the Diagnastics menu items to display and configure basic administrative details of the Managed Switch Under System the following topics are provided to configure and view the system information This section has the following items Ping m IPv6 Ping Cable Diagnostic PING The ping and IPv6 ping allow you to issue ICMP PING packets to troubleshoot IP connectivity issues The Managed Switch transmit ICMP packets and the sequence number and roundtrip time are displayed upon reception of a reply Cable Diagnostics The Cable Diagnostics perform tests on copper cables These functions have the ability to identify the cable length and operating conditions and to isolate a variety of common faults that can occur on the Cat5 twisted pair cabling There might be two status as follow m if the link is established on the twisted pair interface in 1000Base
83. and the Trunking port must be a Tagged port while egress The Port 8 configuration as the following screen is shown in Figure 4 6 13 e 1 o 202 10 Tag v Figure 4 6 13 The Configuration of VLAN Trunk port That is although the VLAN 2 members Port 1 to Port 3 and VLAN 3 members Port 4 to Port 6 also belongs to VLAN 1 But with different PVID settings packets form VLAN 2 or VLAN 3 is not able to access to the other VLAN 6 Repeats Step 1 to 5 setup the VLAN Trunk port at the partner switch and add more VLANs to join the VLAN trunk repeats Step 1 to 3 to assign the Trunk port to the VLANs Port Isolate The diagram shows how the Managed Switch handles isolate and promiscuous ports and the each PCs are not able to access 128 NS3550 24T 4S User Manual each other PCs of each isolate port But they all need to access with the same server AP Printer The screen is shown in Figure 4 6 14 This section will show you how to configure the port for the server that could be accessed by each isolate port A internet Promiscuous Public Servers d I__ snonosIiwoJ NS3550 24T 4S VLAN 1 Private VLAN VLAN 1 Private VLAN Setup steps 1 Assign Port Mode Set Port 1 Port 4 in Isolate port Set Port5 and Port 6 to Promiscuous port The screen is shown in Figure 4 6 15 129 Figure 4 6 15 The Configuration of Isolate and Promiscuous Port 2 Assign VLAN Member VLAN 1 Port 1 Port
84. authentication and privacy and the community string will associated with SNMPv3 communities table Indicates the community writes access string to permit access to SNMP agent The allowed string length is O to 255 and the allowed content is the ASCII characters from 33 to 126 The field only suits to SNMPv1 and SNMPv2c SNMPv3 is using USM for authentication and privacy and the community string will be associated with SNMPv3 community s table Indicates the SNMPv3 engine ID The string must contain an even number between 10 and 64 hexadecimal digits but all zeros and all F s are not allowed Change of the Engine ID will clear all original local users Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 80 NS3550 24T 4S User Manual SNMP System Information Configuration The switch system information is provided here The System Information Configuration screen is shown in Figure 4 3 2 system Information ela nd System Contact System Contact ntact System Name System Name ee OAOT Figure 4 3 2 System Information Configuration Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e System Contact The textual identification of the contact person for this managed node together with information on how to contact this person The allowed string length is O to 255 and the allowed content is the ASCII characters from 32 to 126 e System Name An administrativ
85. bridge instance priority configurations and possibly change them as well The MSTI Configuration screen is shown in Figure 4 7 8 MSTI Configuration Add VLANs separated by spaces or comma Unmapped VLANs are mapped to the CIST The default bridge instance Configuration Identification Configuration Name p Configuration Revision Ooo MSTI Mapping MSTI YLANS Mapped Figure 4 7 8 MSTI Configuration Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Configuration Identification 143 Object Description e Configuration Name The name identifiying the VLAN to MSTI mapping Bridges must share the name and revision see below as well as the VLAN to MSTI mapping configuration in order to share spanning trees for MSTI s Intra region The name is at most 32 characters e Configuration Revision The revision of the MSTI configuration named above This must be an integer between 0 and 65535 MSTI Mapping Object Description e MSTI The bridge instance The CIST is not available for explicit mapping as it will receive the VLANs not explicitly mapped e VLANs Mapped The list of VLAN s mapped to the MSTI The VLANs must be separated with comma and or space A VLAN can only be mapped to one MSTI A unused MSTI should just be left empty l e not having any VLANs mapped to it Buttons Save Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values
86. by the page header The Port QoS Configuration screen is shown in Figure 4 9 9 173 Port QoS Configuration Number of Classes Egress Configuration Ingress Contiguration Queue Weighted NAAA wl eal el bol eal eal el al al alal eel el ell el eel el ell el oleo e 3 2 Si S 8 2 Sl Sl 2 Sl Sl Sl Bl Sl Sl Sl Bl Sl Sl Sl Bl Sl Sls AAA AAA A AAA AAA AAA EEE i CL Tag Priority Queuing Mode Q r y y y y e y ye O Default Class Por Figure 4 9 9 Port QoS Configuration Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Description Object Configure the number of traffic classes as 1 2 or 4 The default value is 4 e Number of Classes The logical port for the settings contained in the same row e Port Configure the default QoS class for the port that is the QoS class for frames not 174 matching any of the QCEs in the QCL e Default Class NS3550 24T 4S User Manual e QCL Select which QCL to use for the port e Tag Priority Select the default tag priority for this port when adding a Tag to the untagged frames e Queuing Mode Select which Queuing mode for this port e Queue Weighted Setting Queue weighted Low Normal Medium High if the Queuing Mode is Weighted Buttons Save Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values Bandwidth Control Configure the switch port rate limit
87. bytes each memtest Testing 0xBBB2c348 0x83fFd1006 Completed no errors fis load managed go Welcome to PLANET Command Line Interface Port Numbers 1 27 4 i 81 10 12 1416 181201221241 11131 oi 41 21111131191 112119211231 4 4 dd tds id E Username _ Figure 5 1 The Managed Switch Console Login Screen 275 For security reason please change and memorize the new password after this first setup Only accept command in lowercase letter under console interface Configure IP address The Managed Switch is shipped with default IP address as following IP Address 192 168 0 100 Subnet Mask 255 255 255 0 To check the current IP address or modify a new IP address for the Switch please use the procedures as follow E Show the current IP address 1 On Switch gt prompt enter ip configuration 2 The screen displays the current IP address Subnet Mask and Gateway As show in Figure 5 2 m COHM1 115200band Tera Term YT File Edit Setup Control Window Resize Help Username admin Password Login 1n progress SWITCH gt 1p configuration IP Configuration DHCP Client Disabled IP Address 192 168 0 100 IP Hask 200 200 200 8 IP Router 192 168 0 1 DNS Server 4 0 0 0 VLAN ae AL DNS Pro Dis TPv6 AUTOCONFIG ode Di ed IPv 6 Link Local Address feg 230 4fTf fe88 645e IPv Address 192 168 0 100 IPv 6 Prefix 96 IPv Router IPv VLAN ID
88. community name Example Leonia Post office box P O BOX Example 12345 Additional code Example 1320300003 260 NS3550 24T 4S User Manual Emergency Call Service Emergency Call Service e g E911 and others such as defined by TIA or NENA Object Description e Emergency Call Emergency Call Service ELIN identifier data format is defined to carry the ELIN Service identifier as used during emergency call setup to a traditional CAMA or ISDN trunk based PSAP This format consists of a numerical digit string corresponding to the ELIN to be used for emergency calling Policies Network Policy Discovery enables the efficient discovery and diagnosis of mismatch issues with the VLAN configuration along with the associated Layer 2 and Layer 3 attributes which apply for a set of specific protocol applications on that port Improper network policy configurations are a very significant issue in VoIP environments that frequently result in voice quality degradation or loss of service Policies are only intended for use with applications that have specific real time network policy requirements such as interactive voice and or video services The network policy attributes advertised are 1 Layer 2 VLAN ID IEEE 802 1Q 2003 2 Layer 2 priority value IEEE 802 1D 2004 3 Layer 3 Diffserv code point DSCP value IETF RFC 2474 This network policy is potentially advertised and associated with multiple sets of application types support
89. connected to the port for instance through a hub to piggy back on the successfully authenticated client and get network access even though they really aren t authenticated To overcome this security breach use the Single 802 1X variant Single 802 1X is really not an IEEE standard but features many of the same characteristics as does port based 802 1X In Single 802 1X at most one supplicant can get authenticated on the port at a time Normal EAPOL frames are used in the communication between the supplicant and the switch If more than one supplicant is connected to a port the one that comes first when the port s link comes up will be the first one considered If that supplicant doesn t provide valid credentials within a certain amount of time another supplicant will get a chance Once a supplicant is successfully authenticated only that supplicant will be allowed access This is the most secure of all the supported modes In this mode the Port Security module is used to secure a supplicant s MAC address once successfully authenticated Multi 802 1X In port based 802 1X authentication once a supplicant is successfully authenticated on a port the whole port is opened for network traffic This allows other clients connected to the port for instance through a hub to piggy back on the successfully authenticated client and get network access even though they really aren t authenticated To overcome this security breach use the Multi 802 1X
90. default Show IP address lt ip_mask gt IP subnet mask a b c d default Show IP mask Example Add SNMPv3 community entry Security Switch SNMP Community Delete Description Delete SNMPv3 community entry Syntax Security Switch SNMP Community Delete lt index gt Parameters lt index gt entry index 1 64 Example Delete SNMPv3 community entry SWITCH gt security switch snmp community delete 3 Security Switch SNMP Community Look up Description Look up SNMPv3 community entry Syntax Security Switch SNMP Community Look up lt index gt 329 Parameters lt index gt entry index 1 64 Example Look up SNMPv3 community entry SWITCH gt security switch snmp community lookup Idx Community Source IP Source Mask 192 168 0 20 255 255 255 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Number of entries 2 Security Switch SNMP User Add Description Add SNMPv3 user entry The entry index key are lt engineid gt and lt user_name gt and it doesn t allow modify Syntax Security Switch SNMP User Add lt engineid gt lt user_name gt MD5 SHA lt auth_password gt DES lt priv_password gt Parameters lt engineid gt Engine ID the format may not be all Zeros or all ff H and is restricted to 5 32 octet string lt user_name gt _ A string identifying the user name that this entry should belong to md5 An optional flag to indicate that this user using MD5 authentication protocol sha An opti
91. eee ree 398 LACR PO 399 BE DP CON ds 399 AN An A 399 ELDP Mode it ea eee eae 400 E cncinareuetacas dat joneeentee al eecie ge Ree tet poaceuaten aneantnc ad tateeannnadiie 400 PTE NCSI laa rate ccyese tas eee sestereaense ata gee eareadce se be E O 401 A eet err a ner cen ere ae oer re ore ee Ret een er ee oer ee ee eee eee ener ee eer eee 402 LEDP Delay anesan ct scat ccs Nocti Saeed EEE NTE EEEE NE 402 EEDE RINI ici oia lola laico ico 402 A Sh a teeta E E AA IEEE A ese een actin eee ETE S AS eects E N 403 A A A E tea dct E E EEN 403 ELDPCDP AWA O susi iS Galen es eed ate eee eee 404 LEDPMED CO MN Mad cio 404 CEDEME D COmMNGUN ANON sirenas tilde A epica oe 404 ELDPMED CIC nl ias 405 EL DPMED ECS o a o a a a ete 406 LLDPMED Policy Delete sninn E ee 406 LLDPME D Pole o st e o dol salad e 406 LEDRME D cd oo AA eet rove ee ee a rove ee eee er tno Ome ner ee era 407 LLDPMED F070 0 ake lt Xo ben eae 407 EER ead B 100 9 ae e Dl leo De la DES 408 MH o erro eer een re ee ere ee ener a eee ee te er ater 408 A eee Pe eee me renee ere eee ee nee ee eee re eee eer ee 409 LEDPMED Debige med TEASING V a ks Nk A eNO I oer AR bo eA OS I a aaa 409 Ourality Of Service Command suse ll cae ee ce ee ee ida 410 OOS GC OMA qua ION o Sd ee Maia eee 410 o A T 410 OS DEM ae 411 Esa An O A EA 411 QOS OCE PIM di te ee esc ee eee oii eed es ae 411 goo OCEA a nar sponse bataanedioa a sparen cueeebormactengaaatabesues 412 O09 8G nn eee men 41
92. end user communication appliances supporting IP media Capabilities include all of the capabilities defined for the previous Generic Endpoint Class and Media Endpoint Class II classes and are extended to include aspects related to end user devices Example product categories expected to adhere to this class include but are not limited to end user communication appliances such as IP Phones PC based softphones or other communication appliances that directly support the end user Discovery services defined in this class include provision of location identifier including ECS E911 information embedded L2 switch support inventory management LLDP MED Capabilities describes the neighbor unit s LLDP MED capabilities The possible capabilities are LLDP MED capabilities Network Policy Location Identification Extended Power via MDI PSE Extended Power via MDI PD Inventory Reserved Application Type indicating the primary function of the application s defined for this network policy advertised by an Endpoint or Network Connectivity Device The poosible application types are shown below Voice for use by dedicated IP Telephony handsets and other similar appliances supporting interactive voice services These devices are typically deployed on a separate VLAN for ease of deployment and enhanced security by isolation from data applications Voice Signaling for use in network topologies that require a different pol
93. features For example the IMAP4 protocol leaves your email messages on the server rather than downloading them to your computer If you wish to remove your messages from the server you must use your mail client to generate local folders copy messages to your local hard drive and then delete and expunge the messages from the server IP is an acronym for Internet Protocol It is a protocol used for communicating data across a internet network IP is a best effort system which means that no packet of information sent over it is assured to reach its destination in the same condition it was sent Each device connected to a Local Area Network LAN or Wide Area Network WAN is given an Internet Protocol address and this IP address is used to identify the device uniquely among all other devices connected to the extended network The current version of the Internet protocol is IPv4 which has 32 bits Internet Protocol addresses allowing for in excess of four billion unique addresses This number is reduced drastically by the practice of webmasters taking addresses in large blocks the bulk of which remain unused There is a rather substantial movement to adopt a new version of the Internet Protocol IPv6 which would have 128 bits Internet Protocol addresses This number can be represented roughly by a three with thirty nine zeroes after it However IPv4 is still the protocol of choice for most of the Internet 457 IPMC is an acronym for IP M
94. first 1 enable Didital input1 action NS3550 24T 4S User Manual Di_desc Description Set or show the system digital input1 2 description 437 Syntax Di_ desc first second lt description gt Parameters lt first gt Digital input output 1 lt second gt Digital input output 2 default Set or show digital input output first 1 second 2 select lt description gt Digital input1 2 described string Use clear or to clear the string In CLI no blank or space characters are permitted as part of a contact Example Set digital input alarm message SWITCH gt dido di_desc first window was opened Di_en Description Set or show the system digital input1 2 Syntax di_desc firstisecond lt description gt Parameters lt first gt Digital input output 1 lt second gt Digital input output 2 default Set or show digital input output first 1 second 2 select lt enable gt Enable digital input1 2 function lt disable gt Disable digital input1 2 function default Set or show digital input output fault alarm 1 2 status lt hightolow gt Trigger gt high to low lt lowtohigh gt Trigger gt low to high default Set or show digital input output 1 2 trigger Example Enable digital input function and set trigger condition SWITCH gt dido di_en first enable hightolow 438 NS3550 24T 4S User Manual Do _ act Description Set or show the system digital output1 2 actio
95. forwarding on the Voice VLAN then the switch can classifying and scheduling to network traffic It is recommands there are two VLANs on a port one for voice one for data Before connect the IP device to the switch The IP phone should configure the voice VLAN ID correctly It should be configure through its own GUI The Voice VLAN Configuration screen is shown in Figure 4 9 14 181 Voice VLAN Configuration Mode VLAN ID Traffic Class Port Configuration Port Mode Security i i 7 10 1 1 1 i 1 1 17 1 ja x 2 22 23 2 Figure 4 9 14 Voice VLAN Configuration Page Screenshot 182 The page includes the following fields Object e Mode e VLAN ID e Age Time e Traffic Class e Port Mode e Port Security Buttons Save Click to save changes NS3550 24T 4S User Manual Description Indicates the Voice VLAN mode operation We must disable MSTP feature before we enable Voice VLAN It can avoid the conflict of ingress filter Possible modes are Enabled Enable Voice VLAN mode operation Disabled Disable Voice VLAN mode operation Indicates the Voice VLAN ID It should be a unique VLAN ID in the system and cannot equal each port PVID It is conflict configuration if the value equal management VID MVR VID PVID etc The allowed range is 1 to 4095 Indicates the Voice VLAN secure learning age time The allowed range is 10 to 10000000 seconds It used when security mode
96. gt tcp lt sip gt lt dip gt lt sport gt lt dport gt lt ip_flags gt lt tcp_flags gt permit deny lt rate_limiter gt lt port_copy gt lt logging gt lt shutdown gt Parameters lt ace_id gt ACE ID 1 128 default Next available ID lt ace_id_next gt Next ACE ID 1 128 default Add ACE last switch Switch ACE keyword port Port ACE keyword lt port gt Port number policy Policy ACE keyword lt policy gt Policy number 1 8 lt vid gt VLAN ID 1 4095 or any lt tag_prio gt VLAN tag priority 0 7 or any lt dmac_type gt DMAC type any unicast multicast broadcast etype Ethernet Type keyword lt etype gt Ethernet Type or any lt smac gt Source MAC address xx xx XX XX XX XX or any 393 lt dmac gt Destination MAC address xx xx xx Xxx Xx Xx or any arp ARP keyword lt sip gt Source IP address a b c d n or any lt dip gt Destination IP address a b c d n or any lt arp_opcode gt ARP operation code anylarp rarpjother lt arp_flags gt ARP flags request smac tmac llen ipjether 0 1 any Ip IP keyword lt protocol gt IP protocol number 0 255 or any lt ip_flags gt IP flags ttlloptions fragment 0 1 any icmp ICMP keyword lt icmp_type gt ICMP type number 0 255 or any lt icmp_code gt ICMP code number 0 255 or any udp UDP keyword lt sport gt Source UDP TCP port range 0 65535 or
97. gt QCL ID lt qce_id gt QCE ID 1 24 QoS QCL Look up Description Look up QCE Syntax QoS QCL Look up lt qcl_id gt lt qce_id gt Parameters lt qcl_id gt QCL ID lt qce_id gt QCE ID 1 24 QoS Mode Description Set or show the port egress scheduler mode Syntax QoS Mode lt port_list gt strict weighted Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports strict Strict mode weighted Weighted mode default Show QoS mode Default Setting Strict Example Set weighted mode for port15 NS3550 24T 4S User Manual SWITCH gt qos mode 15 weighted 413 QoS Weight Description Set or show the port egress scheduler weight Syntax QoS Weight lt port_list gt lt class gt lt weight gt Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports lt class gt Traffic class low normal medium high or 1 2 3 4 lt weight gt Traffic class weight 1 2 4 8 QoS Rate Limiter Description Set or show the port rate limiter Syntax QoS Rate Limiter lt port_list gt enable disable lt bit_rate gt Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports enable Enable rate limiter disable Disable rate limiter default Show rate limiter mode lt bit_rate gt Rate in 1000 bits per second 500 1000000 kbps Default Setting Disabled 500kbps Example Set 1000kbps rate limiter for port1 7 24 SWITCH gt qos ra
98. have active members The information received from IGMP is then used to determine if multicast packets should be forwarded to a given sub network or not The router can check using IGMP to see if there is at least one member of a multicast group on a given subnet work If there are no members on a sub network packets will not be forwarded to that sub network 148 NS3550 24T 4S User Manual Multicast Receiver yr i Multicast Switch Transmitter A IPTV Server Router CG e Switch Multicast bibs Receiver Multicast Receiver D Figure 4 8 1 Multicast Service B UN Multicast Receiver Transmitter IPTV Server Router Switch C Multicast Switch Receiver Multicast Receiver p D Figure 4 8 2 Multicast Flooding 149 Multicast Receiver IGMP Snooping A Switch Multicast Transmitter IPTV Server IGMP Snooping IGMP Snooping Switch Switch C IGMP Snooping Multicast Switch Receiver Multicast Receiver LL D Figure 4 8 3 IGMP Snooping Multicast Stream Control IGMP Versions 1 and 2 Multicast groups allow members to join or leave at any time IGMP provides the method for members and multicast routers to communicate when joining or leaving a multicast group IGMP version 1 is defined in RFC 1112 It has a fixed packet size and no optional data The format of an IGMP packet is shown below IGMP Message Format Octets 0 8 16 3
99. in dotted decimal notation Specify the target IP filter for this specific ACE Any No target IP filter is specified Target IP filter is don t care Host Target IP filter is set to Host Specify the target IP address in the Target IP Address field that 189 e Target IP Address e Target IP Mask e ARP SMAC Match e RARP SMAC Match e IP Ethernet Length e Ethernet a IP Parameters Network Target IP filter is set to Network Specify the target IP address and target IP mask in the Target IP Address and Target IP Mask fields that appear When Host or Network is selected for the target IP filter you can enter a specific target IP address in dotted decimal notation When Network is selected for the target IP filter you can enter a specific target IP mask in dotted decimal notation Specify whether frames can hit the action according to their sender hardware address field SHA settings 0 ARP frames where SHA is not equal to the SMAC address 1 ARP frames where SHA is equal to the SMAC address Any Any value is allowed don t care Specify whether frames can hit the action according to their target hardware address field THA settings 0 RARP frames where THA is not equal to the SMAC address 1 RARP frames where THA is equal to the SMAC address Any Any value is allowed don t care Specify whether frames can hit the action according to their ARP RARP hardware address length HLN and protocol
100. in the order being presented To install your Managed Switch on a desktop or shelf simply complete the following steps Desktop Installation To install the Managed Switch on desktop or shelf please follows these steps As desktop and rackmount installation demonstration as following is an example for a GE DSSG 244 POE however the installation procedure of NS3550 24T 4S is the same with a GE DSSG 244 POE Step1 Attach the rubber feet to the recessed areas on the bottom of the Managed Switch Step2 Place the Managed Switch on the desktop or the shelf near an AC power source as shown in Figure 2 4 Figure 2 4 Place the Managed Switch on the Desktop Step3 Keep enough ventilation space between the Managed Switch and the surrounding objects When choosing a location please keep in mind the environmental restrictions discussed in Chapter 1 Section 4 Product Specification Step4 Connect the Managed Switch to network devices Connect one end of a standard network cable to the 10 100 1000 RJ 45 ports on the front of the Managed Switch Connect the other end of the cable to the network devices such as printer servers workstations or routers etc 29 Connection to the Managed Switch requires UTP Category 5 network cabling with RJ 45 tips For more information please see the Cabling Specification in Appendix A Step5 Supply power to the Managed Switch Connect one end of the power cable to the Managed Switch Conne
101. includes the following fields Object Description e Enable Checks the Enable checkbox will enable Digital Input output function Unchecks the Enable checkbox will disable Digital input output function e Trigger As Digital Input Allows user selecting to High to Low or Low to High This is means a signal received by system is from High to Low or From Low to High it will trigger an action that logs a customize message or issue the message from the switch As Digital Output Allows user selecting to High to Low or Low to High This is means that when the switch has power failed or port failed then system will issue a High 74 NS3550 24T 4S User Manual or Low signal to an external device such as an alarm e Event Description Allows user setting a customize message for Digital Input function alarming e Action As Digital Input Allows user to record alarm message to System log syslog or issues out via SNMP Trap or SMTP As default SNMP Trap and SMTP are disabled please enable them first if you want to issue alarm message via them As Digital Output Allows user to monitor and alarm from port fail or power fail e Power Alarm Allows user to choose which power module want to be monitored e Port Alarm Allows user to choose which port want to be monitored Buttons save Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values Fault Alarm The Fault Relay Alarm
102. it means the port number The Remote ID is 6 bytes in length and the value is equal the DHCP relay agent s MAC address The DHCP Relay Configuration screen is shown in Figure 4 2 11 DHCP Relay Configuration Relay Modo Relay Server 0 0 0 0 Relay Information Mode Relay Information Policy Figure 4 2 11 DHCP Relay Configuration Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Relay Mode Indicates the DHCP relay mode operation Possible modes are Enabled Enable DHCP relay mode operation When enable DHCP relay mode operation the agent forward and to transfer DHCP messages between the clients and the server when they are not on the same subnet domain And the DHCP broadcast message won t flood for security considered Disabled Disable DHCP relay mode operation e Relay Server Indicates the DHCP relay server IP address A DHCP relay agent is used to forward and to transfer DHCP messages between the clients and the server when they are not on the same subnet domain e Relay Information Indicates the DHCP relay information mode option operation Possible modes Mode are Enabled Enable DHCP relay information mode operation When enable DHCP relay information mode operation the agent insert specific information option 82 into a DHCP message when forwarding to DHCP server and remove it from a DHCP message when transferring to DHCP client It only works under DHCP relay operation mode enabled Disa
103. lt ttl gt ttl range 1 255 default Show UPnP TTL Default Setting 4 Example Set the value 10 for TTL value of the IP header in SSDP messages SWITCH gt upnp ttl 10 UPnP Advertising Duration Description Set or show UPnP Advertising Duration Syntax UPnP Advertising Duration lt duration gt Parameters lt duration gt duration range 100 86400 default Show UPnP duration range Default Setting 100 Example Set value 1000 for UPnP Advertising Duration SWITCH gt upnp advertising duration 1000 MVR Command MVR Configuration Description Show the MVR configuration Syntax 421 MVR Configuration Example Show the MVR configuration SWITCH gt mvr configuration MVR Configuration MVR Mode Disabled Muticast VLAN ID 100 Port Port Mode Port Type Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Receive Receive Receive Receive Receive Receive Receive Receive Receive Receive Receive Receive Receive Receive Receive Receive Receive Receive Receive Receive Receive Receive Receive Receive Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled
104. mode Syntax Level Auth Priv NoAuth NoPriv None None Group Name default_ro_group default_rw_group default_ro_group default_rw_group default_rw_group View Type OID Subtree included 1 Model Level any NoAuth NoPriv any NoAuth NoPriv Security Switch SNMP Mode enable disable Parameters enable Enable SNMP disable Disable SNMP default Show SNMP mode Default Setting enable Example Disable SNMP mode 319 NS3550 24T 4S User Manual SWITCH gt security switch snmp mode disable Security Switch SNMP Version Description Set or show the SNMP protocol version Syntax Security Switch SNMP Version 1 2c 3 Parameters 1 SNMP version 1 2c SNMP version 2c 3 SNMP version 3 default Show SNMP version Default Setting 2c Example Set SNMP in version 3 SWITCH gt security switch snmp version 3 Security Switch SNMP Read Community Description Set or show the community string for SNMP read access Syntax Security Switch SNMP Read Community lt community gt 320 NS3550 24T 4S User Manual Parameters lt community gt Community string Use clear or to clear the string default Show SNMP read community Default Setting public Example Set to SNMP read community private SWITCH gt security switch snmp read community private Security Switch SNMP Write Community Description Set or show the community string for SNMP write acc
105. none Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports lt vid gt none Port VLAN ID 1 4095 or none default Show port VLAN ID Default Setting 1 Example Set PVID2 for port20 NS3550 24T 4S User Manual SWITCH gt vlan pvid 20 2 VLAN Frame Type Description Set or show the port VLAN frame type Syntax VLAN FrameType lt port_list gt all tagged Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports all Allow tagged and untagged frames tagged Allow tagged frames only default Show accepted frame types Default Setting All Example Set port20 to allow tagged frames only SWITCH gt vlan frametype 20 tagged 301 VLAN Ingress Filter Description Set or show the port VLAN ingress filter Syntax VLAN IngressFilter lt port_list gt enable disable Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports enable Enable VLAN ingress filtering disable Disable VLAN ingress filtering default Show VLAN ingress filtering Default Setting Disable Example Enable VLAN ingress filtering for port20 SWITCH gt vlan ingressfilter 20 enable VLAN Mode Description Set or show the VLAN Mode Syntax VLAN Mode portbased dot1 q Parameters portbased Port Based VLAN Mode dotiq 802 1Q VLAN Mode default Show VLAN Mode Default Setting IEEE 802 1Q Example Set VLAN mode in port base SWITCH gt vlan mode portbased VLAN Link Type
106. of 0 represents use of the default priority as defined in IEEE 802 1D 2004 DSCP value to be used to provide Diffserv node behavior for the specified application type as defined in IETF RFC 2474 DSCP may contain one of 64 code point values 0 through 63 A value of O represents use of the default DSCP value as defined in RFC 2475 Every port may advertise a unique set of network policies or different attributes for the same network policies based on the authenticated user identity or port configuration Object e Port e Policy ID Description The port number for which the configuration applies The set of policies that shall apply for a given port The set of policies is selected by checkmarking the checkboxes that corresponds to the policies 262 NS3550 24T 4S User Manual Buttons _ Add new policy click to add new policy Save Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values LLDP MED Neighbor This page provides a status overview for all LLDP MED neighbors The displayed table contains a row for each port on which an LLDP neighbor is detected The LLDP MED Neighbor Information screen is shown in Figure 4 14 3 The columns hold the following information LLDP MED Neighbor Information Auto Refresh C Refresh Figure 4 14 3 LLDP MED Neighbor Information Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Fast start repeat count Obje
107. of multiple user name password pairs with associated privilege levels for each user that requires management access to the Managed Switch Understanding IEEE 802 1X Port Based Authentication The IEEE 802 1X standard defines a client server based access control and authentication protocol that restricts unauthorized clients from connecting to a LAN through publicly accessible ports The authentication server authenticates each client connected to a switch port before making available any services offered by the switch or the LAN Until the client is authenticated 802 1X access control allows only Extensible Authentication Protocol over LAN EAPOL traffic through the port to which the client is connected After authentication is successful normal traffic can pass through the port This section includes this conceptual information e Device Roles e Authentication Initiation and Message Exchange e Ports in Authorized and Unauthorized States a Device Roles With 802 1X port based authentication the devices in the network have specific roles as shown below 197 Authentication Server RADIUS Sarver Authentication Server TACACS Server Suthenticator 7 eo oe gt a Supplicant Client with 802 1 Authentication Intranet Figure 4 11 1 Client the device workstation that requests access to the LAN and switch services and responds to requests from the switch The workstation must be running 802 1X compl
108. or auto detect mode is enabled In other cases it will be based hardware age time The actual age time will be situated in the age_time 2 age_time interval Indicates the Voice VLAN traffic class All traffic on Voice VLAN will apply this class Indicates the Voice VLAN port mode When the port mode isn t disabled we must disable MSTP feature before we enable Voice VLAN It can avoid the conflict of ingress filter Possible port modes are Disabled Disjoin from Voice VLAN Auto Enable auto detect mode It detects whether there is VolP phone attached on the specific port and configure the Voice VLAN members automatically Forced Forced join to Voice VLAN Indicates the Voice VLAN port security mode When the function is enabled all non telephone MAC address in Voice VLAN will be blocked 10 seconds Possible port modes are Enabled Enable Voice VLAN security mode operation Disabled Disable Voice VLAN security mode operation Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values Voice VLAN OUI Table Configure VOICE VLAN OUI table on this page The maximum entry number is 16 Modify OUI table will restart auto detect OUI process The Voice VLAN OUI Table screen is shown in Figure 4 9 15 183 Voice VLAN OUI Table 00 30 4f PLANET phones 00 03 6b Cisco phones 00 0f e2 HaC phones 00 60 15 Philips and NEC AG phones 00 d0 1e Pingtel phones 00 e0 5 Polycom phones 00 e0 Eb JCom phon
109. page provides MVR status The MVR Status screen is shown in Figure 4 8 11 MYR Status Auto Refresh LJ Statistics LAN 1 Reports 2 Reports Y3 Reports Y2 Leave ID Receive Receive Receive Receive Multicast Groups Port Members a tao erouns aeee eRss No muticast groups O O Mo rmubhcast grouns Figure 4 8 11 MVR Status Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Group The present multicast groups Maximum are 128 groups in the multicast VLAN e Port Members The ports that are members of the entry e V1 Reports Receive The number of Received V1 Reports e V2 Reports Receive The number of Received V2 Reports e V3 Reports Receive The number of Received V3 Reports e V2 Leave Receive The number of Received V2 Leave 161 Buttons Save Click to refresh the page immediately Reset Clears all Statistics counters Auto refresh Check this box to enable an automatic refresh of the page at regular intervals 162 NS3550 24T 4S User Manual Quality of Service Understand QOS Quality of Service QoS is an advanced traffic prioritization feature that allows you to establish control over network traffic QoS enables you to assign various grades of network service to different types of traffic such as multi media video protocol specific time critical and file backup traffic QoS reduces bandwidth limitations delay loss and jitter It also provides in
110. part of a VLAN The port default VLAN ID PVID is configured on the VLAN Port Configuration page All untagged packets arriving to the device are tagged by the ports PVID Understand nomenclature of the Switch MM IEEE 802 1Q Tagged and Untagged Every port on an 802 1Q compliant switch can be configured as tagged or untagged e Tagged Ports with tagging enabled will put the VID number priority and other VLAN information into the header of all packets that flow into those ports If a packet has previously been tagged the port will not alter the packet thus keeping the VLAN information intact Other 802 1Q compliant devices on the network to make packet forwarding decisions can use the VLAN information in the tag e Untagged Ports with untagging enabled will strip the 802 1Q tag from all packets that flow into those ports If the packet doesn t have an 802 1Q VLAN tag the port will not alter the packet Thus all packets received by and forwarded by an untagging port will have no 802 1Q VLAN information Remember that the PVID is only used internally within the Switch Untagging is used to send packets from an 802 1Q compliant network device to a non compliant network device Frame Income l Income Frame is tagged Income Frame is untagged Leave port is tagged Frame remains tagged Tag is inserted Leave port is untagged Frame remain untagged Table 4 6 1 Ingress Egress port with VLAN VID Tag Untag table M IEEE 802 1Q Tunneling Q in
111. port_copy gt lt logging gt lt shutdown gt Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports permit deny Deny forwarding Permit forwarding default lt rate_limiter gt Rate limiter number 1 15 or disable lt port_copy gt Port number for copy of frames or disable lt logging gt lt shutdown gt Default Setting 300 Example Show ACL action in p ort 1 System logging of frames log log_disable Shut down ingress port shut shut_disable 351 SWITCH gt security network acl action 1 Port Action Rate Limiter Port Copy Logging Shutdown Counter 1 Permit Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled 0 Security Network ACL Policy Description Set or show the ACL port policy Syntax Security Network ACL Policy lt port_list gt lt policy gt Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports lt policy gt Policy number 1 8 Default Setting 1 Example Set ACL policy 2 for port 1 SWITCH gt security network acl policy 1 2 Security Network ACL Rate Description Set or show the ACL rate limiter Syntax Security Network ACL Rate lt rate_limiter_list gt lt packet_rate gt Parameters lt rate_limiter_list gt Rate limiter list 1 15 default All rate limiters lt packet_rate gt Rate in pps 1 2 4 512 1k 2k 4k 1024k Default Setting 1 Example 352 NS3550 24T 4S User M
112. reached the switch can take one of the following actions None Do not allow more than Limit MAC addresses on the port but take no further action Trap If Limit 1 MAC an address is seen on the port send an SNMP trap If Aging is disabled only one SNMP trap will be sent but with Aging enabled new SNMP traps will be sent everytime the limit gets exceeded Shutdown If Limit 1 MAC addresses is seen on the port shut down the port This implies that all secured MAC addresses will be removed from the port and no new will be learned Even if the link is physically disconnected and reconnected on the port by disconnecting the cable the port will remain shut down There are three ways to re open the port 233 1 Boot from a new masterthe switch 2 Disable and re enable Limit Control on the port or the switch 3 Click the Reopen button Trap amp Shutdown If Limit 1 MAC addresses is seen on the port both the Trap and the Shutdown actions described above will be taken e State This column shows the current state of the port as seen from the Limit Control s point of view The state takes one of four values Disabled Limit Control is either globally disabled or disabled on the port Ready The limit is not yet reached This can be shown for all actions Limit Reached Indicates that the limit is reached on this port This state can only be shown if Action is set to None or Trap Shutdown Indicates that the port is shut down
113. referencing locations on water sea ocean IETF Geopriv Civic Address based Location Configuration Information Civic Address LCI Object e Country code e State e County e City e City district e Block Neighborhood e Street e Leading street direction e Trailing street suffix e Street suffix e House no e House no suffix e Landmark e Additional location info e Name e Zip code e Building e Apartment e Floor e Room no e Place type e Postal community name e P O Box e Additional code Description The two letter ISO 3166 country code in capital ASCII letters Example DK DE or US National subdivisions state canton region province prefecture County parish gun Japan district City township shi Japan Example Copenhagen City division borough city district ward chou Japan Neighborhood block Street Example Poppelvej Leading street direction Example N Trailing street suffix Example SW Street suffix Example Ave Platz House number Example 21 House number suffix Example A 1 2 Landmark or vanity address Example Columbia University Additional location info Example South Wing Name residence and office occupant Example Flemming Jahn Postal zip code Example 2791 Building structure Example Low Library Unit Apartment suite Example Apt 42 Floor Example 4 Room number Example 450F Place type Example Office Postal
114. spends in the listening state while moving from the blocking state to the forwarding state Observe the following formulas when setting the above parameters Max Age _ 2 x Forward Delay 1 second Max Age _ 2 x Hello Time 1 second Port Priority A Port Priority can be from 0 to 240 The lower the number the greater the probability the port will be chosen as the Root Port Port Cost A Port Cost can be set from 0 to 200000000 The lower the number the greater the probability the port will be chosen to forward packets 3 Illustration of STP A simple illustration of three switches connected in a loop is depicted in the below diagram In this example you can anticipate some major network problems if the STP assistance is not applied If switch A broadcasts a packet to switch B switch B will broadcast it to switch C and switch C will broadcast it to back to switch Aand so on The broadcast packet will be passed indefinitely in a loop potentially causing a network failure In this example STP breaks the loop by blocking the connection between switch B and C The decision to block a particular connection is based on the STP calculation of the most current Bridge and Port settings Now if switch A broadcasts a packet to switch C then switch C will drop the packet at port 2 and the broadcast will end there Setting up STP using values other than the defaults can be complex Therefore you are advised to keep the default facto
115. the medium priority queue of the 4 QoS queues It has higher priority than the Normal Queue 178 NS3550 24T 4S User Manual e High Queue This is the highest priority queue of the 4 QoS queues e Receive Transmit The number of received and transmitted packets per port Buttons Refresh Click to refresh the page immediately Clear Clears the counters for all ports Auto refresh i Check this box to enable an automatic refresh of the page at regular intervals DSCP Remarking This page allows you to configure DSCP remarking related settings for each port Frames can be classified by 4 different QoS classes Low Normal Medium and High The classification can be controlled by Port QoS configuration page And this page is used to configure DSCP remarking The DSCP value of incoming frames will be changed according to its mapping queue once the packet is transmitted by the egress port The DSCP Remarking Configuration screen is shown in Figure 4 9 13 179 Port DSCP Remarking Mode Disable Disa E SE 4 4 4 a lt lt ololese EEE Br ar Br pak lt 0 co 10 oh Be Ww mh y I 4 B T 4 a lt a a a a a cl a a a aaa a e a E Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable E lt E T E T lt lt DSCP Remarking Configuration DSCP Queue Mapping Normal
116. this page Frames can be classified by up to 4 different QoS classes are Low Normal Medium and High The classification is controlled by a QCL assigned to each port A QCL consists of an ordered list of up to 12 QCEs Each QCE can be used to classify certain frames to a specific QoS Class This classification can be based on parameters such as VLAN ID UDP TCP port IPv4 IPv6 DSCP or Tag Priority Frames not matching any of the QCEs are classified to the default QoS Class for the port The QCE Configuration screen is shown in Figure 4 9 8 QCE Configuration OCE Type Ethernet Type Value Ethernet Type VLAN ID Traffic Class TOPUDP Port DSCP Figure 4 9 8 QCE Configuration Page Screenshot 172 The page includes the following fields Object e QCE Type e Type Value e Traffic Class Buttons Save Click to save changes NS3550 24T 4S User Manual Description Select the available type for the specific QCE Ethernet Type Matches the received frame s EtherType against the QCE Key VLAN ID Matches the frame s VID against the QCE Key TCP UDP Port Matches the destination port and the source port against the QCE Key DSCP Matches the received IPv4 IPv6 DSCP value 6 bits against the two DSCP values in the QCE Key ToS Uses the precedence part of the IPv4 IPv6 ToS 3 bits as an index to the eight QoS Class values in the QCE Key Tag Priority Uses the User Priority value 3 bits a
117. this page The Dynamic ARP Inspection Table contains up to 1024 entries and is sorted first by port then by VLAN ID then by MAC address and then by IP address The Dynamic ARP Inspection Table screen is shown in Figure 4 13 5 252 NS3550 24T 4S User Manual Dynamic ARP Inspection Table Start from _ VLAN MAC Address 00 00 00 00 00 00 and IP Address 0 0 0 0 with entries per page Auto Refresh C Figure 4 13 5 Dynamic ARP Inspection Table Page Screenshot Navigating the ARP Inspection Table Each page shows up to 999 entries from the Dynamic ARP Inspection table default being 20 selected through the entries per page input field When first visited the web page will show the first 20 entries from the beginning of the Dynamic ARP Inspection Table The Start from port address VLAN MAC address and IP address input fields allow the user to select the starting point in the Dynamic ARP Inspection Table Clicking the Refresh button will update the displayed table starting from that or the closest next Dynamic ARP Inspection Table match In addition the two input fields will upon a Refresh button click assume the value of the first displayed entry allowing for continuous refresh with the same start address The gt gt will use the last entry of the currently displayed as a basis for the next lookup When the end is reached the text No more entries is shown in the displayed table Use the lt lt
118. this tag priority The allowed number range is 0 to 7 The value Any means that no tag priority is specified tag priority is don t care The ARP parameters can be configured when Frame Type ARP is selected Object e ARP RARP e Request Reply e Sender IP Filter e Sender IP Address e Sender IP Mask e Target IP Filter Description Specify the available ARP RARP opcode OP flag for this ACE Any No ARP RARP OP flag is specified OP is don t care ARP Frame must have ARP RARP opcode set to ARP RARP Frame must have ARP RARP opcode set to RARP Other Frame has unknown ARP RARP Opcode flag Specify the available ARP RARP opcode OP flag for this ACE Any No ARP RARP OP flag is specified OP is don t care Request Frame must have ARP Request or RARP Request OP flag set Reply Frame must have ARP Reply or RARP Reply OP flag Specify the sender IP filter for this ACE Any No sender IP filter is specified Sender IP filter is don t care Host Sender IP filter is set to Host Specify the sender IP address in the SIP Address field that Network Sender IP filter is set to Network Specify the sender IP address and sender IP mask in the SIP Address and SIP Mask fields that appear When Host or Network is selected for the sender IP filter you can enter a specific sender IP address in dotted decimal notation When Network is selected for the sender IP filter you can enter a specific sender IP mask
119. variant Multi 802 1X is really not an IEEE standard but features many of the same characteristics as does port based 802 1X Multi 802 1X is like Single 802 1X not an IEEE standard but a variant that features many of the same characteristics In Multi 802 1X one or more supplicants can get authenticated on the same port at the same time Each supplicant is authenticated individually and secured in the MAC table using the Port Security module 205 e RADIUS Assigned QoS Enabled e RADIUS Assigned VLAN Enabled In Multi 802 1X it is not possible to use the multicast BPDU MAC address as destination MAC address for EAPOL frames sent from the switch towards the supplicant since that would cause all supplicants attached to the port to reply to requests sent from the switch Instead the switch uses the supplicant s MAC address which is obtained from the first EAPOL Start or EAPOL Response Identity frame sent by the supplicant An exception to this is when no supplicants are attached In this case the switch sends EAPOL Request Identity frames using the BPDU multicast MAC address as destination to wake up any supplicants that might be on the port The maximum number of supplicants that can be attached to a port can be limited using the Port Security Limit Control functionality MAC based Auth Unlike port based 802 1X MAC based authentication is not a standard but merely a best practices method adopted by the industry In MAC based
120. with this aggregation instance For LLAG the id is shown as isid aggr id and for GLAGs as aggr id e Partner System ID The system ID MAC address of the aggregation partner e Partner Key The Key that the partner has assigned to this aggregation ID e Last changed The time since this aggregation changed e Local Ports Shows which ports are a part of this aggregation for this switch Buttons Retresh Click to refresh the page immediately 103 LACP Port Status This page provides a status overview for LACP status for all ports The LACP Port Status screen is shown in Figure 4 5 6 LACP Status LACP Key Agar ID Partner System ID Partner Port No Auto Refresh Ll Figure 4 5 6 LACP Port Status Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Port The switch port number e LACP Yes means that LACP is enabled and the port link is up No means that LACP is not enabled or that the port link is down Backup means that the port could not join the aggregation group but will join if other port leaves Meanwhile it s LACP status is disabled e Key The key assigned to this port Only ports with the same key can aggregate together e Aggr ID The Aggregation ID assigned to this aggregation group IDs 1 and 2 are GLAGs while IDs 3 14 are LLAGs e Partner System ID The partner System ID MAC address e Partner Port The partner port number connected to this port 104 NS3550 24T 4S User Manu
121. 0 SWITCH gt security switch users add test test 10 Security Switch User Delete Description Delete users entry Syntax Security Switch Users Delete lt user_name gt Parameters lt user_names gt A string identifying the user name that this entry should belong to Example Delete test account SWITCH gt security switch users delete user Security Switch Privilege Level Configuration Description Show privilege configuration Syntax Security Switch Privilege Level Configuration Example Show privilege level SWITCH gt security switch privilege level configuration Privilege Level Configuration Privilege Current Level 15 Group Name Privilege Level 309 CRO CRW SRO SRW 5 10 5 10 15 15 15 15 Diagnostics 5 10 5 10 IGMP_Snooping 5 10 5 10 Maintenance Mirroring Port_Security Ports Private VLANs Security Switch Privilege Level Group Description Configure a privilege level group Syntax Security Switch Privilege Level Group lt group_ name gt lt cro gt lt crw gt lt sro gt lt srw gt Parameters lt group_name gt Privilege group name default Show all group privilege level lt Cro gt lt Crw gt lt Sfo gt lt Sfw gt Example Configuration read only privilege level 1 15 Configuration Execute read write privilege level 1 15 Status Statistics read only privilege level 1 15 Status Statistics read write privilege level
122. 0000000 90000000000000000000000 9000000000000 OVDOOODODOVO 90000000000000000000000 20000000000000000000000 90000000000000000000000 2 2 0000000000000000000000 z Sjo0000000000000000000000 5 3j90000000000000000000000 3 P0000000000000000000000 00000000000000000000000 990000000000000000000000 900000000000000000000000 90000000000000000000000 r 900000000000000000000000 990000000000000000000000 900000000000000000000000 s 0000000000000000000000O 90000000000000000000000 CH 07 p LO co re Oo 0 Figure 4 9 2 Set up Policy Rules Page Screenshot zard W Cancel The page includes the following fields Description Object Frames that hit this QCE are set to match this specific QCL e QCL ID A row of radio buttons for each port is displayed for each QCL ID To include a port in a QCL member click the radio button e Port Members Buttons 165 Cancel Wizard Click to start the wizard again Back Click to get more information Next Click to continue the wizard Once the QCL configuration wizard is finished the below screen Finished The QCL configuration wizard is finished and the new configuration is ready for use Click Finish to get more information Click Wizard Again to start the wizard again Wizard Again Finish Buttons Wizard Again Click to start the wizard again Finish Click to get more information Set up Typical
123. 10 401 SWITCH gt Ildp interval 10 LLDP Hold Description Set or show LLDP Tx hold value Syntax LLDP Hold lt hold gt Parameters lt hold gt LLDP hold value 2 10 Default Setting 3 Example Set LLDP hold value in 10 SWITCH hold 10 LLDP Delay Description Set or show LLDP Tx delay Syntax LLDP Delay lt delay gt Parameters lt delay gt LLDP transmission delay 1 8192 Default Setting 2 Example Set LLDP delay value in 1 SWITCH gt lldp delay 1 LLDP Reinit Description Set or show LLDP reinit delay Syntax LLDP Reinit lt reinit gt 402 Parameters lt reinit gt LLDP reinit delay 1 10 Default Setting 2 Example Set LLDP reinit delay value in 3 NS3550 24T 4S User Manual SWITCH gt lIdp reinit 3 LLDP Statistics Description Show LLDP Statistics Syntax LLDP Statistics lt port_list gt clear Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports clear Clear LLDP statistics Example Show LLDP Statistics of port 1 SWITCH gt lldp statistics 1 LLDP global counters Neighbor entries was last changed at 323592 sec ago Total Neighbors Entries Added 0 Total Neighbors Entries Deleted 0 Total Neighbors Entries Dropped 0 Total Neighbors Entries Aged Out 0 LLDP local counters Rx Tx Rx Rx Rx TLV Rx TLV Rx TLV Port Frames Frames Errors Discards Errors Unknown Organz Aged LLDP Info Description Show LLDP neighb
124. 1002 1 pps Buttons Save Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 195 Authentication This section is to control the access of the Managed Switch and includes the user access and management control The Authentication section contains links to the following main topics m IEEE 802 1X Port Based Network Access Control E MAC Based Authentication m User Authentication Overview of 802 1X Port Based Authentication In the 802 1X world the user is called the supplicant the switch is the authenticator and the RADIUS server is the authentication server The switch acts as the man in the middle forwarding requests and responses between the supplicant and the authentication server Frames sent between the supplicant and the switch is special 802 1X frames known as EAPOL EAP Over LANs frames EAPOL frames encapsulate EAP PDUs RFC3748 Frames sent between the switch and the RADIUS server is RADIUS packet RADIUS packets also encapsulate EAP PDUs together with other attributes like the switch s IP address name and the supplicant s port number on the switch EAP is very flexible in that it allows for different authentication methods like MD5 Challenge PEAP and TLS The important thing is that the authenticator the switch doesn t need to know which authentication method the supplicant and the authentication server are using or how many information exchange frames
125. 14 5 266 NS3550 24T 4S User Manual Global Counters Neighbor entries were last changed at 16955 sec ago Total Neighbors Entries Added O Total Neighbors Entries Deleted O Total Neighbors Entries Dropped 0 Total Neighbors Entries Aged Out O Auto Refresh LJ LLDP Statistics Local Counters Local Port Tx Frames Rx Frames Rx Errors Frames Discarded TLYs Discarded TLYs Unrecognized Org Discarded Age Outs 1 0 0 O 0 O 0 O O O 0 O D 0 O O DO O O O U 0 O 0 O O m br br O0D00000005005 05500050 50 O 0 O O A ODO O O ODO OOOO OOOO OOOO OOOO OA Gc 0O 0O G GOG 0O O0 OOOO OOOO O O OO OO On a OOOO OOOO OD0000D00500 50005500 50 0 0 O O DOOO OD aaa aaa aaa aca OOOO O KO 0000005000500 50 50 O OA Figure 4 14 5 LLDP Statistics Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Global Counters Object Description e Neighbor entries were Shows the time for when the last entry was last deleted or added It is also shows last changed at the time elapsed since last change was detected e Total Neighbors Shows the number of new entries added since switch reboot Entries Added e Total Neighbors Shows the number of new entries deleted since switch reboot Entries Deleted e Total Neighbors Shows the number of LLDP frames dropped due to that the entry table was full Entries Dropped e Total Neighbors Shows the number of entries deleted due to Time To Live expiring Entries Age
126. 192 168 0 100 or reset the password to default value press the hardware reset button at the front panel about 10 seconds After the device is rebooted you can login the management WEB interface within the same subnet of 192 168 0 xx E NS3550 24T 4S ifs Console t7 t9 E E ACT 10 100 E 4 E a 3 E Reset 447 APPENDEX A Switch s RJ 45 Pin Assignments 1000Mbps 1000Base T 1 BI DA Bl_DB 2 Bl_DA Bl_DB 3 Bl_DB Bl_DA 4 Bl_DC BI DD 5 BI DC BI DD 6 BI DB BI DA 7 BI DD Bl_DC 8 Bl_DD Bl_DC Implicit implementation of the crossover function within a twisted pair cable or at a wiring panel while not expressly forbidden is beyond the scope of this standard 10 100Mbps 10 100Base TX When connecting your 10 100Mbps Ethernet Switch to another switch a bridge or a hub a straight or crossover cable is necessary Each port of the Switch supports auto MDI MDI X detection That means you can directly connect the Switch to any Ethernet devices without making a crossover cable The following table and diagram show the standard RJ 45 receptacle connector and their pin assignments RJ 45 Connector pin assignment Contact MDI MDI X Media Dependant Interface Media Dependant Interface Cross Ti ans transmit Rx receive ae Rx receive Tx transmit Not used a ct a Not used 448 The standard cable RJ 45 pin assignment NS3550 24T 4S User Manual The standard R
127. 2 Port 5 and Port 3 VLAN 2 Port 3 Port 6 The screen is shown in Figure 4 6 16 Port Members O i MMM mjm A A A m e r dd 4d dd r r Er r dod OO d d Figure 4 6 16 Private VLAN Port Setting 130 NS3550 24T 4S User Manual Spanning Tree Protocol Theory The Spanning Tree protocol can be used to detect and disable network loops and to provide backup links between switches bridges or routers This allows the switch to interact with other bridging devices in your network to ensure that only one route exists between any two stations on the network and provide backup links which automatically take over when a primary link goes down The spanning tree algorithms supported by this switch include these versions a STP Spanning Tree Protocol IEEE 802 1D E RSTP Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol IEEE 802 1w 5 MSTP Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol IEEE 802 1s The IEEE 802 1D Spanning Tree Protocol and IEEE 802 1W Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol allow for the blocking of links between switches that form loops within the network When multiple links between switches are detected a primary link is established Duplicated links are blocked from use and become standby links The protocol allows for the duplicate links to be used in the event of a failure of the primary link Once the Spanning Tree Protocol is configured and enabled primary links are established and duplicated links are blocked automatically The reactivation of the blo
128. 24 1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 17 19 21 23 ifs NS3550 24T 4S 21 23 SNMP Link Aggregation VLAN o Welcome to IFS Transmission Multicast NS3550 24T 4S QoS Access Control List 24 Port Gigabit Ethernet Industrial Managed Switch Authentication Security 4 shared SFP 40 75 Degree C MAC Address Table Interlogix A UTC Fire amp Security Company All rights reserved HELI Figure 3 4 Web Main Screen of Managed Switch 41 SNMP Based Network Management You can use an external SNMP based application to configure and manage the Managed Switch such as SNMPc Network Manager HP Openview Network Node Management NNM or What s Up Gold This management method requires the SNMP agent on the switch and the SNMP Network Management Station to use the same community string This management method in fact uses two community strings the get community string and the set community string If the SNMP Net work management Station only knows the set community string it can read and write to the MIBs However if it only knows the get community string it can only read MIBs The default gets and sets community strings for the Managed Switch are public Managed Switch ee SNMP Agent Status Enabled __ A o E eiin la a inh PC Workstation A A with gt ad o a internets 4 intranet 192 168 0 100 IP Address 192 168 0 x Figure 3 5 SNMP Management Diagram 42
129. 3 DOS OC OOK GD surest cerry as sence adan 413 QOS ModE A A eee 413 A A a 414 SA ag cc tne eee enc toca E ae avec tau eacctensnt E E Stee ee EET 414 DOS ona ia nas 414 COS SO Mm UNCAS is A AA A A A A 415 COS a oOmiMultIcast ct o diri iio ito 415 js A ee 416 COS DSC Remains ii ab dacek A ose cece a lab dacg ed edanset wyatedete a a eas epetee nad ate 416 QoS DSCP Queue Madrid A AAA 417 Mirr r A A da lo o 417 MITO EAU IN dd e des eno ad 417 lago ql do A e A o o e a e aes 417 A IE as ie eae hac tooo a Oa dom acne fiat ate tata hea eat pose vaca a aee eastern act aaet 418 Nya ofl Cele romeceeetecnee emer prope i rots ad ter ee e e nd 418 CONTIGUA ION COMINAING d tena ciavioiueeaiee 419 CONMGUIPATOR SAVE A a 419 COMNGUANON MOA tdi 419 Firmware Command aal aeaa esa aeaiia 419 FMM WAR SAO lo AA E E o yg r ee 419 NS3550 24T 4S User Manual UMW ARC PYG LOA A A ica 420 PAP COMMAN dl ns 420 UIPMPCOnnOUraulOn sit dl das e di 420 DAA ed e 420 A A a S 421 fil PROV ENISING DUO A A atea 421 MVR COMMaNd citadino 421 MYR GOMMQUPATION asi A A AS EE 421 SAYA Sk A a A to 422 MVR oa ns rra 422 MVR MOUE rara E AAA 423 MYR POR MOG sasana a E E E 423 MYR Muus eY EAN e a a 423 MVR POTY DE cuai A a a cee eee eee 424 MVR Immediate Leave is a E E T 424 VOICE VLAN CONTIN aaa 426 VOICE VLAN CAT IAN a A 426 VOICE VEAN MOE nai is 427 VIC MELANIE an too ss 427 NOICSMEAINVAG SU Merritt el sii 427 VOICE VLAN Trae las e e e do o Cal 428 Voice LAN O
130. 3 group entry Syntax Security Switch SNMP Group Look up lt index gt Parameters lt index gt entry index 1 64 Example Look up SNMPv3 group entry SWITCH gt security switch snmp group lookup Idx Model Security Name Group Name vi private default_rw_group v2c public default_ro_group v2c private default_rw_group usm default_user default_rw_group Number of entries 4 Security Switch SNMP View Add Description Add or modify SNMPv3 view entry The entry index key are lt view_name gt and lt oid_subtree gt Syntax Security Switch SNMP View Add lt view_name gt included excluded lt oid_subtree gt Parameters lt view_name gt Astring identifying the view name that this entry should belong to included An optional flag to indicate that this view subtree should included excluded An optional flag to indicate that this view subtree should excluded lt oid_subtree gt The OID defining the root of the subtree to add to the named view 333 Example Add SNMPv3 view entry SWITCH gt security switch snmp view add snmpv3_ view include 1 Security Switch SNMP View Delete Description Delete SNMPv3 view entry Syntax Security Switch SNMP View Delete lt index gt Parameters lt index gt entry index 1 64 Example Delete SNMPv3 view entry SWITCH gt security switch snmp view delete 3 Security Switch SNMP View Look up Description Look up SNMPv3 view entry Syntax
131. 50 24T 4S User Manual Syntax STP Port Mode lt port_list gt enable disable Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all Port zero means aggregations Enable Enable MSTP protocol Disable Disable MSTP protocol Default Enable Example Disable STP function on port1 SWITCH gt stp port mode 1 disable STP Port Edge Description Set or show the STP adminEdge port parameter Syntax STP Port Edge lt port_list gt enable disable Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports Enable Configure MSTP adminEdge to Edge Disable Configure MSTP adminEdge to Non edge Default Enable Example Disable STP edge function on port1 SWITCH gt stp port edge 1 disable 381 STP Port AutoEdge Description Set or show the STP autoEdge port parameter Syntax STP Port AutoEdge lt port_list gt enable disable Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports Enable Enable MSTP autoEdge Disable Disable MSTP autoEdge Default enable Example Disable STP edge function on port1 SWITCH gt stp port autoedge 1 disable STP Port P2P Description Set or show the STP point2point port parameter Syntax STP Port P2P lt port_list gt enable disablejauto Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports enable Enable MSTP point2point disable Disable MSTP point2point auto Automatic MSTP point2point dete
132. 5678 Security Switch SNMP User Look up Description Look up SNMP v3 user entry Syntax Security Switch SNMP User Look up lt index gt Parameters lt index gt entry index 1 64 331 Example Look up SNMPv3 user entry SWITCH gt security switch snmp user lookup Idx Engine ID User Name Level Auth Priv 1 Remote admin_snmpv3 Auth Priv MD5 DES Number of entries 1 Security Switch SNMP Group Add Description Add or modify SNMPv3 group entry The entry index key are lt security_model gt and lt security_name gt Syntax Security Switch SNMP Group Add lt security_model gt lt security_name gt lt group_name gt Parameters lt security model gt v1 Reserved for SNMPv1 v2c Reserved for SNMPv2c usm User based Security Model USM lt security _name gt A string identifying the security name that this entry should belong to lt group_name gt A string identifying the group name that this entry should belong to Example Add SNMPv3 group entry SWITCH gt security switch snmp group add usm admin_snmpv3 group_snmpv3 Security Switch SNMP Group Delete Description Delete SNMPv3 group entry Syntax Security Switch SNMP Group Delete lt index gt Parameters lt index gt entry index 1 64 332 Example Delete SNMPv3 group entry NS3550 24T 4S User Manual SWITCH gt security switch snmp group delete 1 Security Switch SNMP Group Look up Description Look up SNMPv
133. 6 Prefix 96 IPv6 Router IPv6 VLAN ID 1 Example 287 Set IPv6 address SWITCH gt ip ipv6 setup 2001 0002 64 2100 0001 1 IPv6 Ping Description Ping IPv6 address ICMPv6 echo Syntax IP IPv6 Ping6 lt ipv6_addr gt lt ping_length gt Parameters lt ipv6_addr gt IPv6 host address IPv6 address is in 128 bit records represented as eight fields of up to four hexadecimal digits with a colon separate each field For example four hexadecimal digits with a colon separate each field For example fe80 215 c5ff fe03 4dc7 The symbol is a special syntax that can be used as a shorthand way of representing multiple 16 bit groups of contiguous zeros but it can only appear once lt also used a following legally IPv4 address For example 192 1 2 34 lt ping_length gt Ping data length 8 1400 excluding MAC IP and ICMP headers Example SWITCH gt ip ipv6 ping 2001 0002 PING6 server 2001 2 68 bytes from 2001 2 icmp_seq 0 time 0ms 68 bytes from 2001 2 icmp_seq 1 time 0ms 68 bytes from 2001 2 icmp_seq 2 time 0ms 68 bytes from 2001 2 icmp_seq 3 time 0ms 68 bytes from 2001 2 icmp_seq 4 time 0ms Sent 5 packets received 5 OK 0 bad IP NTP Configuration Description Show NTP configuration Syntax IP NTP Configuration Default Setting IP NTP Configuration NTP Mode Disabled Idx Server IP host address a b c d or a host name string 1 pool ntp org 2 europe pool ntp o
134. 60 Security Network DHCP Snooping Statistics cocooococccccnonoconnnconononononcnnonononnonanononnnrononnncnnonanannnnonananonnns 361 Security Network IP Source Guard Configuration cccccccccsseeceeeeeeeeeeeeeesaeeeeeseeeeeeseeeeeseeeeeesaaeeesseeeeeeesaaeeeesaess 362 Security Network IP Source Guard MOdGe ccccccccsseeccceececceescecceueeecseueecsauscecseuecesseueeessuscessueeesseaseeeessseessages 363 Security Network IP Source Guard Port M dena a a E EEA E ETTE 363 security Network IP Source Guard LIMIT da alada riada n 364 Security Network IP Source Guard Entry occcccoccccococnnconoconoconcnnoconnnconnnnnnnrnnononnnnnnonnnnnnnrnnornnrnnennrannnnnranannnnos 364 Security Network IP Source Guard StatuS oooccccooncccoconnnnonoccnnonncnnononnnnnnnncnnnnnrnnnnnnrnnnnnnrnnnnnrrnnnnrnnrrrnnnrnnenaninnnnas 365 Security Network ARP Inspection ConfiguratiON oooncccoooncncconcnncnnnnnnnnnnononnncnnononcnnnnnnnnnnnnrnnrnnnrnnnnnnnnrnnnnannnnonas 365 Security Network ARP Inspection Mode c ccccccccsseecceeececceeececceueeecseuceeseuscecseecessegeeesausseesseeesssageeesseeeesaaes 365 Security Network ARP Inspection Port Mode cccccccssscecceseeecceeececseececceescecseuececseueeecsuusesseeeessaueeessseseesseges 366 Security Network ARP Inspection Entry ccccccccceececeececeeeeseeeece cece ceseeeeeeeeeesseeesseceeseeceseeeessusessaeeesseeeseeeesees 367 Securit
135. 8K 256K 512K or 1024K The 1 kpps is actually 1002 1 pps Buttons Save Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 177 QoS Statistics This page provides statistics for the different queues for all switch ports The ports belong to the currently selected unit as reflected by the page header The QoS Statistics screen is shown in Figure 4 9 12 Queuing Counters port _ Low Queue Normal Queue Medium Queue High Queue o 0 0 0 0 LT hI O 1 2 3 4 5 5 is o zl 0 11 12 13 1 15 16 Jue 16 J 10 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 13 20 21 Le 2J SO SOS OS GG ORO RS ORS ORS OS OS CO SS O A O OOOO OOOO 000 OOO OOOO 0 E SO SS OS OS OS Oe G 0 ORS ORS OS OS CO SS oO O Ds a GG G G 0 GOGO 0 G0 OO O AO E D O 0 G A AG G CO G ee OO A CO AA GA a CO d COI ees d d OOOO O O OOO OOO OOOO O O OO O U El MOIOOOMOOM OOM OOM OOOO GOGG GO O O SOS OS OS OS OS Ome ORS OR OS OS COS O eS Auto Refresh C1 Figure 4 9 12 QoS Statistics Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Port The logical port for the settings contained in the same row e Low Queue There are 4 QoS queues per port with strict or weighted queuing scheduling This is the lowest priority queue e Normal Queue This is the normal priority queue of the 4 QoS queues It has higher priority than the Low Queue e Medium Queue This is
136. A o eo 428 VOICE VLAN CU Delelea nana oda 429 VolceVLAN CUE iio iii ialeiwanat edievesencuatunseens 429 VOICE VLAN OU ECU a lA ee 429 VOICES VIEAIN POF MOJO in asia 430 VOICE WAIN SECUN onset seitcenee tage sted iran 430 SIM TP COMMANA sus a Aa iaai Aaaa aaa aaa aaa i aaa aaa 431 SMT CONIgUraUO siani a a i nae Rt ne a e a ee ene 431 SMTP Mode a a a ee a E 431 SMTP SEVO aaae O 431 SN PA a E A A neqnnemuenaaane 432 I MU IUS E esi aE A es E ER 432 SIT AUN PISS ae a A a E A 432 SMTP MIIO Meri A A a E dma dea otevnrntenanee 432 SNE MAUD E PA a 433 TI EO T saime a a E is 433 SMTRMAaito2 rra ii ec 433 15 SNOW Command emer eine nt one Rete a ee 20 ie 2 POC Oe evi eo oo 434 SHOW ACL C OMMOURAUOM currada pi ii a 434 Show Link Aggregation Configuration ccccccccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeesaeeeeeeesaeeeeeeesaeeeeeesaaeeeessaaeeeeeeessaeeeseesaneeeees 434 SHOW IGMP COMIGU ALON ra Cha each Ei nee Seek tah a eects Oe eS cet etna e ch adsl 434 SHOW IPC Ong Ura OR a 434 SHOW LAC COM Gul ION si iii lalola ios dedo 434 SHOW LEDP COR TUTTO Nintento dicas lacio 434 Sy IAC Cin ECU AEN I o ato de ot te NO o DE 435 Show Mirror Contigua OM aaa 435 SHOW POE COMMOUIANOM eses secos 435 SNOW OFF COM OULANON dansa tete ici 435 Show Private VLAN CONNGUFAOM a e o eal adi laa o co ea 435 SHOW OOS EAN dos 436 Snow SAMP CON IqU ION e dl ea dl Lado 436 SHOW SYSte Mi COMMOULA OR airada l 436 SHOW VLAN CONGU atO se a hese ae heeled eB eee
137. Accounting Server Overview Page Screenshot 217 The page includes the following fields RADIUS Authentication Servers Object o e IP Address e State RADIUS Accounting Servers Object o e IP Address e State Buttons Retresh Description The RADIUS server number Click to navigate to detailed statistics for this server The IP address and UDP port number in lt IP Address gt lt UDP Port gt notation of this server The current state of the server This field takes one of the following values Disabled The server is disabled Not Ready The server is enabled but IP communication is not yet up and running Ready The server is enabled IP communication is up and running and the RADIUS module is ready to accept access attempts Dead X seconds left Access attempts were made to this server but it did not reply within the configured timeout The server has temporarily been disabled but will get re enabled when the dead time expires The number of seconds left before this occurs is displayed in parentheses This state is only reachable when more than one server is enabled Description The RADIUS server number Click to navigate to detailed statistics for this server The IP address and UDP port number in lt IP Address gt lt UDP Port gt notation of this server The current state of the server This field takes one of the following values Disabled The server is disabled Not Ready The server
138. Auto Active Disabled Auto Active Disabled Auto Active Disabled Auto Active Disabled Auto Active Disabled Auto Active Disabled Auto Active Disabled Auto Active Disabled Auto Active Disabled Auto Active Disabled Auto Active Disabled Auto Active Disabled Auto Active Disabled Auto Active Disabled Auto Active LACP Mode Description Set or show LACP mode 396 Syntax LACP Mode lt port_list gt enable disable Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports enable Enable LACP protocol disable Disable LACP protocol default Show LACP mode Default Setting disable Example Enable LACP for port1 4 NS3550 24T 4S User Manual SWITCH gt lacp mode 1 4 enable LACP Key Description Set or show the LACP key Syntax LACP Key lt port_list gt lt key gt Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports lt key gt LACP key 1 65535 or auto Default Setting auto Example Set key1 for port1 4 SWITCH gt lacp key 1 4 1 397 LACP Role Description Set or show the LACP role Syntax LACP Role lt port_list gt active passive Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports active Initiate LACP negotiation passive Listen for LACP packets default Show LACP role Default Setting active Example Set passive for port1 4 SWITCH gt lacp role 1 4 passive LACP Status Description
139. Bridge ID of this Bridge instance e Root ID The Bridge ID of the currently elected root bridge e Root Port The switch port currently assigned the root port role e Root Cost Root Path Cost For the Root Bridge this is zero For all other Bridges it is the sum of the Port Path Costs on the least cost path to the Root Bridge e Topology Flag The current state of the Topology Change Flag for this Bridge instance e Topology Change Last The time since last Topology Change occurred CIST Port Configuration This page allows the user to inspect the current STP CIST port configurations and possibly change them as well This page contains settings for aggregations and physical ports The RSTP port settings relate to the currently selected unit as reflected by the page header The STP CIST Port Configuration screen is shown in Figure 4 7 6 139 STP CIST Ports Configuration CIST Aggregated Ports Configuration oj a T oho EE a p a ta aL m rare a T d Ly EY oe 1 cn LU e 1 ch LU gt la ml da Ly LA p E ml 1 Os hal Mm e LU T m i A gt un i T L jaz E o e un E o DL w pm gt E 2 e Restricted BPDU Guard Point to point on a Lu col 2 T w on Lu i la z ts ES Path Cost 1 8 5 7 5 elelelelellellelgle HEHA
140. DP awareness for a port is disabled the CDP information isn t removed immediately but will be removed when the hold time is exceeded e Port Descr Optional TLV When checked the port description is included in LLDP information transmitted e Sys Name Optional TLV When checked the system name is included in LLDP information transmitted e Sys Descr Optional TLV When checked the system description is included in LLDP information transmitted 257 e Sys Capa Optional TLV When checked the system capability is included in LLDP information transmitted The system capabilities identifies the primary function s of the system and whether or not these primary functions are enabled The information advertised by this TLV is described in IEEE 802 1AB e Mgmt Addr Optional TLV When checked the management address is included in LLDP information transmitted The management address protocol packet includes the IPv4 address of the switch If no management address is available the address should be the MAC address for the CPU or for the port sending this advertisement The management address TLV may also include information about the specific interface associated with this address and an object identifier indicating the type of hardware component or protocol entity associated with this address Buttons Save Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values LLDPMED Configur
141. Default Setting Disable 376 NS3550 24T 4S User Manual Example Set edge port BPDU filtering SWITCH gt stp bpdufilter enable STP BPDU Guard Description Set or show edge port BPDU Guard Syntax STP bpduGuard enable disable Parameters enable disable enable or disable BPDU Guard for Edge ports Default Setting Disable Example Set edge port BPDU guard SWITCH gt stp bpduguard enable STP Recovery Description Set or show edge port error recovery timeout Syntax STP recovery lt timeout gt Parameters lt timeout gt Time before error disabled ports are reenabled 30 86400 seconds 0 disables default Show recovery timeout Default Setting Disable 3 7 Example Set STP recovery value in 30 sec SWITCH gt stp recovery 30 STP Status Description Show STP Bridge status Syntax STP Status lt msti gt lt port_list gt Parameters lt msti gt STP bridge instance no 0 7 CIST 0 MSTI1 1 lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports Default Setting Disable Example Show up STP Bridge status SWITCH gt stp status CIST Bridge STP Status 80 00 00 30 4F 24 04 D1 80 00 00 30 4F 24 04 D1 Root PathCost 0 Regional Root 80 00 00 30 4F 24 04 D1 Steady STP MSTI Priority Description Set or show the CIST MSTI bridge priority Syntax STP Msti Priority lt msti gt lt priority gt 378 NS3550 24T 4S User Manual
142. Each page shows up to 999 entries from the MAC table default being 20 selected through the entries per page input field When first visited the web page will show the first 20 entries from the beginning of the MAC Table The first displayed will be the one with the lowest VLAN ID and the lowest MAC address found in the MAC Table The Start from MAC address and VLAN input fields allow the user to select the starting point in the MAC Table Clicking the Refresh button will update the displayed table starting from that or the closest next MAC Table match In addition the two input fields will upon a Refresh button click assume the value of the first displayed entry allowing for continuous refresh with the same start address The gt gt will use the last entry of the currently displayed VLAN MAC address pairs as a basis for the next lookup When the end is reached the text no more entries is shown in the displayed table Use the lt lt button to start over The page includes the following fields Object Description e Query by The query of the MAC addresses entry The following query types are supported Interface Query of the MAC addresses entry by interface VLAN Query of the MAC addresses entry by VLAN MAC Address Query of the MAC addresses entry by MAC address e Type Indicates whether the entry is a static or dynamic entry e VLAN The VLAN ID of the entry 250 NS3550 24T 4S User Manual
143. HTTPS interface snmp SNMP interface telnet TELNET SSH interface default Show configured and current mode Example Add access management list from 2001 0001 to 2001 0100 via web interface SWITCH gt security switch access add 2001 0001 2001 0100 web Security Switch Access Delete Description Delete access management entry Syntax Security Switch Access Delete lt access_id Parameters lt access_id gt entry index 1 16 Example Delete access management ID 1 SWITCH gt security switch access delete 1 316 Security Switch Access Look up Description Look up access management entry Syntax Security Switch Access Look up lt access_id gt Parameters lt access_id gt entry index 1 16 Example Look up access management entry NS3550 24T 4S User Manual SWITCH gt security switch access lookup 1 Security Switch Access Clear Description Clear access management entry Syntax Security Switch Access Clear Example Clear to access management entry SWITCH gt security switch access clear Security Switch Access Statistics Description Show up or clear to access management statistics Syntax Security Switch Access Statistics clear Parameters 317 clear Clear access management statistics Default Setting disable Example Show access management statistics SWITCH gt security switch access statistics Access Management Statist
144. HY Maintenance CLI System Reboot System Restore Default System Password Configuration Save Configuration Load and Firmware Load Web Users Privilege Levels and everything in Maintenance Debug Only present in CLI e Privilege Level Every privilege level group has an authorization level for the following sub groups configuration read only configuration execute read write status statistics read only and status statistics read write e g for clearing of statistics Buttons Save Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 57 NTP Configuration Configure NTP on this page NTP is an acronym for Network Time Protocol a network protocol for synchronizing the clocks of computer systems NTP uses UDP data grams as transport layer You can specify NTP Servers and set GMT Time zone The NTP Configuration screen is shown in Figure 4 2 8 NTP Configuration Mode GMT 0 Casablanca Monrovia Dublin Edinburgh Lisbon London v Server Server Servers omiaa OOOO O OOOO The page includes the following fields Object e Mode e Timezone e Server Buttons Save Click to save changes Figure 4 2 8 NTP Configuration Page Screenshot Description Indicates the NTP mode operation Possible modes are Enabled Enable NTP mode operation When enable NTP mode operation the agent forward and to transfer NTP messages between t
145. ICMPv6 packets are transmitted and the sequence number and roundtrip time are displayed upon reception of a reply The page refreshes automatically until responses to all packets are received or until a timeout occurs The ICMPv6 Ping screen is shown in Figure 4 15 2 270 NS3550 24T 4S User Manual ICMPv6 Ping IP Address Ping Size Figure 4 15 2 ICMPv6 Ping Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e IPv6 Address The destination IPv6 Address e Ping Size The payload size of the ICMP packet Values range from 8 bytes to 1400 bytes Buttons Star Click to transmit IC MP packets Remote IP Ping Test This page allows you to issue ICMP PING packets to troubleshoot IP connectivity issues on special port After you press Test 5 ICMP packets are transmitted and the sequence number and roundtrip time are displayed upon reception of a reply The page refreshes automatically until responses to all packets are received or until a timeout occurs The ICMP Ping screen is shown in Figure 4 15 3 271 Remote IP Ping Test Remote IP Address Ping Size Ping Button Result 10900 at Pe 2 om00 a ae 20000 at ee ono a ae s 0000 at Pas o oo a ae 70000 a Pas sono a ne 20000 at as w wo at Ping 1 o at Ping 2 0000 at Pig a 0009 at e 1 oo at Ping s O oo e Ping 16 oo at e 7 oo at Ping 19 oo at Pig 0000 at e 20 w
146. IP Address 192 168 0 100 IP Address 192 168 0 x Figure 4 1 1 Web Management Diagram 43 m Logging on the switch li Use Internet Explorer 7 0 or above Web browser Enter the factory default IP address to access the Web interface The factory default IP Address as following http 192 168 0 100 2 When the following login screen appears please enter the default username admin with password admin or the username password you have changed via console to login the main screen of Managed Switch The login screen is shown in Figure 4 1 2 Connect to 192 168 0 100 The server 192 168 0 100 at Web Management requires a username and password Warning This server is requesting that your username and password be sent in an insecure manner basic authentication Without a secure connection User name Ea admin hd Password TETT Remember my password Figure 4 1 2 Login Screen Default User name admin Default Password admin After entering the username and password the main screen is shown in Figure 4 1 3 44 NS3550 24T 4S User Manual r A E A 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 ae ff m ae A 9 1 13 15 17 19 24 23 21 23 fs NS3550 24T 4S Welcome to IFS Transmission NS3550 24T 4S 24 Port Gigabit Ethernet Industrial Managed Switch 4 shared SFP 40 75 Degree C Interlogix A UTC Fire amp Security Company All rights reserved re Figure 4 1 3 Defau
147. If the two VID are different the switch will drop the packet Because of the existence of the PVID for untagged packets and the VID for tagged packets tag aware and tag unaware network devices can coexist on the same network A switch port can have only one PVID but can have as many VID as the switch has memory in its VLAN table to store them 109 Because some devices on a network may be tag unaware a decision must be made at each port on a tag aware device before packets are transmitted should the packet to be transmitted have a tag or not If the transmitting port is connected to a tag unaware device the packet should be untagged If the transmitting port is connected to a tag aware device the packet should be tagged MW Default VLANs The Switch initially configures one VLAN VID 1 called default The factory default setting assigns all ports on the Switch to the default As new VLAN are configured in Port based mode their respective member ports are removed from the default MM Assigning Ports to VLANs Before enabling VLANs for the switch you must first assign each port to the VLAN group s in which it will participate By default all ports are assigned to VLAN 1 as untagged ports Add a port as a tagged port if you want it to carry traffic for one or more VLANs and any intermediate network devices or the host at the other end of the connection supports VLANs Then assign ports on the other VLAN aware network devices al
148. Ildpmed Coordinate datum LLDPMED Fast Description Set or show LLDP MED Fast Start Repeat Count Syntax LLDPMED Fast lt count gt Parameters lt count gt The number of times the fast start LLDPDU are being sent during the activation of the fast start mechanism defined by LLDP MED 1 10 408 NS3550 24T 4S User Manual LLDPMED Info Description Show up LLDP MED neighbor device information Syntax LLDPMED Info lt port_list gt Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports LLDPMED Debuge_ med _transmit_var Description Set or show if the current value of the global medTansmitEnable variable Section Section 11 2 1 TIA 1057 Syntax LLDPMED debug_med transmit_var lt port_list gt enable disable Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports enable Enable Set medTansmitEnable variable to true disable Disable Set medTansmitEnable variable to false default Show medTansmitEnable variable value 409 Quality of Service Command QoS Configuration Description Show QoS Configuration Syntax QoS Configuration lt port_list gt Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports Example Show QoS Configuration of port 1 4 SWITCH gt qos configuration 1 4 QoS Configuration Storm Multicast Disabled 1 pps Storm Broadcast Disabled 1 pps Storm Unicast Disabled 1 pps Port Default Tag Priority QCLID Rate Limite
149. Indicates whether the corresponding MAC address is blocked or forwarding In the blocked state it will not be allowed to transmit or receive traffic e Time of Adding Shows the date and time when this MAC address was first seen on the port e Age Hold If at least one user module has decided to block this MAC address it will stay in the blocked state until the hold time measured in seconds expires If all user modules have decided to allow this MAC address to forward and aging is enabled the Port Security module will periodically check that this MAC address still forwards traffic If the age period measured in seconds expires and no frames have been seen the MAC address will be removed from the MAC table Otherwise a new age period will begin If aging is disabled or a user module has decided to hold the MAC address indefinitely a dash will be shown Buttons Retesh Click to refresh the page immediately Auto refresh Check this box to enable an automatic refresh of the page at regular intervals DHCP Snooping DHCP Snooping is used to block intruder on the untrusted ports of DUT when it tries to intervene by injecting a bogus DHCP reply packet to a legitimate conversation between the DHCP client and server Configure DHCP Snooping on this page The DHCP Snooping Configuration screen is shown in Figure 4 12 8 240 NS3550 24T 4S User Manual DHCP Snooping Configuration Snooping Mode Dials Port Mode Configu
150. J 45 receptacle connector There are 8 wires on a standard UTP STP cable and each wire is color coded The following shows the pin allocation and color of straight cable and crossover cable connection Straight Cable SIDE 1 SIDE2 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 SIDE 1 1 White Orange 1 White Orange 2 Orange 2 Orange 3 White Green 3 White Green 4 Blue 4 Blue 5 White Blue 5 White Blue 6 Green 6 Green 7 White Brown 7 White Brown 8 Brown 8 Brown 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 SIDE 2 Crossover Cable SIDE 1 SIDE2 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 SIDE 1 1 White Orange 1 White Green 2 Orange 2 Green 3 White Green 3 White Orange 4 Blue 4 Blue 5 White Blue 5 White Blue 6 Green 6 Orange 7 White Brown 7 White Brown 8 Brown 8 Brown 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 SIDE 2 Figure A 1 Straight Through and Crossover Cable Please make sure your connected cables are with same pin assignment and color as above picture before deploying the cables into your network 449 APPENDIX B Local User Access Level Table NS2503 24P 2C User Level Admin Viewer Admin Viewer Admin Viewer Change Not Accessable Not Accessable Not Accessable Main Function System Information Z O r gt e Q D n Y Q e D Z O e gt Q O N Y D o D Misc Config pn gt e Z O pn gt O O 49 0 0 Q e 9 IP Configuration Console Port Info View Only SNMP Configuration gt
151. K Tx NAK Tx Release Tx Inform Tx Lease Query Tx Lease Unassigned Tx Lease Unknown Tx Lease Active Rx NAK Rx Release Rx Inform Rx Lease Query Rx Lease Unassigned Rx Lease Unknown Rx Lease Active Coa Co Co A AAA AA E Sao ono ooo AA amp amp A Figure 4 12 9 DHCP Snooping Port Statistics Screen Page Screenshot 242 The page includes the following fields Object Buttons Rx and Tx Discover Rx and Tx Offer Rx and Tx Request Rx and Tx Decline Rx and Tx ACK Rx and Tx NAK Rx and Tx Release Rx and Tx Inform Rx and Tx Lease Query Rx and Tx Lease Unassigned Rx and Tx Lease Unknown Rx and Tx Lease Active NS3550 24T 4S User Manual Description The number of discover option 53 with value 1 packets received and transmitted The number of offer option 53 with value 2 packets received and transmitted The number of request option 53 with value 3 packets received and transmitted The number of decline option 53 with value 4 packets received and transmitted The number of ACK option 53 with value 5 packets received and transmitted The number of NAK option 53 with value 6 packets received and transmitted The number of release option 53 with value 7 packets received and transmitted The number of inform option 53 with value 8 packets received and transmitted The number of lease query option 53 with value 10 packets received and transmitted The number of lease unassigned option 53 with va
152. LS 4 4 al Es 3 x 4 i lt 4 i lt 4 ii qi lt 4 AA lt 4 4 i E lt l x 4 x 4 The page includes the following fields Object e Port e Description e Link e Current Link Speed e Configured Link Speed e Flow Control e Maximum Frame e Excessive Collision Mode e Power Control Buttons Save Click to save changes NS3550 24T 4S User Manual Description This is the logical port number for this row Indicates the per port description The current link state is displayed graphically Green indicates the link is up and red indicates that it is down Provides the current link speed of the port Select any available link speed for the given switch port Draw the menu bar to select the mode Auto Speed Setup Auto negotiation 10 Half Force sets 10Mbps Half Duplex mode 10 Full Force sets 10Mbps Full Duplex mode 100 Half Force sets 100Mbps Half Duplex mode 100 Full Force sets 100Mbps Full Duplex mode 1000 Full Force sets 10000Mbps Full Duplex mode Disable Shutdown the port manually When Auto Speed is selected for a port this section indicates the flow control capability that is advertised to the link partner When a fixed speed setting is selected that is what is used Current Rx column indicates whether pause frames on the port are obeyed Current Tx column indicates whether pause frame
153. MAC filter for this ACE Any No SMAC filter is specified SMAC filter status is don t care Specific If you want to filter a specific source MAC address with this ACE choose this value A field for entering an SMAC value When Specific is selected for the SMAC filter you can enter a specific source MAC address The legal format is xx xx xx xx xx xx A frame that hits this ACE matches this SMAC value Specify the destination MAC filter for this ACE Any No DMAC filter is specified DMAC filter status is don t care MC Frame must be multicast BC Frame must be broadcast UC Frame must be unicast Specific If you want to filter a specific destination MAC address with this ACE choose this value A field for entering a DMAC value When Specific is selected for the DMAC filter you can enter a specific destination MAC address The legal format is xx xx xx xx xx xx A frame that hits this ACE matches this DMAC value Description Specify the VLAN ID filter for this ACE Any No VLAN ID filter is specified VLAN ID filter status is don t care Specific If you want to filter a specific VLAN ID with this ACE choose this value A field for entering a VLAN ID number When Specific is selected for the VLAN ID filter you can enter a specific VLAN ID number The allowed range is 1 to 4095 A frame that hits this ACE matches this VLAN ID value Specify the tag priority for this ACE A frame that hits this ACE matches
154. Network is selected for the destination IP filter you can enter a specific DIP address in dotted decimal notation When Network is selected for the destination IP filter you can enter a specific DIP mask in dotted decimal notation Description Specify the ICMP filter for this ACE Any No ICMP filter is specified ICMP filter status is don t care Specific If you want to filter a specific ICMP filter with this ACE you can enter a specific ICMP value A field for entering an ICMP value When Specific is selected for the ICMP filter you can enter a specific ICMP value The allowed range is 0 to 255 A frame that hits this ACE matches this ICMP value Specify the ICMP code filter for this ACE Any No ICMP code filter is specified ICMP code filter status is don t care Specific If you want to filter a specific ICMP code filter with this ACE you can enter a specific ICMP code value A field for entering an ICMP code value When Specific is selected for the ICMP code filter you can enter a specific ICMP code value The allowed range is 0 to 255 Aframe that hits this ACE matches this ICMP code value Description Specify the TCP UDP source filter for this ACE Any No TCP UDP source filter is specified TCP UDP source filter status is don t care Specific If you want to filter a specific TCP UDP source filter with this ACE you can enter a specific TCP UDP source value A field for entering a TCP UDP source value
155. Network Application Rules Set up the specific QCL for different typical network application quality control E STEP 1 Set up the specific QCL for different typical network application quality control by selecting the network application type for your rule The Set up Typical Network Application Rules screen is shown in Figure 4 9 3 166 The page includes the following fields NS3550 24T 4S User Manual Set up Typical Network Application Rules Set up the specific QCL for different typical network application quality control by selecting the network application type for your rule o Audio and Video LJ QuickTime 4 Server MSN Messenger Phone Ll Yahoo Messenger Phone C Mapster C Real Audio o Games Cl Blizzard Battlenet Diablo and StarCraft DU Fighter Ace ll LJ Quake2 Ll Quake3 LIMSN Game Zone o User Definition Ethernet Type LIVLAN ID LITCPYUDP Pot LIJDScR Coa Waa Figure 4 9 3 Set up Typical Network Application Rules Page Screenshot Object e Audio and Video e Games e User Definition Buttons Cancel Wizard Description Indicates the common servers that apply to the specific QCE The common servers are QuickTime 4 Server MSN Messenger Phone Yahoo Messenger Phone Napster Real Audio Indicates the common games that apply to the specific QCE Indicates the user definition that applies to the specific QCE The user definitions are Ethernet Type Specify the Ethernet Type filter for this QCE
156. O O Figure 4 6 2 VLAN Port Configuration Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Port This is the logical port number for this row e PVID Allow assign PVID for selected port The range for the PVID is 1 4094 The PVID will be inserted into all untagged frames entering the ingress port The PVID must as same as the VLAN ID that the port belong to VLAN group or the untagged traffic will be dropped Ingress Filtering Enable ingress filtering for a port by checking the box This parameter affects VLAN ingress processing If ingress filtering is enabled and the ingress port is not a member of the classified VLAN of the frame the frame is discarded By default ingress filtering is disabled no checkmark e Accept Frame Type Determines whether the port accepts all frames or only tagged frames This parameter affects VLAN ingress processing If the port only accepts tagged frames untagged frames received on the port are discarded By default the field is set to All 114 NS3550 24T 4S User Manual e Link Type Allow 802 1Q Untagged or Tagged VLAN for selected port When adding a VLAN to selected port it tells the switch whether to keep or remove the tag from a frame on egress Untag outgoing frames without VLAN Tagged Tagged outgoing frames with VLAN Tagged e Q in Q Mode Sets the Managed Switch to QinQ mode and allows the QinQ tunnel port to be configured The default is for the Mana
157. OL frame MAC based Not applicable Description The Selected Counters table is visible when the port is one of the following administrative states Multi 802 1X MAC based Auth The table is identical to and is placed next to the Port Counters table and will be empty if no MAC address is currently selected To populate the table select one of the attached MAC Addresses from the table below Description Shows the identity of the supplicant as received in the Response Identity EAPOL frame Clicking the link causes the supplicant s EAPOL and Backend Server counters to be shown in the Selected Counters table If no supplicants are attached it shows No supplicants attached This column is not available for MAC based Auth For Multi 802 1X this column holds the MAC address of the attached supplicant For MAC based Auth this column holds the MAC address of the attached client Clicking the link causes the client s Backend Server counters to be shown in the Selected Counters table If no clients are attached it shows No clients attached This column holds the VLAN ID that the corresponding client is currently secured through the Port Security module The client can either be authenticated or unauthenticated In the authenticated state it is allowed to forward frames on the port and in the unauthenticated state it is blocked As long as the backend server hasn t successfully authenticated the client it is unauthenticated If an a
158. OM 3C940 Status General Support Connection Statues Connected Duration 03 35 37 Speed 100 0 Mbps Activity E s RS Recelwed he 146 935 760 110 212 126 Figure 4 11 18 228 NS3550 24T 4S User Manual 4 Select Authentication tab 5 Select Enable network access control using IEEE 802 1X to enable 802 1x authentication 6 Select MD 5 Challenge from the drop down list box for EAP type 3COM 3C940 Properties General Suthentication Advanced Select this option to provide authenticated network access for Ethernet networks Enable IEEE 802 1 authentication for this network EAP type MO 5 Challenge Protected EAP FEAF Smart Card or other Certificate Authenticate az computer when computer information is available Authenticate as quest when user or computer information is unavailable Figure 4 11 19 7 Click OK 8 When client has associated with the Managed Switch a user authentication notice appears in system tray Click on the notice to continue 229 ij Local Area Connection 3 x Click here to enter your user name and password For the network 10 15 PM Figure 4 11 20 Windows Client Popup Login Request Message 9 Enter the user name password and the logon domain that your account belongs 10 Click OK to complete the validation process Local Area Connection 3 User name test Logon d
159. POL retransmission timeout Default Setting 30 Example Set the time between EAPOL retransmissions for 100sec 345 SWITCH gt security network nas eapoltimeout 100 Security Network NAS Agetime Description Time in seconds between check for activity on successfully authenticated MAC addresses Syntax Security Network NAS Agetime lt age_time gt Parameters lt age_time gt Time between checks for activitiy on a MAC address that succeeded autentication default Show current age time Default Setting 300 Example Set NAS age time in 1000sec SWITCH gt security network nas agetime 1000 Security Network NAS Holdtime Description Time in seconds before a MAC address that failed authentication gets a new authentication chance Syntax Security Network NAS Holdtime lt hold_time gt Parameters lt hold_time gt Hold time before MAC addresses that failed authentication expire default Show current hold time Default Setting 10 Example Set NAS hold time in 100sec 346 NS3550 24T 4S User Manual SWITCH gt security network nas holdtime 100 Security Network NAS RADIUS QoS Description Set or show either global enabledness use the global keyword or per port enabledness of RADIUS assigned QoS Syntax Security Network NAS RADIUS_QoS global lt port_list gt enable disable Parameters global Select the global RADIUS assigned QoS setting lt port_list gt Select the pe
160. Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Delete To delete a VLAN entry check this box e VLANID Indicates the ID of this particular VLAN e Port Members A row of check boxes for each port is displayed for each VLAN ID To include a port in a VLAN check the box To remove or exclude the port from the VLAN make sure the box is unchecked By default no ports are members and all boxes are unchecked e Adding a New VLAN Click to add a new VLAN ID An empty row is added to the table and the VLAN can be configured as needed Legal values for a VLAN ID are 1 through 4095 The VLAN is enabled on the selected switch when you click on Save A VLAN without any port members on any unit will be deleted when you click Save The button can be used to undo the addition of new VLANs 116 NS3550 24T 4S User Manual Buttons Add new ent Click to add new VLAN Save Click to save changes Et d Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values i Refreshes the displayed table starting from the VLAN ID input fields Sa Updates the table starting from the first entry in the VLAN Table i e the entry with the lowest VLAN ID Gla Updates the table starting with the entry after the last entry currently displayed VLAN Membership Status for User Static This page provides an overview of membership status for VLAN users The VLAN Membership Status for Us
161. Parameter Description Default Value Bridge Identifier Not user A combination of the User set priority and the 32768 MAC configurable switch s MAC address except by setting priority The Bridge Identifier consists of two parts below a 16 bit priority and a 48 bit Ethernet MAC address 32768 MAC Priority A relative priority for each switch lower 32 68 numbers give a higher priority and a greater chance of a given switch being elected as the root bridge Hello Time The length of time between broadcasts of the 2 seconds hello message by the switch Maximum Age Timer Measures the age of a received BPDU fora 20 seconds port and ensures that the BPDU is discarded when its age exceeds the value of the maximum age timer Forward Delay Timer The amount time spent by a port in the 15 seconds learning and listening states waiting for a BPDU that may return the port to the blocking state The following are the user configurable STP parameters for the port or port group level Variable Description Default Value Port Priority A relative priority for each 128 port lower numbers give a higher priority and a greater chance of a given port being elected as the root port Port Cost A value used by STP to evaluate paths 200 000 100Mbps Fast Ethernet ports STP calculates path costs and selects the 20 000 1000Mbps Gigabit Ethernet path with the minimum cost as the active ports path O Auto Default Spanning Tree Configuration F
162. ROGUCL DESCHIDUO I a a A aE 18 Howto Use ThiS ManUal cms evevsleaveuds eos siecnavcaceenieieads eeewse evi eileen event 20 di AAA 21 Product SDCCITICATION rt re decanters Cavan a A a a a e a a 24 INSTALLA THON caa 26 Hardware DOSIS 26 SWIC FTONCF AINC hesian a a E EENS I e a E E E Oi 26 LEDNICA eena e A E E a e E eu 27 Switch Rear Panel aa lt 28 NSAN SWE Meara A AS 29 DSS KIOD AIS CAN AUOMA rs a a ia 29 RaCE MOURNING ioe a re oaray science ope wabaginc dha can T vaso a ogee adam wuanec eee ETN 30 lnstallingsthe SEP WansSCe iver aecneseetie A id 31 Winna Me OWW GE LO OU ceca tanta ereccion aceites ic est r 34 Winnog the Digital Input QUID cess 2ci za ziscnaycnessacsaatasassenccasagahaonwicmeudaeicatecenarecesoea ae aasniacnns sedewia nels adel catalan scenes souaatasenaee 35 SWITCH MANAGEMEN isvessvessvesevecsveus rete tensveunsecewcensensseuesc a a aaea 38 Requirements ala 38 Management ACCESS OVA VIW aiii a a A 39 Admimistralon CONS Uli 39 Web Manade Metas 41 SNMP Based Network Manageme nt sccccccssssssseeeeeeescenseneeeeeeeecoesssseeeeeeeeooenssseeeeeeeegonasseeeeeseoononsnneeesees 42 WEB CONFIGURATION coccion 43 Main Web Page ais 46 VSEM e Ee ee EN ee Ter ee eS Ee ree ene nae i moe eee ae nme Cre ree 48 SYVSteMIMIORMANOM ti el dao el reia 49 PCG MNGUI ALON es do e eterno ee tee eae 50 POS OATIQUAIO Na sesos tools cios eee etre ee Se etc eee ene a eee ee elas ti 51 Users CONQUE MON sms AA A Ea 52 VEA e
163. Replace the original relay information when receive a DHCP message that already contains it keep Keep the original relay information when receive a DHCP message that already contains it drop Drop the package when receive a DHCP message that already contains relay information default Show DHCP relay information policy Default Setting replace Example 358 NS3550 24T 4S User Manual Keep the original relay information when receive a DHCP message that already contains it SWITCH gt security network dhcp relay information policy keep Security Network DHCP Relay Statistics Description Show or clear DHCP relay statistics Syntax Security Network DHCP Relay Statistics clear Parameters clear Clear DHCP relay statistics Example Show DHCP relay statistics SWITCH gt security network dhcp relay statistics Security Network DHCP Snooping Configuration Description Show DHCP snooping configuration Syntax Security Network DHCP Snooping Configuration Example Set NAS age time in 1000sec SWITCH gt security network dhcp snooping configuration DHCP Snooping Configuration DHCP Snooping Mode Disabled Port Port Mode 4 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 trusted trusted trusted trusted trusted trusted trusted trusted 399 trusted trusted trusted trusted trusted trusted trusted trusted trusted trusted trusted trusted trusted trusted trusted trusted Security Network
164. S3550 24T 4S User Manual Management Access Overview The Managed Switch gives you the flexibility to access and manage it using any or all of the following methods a An administration console a Web browser interface a An external SNMP based network management application The administration console and Web browser interface support are embedded in the Managed Switch software and are available for immediate use Each of these management methods has their own advantages Table 3 1 compares the three management methods Method Advantages Disadvantages Console e No IP address or subnet needed e Must be near switch or use dial up connection e Text based e Not convenient for remote users e Telnet functionality and HyperTerminal e Modem connection may prove to be unreliable built into Windows or slow 95 98 NT 2000 ME XP operating systems e Secure Web Browser e Ideal for configuring the switch remotely e Security can be compromised hackers need e Compatible with all popular browsers only know the IP address and subnet mask e Can be accessed from any location e May encounter lag times on poor connections e User friendly GUI SNMP Agent e Communicates with switch functions at e Requires SNMP manager software the MIB level e Least visually appealing of all three methods e Based on open standards e Some settings require calculations e Security can be compromised hackers need only know the community name Table 3 1 Management Methods Comp
165. Show error statistics discards Show discard statistics filtered Show filtered statistics low Show low priority statistics normal Show normal priority statistics medium Show medium priority statistics high Show high priority statistics default Show all port statistics up Show ports which are up down Show ports which are down default Show all ports Port VeriPHY Description Run cable diagnostics Syntax Port VeriPHY lt port_list gt Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports 295 NS3550 24T 4S User Manual MAC Address Table Command MAC Configuration Description Show MAC address table configuration Syntax MAC Configuration lt port_list gt Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports Example Show Mac address state SWITCH gt mac configuration MAC Configuration MAC Address 9c f6 1a XX XX XX MAC Age Time 300 MAC Add Description Add MAC address table entry Syntax MAC Add lt mac_addr gt lt port_list gt lt vid gt 296 NS3550 24T 4S User Manual Parameters lt mac_addr gt MAC address XX XX XX XX XX XX lt port_list gt Port list or all or none lt vid gt VLAN ID 1 4095 default 1 Example Add Mac address 9c f6 1a XX XX XX in port1 and vid1 SWITCH gt mac add 9c f6 1a XX XX XX 1 1 MAC Delete Description Delete MAC address entry Syntax MAC Delete lt mac_addr gt
166. Strom Broadcast Description Set or show the multicast storm rate limiter Syntax QoS Storm Broadcast enable disable lt packet_rate gt Parameters enable Enable broadcast storm control disable Disable broadcast storm control lt packet_rate gt Rate in pps 1 2 4 512 1k 2k 4k 1024k Default Setting Disabled 1pps Example Enable broadcast storm rate limiter in 1kpps SWITCH gt qos storm broadcast enable 1k QoS DSCP Remarking Description Set or show the status of QOS DSCP Remarking Syntax QoS DSCP Remarking lt port_list gt enable disable Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports enable Enable QoS Remarking disable Disable QoS Remarking Default Setting Disabled Example Enable the status of QOS DSCP Remarking for port 1 4 416 NS3550 24T 4S User Manual SWITCH gt qos dscp remarking 1 4 enable QoS DSCP Queue Mapping Description Set or show the default port priority Syntax QoS DSCP Queue Mapping lt port_list gt lt class gt lt dscp gt Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports lt class gt Traffic class low normal medium high or 1 2 3 4 lt dscp gt QoS DSCP Remarking Value 0 8 16 24 32 40 48 56 46 Mirror Command Mirror Configuration Description Show mirror configuration Syntax Mirror Configuration lt port_list gt Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all d
167. TACACS Authentication Server and a number of columns which are 216 NS3550 24T 4S User Manual Object Description o The TACACS Authentication Server number for which the configuration below applies e Enabled Enable the TACACS Authentication Server by checking this box e IP Address Hostname The IP address or hostname of the TACACS Authentication Server IP address is expressed in dotted decimal notation e Port The TCP port to use on the TACACS Authentication Server If the port is set to 0 zero the default port 49 is used on the TACACS Authentication Server e Secret The secret up to 29 characters long shared between the TACACS Authentication Server and the switch Buttons save Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values RADIUS Overview This page provides an overview of the status of the RADIUS servers configurable on the Authentication configuration page The RADIUS Authentication Accounting Server Overview screen is shown in Figure 4 11 8 RADIUS Authentication Server Status Overview T ates O 0 0 0 1812 Disable 0 0 0 0 1612 Disable 0 0 0 0 1012 Disable 0 0 0 0 1612 Disable 0 0 0 0 1012 Disable RADIUS Accounting Server Status Overview e iP adres 0 0 0 0 1813 Disable 0 0 0 0 1813 Disable 0 0 0 0 1813 Disable 0 0 0 0 1813 Disable 0 0 0 0 1813 Disable Auto Refresh LJ Figure 4 11 8 RADIUS Authentication
168. The allowed range is 0x600 to OxFFFF VLAN ID VLAN ID filters for this QCE The allowed range is 1 to 4095 UDP TCP Port Specify the TCP UDP port filter for this QCE The allowed range is O to 65535 DSCP Specify the DSCP filter for this QCE The allowed range is O to 63 Click to cancel the wizard Back Click to go back to the previous wizard step Next Click to continue the wizard STEP 2 According to your selection on the previous page this wizard will create specific QCEs QoS Control Entries automatically First select the QCL ID for these QCEs and then select the traffic class Different parameter options are displayed depending on 167 the frame type that you selected Set up Typical Network Application Rules According to your selection on the previous page this wizard will create specific QCEs QoS Control Entries automatically First select the QCL ID for these QCEs and then select the traffic class Different parameter options are displayed depending on your selection Cancel Wizard Figure 4 9 4 Set up Typical Network Application Rules Page 2 Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e QCLID Select the QCL ID to which these QCEs apply e Traffic Class Select a traffic class of Low Normal Medium or High to apply to the QCE Buttons Cancel Wizard Click to cancel the wizard Back Click to go back to the previous wizard step Next Click to continu
169. Updates the table starting from the first entry in the MAC Table i e the entry with the lowest VLAN ID and MAC address gt gt gt Updates the table starting with the entry after the last entry currently displayed LDP Link Layer Discovery Protocol Link Layer Discovery Protocol LLDP is used to discover basic information about neighboring devices on the local broadcast domain LLDP is a Layer 2 protocol that uses periodic broadcasts to advertise information about the sending device Advertised information is represented in Type Length Value TLV format according to the IEEE 802 1ab standard and can include details such as device identification capabilities and configuration settings LLDP also defines how to store and maintain information gathered about the neighboring network nodes it discovers Link Layer Discovery Protocol Media Endpoint Discovery LLDP MED is an extension of LLDP intended for managing endpoint devices such as Voice over IP phones and network switches The LLDP MED TLVs advertise information such as network policy power inventory and device location details LLDP and LLDP MED information can be used by SNMP applications to simplify troubleshooting enhance network management and maintain an accurate network topology LLDP Configuration This page allows the user to inspect and configure the current LLDP port settings The LLDP Configuration screen is shown in Figure 4 14 1 255 LLDP Configuration
170. V Level 1 2 1 24V 0 1V Input Load Current 10mA max 2 Digital Output DO Open collector to 24VDC 100mA max load DI DO Layer 2 Function Port disable enable Auto Negotiation 10 100 1000Mbps full and half duplex mode selection Flow Control disable enable Bandwidth control on each port Power saving mode control Display each port s speed duplex mode link status Flow control status Auto negotiation status trunk status 802 1Q Tagged Based VLAN Port Based VLAN VLAN Q in Q Private VLAN Edge PVE Up to 256 VLAN groups out of 4094 VLAN IDs Porttrunkin IEEE 802 3ad LACP Static Trunk g Support 12 groups of 16 Port trunk support Traffic classification based Strict priority and WRR 4 level priority for switching Port Number Port configuration 802 1p priority 802 1Q VLAN tag DSCP TOS field in IP Packet Policy Based QoS IGMP v1 v2 Snooping up to 255 multicast Groups DS IGMP Querier mode support i IP Based ACL MAC Based ACL Access Control List l Up to 256 entries Management 24 NS3550 24T 4S User Manual Basic Management Interfaces Secure Management Interface RFC 1213 MIB II IF MIB RFC 1493 Bridge MIB RFC 1643 Ethernet MIB RFC 2863 Interface MIB RFC 2665 Ether Like MIB RFC 2819 RMON MIB Group 1 RFC 2737 Entity MIB RFC 2618 RADIUS Client MIB RFC 2933 IGMP STD MIB RFC3411 SNMP Frameworks MIB IEEE802 1X PAE LLDP MAU MIB Standards Confo
171. VLAN can be used to combine any collection of LAN segments into an autonomous user group that appears as a single LAN VLAN also logically segment the network into different broadcast domains so that packets are forwarded only between ports within the VLAN Typically a VLAN corresponds to a particular subnet although not necessarily VLAN can enhance performance by conserving bandwidth and improve security by limiting traffic to specific domains A VLAN is a collection of end nodes grouped by logic instead of physical location End nodes that frequently communicate with each other are assigned to the same VLAN regardless of where they are physically on the network Logically a VLAN can be equated to a broadcast domain because broadcast packets are forwarded to only members of the VLAN on which the broadcast was initiated No matter what basis is used to uniquely identify end nodes and assign these nodes VLAN membership packets cannot cross VLAN without a network device performing a routing function between the VLAN The Managed Switch supports IEEE 802 1Q VLAN The port untagging function can be used to remove the 802 1 tag from packet headers to maintain compatibility with devices that are tag unaware The Switch s default is to assign all ports to a single 802 1Q VLAN named DEFAULT VLAN As new VLAN is created the member ports assigned to the new VLAN will be removed from the DEFAULT_ VLAN port member list The DEFAULT VLAN has a VID 1
172. Y a O Clare messin ce aces eat O 293 FOF DPOWS onet Rea rh o a ad 293 FOS pacino ee ee eh es eh eh ces 293 PORE EEX A o O e 294 POUS al sah atratseeeara uae tease Rees gat Ain eda depeche slag ee eeal mesa at eaae tae etadoonseacesnains 294 E alt eee te te es te mn en ee ee ee Oe ee ere en eee ee 295 MAG Address Table Commands iii li 296 MAS Configuration sar A de A ia 296 MAC Addens ee ee ee neers eee 296 MAC Dolle ee ee oe oia aa 297 MAC Ed ce lt a Uo A isc 297 MAC AGG TIME amen ee at 298 MAC ECAP iin aii 298 MAC DIN seo stas 298 MACS SEAUSUGCS ua a aeecteeghedennicteuianaate hs 299 NS3550 24T 4S User Manual MAGC FIUS MO a A A IS oo a 300 VLAN Configuration Command aiii ind 300 VEAN COMMGUR ATOR yt Sl ds el O 300 MEA Pd ee eer 301 VELAN Frame TYPE ana ato maite lod diaa 301 MEAN NOTES MO A a a E ARO ariel 302 VAN Me e ees 302 VEAN CIAT ad 302 VEAN QE A A a e a dt ch Sadedaviatsonouadunaaead 303 VEAN EME De ld er errr ae 303 VEAN A nT mr a E AE eR E Te eS 304 o eT NR ee ee Ree Ee eon nee eer 304 VEAN EOOK UD a e OC o 304 VEAN SUS eter nn er CE e o e Pee eee ee eee 305 Private VLAN Configuration Command cccccccsssennssseeeeeeeeeensseeeeeeeeconnaseeneeeeeeoonnsseeeseeeooconsssenesseesoes 306 PV LANG OMiQUIAllOMN sena ios pete ah eevee A a eee ee 306 PVAN A bit neat tal senses rales tios 307 EVEAN DOS lt r erate ete ene Meee nee E ene er Lene E ee Seer eee emer eer eee 307 PULAN LOOK Utd ii di sean 307 PVEAN
173. a specific port number The default value is Disabled Specify the logging operation of this port The allowed values are Enabled Frames received on the port are stored in the System Log Disabled Frames received on the port are not logged The default value is Disabled Please note that the System Log memory size and logging rate is limited Specify the port shut down operation of this port The allowed values are Enabled If a frame is received on the port the port will be disabled Disabled Port shut down is disabled The default value is Disabled Counts the number of frames that match this ACE Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values Click to refresh the page any changes made locally will be undone ACL Rate Limiter Configuration Configure the rate limiter for the ACL of the switch The ACL Rate Limiter Configuration screen is shown in Figure 4 10 5 194 NS3550 24T 4S User Manual ACL Rate Limiter Configuration Rate Limiter ID Rate pps 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 Figure 4 10 5 ACL Rate Limiter Configuration Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Rate Limiter ID The rate limiter 1D for the settings contained in the same row e Rate The rate unit is packet per second pps configure the rate as 1 2 4 8 16 32 64 128 256 512 1K 2K 4K 8K 16K 32K 64K 128K 256K 512K or 1024K The 1 kpps is actually
174. a interlogix IFS NS3550 24T 4S User Manual Copyright Trademarks and patents Intended use Manufacturer Certification FCC compliance ACMA compliance Canada European Union directives pit Contact information Contact support 2013 UTC Fire amp Security Americas Corporation Inc Interlogix is part of UTC Climate Controls amp Security a unit of United Technologies Corporation All rights reserved The IFS NS3550 24T 4S and logo are trademarks of United Technologies Other trade names used in this document may be trademarks or registered trademarks of the manufacturers or vendors of the respective products Use this product only for the purpose it was designed for refer to the data sheet and user documentation for details For the latest product information contact your local supplier or visit us online at www interlogix com UTC Fire amp Security Americas Corporation Inc 2955 Red Hill Avenue Costa Mesa CA 92626 5923 USA EU authorized manufacturing representative UTC Fire amp Security B V Kelvinstraat 7 6003 DH Weert The Netherlands C nara This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device pursuant to part 15 of the FCC Rules These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment This equipment generates uses and can radiate radio frequen
175. a network or the Internet to a specific computer in order to generate a response from that computer The other computer responds with an acknowledgment that it received the packets Ping was created to verify whether a specific computer on a network or the Internet exists and is connected 460 NS3550 24T 4S User Manual ping uses Internet Control Message Protocol ICMP packets The PING Request is the packet from the origin computer and the PING Reply is the packet response from the target POE is an acronym for Power Over Ethernet Power Over Ethernet is used to transmit electrical power to remote devices over standard Ethernet cable It could for example be used for powering IP telephones wireless LAN access points and other equipment where it would be difficult or expensive to connect the equipment to main power supply A policer can limit the bandwidth of received frames It is located in front of the ingress queue POP3 is an acronym for Post Office Protocol version 3 It is a protocol for email clients to retrieve email messages from a mail server POP3 is designed to delete mail on the server as soon as the user has downloaded it However some implementations allow users or an administrator to specify that mail be saved for some period of time POP can be thought of as a store and forward service An alternative protocol is Internet Message Access Protocol IMAP IMAP provides the user with more capabilities for
176. able IGMP Flooding Description Set or show the IGMP snooping unregistered flood operation Syntax IGMP Flooding enable disable Parameters enable Enable IGMP flooding disable Disable IGMP flooding default Show IGMP flood mode Default Setting disable Example Enable IGMP flooding function SWITCH gt igmp flooding enable IGMP Groups Description Show IGMP groups Syntax IGMP Groups lt vid gt Parameters 392 lt vid gt VLAN ID 1 4095 IGMP Status Description Show IGMP status Syntax IGMP Status lt vid gt Parameters lt vid gt VLAN ID 1 4095 Default Setting disable Link Aggregation Command Aggregation Configuration Description Show link aggregation configuration Syntax Aggr Configuration Example SWITCH gt aggr configuration Aggregation Mode SMAC Enabled DMAC Disabled Enabled Enabled Aggregation Add Description Add or modify link aggregation Syntax 393 NS3550 24T 4S User Manual Aggr Add lt port_list gt lt aggr_id gt Parameters lt port_list gt Port list lt aggr_id gt Aggregation ID global 1 2 local 3 14 Default Setting disable Example Add port 1 4 in Group SWITCH gt aggr add 1 4 1 Aggregation Delete Description Delete link aggregation Syntax Aggr Delete lt aggr_id gt Parameters lt aggr_id gt Aggregation ID global 1 2 local 3 14 Exa
177. able Example Use RADIUS authentication method for telnet SWITCH gt security switch auth method telnet radius enable Security Switch SSH Configuration Description Show SSH configuration Syntax Security Switch SSH Configuration Example Show SSH configuration SWITCH gt security switch ssh configuration SSH Configuration SSH Mode Disabled Security Switch SSH Mode Description Set or show the SSH mode Syntax Security Switch SSH Mode enable disable Parameters enable Enable SSH disable Disable SSH default Show SSH mode Default Setting disable Example Enable SSH function SWITCH gt security switch ssh mode enable 312 Security Switch HTTPs Configuration Description Show HTTPS configuration Syntax Security Switch HTTPS Configuration Default Setting disable Example Show HTTPs configuration SWITCH gt security switch https configuration HTTPS Configuration HTTPS Mode Disabled HTTPS Redirect Mode Disabled NS3550 24T 4S User Manual Security Switch HTTPs Mode Description Set or show the HTTPS mode Syntax Security Switch HTTPS Mode enable disable Parameters enable Enable HTTPs disable Disable HTTPs default Show HTTPs mode Default Setting disable Example Enable HTTPs function SWITCH gt security switch https mode enable Security Switch HTTPs Redirect Description Set or show HTTPS redirect mode Automatic redirect web b
178. accounting server disable Disable RADIUS accounting server default Show RADIUS server mode lt ip_addr_string gt IP host address a b c d or a host name string lt secret gt Secret shared with external accounting server Set to an empty secret use two quotes To use spaces in secret enquote the secret 370 NS3550 24T 4S User Manual Quotes in the secret are not allowed lt server_port gt Server UDP port Use O to use the default RADIUS port 1813 Example Set RADIUS accounting server configuration SWITCH gt security acct_radius 1 enable 192 168 0 20 12345678 1813 Security AAA TACACS Description Set or show TACACS authentication server setup Syntax Security AAA TACACS lt server_index gt enable disable lt ip_addr_string gt lt secret gt lt server_port gt Parameters The server index 1 5 default Show TACACS authentication server configuration enable Enable TACACS authentication server disable Disable TACACS authentication server default Show TACACS server mode lt ip_addr_string gt IP host address a b c d or a host name string lt secret gt Secret shared with external authentication server Set to an empty secret use two quotes To use spaces in secret enquote the secret Quotes in the secret are not allowed lt server_port gt Server TCP port Use 0 to use the default TACACS port 49 Example Set TACACS authentication server confi
179. ackup gt p e E n xml biy Recent Documents Mu D ocuments My Computer My Network File name config xm Places Files of type El Files Cancel Figure 4 2 25 Windows File Selection Menu Popup Upload 2 Select on the configuration file then click Unload the bottom of the browser shows the upload status 3 After the upload process is finished the foloowing meassage appears Transfer Completed 73 Digital input output Digital Input allows the user to manage external devices with customized messages for specific events and create logs in to system log syslog issue SNMP trap or issue an alarm e mail Digital Output allows user to monitor the switch port and power and let system issues a high or low signal to an external device such as alarm when the monitor port or power has been failed The Configuration screen is shown in Figure 4 2 26 Digital Input Output Control Configuration Digital Input _ enable Enable enable Achan System Log Syslog E System Log Syslog SNMP Trap SMTP SNMP Trap SMTP Digital Output Digital Output C enable C enable Port Fail Power Fail Port Fail Power Fail DC 1 1 DC2 AC Power DC 1 DC 2 CIAC Power M2 3 4 5 amp fF 64 1 2 345566 TfT 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 Part Alarm Part Alarm Tf 18 19 20 21 22 23 M Tf 18 19 20 21 22 23 M Figure 4 2 26 Windows File Selection Menu Popup The page
180. aie eed A ue ete les eta 436 SHOW STF COMO UPA TON asa a sica 436 DIDO C OMMAN e ve aaea 437 A a a a 437 EITE E cane PEII E E OAEIAE ea AE E T E A E O In 437 DLE A ias 438 A NE 439 IO y A A 439 DOTO er Rerene mene emer ier ne eanir ta ane E eee meee et ne ena Marte rae 440 IB ea Bal WE gt cree metre neem ne ae eee A iaa 440 cn E chaceal E E ee aed aetna 441 A recta E E A P E ca alae eon acasangesaaes T E A E 442 fauk porn AAA A a a O ee ae are en oe ee 442 AUT ON A A E A O A 442 SWITCH OPERATION idas 444 Address Tablespoon tana wena a tauren neta rbeeat eds na a Mitesh dad Satter neee Gace ats 444 ES MINING A IE tees te ctanectsenneestueet a a a EE AA a a a a a 444 Forwarding amp FiteriNg ad 444 Store and O Wald 444 AUN A a 445 TROUBLE SHOOTING cccccscessssccscesssscsccecesscscscescacacscsesecasacsesscasacsesescavacacsececatacacececaranaceees 446 NS3550 24T 4S User Manual APPENDEA Aucas 448 Switch s RIAS PINASS IMEI aa 448 TO TOOMB DS 10 100 B aS C Tiida 448 APPENDIX B Local User Access Level Table ooconcoccoccoccococconconcanonnonconcancnnnaronrancanonnnnos 450 APPENDEX C GLOSSARY Vasili elieenia me 452 INTRODUCTION The IFS NS3550 24T 4S is a 24 ports Gigabit Ethernet Switch with SFP fiber ports and robust layer 2 features The term Managed Switch refers to the NS3550 24T 4S Industrial Switch Packet Contents Open the box of the Managed Switch and carefully unpack it The bo
181. ail lt power gt power fail default Set or show digital output fault alarm 1 2 action lt enable gt Enable digital input1 2 function lt disable gt Disable digital input1 2 function default Set or show digital input output fault alarm 1 2 status Example Enable power alarm configuration SWITCH gt dido fault_act port enable SWITCH gt dido fault_act power enable 441 fault_en Description Set or show the system fault alarm Syntax dido fault_en enable disable Parameters lt enable gt Enable digital input1 2 function lt disable gt Disable digital input1 2 function default Set or show digital input output fault alarm 1 2 status Example Enable power alarm configuration SWITCH dido fault_en enable fault_port_alr Description Set or show the system fault alarm of port alarm Syntax dido fault_port_alr lt port_list gt Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports Example Enable power alarm configuration SWITCH gt dido fault_port_alr all SWITCH gt dido fault_port_alr 1 3 5 SWITCH gt dido fault_port_alr 1 10 fault_pwr_alr Description Set or show the system fault alarm of power alarm Syntax dido fault_pwr_alr dc1 dc2 ac enable disable 442 NS3550 24T 4S User Manual Parameters lt dc1 gt DC power 1 lt dc2 gt DC power 2 lt ac gt AC power default Set or show digital output fault alarm 1 2 power fail
182. al Buttons Refresh Click to refresh the page immediately Auto refresh Check this box to enable an automatic refresh of the page at regular intervals LACP Port Statistics This page provides an overview for LACP statistics for all ports The LACP statistics screen is shown in Figure 4 5 7 LACP Statistics Port LacPR d LACP T itted Discarded o ecelve Fansmitte Unknoven mega 0 0 4 01M E to Ri 0 0 0 Ll 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 O 0 0 0 O 0 O 0 O 0 0 0 0 SIS Oe OR OS OS Oe GGO OS OS oO So O OA SoS OS ORS ORS ORO RS CO eS OS OS Oo SO A O a ee ee OO GGO ee OO ee GCAO OO ee GOG GGO eS Oe CO eS O Auto Refresh Ll Figure 4 5 7 LACP Port Statistics Page Screenshot 105 The page includes the following fields Object Description e Port The switch port number e LACP Transmitted Shows how many LACP frames have been sent from each port e LACP Received Shows how many LACP frames have been received at each port e Discarded Shows how many unknown or illegal LACP frames have been discarded at each port Buttons Auto refresh Check this box to enable an automatic refresh of the page at regular intervals Click to refresh the page immediately Retires h Clear Clears the counters for all ports 106 NS3550 24T 4S User Manual VLAN VLAN Overview A Virtual Local Area Network VLAN is a network topology configured according to a logical scheme rather than the physical layout
183. allow this new MAC address to forward or block it For a MAC address to be set in the forwarding state all enabled user modules must unanimously agree on allowing the MAC address to forward If only 236 NS3550 24T 4S User Manual one chooses to block it it will be blocked until that user module decides otherwise The status page is divided into two sections one with a legend of user modules and one with the actual port status The SSH Configuration screen is shown in Figure 4 12 5 SoH Configuration Mode Dissticd vy Save Figure 4 12 5 SSH Configuration Screen Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Mode Indicates the SSH mode operation Possible modes are Enabled Enable SSH mode operation Disabled Disable SSH mode operation Buttons Save Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values Port Security Status This page shows the Port Security status Port Security is a module with no direct configuration Configuration comes indirectly from other modules the user modules When a user module has enabled port security on a port the port is set up for software based learning In this mode frames from unknown MAC addresses are passed on to the port security module which in turn asks all user modules whether to allow this new MAC address to forward or block it For a MAC address to be set in the forwarding state a
184. allowed range is 0 to 65535 A frame that hits this ACE matches this TCP UDP destination value When Range is selected for the TCP UDP destination filter you can enter a specific TCP UDP destination range value The allowed range is 0 to 65535 A frame that hits this ACE matches this TCP UDP destination value Specify the TCP No more data from sender FIN value for this ACE 0 TCP frames where the FIN field is set must not be able to match this entry 1 TCP frames where the FIN field is set must be able to match this entry Any Any value is allowed don t care Specify the TCP Synchronize sequence numbers SYN value for this ACE 0 TCP frames where the SYN field is set must not be able to match this entry 1 TCP frames where the SYN field is set must be able to match this entry Any Any value is allowed don t care Specify the TCP Push Function PSH value for this ACE 0 TCP frames where the PSH field is set must not be able to match this entry 1 TCP frames where the PSH field is set must be able to match this entry Any Any value is allowed don t care Specify the TCP Acknowledgment field significant ACK value for this ACE 0 TCP frames where the ACK field is set must not be able to match this entry 1 TCP frames where the ACK field is set must be able to match this entry Any Any value is allowed don t care Specify the TCP Urgent Pointer field significant URG value for this ACE 0 TCP fr
185. ally and revert to previously saved values 87 Port Management Use the Port Menu to display or configure the Managed Switch s ports This section has the following items 2 Port Configuration Port Statistics Overview Port Statistics Detail SFP Module Information Configures port connection settings a m Lists Ethernet and RMON port statistics E Display SFP information E Port Mirror Sets the source and target ports for mirroring Port Configuration This page displays current port configurations Ports can also be configured here The port settings relate to the currently selected unit as reflected by the page header The table has one row for each port on the selected switch in the and a number of columns which are The Port Configuration screen is shown in Figure 4 4 1 Port Configuration Link a Maximum Frame Excessive Collision Mode Power Control A al k 3 4 lt 3 T x Description 0 0 50 Aa BA Qi l x i 4 l iiil 4 l 4 RRA KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK x Figure 4 4 1 Port Configuration Page Screenshot SRR KKK KK KK KKK KKK KKK KKK KK ze 88 RRR ee fije ee hk RE ee fee fol le elelsls sl sig sissies sis s8 sisleisesiaisls a E 3 gl 3 k a Es 3 lt apa AE 4 4 a E 3 yl E 3 al Es 3 A 4 a Es 3 lt 1010 10 AENEA ENANA A a E 3 A lt al E E El yl AA
186. alues Using the Specific setting a user defined value can be entered The path cost is used when establishing the active topology of the network Lower path cost ports are chosen as forwarding ports in favor of higher path cost ports Valid values are in the range 1 to 200000000 e Priority Controls the port priority This can be used to control priority of ports having identical port cost See above Buttons cet Click to set MSTx configuration Retresh Click to refresh the page immediately Auto refresh Check this box to enable an automatic refresh of the page at regular intervals Port Status This page displays the STP CIST port status for port physical ports in the currently selected switch The STP Port Status screen is shown in Figure 4 7 11 STP Port Status CIST Role CIST State a gt ode ol ol on ol oo of a 2 a a 5 H T an 4 10 11 aie 15 14 15 16 17 15 19 DesignatedPont Forwarding Ud 01 56 44 Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled DesignatedPort Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Discarding Discarding Discarding Discarding Discarding Discarding Discarding Discarding Discarding Discarding Discarding Discarding Discarding Discarding Forwarding Discarding Discarding Discarding Discarding Discarding Discarding Discarding Discard
187. ames where the URG field is set must not be able to match this entry 1 TCP frames where the URG field is set must be able to match this entry Any Any value is allowed don t care The Ethernet Type parameters can be configured when Frame Type Ethernet Type is selected Object e EtherType Filter e Ethernet Type Value Buttons Save Click to save changes Description Specify the Ethernet type filter for this ACE Any No EtherType filter is specified EtherType filter status is don t care Specific If you want to filter a specific EtherType filter with this ACE you can enter a specific EtherType value A field for entering a EtherType value When Specific is selected for the EtherType filter you can enter a specific EtherType value The allowed range is 0x600 to OxFFFF A frame that hits this ACE matches this EtherType value Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values Cancel Return to the previous page 192 NS3550 24T 4S User Manual ACL Ports Configuration Configure the ACL parameters ACE of each switch port These parameters will affect frames received on a port unless the frame matches a specific ACE The settings relate to the currently selected unit as reflected by the page header The ACL Ports Configuration screen is shown in Figure 4 10 4 ACL Ports Configuration Policy ID Rate Limiter ID Port Copy Logging Shutdown Disable Disable
188. anagement STP Spanning Tree Protocol IGMP Internet Group Management Protocol snooping Aggr Link Aggregation LACP Link Aggregation Control Protocol LLDP Link Layer Discovery Protocol LLDPMED Link Layer Discovery Protocol Media PoE Power Over Ethernet QoS Quality of Service Mirror Port mirroring Config Load Save of configuration via TFTP Firmware Download of firmware via TFTP UPnP Universal Plug and Play MVR Multicast VLAN Registration Voice VLAN Specific VLAN for voice traffic SMTP SMTP control configure Show Display the current information System Command System Configuration Description Show system configuration Syntax 279 System Configuration all lt port_list gt Parameters all Show all switch configuration default Show system configuration lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports Example To display system information SWITCH gt System configuration System Contact System Name IGSW 24040T System Location Timezone Offset 0 CLI Prompt SWITCH MAC Address 00 30 4f 76 27 10 Power Status AC Power OFF DC Power1 OFF DC Power2 ON Temperature 49 5 C 121 1 F System Time 1970 01 01 Thu 00 08 08 0000 System Uptime 00 08 08 Software Version Beta110426 Software Date 2010 06 23 15 43 02 0800 Previous Restart Cool SWITCH gt System Name Description Set or show the system name Syntax System Name lt name gt Parameters lt name gt
189. and will be removed from the active topology Control whether a port in the error disabled state automatically will be enabled after a certain time If recovery is not enabled ports have to be disabled and re enabled for normal STP operation The condition is also cleared by a system reboot The time that has to pass before a port in the error disabled state can be enabled Valid values are between 30 and 86400 seconds 24 hours The Gigabit Ethernet Switch implements the Rapid Spanning Protocol as the default spanning tree protocol While select Compatible mode the system uses the RSTP 802 1w to compatible and co work with another STP 802 1d s BPDU control packets Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 138 NS3550 24T 4S User Manual Bridge Status This page provides a status overview for all STP bridge instances The displayed table contains a row for each STP bridge instance where the column displays the following information The STP Bridge Status screen is shown in Figure 4 7 5 STP Bridges Root MSTI Bridge ID Root Topology Flag Topology Change Last CIST 560 00 00 30 4P 24 04 07 60 00 00 50 4P 00 00 00 18 0000 steady 0d 03 11 08 Auto Refresh L Figure 4 7 5 STP Bridge Status Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e MSTI The Bridge Instance This is also a link to the STP Detailed Bridge Status e Bridge ID The
190. anual Set rate limit value in 1024k for port 1 SWITCH gt security network acl rate 1 1024k Security Network ACL Add Description Add or modify Access Control Entry ACE If the ACE ID parameter lt ace_id gt is specified and an entry with this ACE ID already exists the ACE will be modified Otherwise a new ACE will be added If the ACE ID is not specified the next available ACE ID will be used If the next ACE ID parameter lt ace_id_next gt is specified the ACE will be placed before this ACE in the list If the next ACE ID is not specified the ACE will be placed last in the list If the Switch keyword is used the rule applies to all ports If the Port keyword is used the rule applies to the specified port only If the Policy keyword is used the rule applies to all ports configured with the specified policy The default is that the rule applies to all ports Syntax Security Network ACL Add lt ace_id gt lt ace_id_next gt switch port lt port gt policy lt policy gt lt vid gt lt tag_prio gt lt dmac_type gt etype lt etype gt lt smac gt lt dmac gt arp lt sip gt lt dip gt lt smac gt lt arp_opcode gt lt arp_flags gt ip lt sip gt lt dip gt lt protocol gt lt ip_flags gt icmp lt sip gt lt dip gt lt icmp_type gt lt icmp_code gt lt ip_flags gt udp lt sip gt lt dip gt lt sport gt lt dport gt lt ip_flags
191. ap mode operation Possible modes are Enabled Enable SNMP trap mode operation Disabled Disable SNMP trap mode operation Indicates the SNMP trap supported version Possible versions are SNMP v1 Set SNMP trap supported version 1 SNMP v2c Set SNMP trap supported version 2c SNMP v3 Set SNMP trap supported version 3 Indicates the community access string when send SNMP trap packet The allowed string length is 0 to 255 and the allowed content is the ASCII characters from 33 to 126 Indicates the SNMP trap destination address Provide the trap destination IPv6 address of this switch IPv6 address is in 128 bit records represented as eight fields of up to four hexadecimal digits with a colon separate each field For example fe80 215 c5ff fe03 4dc7 The symbol is a special syntax that can be used as a shorthand way of representing multiple 16 bit groups of contiguous zeros but it can only appear once It also used a following legally IPv4 address For example 192 1 2 34 Indicates the SNMP entity is permitted to generate authentication failure traps Possible modes are Enabled Enable SNMP trap authentication failure Disabled Disable SNMP trap authentication failure Indicates the SNMP trap link up and link down mode operation Possible modes are Enabled Enable SNMP trap link up and link down mode operation Disabled Disable SNMP trap link up and link down mode operation Indicates the SNMP trap inform mod
192. applies If NAS is globally enabled this selection controls the port s authentication mode The following modes are available Force Authorized In this mode the switch will send one EAPOL Success frame when the port link comes up and any client on the port will be allowed network access without authentication Force Unauthorized 204 NS3550 24T 4S User Manual In this mode the switch will send one EAPOL Failure frame when the port link comes up and any client on the port will be disallowed network access Port based 802 1X In the 802 1X world the user is called the supplicant the switch is the authenticator and the RADIUS server is the authentication server The authenticator acts as the man in the middle forwarding requests and responses between the supplicant and the authentication server Frame sent between the supplicant and the switch is special 802 1X frame known as EAPOL EAP Over LANs frames EAPOL frames encapsulate EAP PDUs RFC3748 Frame sent between the switch and the RADIUS server is RADIUS packet RADIUS packets also encapsulate EAP PDUs together with other attributes like the switch s IP address name and the supplicant s port number on the switch EAP is very flexible in that it allows for different authentication methods like MD5 Challenge PEAP and TLS The important thing is that the authenticator the switch doesn t need to know which authentication method the supplicant and the authentication serve
193. arison Administration Console The administration console is an internal character oriented and command line user interface for performing system administration such as displaying statistics or changing option settings Using this method you can view the administration console from a terminal personal computer Apple Macintosh or workstation connected to the switch s console serial port There are two ways to use this management method via direct access or modem port access The following sections describe these methods For more information about using the console refer to Chapter 5 Command Line Interface Console Management 39 PC Workstation LE Browser LZ IP Ackiress 192 1608 0 100 IP Address 192 168 0 x Figure 3 1 Console Management Diagram Direct Access Direct access to the administration console is achieved by directly connecting a terminal or a PC equipped with a terminal emulation program such as HyperTerminal to the Managed Switch console serial port When using this management method a straight DB9 RS 232 cable is required to connect the switch to the PC After making this connection configure the terminal emulation program to use the following parameters The default parameters are a 115200 bps E 8 data bits E No parity E 1 stop bit COM1 Properties Port Settings Bits per second Data bits Parity Stop bits Flow control Restore Defaults Figure 3 2 Terminal Parameter Set
194. atch this entry Yes IPv4 frames where the MF bit is set or the FRAG OFFSET field is greater than zero must be able to match this entry Any Any value is allowed don t care Specify the options flag setting for this ACE No Pv4 frames where the options flag is set must not be able to match this entry Yes IPv4 frames where the options flag is set must be able to match this entry Any Any value is allowed don t care Specify the source IP filter for this ACE Any No source IP filter is specified Source IP filter is don t care Host Source IP filter is set to Host Specify the source IP address in the SIP Address field that Network Source IP filter is set to Network Specify the source IP address and source IP mask in the SIP Address and SIP Mask fields that appear When Host or Network is selected for the source IP filter you can enter a specific SIP address in dotted decimal notation When Network is selected for the source IP filter you can enter a specific SIP mask in dotted decimal notation Specify the destination IP filter for this ACE Any No destination IP filter is specified Destination IP filter is don t care Host Destination IP filter is set to Host Specify the destination IP address in the DIP Address field that Network Destination IP filter is set to Network Specify the destination IP address and destination IP mask in the DIP Address and DIP Mask fields that appear When Host or
195. ation Start from LAN with 2o entries per page a embers 7 ait vento lle loaded plz 1 O O Cod m4 lv lv e e e e e e ede e fe i MMMJOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOO AO PEPER EER PEPE EP BP Add new entry Figure 4 6 9 Add new VLAN group assign VLAN members for VLAN 2 and VLAN 3 and Remove Specify Ports from VLAN 1 Member It s import to remove the VLAN members from VLAN 1 configuration Or the ports would become overlap setting About the overlapped VLAN configuration see next VLAN configure sample 4 Assign PVID for each port Port 1 Port 2 and Port 3 PVID 2 Port 4 Port 5 and Port 6 PVID 3 Port 7 Port 24 PVID 17 5 Enable VLAN Tag for specific ports Link Type Port 3 VLAN 2 and Port 6 VLAN 3 The Per Port VLAN configuration in Figure 4 6 10 125 VLAN Port Configuration ret evo fitetea fame tye Unk tee ai aMode AS z o Fo M eto 1 82 10 Tag d d O d O d O d d d Pi d d d LI d LI d d d O O O Figure 4 6 10 Port 1 Port 6 VLAN Configuration 126 NS3550 24T 4S User Manual VLAN Trunking between two 802 1Q aware switch The most cases are used for Uplink to other switches VLANs are separated at different switches but they need to access with other switches within the same VLAN group The screen is shown in Figure 4 6 11 PC 2 PC 3 Untagged Tagged PC 5 PC 6 Untagged Tagged ku m m m m m m
196. ation This page allows you to configure the LLDP MED The LLDPMED Configuration screen is shown in Figure 4 14 2 LLDPMED Configuration Fast Start Repeat Count Fast start repeat count Coordinates Location Ce Es Y A TY Civic Address Location O street Leading street direction sinensis ma Mame en ii location info C O S O Emergency Call Service Policies Policy Port Configuration Figure 4 14 2 LLDPMED Configuration p Page Screenshot 258 The page includes the following fields Fast start repeat count Object e Fast start repeat count Coordinates Location Object e Latitude e Longitude e Altitude e Map Datum NS3550 24T 4S User Manual Description Rapid startup and Emergency Call Service Location Identification Discovery of endpoints is a critically important aspect of VoIP systems in general In addition it is best to advertise only those pieces of information which are specifically relevant to particular endpoint types for example only advertise the voice network policy to permitted voice capable devices both in order to conserve the limited LLDPU space and to reduce security and system integrity issues that can come with inappropriate knowledge of the network policy With this in mind LLDP MED defines an LLDP MED Fast Start interaction between the protocol and the application layers on top of the protocol in order to achieve these related properties Initially a Network Conn
197. ber Typical network application Strict priority and Weighted Round Robin WRR CoS policies Supports QoS and In Out bandwidth control on each port Traffic policing policies on the switch port QoS Control List Wizard makes QoS creation and configuration easier and more quickly DSCP remarking Supports IGMP Snooping v1 v2 and v3 Querier mode support IGMP Snooping port filtering Multicast VLAN Registration MVR support IEEE 802 1x Port Based MAC Based network access authentication Built in RADIUS client to co operate with the RADIUS servers TACACS login users access authentication RADIUS TACACS users access authentication IP Based Access Control List ACL MAC Based Access Control List Source MAC IP address binding DHCP Snooping to filter un trusted DHCP messages Dynamic ARP Inspection discards ARP packets with invalid MAC address to IP address binding IP Source Guard prevents IP spoofing attacks Auto DoS rule to defend DoS attack IP address access management to prevent unauthorized intruder gt Management Mi Switch Management Interfaces Console Telnet Command Line Interface Web switch management SNMP v1 v2c and v3 switch management SSH SSL secure access Mi Four RMON groups history statistics alarms and events 22 NS3550 24T 4S User Manual IPv6 IP Address NTP DNS management Built in Trivial File Transfer Protocol TFTP client BOOTP and DHCP for IP address assig
198. ble Disable IGMP Leave Proxy default Show IGMP snooping mode Default Setting disable Example Enable IGMP leave proxy SWITCH gt igmp leave proxy enable IGMP State Description Set or show the IGMP snooping state for VLAN Syntax IGMP State lt vid gt enable disable 388 NS3550 24T 4S User Manual Parameters lt vid gt VLAN ID 1 4095 default Show all VLANs enable Enable IGMP snooping disable Disable IGMP snooping default Show IGMP snooping mode Default Setting enable Example Disable VID 1 SWITCH gt igmp state 1 disable IGMP Querier Description Set or show the IGMP snooping querier mode for VLAN Syntax IGMP Querier lt vid gt enable disable Parameters lt vid gt VLAN ID 1 4095 default Show all VLANs enable Enable IGMP querier disable Disable IGMP querier default Show IGMP querier mode Default Setting disable Example Enable the IGMP snooping querier mode for VLAN SWITCH gt igmp querier 1 enable 389 IGMP Fastleave Description Set or show the IGMP snooping fast leave port mode Syntax IGMP Fastleave lt port_list gt enable disable Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports enable Enable IGMP fast leave disable Disable IGMP fast leave default Show IGMP fast leave mode Default Setting disable Example Enable the IGMP snooping fast leave port mode SWITCH gt ig
199. ble UPnP mode operation When the mode is enabled two ACEs are added automatically to trap UPNP related packets to CPU The ACEs are automatically removed when the mode is disabled The TTL value is used by UPnP to send SSDP advertisement messages Valid values are in the range 1 to 255 The duration carried in SSDP packets is used to inform a control point or control points how often it or they should receive a SSDP advertisement message from this switch If a control point does not receive any message within the duration it will think that the switch no longer exists Due to the unreliable nature of UDP in the standard it is recommended that such refreshing of advertisements to be done at less than one half of the advertising duration In the implementation the switch sends SSDP messages periodically at the interval one half of the advertising duration minus 30 seconds Valid values are in the range 100 to 86400 99 Buttons Save Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values Y my Network Places E l Joj x File Edit View Favorites Tools Help T 4 F Ea Her Q Back gt wi A Search T Folders 252 Address us My Network Places Go Local Network gt gt Network Tasks gt Add a network place View network connections Set up a wireless network For a home or small office The Internet Ear Search Active Directory cy Hide ico
200. ble rx tx Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports enable Enable LLDP reception and transmission disable Disable LLDP rx Enable LLDP reception only tx Enable LLDP transmission only default Show LLDP mode Default Setting disable Example Enable port1 LLDP function SWITCH gt IIdp mode 1 enable LLDP Optional TLV Description Show or Set LLDP Optional TLVs 400 NS3550 24T 4S User Manual Syntax LLDP Optional_ TLV lt port_list gt port_descr sys namelsys descr sys capalmgmt_addr enable disable Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports port_descr Description of the port sysm_name System name sys descr _ Description of the system sys _ capa System capabilities mgmt_addr Master s IP address default Show optional TLV s configuration enable Enables TLV disable Disable TLV default Show optional TLV s configuration Default Setting Description of the port Enable System name Enable Description of the system Enable System capabilities Enable Master s IP address Enable Example Disable description of the port for port1 SWITCH gt lldp optional_tlv 1 port_descr disable LLDP Interval Description Set or show LLDP Tx interval Syntax LLDP Interval lt interval gt Parameters lt interval gt LLDP transmission interval 5 32768 Default Setting 30 Example Set transmission interval in
201. bled Disable DHCP relay information mode operation e Relay Information Indicates the DHCP relay information option policy When enable DHCP relay Policy information mode operation if agent receives a DHCP message that already contains relay agent information It will enforce the policy And it only works under DHCP relay information operation mode enabled Possible policies are Replace Replace the original relay information when receive a DHCP message that already contains it Keep Keep the original relay information when receive a DHCP message that already contains it Drop Drop the package when receive a DHCP message that already contains relay information Buttons Save Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 61 DHCP Relay Statistics This page provides statistics for DHCP relay The DHCP Relay Statistics screen is shown in Figure 4 2 12 DHCP Relay Statistics Server Statistics Transmit to Transmit Receive from Receive Missing Agent Receive Missing Receive Missing Receive Bad Receive Bad Server Error Server Option Circuit ID Remote ID Circuit ID Remote ID 0 0 0 0 0 Client Statistics Transmit to Client Receive from Client Receive Agent Option Replace Agent Option Keep Agent Option Drop Agent Option O 0 O 0 O O 0 Auto Refresh LJ Figure 4 2 12 DHCP Relay Statistics Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields
202. bled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Figure 4 12 1 Port Limit Control Configuration Overview Page Screenshot 232 The page includes the following fields System Configuration Object e Mode e Aging Enabled e Aging Period Port Configuration NS3550 24T 4S User Manual Description Indicates if Limit Control is globally enabled or disabled on the switch If globally disabled other modules may still use the underlying functionality but limit checks and corresponding actions are disabled If checked secured MAC addresses are subject to aging as discussed under Aging Period If Aging Enabled is checked then the aging period is controlled with this input If other modules are using the underlying port security for securing MAC addresses they may have other requirements to the aging period The underlying port security will use the shorter requested aging period of all modules that use the functionality The Aging Period can be set to a number between 10 and 10 000 000 seconds To understand why aging may be desired consider the following scenario Suppose an end host is connected to a 3rd party switch or hub which in turn is connected to a port on this switch on which Limit Control is enabled The end host will be allowed to forward if the limit is not exceeded Now suppose that th
203. both Media Endpoints Class Il and Generic Endpoints Class LLDP MED Generic Endpoint Class 1 The LLDP MED Generic Endpoint Class definition is applicable to all endpoint products that require the base LLDP discovery services defined in TIA 1057 however do not support IP media or act as an end user communication appliance Such devices may include but are not limited to IP Communication Controllers other communication related servers or any device requiring basic services as defined in TIA 1057 Discovery services defined in this class include LAN configuration device location network policy power management and inventory management LLDP MED Media Endpoint Class II The LLDP MED Media Endpoint Class II definition is applicable to all endpoint products that have IP media capabilities however may or may not be associated with a particular end user Capabilities include all of the capabilities defined for the previous Generic Endpoint Class Class and are extended to include aspects related to media streaming Example product categories expected to adhere to this class include but are not limited to Voice Media Gateways Conference Bridges Media Servers and similar Discovery services defined in this class include media type specific network layer policy discovery LLDP MED Communication Endpoint Class lll The LLDP MED Communication Endpoint Class III definition is applicable to all endpoint products that act as
204. by aging the entries For ports in MAC based Auth mode reauthentication doesn t cause direct communication between the switch and the client so this will not detect whether the client is still attached or not and the only way to free any resources is to age the entry e Hold Time This setting applies to the following modes i e modes using the Port Security functionality to secure MAC addresses Single 802 1X Multi 802 1X MAC Based Auth If a client is denied access either because the RADIUS server denies the client access or because the RADIUS server request times out according to the timeout specified on the Configuration Security AAA page the client is put on hold in the Unauthorized state The hold timer does not count during an on going authentication In MAC based Auth mode the The switch will ignore new frames coming from the client during the hold time The Hold Time can be set to a number between 10 and 1000000 seconds e RADIUS Assigned QoS RADIUS assigned QoS provides a means to centrally control the traffic class to Enabled which traffic coming from a successfully authenticated supplicant is assigned on the switch The RADIUS server must be configured to transmit special RADIUS attributes to take advantage of this feature see RADIUS Assigned QoS Enabled below for a detailed description 203 e RADIUS Assigned VLAN Enabled e Guest VLAN Enabled e Guest VLAN ID e Max Reauth Count e Allow Guest VLAN
205. by the Limit Control module This state can only be shown if Action is set to Shutdown or Trap amp Shutdown e Reopen Button If a port is shutdown by this module you may reopen it by clicking this button which will only be enabled if this is the case For other methods refer to Shutdown in the Action section Note that clicking the reopen button causes the page to be refreshed so non committed changes will be lost Click to refresh the page Note that non committed changes will be lost Save Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values Access Management Configure access management table on this page The maximum entry number is 16 If the application s type match any one of access management entry it will allow to access the switch The Access Management Configuration screen is shown in Figure 4 12 2 Access Management Configuration Mode Disable v Delete Start IP Address End IP Address HTTP HTTPS SNMP TELNET SSH Figure 4 12 2 Access Management Configuration Overview Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Mode Indicates the access management mode operation Possible modes are Enabled Enable access management mode operation 234 e Delete e Start IP address e End IP address e HTTP HTTPS e SNMP e TELNET SSH Buttons Add new entry Save Click to save changes NS3550 24T 4S U
206. ch E The path cost to the root from the transmitting port m The port identifier of the transmitting port 131 The switch sends BPDUs to communicate and construct the spanning tree topology All switches connected to the LAN on which the packet is transmitted will receive the BPDU BPDU does nt directly forward by the switch but the receiving switch uses the information in the frame to calculate a BPDU and if the topology changes initiates a BPDU transmission The communication between switches via BPDUs results in the following E One switch is elected as the root switch a The shortest distance to the root switch is calculated for each switch a A designated switch is selected This is the switch closest to the root switch through which packets will be forwarded to the root a A port for each switch is selected This is the port providing the best path from the switch to the root switch a Ports included in the STP are selected Creating a Stable STP Topology It is to make the root port a fastest link If all switches have STP enabled with default settings the switch with the lowest MAC address in the network will become the root switch By increasing the priority lowering the priority number of the best switch STP can be forced to select the best switch as the root switch When STP is enabled using the default parameters the path between source and destination stations in a switched network might not be ideal For instance connecti
207. ch system information is provided here Configure the switch managed IP information on this page Configure the switch managed IPv6 information on this page This page provides an overview of the current users Currently the only way to login as another user on the web server is to close and reopen the browser This page provides an overview of the privilege levels Configure NTP on this page Configure UPnP on this page Configure DHCP Relay on this page This page provides statistics for DHCP relay This page displays the CPU load using a SVG graph The switch system log information is provided here The switch system detailed log information is provided here Configure remote syslog on this page This page facilitates an update of the firmware controlling the switch Upgrade the firmware via TFTP server You can save the switch configuration The configuration file is in XML format with a hierarchy of tags You can load the switch configuration The configuration file is in XML format with a hierarchy of tags Configure SMTP for alarm on this page This page is for you setting up digital input and digital output and what kind of action will be done This page is for you monitoring power and port status If they are failed system will trigger alarm You can reset the configuration of the switch on this page Only the IP configuration is retained You can restart the switch on this page After restart the switch will boot
208. ck to add new VLAN Save Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values VLAN setting example Separate VLAN 802 1Q VLAN Trunk Port Isolate Two separate 802 1Q VLAN The diagram shows how the Managed Switch handles Tagged and Untagged traffic flow for two VLANs VLAN Group 2 and VLAN Group 3 are separated VLAN Each VLAN isolate network traffic so only members of the VLAN receive traffic from the same VLAN members The screen is shown in Figure 4 6 8 appears and Table 4 6 2 describes the port configuration of the Managed Switches 1 I l l I I I l l I I I l ee it AS nn Ti e a o a ae oe PC 1 PC 2 PC 3 i PC 4 PC 5 PC 6 Untagged Untagged Tagged i Untagged Untagged Tagged l i VLAN 2 VLAN 3 Ms PA NN A a TO Figure 4 6 8 two separate VLAN Diagram E VLAN Group 1 Port 7 Port 24 123 VLAN Group 2 Port 1 Port 2 Port 3 VLAN Group 3 Port 4 Port 5 Port 6 Table 4 6 2 VLAN and Port Configuration The scenario described as follow Untagged packet entering VLAN 2 1 While PC 1 transmit an untagged packet enters Port 1 the Managed Switch will tag it with a VLAN Tag 2 PC 2 and PC 3 will be received the packet through Port 2 and Port 3 2 PC 4 PC 5 and PC 6 received no packet 3 While the packet leaves Port 2 it will b
209. cked links at the time of a primary link failure is also accomplished automatically without operator intervention This automatic network reconfiguration provides maximum uptime to network users However the concepts of the Spanning Tree Algorithm and protocol are a complicated and complex subject and must be fully researched and understood It is possible to cause serious degradation of the performance of the network if the Spanning Tree is incorrectly configured Please read the following before making any changes from the default values The Switch STP performs the following functions Creates a single spanning tree from any combination of switching or bridging elements E Creates multiple spanning trees from any combination of ports contained within a single switch in user specified groups E Automatically reconfigures the spanning tree to compensate for the failure addition or removal of any element in the tree m Reconfigures the spanning tree without operator intervention Bridge Protocol Data Units For STP to arrive at a stable network topology the following information is used a The unique switch identifier E The path cost to the root associated with each switch port E The port identifier STP communicates between switches on the network using Bridge Protocol Data Units BPDUs Each BPDU contains the following information E The unique identifier of the switch that the transmitting switch currently believes is the root swit
210. creased reliability for delivery of your data and allows you to prioritize certain applications across your network You can define exactly how you want the switch to treat selected applications and types of traffic You can use QoS on your system to Control a wide variety of network traffic by Classifying traffic based on packet attributes Assigning priorities to traffic for example to set higher priorities to time critical or business critical applications Applying security policy through traffic filtering Provide predictable throughput for multimedia applications such as video conferencing or voice over IP by minimizing delay and jitter Improve performance for specific types of traffic and preserve performance as the amount of traffic grows Reduce the need to constantly add bandwidth to the network Manage network congestion QoS Terminology Classifier classifies the traffic on the network Traffic classifications are determined by protocol application source destination and so on You can create and modify classifications The Switch then groups classified traffic in order to schedule them with the appropriate service level DiffServ Code Point DSCP is the traffic prioritization bits within an IP header that are encoded by certain applications and or devices to indicate the level of service required by the packet across a network Service Level defines the priority that will be given to a set of classifie
211. ct Description e Port The port on which the LLDP frame was received e Device Type LLDP MED Devices are comprised of two primary Device Types Network Connectivity Devices and Endpoint Devices LLDP MED Network Connectivity Device Definition LLDP MED Network Connectivity Devices as defined in TIA 1057 provide access to the IEEE 802 based LAN infrastructure for LLDP MED Endpoint Devices An LLDP MED Network Connectivity Device is a LAN access device based on any of the following technologies 1 LAN Switch Router 2 IEEE 802 1 Bridge 3 IEEE 802 3 Repeater included for historical reasons 4 IEEE 802 11 Wireless Access Point 5 Any device that supports the IEEE 802 1AB and MED extensions defined by TIA 1057 and can relay IEEE 802 frames via any method LLDP MED Endpoint Device Definition Within the LLDP MED Endpoint Device category the LLDP MED scheme is broken into further Endpoint Device Classes as defined in the following Each LLDP MED Endpoint Device Class is defined to build upon the capabilities defined for the previous Endpoint Device Class Fore example will any LLDP MED Endpoint Device claiming compliance as a Media Endpoint Class ll also support all aspects of TIA 1057 applicable to Generic Endpoints Class 1 and any LLDP MED Endpoint Device claiming compliance as a Communication 263 e LLDP MED Capabilities e Application Type e Policy Device Class III will also support all aspects of TIA 1057 applicable to
212. ct the power plug of the power cable to a standard wall outlet When the Managed Switch receives power the Power LED should remain solid Green Rack Mounting To install the Managed Switch in a 19 inch standard rack please follow the instructions described below Step1 Place the Managed Switch on a hard flat surface with the front panel positioned towards the front side Step2 Attach the rack mount bracket to each side of the Managed Switch with supplied screws attached to the package Figure 2 5 shows how to attach brackets to one side of the Managed Switch Figure 2 5 Attach Brackets to the Managed Switch You must use the screws supplied with the mounting brackets Damage caused to the parts by using incorrect screws would invalidate the warranty Step3 Secure the brackets tightly Step4 Follow the same steps to attach the second bracket to the opposite side Step5 After the brackets are attached to the Managed Switch use suitable screws to securely attach the brackets to the rack as shown in Figure 2 6 30 NS3550 24T 4S User Manual Figure 2 6 Mounting the Managed Switch on a Rack Step6 Proceeds with the steps 4 and steps 5 of session 2 2 1 Desktop Installation to connect the network cabling and supply power to the Managed Switch Installing the SFP transceiver The sections describe how to plug in an SFP transceiver into an SFP slot The SFP transceivers are hot swappable You can plug in and out the tra
213. ction 382 NS3550 24T 4S User Manual Default auto Example Disable STP P2P function on port SWITCH gt stp port p2p 1 disable STP Port RestrictedRole Description Set or show the MSTP restrictedRole port parameter Syntax STP Port RestrictedRole lt port_list gt enable disable Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports enable Enable MSTP restricted role disable Disable MSTP restricted role Default disable Example Eisable STP restricted role on port SWITCH gt stp port restrictedrole 1 enable STP Port RestrictedTcn Description Set or show the MSTP restrictedTcn port parameter Syntax STP Port RestrictedTcn lt port_list gt enable disable Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports 383 enable Enable MSTP restricted TCN disable Disable MSTP restricted TCN Default disable Example Eisable STP restricted TCN on port1 SWITCH gt stp port restrictedtcn 1 enable STP Port bpduGuard Description Set or show the bpduGuard port parameter Syntax STP Port bpduGuard lt port_list gt enable disable Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports enable Enable port BPDU Guard disable Disable port BPDU Guard Default disable Example Eisable BPDU guard on port SWITCH gt stp port bpduguard 1 enable STP Port Statistic Description Show STP port
214. cy energy and if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual may cause harmful interference to radio communications You are cautioned that any changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user s authority to operate the equipment Notice This is a Class A product In a domestic environment this product may cause radio interference in which case the user may be required to take adequate measures This Class A digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES 003 Cet appareil num rique de la classe A est conforme a la norme NMB 003du Canada 2004 108 EC EMC Directive Hereby UTC Fire amp Security Americas Corporation Inc declares that this device is in compliance with the essential requirements and other relevant provisions of Directive 2004 108 EC 2002 96 EC WEEE directive Products marked with this symbol cannot be disposed of as unsorted municipal waste in the European Union For proper recycling return this product to your local supplier upon the purchase of equivalent new equipment or dispose of it at designated collection points For more information see www recyclethis info For contact information see our Web site www interlogix com www interlogix com customer support NS3550 24T 4S User Manual TABLE OF CONTENTS IFS NS35590 241 45 User M n dl ssrin ii ctaids 1 INTRODUCTION cuscusmniancnaca cai 18 Packet Contents siciliana 18 P
215. d Auto Refresh L Figure 4 14 4 LLDP Neighbor Information Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Local Port The port on which the LLDP frame was received e Chassis ID The Chassis ID is the identification of the neighbor s LLDP frames e Remote Port ID The Remote Port ID is the identification of the neighbor port e System Name System Name is the name advertised by the neighbor unit e Port Description Port Description is the port description advertised by the neighbor unit 265 e System Capabilities System Capabilities describes the neighbor unit s capabilities The possible capabilities are 1 Other Repeater Bridge WLAN Access Point Router Telephone DOCSIS cable device Station only Reserved When a capability is enabled the capability is followed by If the capability is disabled the capability is followed by e Management Address Management Address is the neighbor unit s address that is used for higher layer entities to assist the discovery by the network management This could for instance hold the neighbor s IP address O COND OB Y N Buttons Retesh J Click to refresh the page immediately Auto refresh Check this box to enable an automatic refresh of the page at regular intervals Port Statistics This page provides an overview of all LLDP traffic Two types of counters are shown The LLDP Statistics screen is shown in Figure 4
216. d Out Local Counters The displayed table contains a row for each port The columns hold the following information 267 Object e Local Port e Tx Frames e Rx Frames e Rx Errors e Frames Discarded e TLVs Discarded e TLVs Unrecognized e Org Discarded e Age Outs Buttons Retresh Description The port on which LLDP frames are received or transmitted The number of LLDP frames transmitted on the port The number of LLDP frames received on the port The number of received LLDP frames containing some kind of error If an LLDP frame is received on a port and the switch s internal table has run full the LLDP frame is counted and discarded This situation is known as Too Many Neighbors in the LLDP standard LLDP frames require a new entry in the table when the Chassis ID or Remote Port ID is not already contained within the table Entries are removed from the table when a given port links down an LLDP shutdown frame is received or when the entry ages out Each LLDP frame can contain multiple pieces of information known as TLVs TLV is short for Type Length Value If a TLV is malformed it is counted and discarded The number of well formed TLVs but with an unknown type value The number of organizationally TLVs received Each LLDP frame contains information about how long time the LLDP information is valid age out time If no new LLDP frame is received within the age out time the LLDP information is removed
217. d traffic You can create and modify service levels Policy comprises a set of rules that are applied to a network so that a network meets the needs of the business That is traffic can be prioritized across a network according to its importance to that particular business type QoS Profile consists of multiple sets of rules classifier plus service level combinations The QoS profile is assigned to a port s Rules comprises a service level and a classifier to define how the Switch will treat certain types of traffic Rules are associated with a QoS Profile see above To implement QoS on your network you need to carry out the following actions 1 Define a service level to determine the priority that will be applied to traffic 2 Apply a classifier to determine how the incoming traffic will be classified and thus treated by the Switch 3 Create a QoS profile that associates a service level and a classifier 163 4 Apply a QoS profile to a port s QCL Configuration Wizard This handy wizard helps you set up a QCL quickly The QCL Configuration Wizard screen is shown in Figure 4 9 1 Welcome to the QCL Configuration Wizard Please select an action Set up Port Policies Group ports into several types according to different QGL policies Set up Typical Network Application Rules set up the specific CL for different typical network application quality control Set up ToS Precedence Mapping set u
218. dBm RX Sen dBm dBm Power Budget 12 12 19 19 18 18 Power Budget 7 5 7 5 10 Operating Temperature O 50 C 40 75 C O 50 C 40 75 C O 50 C O 50 C Operating Temperature O 50 C O 50 C 40 75 C O 50 C S30 25LC 10 S35 2SLC 10 S30 2SLC 30 S35 2SLC 30 S30 2SLC 70 S35 2SLC 70 1000Base LX 1000Base LX 1000Base LHX 1000Base LHX 1 000Base ZX 1000Base ZX NiNININI IN N Single mode Single mode Single mode Single mode Single mode Single mode LC LC LC LC LC LC 1310nm 1310nm 1310nm 1310nm 1550nm 1550nm 1310nm 1310nm 1310nm 1310nm 1550nm 1550nm 10km 10km 30km 30km 70km 7okm 10 5 10 5 21 21 24 24 O 50 C 40 75 C O 50 C 40 75 C O 50 C 40 75 C 1000Base BX S30 1SLC A 10 S30 1SLC B 10 30 1SLC A 20 30 1SLC B 20 S30 1SLC A 60 30 1SLC B 60 1000Base BxX10 U 1000Base BX10 D 1000Base BX20 U 1000Base Bx20 D 1000Base BX60 U 1000Base BX60 D h be do o o ln Single mode Single mode Single mode Single mode Single mode Single mode LC LC LC LC LC LC 1310nm 1490nm 1310nm 1490nm 1310nm 1490nm 220m distance ls based on 62 5 125 OM1 fiber 550m distance la based on 50 125 OM2 fiber Requires laser optimized 50 125 OMS fiber to achleve 2km distance Fiber should be tested and verified to OM3 standard Es 1490nm 1310nm 1490nm 1310nm 1490
219. dd 1 2001 7b8 3 2c 123 IP NTP Server Delete Description Delete NTP server entry Syntax IP NTP Server Delete lt server_index gt Parameters lt server_index gt The server index 1 5 Example To delete NTP server SWITCH gt ip ntp server delete 1 290 Port Management Command Port Configuration Description Show port configuration Syntax Port Configuration lt port_list gt up down Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports up Show ports which are up down Show ports which are down default Show all ports Example Display port1 4 status SWITCH gt port configuration 1 4 Port Configuration Port State Mode Flow Control MaxFrame Power Excessive Link Enabled Auto Disabled Enabled Discard Down Enabled Auto Disabled Enabled Discard Down Enabled Auto Disabled Enabled Discard Down Enabled Auto Disabled Enabled Discard Down Port Mode Description Set or show the port speed and duplex mode Syntax Port Mode lt port_list gt 1Ohdx 10fdx 100hdx 100fdx 1000fdx auto Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports 10hdx 10 Mbps half duplex 10fdx 10 Mbps full duplex 100hdx 100 Mbps half duplex 100fdx 100 Mbps full duplex 1000fdx 1 Gbps full duplex auto Auto negotiation of speed and duplex default Show configured and current mode Default Setting 291 NS3550 24T 4S User Manual Auto Example S
220. dule Make sure there is no network activity Go through the management interface of the switch to disable the port in advance Remove the Fiber Optic Cable gently Turn the handle of the MGB module to the horizontal position Pull out the module gently with the handle SFP Transceiver Figure 2 8 Pull out the SFP Transceiver Never pull out the module without pull the handle or the push bolts on the module Directly pulling out the module may damage the module and SFP module slot of the Managed Switch MFB series SFP module remove procedure is the same with MGB series SFP Module 33 Wiring the Power Input The 6 contact terminal block connector on the rear panel of NS3550 24T 4S is used for two DC redundant powers inputs Please follow the steps below to insert the power wire ll Insert positive negative DC power wires into the contacts 1 and 2 for DC POWER 1 or 5 and 6 for DC POWER 2 DC POWER ON DIO DI7 DOO DO1 GND GND Ax CAUTION Please refer to user s manual before connect the DC wire DC Input Range 36V 72V DC LI D DC 1 Fault DC 2 Figure 2 9 Wiring the Redundant Power Inputs 2 Tighten the wire clamp screws to prevent the wires from loosening Figure 2 10 6 Pin Terminal Block Power Wiring Input The wire gauge for the terminal block should be in the range between 12 24 AWG 34 NS3550 24T 4S User Manual Wiring the Digital Input Output The 6 contact terminal bloc
221. e Buttons Save Click to save changes Description The switch port number Controls whether LACP is enabled on this switch port LACP will form an aggregation when 2 or more ports are connected to the same partner LACP can form max 12 LLAGs per switch The Key value incurred by the port range 1 65535 The Auto setting will set the key as appropriate by the physical link speed 10Mb 1 100Mb 2 1Gb 3 Using the Specific setting a user defined value can be entered Ports with the same Key value can participate in the same aggregation group while ports with different keys cannot The default setting is Auto The Role shows the LACP activity status The Active will transmit LACP packets each second while Passive will wait for a LACP packet from a partner speak if spoken to Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values LACP System Status This page provides a status overview for all LACP instances The LACP Status page display the current LACP aggregation Groups and LACP Port status The LACP System Status screen is shown in Figure 4 5 5 LACP System Status Aggr ID Partner System ID Partner Key Last Changed Local Ports No ports enabled or o existing partners Auto Refresh L Figure 4 5 5 LACP System Status Page Screenshot 102 NS3550 24T 4S User Manual The page includes the following fields Object Description e Aggr ID The Aggregation ID associated
222. e SMTP Mailsubject Description Set or show up SMTP e mail subject configure Syntax SMTP Mailsubject lt mailsubject_ text gt Parameters lt mailsubject_text gt SMTP E mail Subject Default Setting disable SMTP Mailto1 Description Set or show SMTP e mail 1 to configure Syntax SMTP Mailto1 lt mailto1_ text gt Parameters lt mailto1 text gt SMTP e mail 1 to address Default Setting disable SMTP Mailto2 Description Set or show SMTP e mail 2 to configure Syntax SMTP Mailto2 lt mailto2_ text gt Parameters lt mailto1 text gt SMTP e mail 2 to address Default Setting disable 433 NS3550 24T 4S User Manual Show Command Show ACL Configuration Description Show ACL Configuration Syntax Show acl Show Link Aggregation Configuration Description Show link aggregation configuration Syntax Show aggr Show IGMP Configuration Description Show IGMP snooping configuration Syntax Show igmp Show IP Configuration Description Show IP configuration Syntax Show ip Show LACP Configuration Description Show LACP configuration Syntax Show lacp Show LLDP Configuration Description 434 Show LLDP configuration Syntax Show Ildp Show MAC Configuration Description Show MAC address table configuration Syntax Show MAC Show Mirror Configuration Description Show mirror configuration Syntax Show mirror Show PoE Co
223. e Ports web page There are number of parameters that can be configured with an ACE Read the Web page help text to get further information for each of them The maximum number of ACEs is 64 ACL Ports The ACL Ports configuration is used to assign a Policy ID to an ingress port This is useful to group ports to obey the same traffic rules Traffic Policy is created under the Access Control List page You can you also set up specific traffic properties Action Rate Limiter Port copy etc for each ingress port They will though only apply if the frame gets past the ACE matching without getting matched In that case a counter associated with that port is incremented See the Web page help text for each specific port property ACL Rate Limiters Under this page you can configure the rate limiters There can be 15 different rate limiters each ranging from 1 1024K packets per seconds Under Ports and Access Control List web pages you can assign a Rate Limiter ID to the ACE s or ingress port s 452 NS3550 24T 4S User Manual AES is an acronym for Advanced Encryption Standard The encryption key protocol is applied in 802 1i standard to improve WLAN security It is an encryption standard by the U S government which will replace DES and 3DES AES has a fixed block size of 128 bits and a key size of 128 192 or 256 bits APS is an acronym for Automatic Protection Switching This protocol is used to secure that switching is done b
224. e end host logs off or powers down If it weren t for aging the end host would still take up resources on this switch and will be allowed to forward To overcome this situation enable aging With aging enabled a timer is started once the end host gets secured When the timer expires the switch starts looking for frames from the end host and if such frames are not seen within the next Aging Period the end host is assumed to be disconnected and the corresponding resources are freed on the switch The table has one row for each port on the selected switch which are Object e Port e Mode e Limit e Action Description The port number for which the configuration below applies Controls whether Limit Control is enabled on this port Both this and the Global Mode must be set to Enabled for Limit Control to be in effect Notice that other modules may still use the underlying port security features without enabling Limit Control on a given port The maximum number of MAC addresses that can be secured on this port This number cannot exceed 1024 If the limit is exceeded the corresponding action is taken The switch is born with a total number of MAC addresses from which all ports draw whenever a new MAC address is seen on a Port Security enabled port Since all ports draw from the same pool it may happen that a configured maximum cannot be granted if the remaining ports have already used all available MAC addresses If Limit is
225. e All of the ports in a link aggregation have to be treated as a whole when moved from to added or deleted from a VLAN e The Spanning Tree Protocol will treat all the ports in a link aggregation as a whole e Enable the link aggregation prior to connecting any cable between the switches to avoid creating a data loop e Disconnect all link aggregation port cables or disable the link aggregation ports before removing a port link aggregation to avoid creating a data loop It allows a maximum of 16 ports to be aggregated at the same time The Managed Switch support Gigabit Ethernet ports up to 12 groups If the group is defined as a LACP static link aggregationing group then any extra ports selected are placed in a standby mode for redundancy if one of the other ports fails If the group is defined as a local static link aggregationing group then the number of ports must be the same as the group member ports The aggregation code ensures that frames belonging to the same frame flow for example a TCP connection are always forwarded on the same link aggregation member port Reording of frames within a flow is therefore not possible The aggregation code is based on the following information e Source MAC e Destination MAC e Source and destination IPv4 address e Source and destination TCP UDP ports for IPv4 packets Normally all 5 contributions to the aggregation code should be enabled to obtain the best traffic distribution among the link
226. e Author Globally Disabled Force Author Globally Disabled Force Author Globally Disabled Force Author Globally Disabled Force Author Globally Disabled Force Author Globally Disabled Force Author Globally Disabled Force Author Globally Disabled Fore Author Globally Disabled Force Author Globally Disabled Force Author Globally Disabled Force Author Globally Disabled Force Author Globally Disabled Force Author Globally Disabled Force Author Globally Disabled Force Author Globally Disabled Force Author Globally Disabled Force Author Globally Disabled Force Author Globally Disabled Force Author Globally Disabled Force Author Globally Disabled Force Author Globally Disabled Force Author Globally Disabled Force Author Globally Disabled 4 E 4 ME w E 4 4 4 EE Ii i Figure 4 11 4 Network Access Server Configuration Page Screenshot 202 NS3550 24T 4S User Manual The page includes the following fields System Configuration Object Description e Mode Indicates if NAS is globally enabled or disabled on the switch If globally disabled all ports are allowed forwarding of frames e Reauthentication If checked successfully authenticated supplicants clients are reauthenticated Enabled after the interval specified by the Reauthentication Period Reauthentication for 802 1X enabled ports can be used to detect if a new device is plugged into a switch port or if a supplicant is no longer attached For MAC bas
227. e Conflicts Shows status of Conflicts whether exists or Not When a Volatile VLAN User requests to set VLAN membership or VLAN port configuration the following conflicts can occur Functional Conflicts between features Conflicts due to hardware limitation Direct conflict between user modules e VLAN User A VLAN User is a module that uses services of the VLAN management functionality to configure VLAN memberships and VLAN port configuration such as PVID UVID Currently we support following VLAN CLI Web SNMP This are reffered as static NAS NAS provides port based authentication which involves communications between a Supplicant Authenticator and an Authentication Server Voice VLAN Voice VLAN is a VLAN configured specially for voice traffic typically originating from IP phones MVR MVR is used to eliminate the need to duplicate multicast traffic for subscribers in each VLAN Multicast traffic for all channels is sent only on a single multicast VLAN MSTP The 802 1s Multiple Spanning Tree protocol MSTP uses VLANs to create multiple spanning trees in a network which significantly improves network resource utilization while maintaining a loop free environment Buttons Select VLAN Users from this drop down list Auto refresh Check this box to enable an automatic refresh of the page at regular intervals Refiesh J Click to refresh the page immediately Port Isolation Configuration Overview When
228. e SNMP on this page a System Information The system information is provides here El Trap Configuration Configure SNMP trap on this page E SNMPv3 Communities Configure SNMPv3 communities table on this page a SNMPv3 Users Configure SNMPv3 users table on this page 79 a SNMPv3 Groups SNMPv3 Views a SNMPv3 Accesses Configure SNMPv3 groups table on this page Configure SNMPv3 views table on this page Configure SNMPv3 accesses table on this page SNMP System Configuration Configure SNMP on this page The SNMP System Configuration screen is shown in Figure 4 3 1 SNMP System Configuration ede SNMP vi Read Community The page includes the following fields Object e Mode e Version e Read Community e Write Community e Engine ID Buttons ave Click to save changes E rer Figure 4 3 1 SNMP System Configuration Page Screenshot Description Indicates the SNMP mode operation Possible modes are Enabled Enable SNMP mode operation Disabled Disable SNMP mode operation Indicates the SNMP supported version Possible versions are SNMP v1 Set SNMP supported version 1 SNMP v2c Set SNMP supported version 2c SNMP v3 Set SNMP supported version 3 Indicates the community read access string to permit access to SNMP agent The allowed string length is O to 255 and the allowed content is the ASCII characters from 33 to 126 The field only suits to SNMPv1 and SNMPv2c SNMPv3 is using USM for
229. e for the attached LANs transitions frequently e BPDU Guard If enabled causes the port to disable itself upon receiving valid BPDU s Contrary to the similar bridge setting the port Edge status doesn t affect this setting A port entering error disabled state due to this setting is subject to the bridge Port Error Recovery setting as well e Point2Point Controls whether the port connects to a point to point LAN rather than a shared medium This can be automatically determined or forced either true or false Transition to the forward state is faster for point to point LANs than for shared media This applies to physical ports only Aggregations are always forced Point2Point Buttons Save Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values By default the system automatically detects the speed and duplex mode used on each port and configures the path cost according to the values shown below Path cost 0 is used to indicate auto configuration mode When the short path cost method is selected and the default path cost recommended by the IEEE 8021w standard exceeds 65 535 the default is set to 65 535 Port Type IEEE 802 1D 1998 IEEE 802 1w 2001 Ethernet 50 600 200 000 20 000 000 Fast Ethernet 10 60 20 000 2 000 000 Gigabit Ethernet 2 000 200 000 Table 4 7 1 Recommended STP Path Cost Range Port Type Link Type IEEE 802 1D 1998 IEEE 802 1w 2001 141 Half
230. e limit mode SWITCH gt security network limit mode enable Security Network Limit Aging Description Set or show aging enabledness Syntax Security Network Limit Aging enable disable Parameters enable Enable aging disable Disable aging default Show current enabledness of aging Default Setting disable Example Enable limit aging SWITCH gt security network limit aging enable 339 Security Network Limit Agetime Description Time in second between check for activity on learned MAC addresses Syntax Security Network Limit Agetime lt age_time gt Parameters lt age_time gt Time in seconds between checks for activity on a MAC address 10 10000000 seconds default Show current age time Default Setting 3600 Example Set age time in 100sec SWITCH gt security network limit agetime 100 Security Network Limit Port Description Set or show per port enabledness Syntax Security Network Limit Port lt port_list gt enable disable Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports enable Enable port security on this port disable Disable port security on this port default Show current port enabledness of port security limit control Default Setting disable Example Enable port limit for port 1 340 NS3550 24T 4S User Manual SWITCH gt security network limit port 1 enable Security Network Limit Limit Description Set or sho
231. e operation Possible modes are Enabled Enable SNMP trap inform mode operation Disabled Disable SNMP trap inform mode operation Indicates the SNMP trap inform timeout The allowed range is 0 to 2147 Indicates the SNMP trap informs retry times The allowed range is O to 255 Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 82 NS3550 24T 4S User Manual SNMPv3 Configuration SNMPv3 Communities Configuration Configure SNMPv3 community s table on this page The entry index key is Community The SNMPv3 Communities Configuration screen is shown in Figure 4 3 4 gt NMPvy3 Communities Configuration public 00 00 private 0000 Figure 4 3 4 SNMPv3 Communities Configuration Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Delete Check to delete the entry It will be deleted during the next save e Community Indicates the community access string to permit access to SNMPv3 agent The allowed string length is 1 to 32 and the allowed content is the ASCII characters from 33 to 126 e Source IP Indicates the SNMP access source address e Source Mask Indicates the SNMP access source address mask Buttons Add new community Click to add a new community entry Save Click to save changes _Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values SNMPv3 Users Configuration Configure SNMPv3 users table on this page The e
232. e stripped away it tag becoming an untagged packet 4 While the packet leaves Port 3 it will keep as a tagged packet with VLAN Tag 2 E Tagged packet entering VLAN 2 5 While PC 3 transmit a tagged packet with VLAN Tag 2 enters Port 3 PC 1 and PC 2 will received the packet through Port 1 and Port 2 6 While the packet leaves Port 1 and Port 2 it will be stripped away it tag becoming an untagged packet E Untagged packet entering VLAN 3 1 While PC 4 transmit an untagged packet enters Port 4 the switch will tag it with a VLAN Tag 3 PC 5 and PC 6 will be received the packet through Port 5 and Port 6 2 While the packet leaves Port 5 it will be stripped away it tag becoming an untagged packet 3 While the packet leaves Port 6 it will keep as a tagged packet with VLAN Tag 3 At this example VLAN Group 1 just set as default VLAN but only focus on VLAN 2 and VLAN 3 traffic flow Setup steps 1 Create VLAN Group Set VLAN Group 1 Default VLAN with VID VLAN ID 1 Add two VLANs VLAN 2 and VLAN 3 VLAN Group 2 with VID 2 VLAN Group 3 with VID 3 2 Assign VLAN Member VLAN 2 Port 1 Port 2 and Port 3 124 NS3550 24T 4S User Manual VLAN 3 Port 4 Port 5 and Port 6 VLAN 1 All other ports Port 7 Port 24 3 Remove VLAN Member for VLAN 1 Remember to remove the Port 1 Port 6 from VLAN 1 membership since the Port 1 Port 6 had been assigned to VLAN 2 and VLAN 3 VLAN Membership Configur
233. e the wizard 168 NS3550 24T 4S User Manual Set up ToS Precedence Mapping Set up the traffic class mapping to the precedence part of ToS 3 bits when receiving IPv4 IPv6 packets The Set up ToS Precedence Mapping screen is shown in Figure 4 9 5 Set up ToS Precedence Mapping Set up the traffic class mapping to the precedence part of ToS 3 bits when receiving IP v4 IPv6 packets Lov Low ToS Precedence3 Class Lov Low Low Lov ToS Precedence Class k Figure 4 9 5 Set up ToS Precedence Mapping Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e QCLID Select the QCL ID to which this QCE applies e ToS Precedence Class Select a traffic class of Low Normal Medium or High to apply to the QCE Buttons Cancel Wizard Click to cancel the wizard Back Click to go back to the previous wizard step Next Click to continue the wizard The QCL configuration wizard is finished and the new configuration is ready for use 169 QoS Control List Configuration mam OCE Type Type Value Traffic Class Po Set up VLAN Tag Priority Mapping Set up the traffic class mapping to the User Priority value 3 bits when receiving VLAN tagged packets The Set up VLAN Tag Priority Mapping screen is shown in Figure 4 9 6 Set up VLAN Tag Priority Mapping Set up the traffic class mapping to the user priority value 3 bits when receiving VLAN tagged packets Tag Priority Clas
234. e unauthorized state If the link state of a port transitions from up to down or if an EAPOL logoff frame is received the port returns to the unauthorized state Authentication Configuration This page allows you to configure how an administrator is authenticated when he logs into the switch via TELNET SSH or the web pages The Authentication Method Configuration screen is shown in Figure 4 11 3 Authentication Method Configuration Method Fallback console telnet ssh Figure 4 11 3 Authentication Method Configuration Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Client The management client for which the configuration below applies 200 NS3550 24T 4S User Manual e Authentication Method Authentication Method can be set to one of the following values None authentication is disabled and login is not possible local use the local user database on the switch for authentication radius use a remote RADIUS server for authentication tacacs use a remote TACACS server for authentication e Fallback Enable fallback to local authentication by checking this box If none of the configured authentication servers are alive the local user database is used for authentication This is only possible if the Authentication Method is set to something else than none or local Buttons Save Click to save changes _Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to p
235. eature Default Value Enable state STP disabled for all ports Port priority 128 Port cost 0 Bridge Priority 32 68 User Changeable STA Parameters The Switch s factory default setting should cover the majority of installations However it is suggested to keep the default settings as set at the factory unless it is absolutely necessary The user changeable parameters in the Switch are as follows Priority A Priority for the switch can be set from O to 65535 0 is equal to the highest Priority Hello Time The Hello Time can be from 1 to 10 seconds This is the interval between two transmissions of BPDU packets sent by the Root Bridge to tell all other Switches that it is indeed the Root Bridge If you set a Hello Time for your Switch and it is not the Root Bridge the set Hello Time will be used if and when your Switch becomes the Root Bridge The Hello Time cannot be longer than the Max Age Otherwise a configuration error will occur Max Age The Max Age can be from 6 to 40 seconds At the end of the Max Age if a BPDU has still not been received from the 134 NS3550 24T 4S User Manual Root Bridge your Switch will start sending its own BPDU to all other Switches for permission to become the Root Bridge If it turns out that your Switch has the lowest Bridge Identifier it will become the Root Bridge Forward Delay Timer The Forward Delay can be from 4 to 30 seconds This is the time any port on the Switch
236. ectivity Device will only transmit LLDP TLVs in an LLDPDU Only after an LLDP MED Endpoint Device is detected will an LLDP MED capable Network Connectivity Device start to advertise LLDP MED TLVs in outgoing LLDPDUs on the associated port The LLDP MED application will temporarily speed up the transmission of the LLDPDU to start within a second when a new LLDP MED neighbor has been detected in order share LLDP MED information as fast as possible to new neighbors Because there is a risk that a LLDP frame being lost during transmission between neighbors it is recommended to repeat the fast start transmission multiple times to increase the possibility for that the neighbors has received the LLDP frame With Fast start repeat count it is possible to specify the number of times the fast start transmission is repeated The recommended value is 4 times giving that 4 LLDP frames with a 1 second interval will be transmitted when a LLDP frame with new information is received It should be noted that LLDP MED and the LLDP MED Fast Start mechanism is only intended to run on links between LLDP MED Network Connectivity Devices and Endpoint Devices and as such does not apply to links between LAN infrastructure elements including between Network Connectivity Devices or to other types of links Description Latitude SHOULD be normalized to within 0 90 degrees with a maximum of 4 digits It is possible to specify the direction to either North of the equator
237. ed but the port cost should be increased from the default to ensure that the link between switch B and switch C is the blocked link STP Bridge Configuration This page allows you to configure STP system settings The settings are used by all STP Bridge instances in the Switch The Managed Switch support the following Spanning Tree protocols Compatiable Spanning Tree Protocol STP Provides a single path between end stations avoiding and eliminating loops Normal Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol RSTP Detects and uses of network topologies that provide faster spanning tree convergence without creating forwarding loops Extension Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol MSTP Defines an extension to RSTP to further develop the usefulness of virtual LANs VLANs This Per VLAN Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol configures a separate Spanning Tree for each VLAN group and blocks all but one of the possible alternate paths within each Spanning Tree The STP Bridge Configuration screen is shown in Figure 4 7 4 STP Bridge Configuration Basic Settings vooo Maximum Hop Count 2 Transmit Hold Count 6 Advanced Settings Edge Port BPDU Filtering eae mee Port BPDU Guard Port Error Port Error Recovery Pon Error Recovery Timea Figure 4 7 4 STP Bridge Configuration Page Screenshot 137 The page includes the following fields Basic Settings Object e Protocol Version e Forward Delay e Max Age e Ma
238. ed the individual ports ditto setting determines whether the port can be moved into Guest VLAN When unchecked the ability to move to the Guest VLAN is disabled for all ports This is the value that a port s Port VLAN ID is set to if a port is moved into the Guest VLAN It is only changeable if the Guest VLAN option is globally enabled Valid values are in the range 1 4095 The number of times that the switch transmits an EAPOL Request Identity frame without response before considering entering the Guest VLAN is adjusted with this setting The value can only be changed if the Guest VLAN option is globally enabled Valid values are in the range 1 255 The switch remembers if an EAPOL frame has been received on the port for the lifetime of the port Once the switch considers whether to enter the Guest VLAN it will first check if this option is enabled or disabled If disabled unchecked default the switch will only enter the Guest VLAN if an EAPOL frame has not been received on the port for the lifetime of the port If enabled checked the switch will consider entering the Guest VLAN even if an EAPOL frame has been received on the port for the lifetime of the port The value can only be changed if the Guest VLAN option is globally enabled The table has one row for each port on the selected switch and a number of columns which are Object e Port e Admin State Description The port number for which the configuration below
239. ed on a given port The application types specifically addressed are 1 Voice 2 Guest Voice 3 Softphone Voice 4 Video Conferencing 5 Streaming Video 6 Control Signaling conditionally support a separate network policy for the media types above A large network may support multiple VoIP policies across the entire organization and different policies per application type LLDP MED allows multiple policies to be advertised per port each corresponding to a different application type Different ports on the same Network Connectivity Device may advertise different sets of policies based on the authenticated user identity or port configuration It should be noted that LLDP MED is not intended to run on links other than between Network Connectivity Devices and Endpoints and therefore does not need to advertise the multitude of network policies that frequently run on an aggregated link interior to the LAN Object Description e Delete Check to delete the policy It will be deleted during the next save e Policy ID ID for the policy This is auto generated and shall be used when selecting the police that shall be mapped to the specific ports 261 e Application Type e Tag e VLAN ID e L2 Priority e DSCP Port Policies Configuration Intended use of the application types Voice for use by dedicated IP Telephony handsets and other similar appliances supporting interactive voice services These devices are typically depl
240. ed ports reauthentication is only useful if the RADIUS server configuration has changed It does not involve communication between the switch and the client and therefore doesn t imply that a client is still present on a port e Reauthentication Determines the period in seconds after which a connected client must be Period reauthenticated This is only active if the Reauthentication Enabled checkbox is checked Valid values are in the range 1 to 3600 seconds e EAPOL Timeout Determines the time between retransmission of Request Identity EAPOL frames Valid values are in the range 1 to 255 seconds This has no effect for MAC based ports e Age Period This setting applies to the following modes i e modes using the Port Security functionality to secure MAC addresses Single 802 1X Multi 802 1X MAC Based Auth When the NAS module uses the Port Security module to secure MAC addresses the Port Security module needs to check for activity on the MAC address in question at regular intervals and free resources if no activity is seen within a given period of time This parameter controls exactly this period and can be set toa number between 10 and 1000000 seconds If reauthentication is enabled and the port is in 802 1X based mode this is not so criticial since supplicants that are no longer attached to the port will get removed upon the next reauthentication which will fail But if reauthentication is not enabled the only way to free resources is
241. ee a cee ee 384 STP PO Stat Sii 384 A LS 385 SIP MS TI Pom COn IOMA A 385 NS3550 24T 4S User Manual STR IMSTIMP ORM COS tre x3 seein GiS E oe a Selene NS esas ee eG a 386 EP STIL OR PHON Yiia eqnisenheatcet encores ean tieeheqeeumeha A E T E tek i ennteeusnaees 386 Multicast Configuration Command ssscivericcece at shores eee etaceeanceructaatniaeec tide busetaetevedd abo ty atest odanredretedosetns 387 ISM CG ONIGUA e Ss ate 387 A eo OA meee ee eee ere 387 IGMP LEAVE RON a a o een eer er weer enone tre err errr ee pee er ere reer oe eer re 388 AA cee ee ee ees 388 EMP cito a 389 E A A A A II A AR 390 GME TAON nee retry tence erate Cro ee A pen ee ene eer ee 390 IGMP ENENG iia setae chester to cesos Da 391 GMER ROUE sarro o beer psss rotos hades 391 IGMP RIG OGIING sata A ect ike otctaundscedieked inten 392 GNP GUS a a da o e cach ca o a da 392 o as es oe ce ces 393 Link AGGre dation COMMA iii ici 393 Agored ator CONTIGUA Mixteciense derbies tebvea reeset A A AA lAs 393 PROG CO AUO MENG ac aan ao anto ineces 393 Aggregation Delete A AA A AAA AAA 394 Aggregation Look UN A AA A 394 goregaton MOJE cuadradas 395 Link Aggregation Control Protocol Command ssssssssuuunnsnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn nnmnnn 396 CAPCOM AO a o dl ld ds dd tl eats 396 Pi II 396 PANG KEY seca eo eh th ol aha oleh hy ola Seal os Gia clatter ees 397 LAC PROC ana ear Ee eR A E eT cre eT eee ee en ee eee 398 PA E ee eee ee eee ee ee
242. eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeesaeeeessaueeeseeeeeeesseseeesaeeeeesaaeees 85 SNMEPVS VIEWS GON TIC A EIN a e cad Di 85 SINMNPV3ACCesses CONnMOUI All ON ba 86 POM Management ins 38 POR COMgU atO illo dad da AED dol iaa 88 A A it eieounas a tenant 90 POM Statistics Detalla A A AS 91 SFP Module TAO MANO aa 93 POr MIF ObinG CONTIQUI ALON tatiana 94 EI AG OREO A Oi oi EE a TGE E 97 Static Aggregation ConiguratiON seisen a a le aloe 99 NS3550 24T 4S User Manual PAS COMO UA OM seeds ae ie 101 ACP Systems tal ese hertes casei eanuiehi taketh enceaelue E E E 102 Pee ON AUS O 104 LACP FOM SUAS CS ta A A 105 VEAN A AAA res eh eet nica ARA ei A EA NAAA eerie 107 LEAN ON O O eet 107 IEEE 602 10 VIAN Os 107 WIEAIN Basic INONMA ON dd iets tapoedssiouemcs euhendacadswanaed teatete lis anhanda Ate auasnanostuat nes 111 VEAN POC ONIgUrAUON siii co tano ii Sen Sal aia saa ace an tein aaa aide rada 112 MEAN Membership Conngurato N o e oleate No 116 VLAN Membership Status for User tall eS 117 VLAN Port Status torUset ollas cose 118 Port Isolation Configuration ocoooonccccocncnncnocnncnnonnnononnnnnnnrnnnnnnrnnn nn rn nn rn rn r nn RR eeesaaeeessaaseeeesaaeeesaaeeessaaeeesaaeeeesaaeees 119 Private VLAN Membership CONTIGUA Ae A MRE ee 121 WLAN SETING CxXaINDIC ai a E E einen 123 TWO separate COZ 1 Ci VLAN ise tis oh ets Loaded baci dd id 123 VLAN Trunking between two 802 1Q aware SWitCh cccoocccccccccnnonoccnccnnconcnnncnn
243. eenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Snooping Enabled Enable the Global IGMP Snooping e Unregistered IPMC Enable unregistered IPMC traffic flooding Flooding enabled e Leave Proxy Enable Enable the leave proxy e VLAN ID The VLAN ID of the entry e Snooping Enabled Enable the per VLAN IGMP Snooping e IGMP Querier Enable the IGMP Querier in the VLAN The Querier will send out if no Querier received in 255 seconds after IGMP Querier Enabled Each Querier s interval is 125 second and it will stop act as an IGMP Querier if received any Querier from other devices Buttons Save Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values IGMP Port Related Configuration This page provides IGMP Snooping related configuration 153 Most of the settings are global whereas the Router Port configuration is related to the currently selected unit as reflected by the page header The IGMP Port Related Configuration screen is shown in Figure 4 8 6 IGMP Port Related Configuration Port Router Port Fast Leave auto auto auto auto auto auto auto auto auto auto auto auto auto auto auto Unlimited Unlimited ed auto auto auto static static Figure 4 8 6 IGMP Port Related Configuration Page Screenshot LI LI LI d LI LI d LI LI LI d LI LI d
244. efault All ports Default Setting disable Example Show mirror configuration SWITCH gt mirror configuration Mirror Port Description Set or show the mirror port Syntax Mirror Port lt port gt disable 417 Parameters lt port gt disable Mirror port or disable default Show port Default Setting Mirror Port 1 Example Set port 2 for the mirror port SWITCH gt mirror port 2 Mirror SID Description Set or show the mirror switch ID Syntax Mirror SID lt sid gt Parameters lt sid gt Switch ID 1 16 Default Setting 1 Example Set SID2 for mirror switch ID SWITCH gt mirror sid 2 Mirror Mode Description Set or show the mirror mode Syntax Mirror Mode lt port_list gt enable disable rx tx Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports enable Enable Rx and Tx mirroring disable Disable Mirroring rx Enable Rx mirroring tx Enable Tx mirroring default Show mirror mode Default Setting disable Example Enable the mirror mode for port 1 4 418 NS3550 24T 4S User Manual SWITCH gt mirror mode 1 4 enable Configuration Command Configuration Save Description Save configuration to TFTP server Syntax Config Save lt ip_server gt lt file_name gt Parameters lt ip_server gt TFTP server IP address a b c d lt file_name gt Configuration file name Configuration Load Description Load configuration fro
245. efore the original Ether Type Length or Logical Link Control Because the packet is now a bit longer than it was originally the Cyclic Redundancy Check CRC must be recalculated Adding an IEEE802 1Q Tag Dest Addr Src Addr Length E type Data Old CRC Original Ethernet Dest Addr Src Addr E type Length E type New CRC New Tagged Packet VLAN ID M Port VLAN ID Packets that are tagged are carrying the 802 1Q VID information can be transmitted from one 802 1Q compliant network device to another with the VLAN information intact This allows 802 1Q VLAN to span network devices and indeed the entire network if all network devices are 802 1Q compliant Every physical port on a switch has a PVID 802 1Q ports are also assigned a PVID for use within the switch If no VLAN are defined on the switch all ports are then assigned to a default VLAN with a PVID equal to 1 Untagged packets are assigned the PVID of the port on which they were received Forwarding decisions are based upon this PVID in so far as VLAN are concerned Tagged packets are forwarded according to the VID contained within the tag Tagged packets are also assigned a PVID but the PVID is not used to make packet forwarding decisions the VID is Tag aware switches must keep a table to relate PVID within the switch to VID on the network The switch will compare the VID of a packet to be transmitted to the VID of the port that is to transmit the packet
246. either frames transmitted nor received are mirrored Enabled Frames received and frames transmitted are mirrored to the mirror port Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 96 NS3550 24T 4S User Manual Link Aggregation Port Aggregation optimizes port usage by linking a group of ports together to form a single Link Aggregated Groups LAGs Port Aggregation multiplies the bandwidth between the devices increases port flexibility and provides link redundancy Each LAG is composed of ports of the same speed set to full duplex operations Ports in a LAG can be of different media types UTP Fiber or different fiber types provided they operate at the same speed Aggregated Links can be assigned manually Port Trunk or automatically by enabling Link Aggregation Control Protocol LACP on the relevant links Aggregated Links are treated by the system as a single logical port Specifically the Aggregated Link has similar port attributes to a non aggregated port including auto negotiation speed Duplex setting etc The device supports the following Aggregation links a Static LAGs Port Trunk Force aggregared selected ports to be a trunk group a Link Aggregation Control Protocol LACP LAGs LACP LAG negotiate Aggregated Port links with other LACP ports located on a different device If the other device ports are also LACP ports the devices establish a LAG between them
247. ely assigned name for this managed node By convention this is the node s fully qualified domain name A domain name is a text string drawn from the alphabet A Za z digits 0 9 minus sign No space characters are permitted as part of a name The first character must be an alpha character And the first or last character must not be a minus sign The allowed string length is O to 255 e System Location The physical location of this node e g telephone closet 3rd floor The allowed string length is O to 255 and the allowed content is the ASCII characters from 32 to 126 Buttons Save Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values SNMP Trap Configuration Configure SNMP trap on this page The SNMP Trap Configuration screen is shown in Figure 4 3 3 SNMP Trap Configuration Trap Destination Addres Trap Destination Pwi Address rap Inform Mode ft Trap Inform Timeout seconds Trap tato Rety Times Figure 4 3 3 SNMP Trap Configuration Page Screenshot 81 The page includes the following fields Object e Trap Mode e Trap Version e Trap Community e Trap Destination Address e Trap Destination IPv6 Address e Trap Authentication Failure e Trap Link up and Link down e Trap Inform Mode e Trap Inform Timeout seconds e Trap Inform Retry Times Buttons Save Click to save changes Description Indicates the SNMP tr
248. ent parameter options that are available for individual application ACL is an acronym for Access Control List It is the list table of ACEs containing access control entries that specify individual users or groups permitted or denied to specific traffic objects such as a process or a program Each accessible traffic object contains an identifier to its ACL The privileges determine whether there are specific traffic object access rights ACL implementations can be quite complex for example when the ACEs are prioritized for the various situation In networking the ACL refers to a list of service ports or network services that are available on a host or server each with a list of hosts or servers permitted or denied to use the service ACL can generally be configured to control inbound traffic and in this context they are similar to firewalls There are 3 web pages associated with the manual ACL configuration ACL Access Control List The web page shows the ACEs in a prioritized way highest top to lowest bottom Default the table is empty An ingress frame will only get a hit on one ACE even though there are more matching ACEs The first matching ACE will take action permit deny on that frame and a counter associated with that ACE is incremented An ACE can be associated with a Policy 1 ingress port or any ingress port the whole switch If an ACE Policy is created then that Policy can be associated with a group of ports under th
249. entication protocol MD5 An optional flag to indicate that this user using MD5 authentication protocol SHA An optional flag to indicate that this user using SHA authentication protocol The value of security level cannot be modified if entry already existed That means must first ensure that the value is set correctly e Authentication A string identifying the authentication pass phrase For MD5 authentication Password protocol the allowed string length is 8 to 32 For SHA authentication protocol the allowed string length is 8 to 40 The allowed content is the ASCII characters from 33 to 126 e Privacy Protocol Indicates the privacy protocol that this entry should belong to Possible privacy protocol are None None privacy protocol DES An optional flag to indicate that this user using DES authentication protocol e Privacy Password A string identifying the privacy pass phrase The allowed string length is 8 to 32 and the allowed content is the ASCII characters from 33 to 126 Buttons Add new user Click to add a new user entry Save Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 84 SNMPv3 Groups Configuration NS3550 24T 4S User Manual Configure SNMPv3 groups table on this page The entry index keys are Security Model and Security Name The SNMPv3 Groups Configuration screen is shown in Figure 4 3 6 SNMPv3 Groups Configuration a TT The pa
250. er Static screen is shown in Figure 4 6 4 VLAN Membership Status for User Static ed Port Members Maa CNN wwe ww ww Ow NE as y yw ay Figure 4 6 4 VLAN Membership Status for User Static Page Screenshot WOOO O O O o o o The page includes the following fields Object Description e VLAN ID Indicates the ID of this particular VLAN e Port Members The VLAN Membership Status Page shall show the current VLAN port members for all VLANs configured by a selected VLAN User selection shall be allowed by a Combo Box When ALL VLAN Users is selected it shall show this information for all the VLAN Users and this is the default VLAN membership allows the frames Classified to the VLAN ID to be forwarded to the respective VLAN member ports e VLAN User A VLAN User is a module that uses services of the VLAN management functionality to configure VLAN memberships and VLAN port configuration such as PVID UVID Currently we support following VLAN CLI Web SNMP This are reffered as static NAS NAS provides port based authentication which involves communications between a Supplicant Authenticator and an Authentication Server Voice VLAN Voice VLAN is a VLAN configured specially for voice traffic typically originating from IP phones MVR MVR is used to eliminate the need to duplicate multicast traffic for subscribers in each VLAN Multicast traffic for all channels is sent only on a single multicast VLAN MSTP
251. er a computer network 459 NTP is an acronym for Network Time Protocol a network protocol for synchronizing the clocks of computer systems NTP uses UDP datagrams as transport layer O ORM OAM is an acronym for Operation Administration and Maintenance It is a protocol described in ITU T Y 1731 used to implement carrier ethernet functionality MEP functionality like CC and RDI is based on this A LLDP frame contains multiple TLVs For some TLVs it is configurable if the switch shall include the TLV in the LLDP frame These TLVs are known as optional TLVs If an optional TLVs is disabled the corresponding information is not included in the LLDP frame OUI is the organizationally unique identifier An OUI address is a globally unique identifier assigned to a vendor by IEEE You can determine which vendor a device belongs to according to the OUI address which forms the first 24 bits of a MAC address P AAA AAA PCP is an acronym for Priority Code Point It is a 3 bit field storing the priority level for the 802 1Q frame It is also known as User Priority PD is an acronym for Powered Device In a PoE gt system the power is delivered from a PSE power sourcing equipment to a remote device The remote device is called a PD PHY is an abbreviation for Physical Interface Transceiver and it is the device implements the Ethernet physical layer IEEE 802 3 ping is a program that sends a series of packets over
252. eration When a Guest VLAN enabled port s link comes up the switch starts transmitting EAPOL Request Identity frames If the number of transmissions of such frames exceeds Max Reauth Count and no EAPOL frames have been received in the meanwhile the switch considers entering the Guest VLAN The interval between transmissions of EAPOL Request Identity frames is configured with EAPOL Timeout If Allow Guest VLAN if EAPOL Seen is enabled the port will now be placed in the Guest VLAN If disabled the switch will first check its history to see if an EAPOL frame has previously been received on the port this history is cleared if the port link goes down or the port s Admin State is changed and if not the port will be placed in the Guest VLAN Otherwise it will not move to the Guest VLAN but continue transmitting EAPOL Request Identity frames at the rate given by EAPOL Timeout Once in the Guest VLAN the port is considered authenticated and all attached clients on the port are allowed access on this VLAN The switch will not transmit an EAPOL Success frame when entering the Guest VLAN While in the Guest VLAN the switch monitors the link for EAPOL frames and if one such frame is received the switch immediately takes the port out of the Guest VLAN and starts authenticating the supplicant according to the port mode If an EAPOL frame is received the port will never be able to go back into the Guest 207 VLAN if the Allow Guest VLAN if EAPOL
253. erver and a number of columns which are Object o e Enabled e IP Address Hostname e Port e Secret Description The RADIUS Authentication Server number for which the configuration below applies Enable the RADIUS Authentication Server by checking this box The IP address or hostname of the RADIUS Authentication Server IP address is expressed in dotted decimal notation The UDP port to use on the RADIUS Authentication Server If the port is set to 0 zero the default port 1812 is used on the RADIUS Authentication Server The secret up to 29 characters long shared between the RADIUS Authentication Server and the switch RADIUS Accounting Server Configuration The table has one row for each RADIUS Accounting Server and a number of columns which are Object o e Enabled e IP Address Hostname e Port e Secret Description The RADIUS Accounting Server number for which the configuration below applies Enable the RADIUS Accounting Server by checking this box The IP address or hostname of the RADIUS Accounting Server IP address is expressed in dotted decimal notation The UDP port to use on the RADIUS Accounting Server If the port is set to 0 zero the default port 1813 is used on the RADIUS Accounting Server The secret up to 29 characters long shared between the RADIUS Accounting Server and the switch TACACS Authentication Server Configuration The table has one row for each
254. es 00 01 83 clemens 46 phones Figure 4 9 15 Voice VLAN OUI Table Page Screenshot LI L LI LI d LI LI The page includes the following fields Object Description e Delete Check to delete the entry It will be deleted during the next save e Telephony OUI An telephony OUI address is a globally unique identifier assigned to a vendor by IEEE It must be 6 characters long and the input format is xx xx xx x is a hexadecimal digit e Description The description of OUI address Normaly it describes which vendor telephony device The allowed string length is 0 to 32 Buttons Adel new entry Click to add a new access management entry Save Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values Access Control Lists ACL is an acronym for Access Control List It is the list table of ACEs containing access control entries that specify individual users or groups permitted or denied to specific traffic objects such as a process or a program Each accessible traffic object contains an identifier to its ACL The privileges determine whether there are specific traffic object 184 NS3550 24T 4S User Manual access rights ACL implementations can be quite complex for example when the ACEs are prioritized for the various situations In networking the ACL refers to a list of service ports or network services that are available on a host or server each with a list
255. es filtered by the forwarding process Short frames are frames that are smaller than 64 bytes Long frames are frames that are longer than the configured maximum frame length for this port Description The number of frames dropped due to output buffer congestion The number of frames dropped due to excessive or late collisions Click to refresh the page immediately Clear Clears the counters for all ports 92 NS3550 24T 4S User Manual Auto refresh Check this box to enable an automatic refresh of the page at regular intervals SFP Module Information You can check the physical or operational status of an SFP module via the SFP Module Information page This page shows the operational status such as the transceiver type speed and wavelength and supports distance of SFP module on a specific interface You can also use the hyperlink of port no to check the statistics on a speficic interface The SFP Module Information screen is shown in Figure 4 4 4 SFP Module Information E TR RP 1UUUBase L 1000 Base 1O0U0Base L 1000 Base 10U0Base L 1000 Base 1000 Base L 1000 Base Auto Refresh Figure 4 4 4 SFP Module Information for Switch Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Type Display the type of current SFP module the possible types are NW 1000Base SX NW 1000Base LX NW 100Base FX e Speed Display the spedd of current SFP module the speed value or descripti
256. ess Syntax Security Switch SNMP Write Community lt community gt Parameters lt community gt Community string Use clear or to clear the string default Show SNMP write community Default Setting private Example Set public value in SNMP write community SWITCH gt security switch snmp write community public Security Switch SNMP Trap Mode Description Set or show the SNMP trap mode Syntax Security Switch SNMP Trap Mode enable disable 321 Parameters enable Enable SNMP traps disable Disable SNMP traps default Show SNMP trap mode Default Setting disable Example Enable SNMP trap mode SWITCH gt security switch snmp trap mode enable Security Switch SNMP Trap Version Description Set or show the SNMP trap protocol version Syntax Security Switch SNMP Trap Version 1 2c 3 Parameters 1 SNMP version 1 2c SNMP version 2c 3 SNMP version 3 default Show SNMP trap version Default Setting 1 Example Set SNMP trap version in version 2c SWITCH gt security switch snmp trap version 2c Security Switch SNMP Trap Community Description Set or show the community string for SNMP traps 322 NS3550 24T 4S User Manual Syntax Security Switch SNMP Trap Community lt community gt Parameters lt community gt Community string Use clear or to clear the string default Show SNMP trap community Default Setting public Example
257. et 10Mbps half duplex speed for port1 SWITCH gt port mode 1 10hdx Port Flow Control Description Set or show the port flow control mode Syntax Port Flow Control lt port_list gt enable disable Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports enable Enable flow control disable Disable flow control default Show flow control mode Default Setting Disable Example Enable flow control function for port1 SWITCH gt port flow control 1 enable Port State Description Set or show the port administrative state Syntax Port State lt port_list gt enable disable Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports enable Enable port disable Disable port default Show administrative mode Default Setting Enable Example Disable port1 292 NS3550 24T 4S User Manual SWITCH gt port state 1 disable Port Maximum Frame Description Set or show the port maximum frame size Syntax Port MaxFrame lt port_list gt lt max_frame gt Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports lt max_frame gt Port maximum frame size 1518 9600 default Show maximum frame size Default Setting 9600 Example Set 2048 frame size for port SWITCH gt port maxframe 1 2048 Port Power Description Set or show the port PHY power mode Syntax Port Power lt port_list gt enable disablelactiphy dynamic Parameters lt port_
258. ete VIAN 10 mac address 1 2 5 aJ5 o 7 9 9 20 0 2 10 1a 550 0715 19 20 2 22J22 24 Add new static entry Figure 4 13 2 Static MAC Table Configuration Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Delete Check to delete the entry It will be deleted during the next save e VLANID The VLAN ID for the entry e MAC Address The MAC address for the entry e Port Members Checkmarks indicate which ports are members of the entry Check or uncheck as needed to modify the entry Buttons Add new static entry Click to add new entry Save Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values MAC Address Table Status Dynamic MAC Table Entries in the MAC Table are shown on this page The MAC Table contains up to 8192 entries and is sorted first by VLAN ID then by MAC address The MAC Address Table screen is shown in Figure 4 13 3 249 MAC Address Table Start fram VLAN and MAC Address 00 00 00 00 00 00 with entries per page Query by CPU E VLAN C MAC Address COO mac portmem type vean macaddress cpuls 2 3 4 5 6 7 e Te ao 1a s2 13 14 15 6 17 19 19 20 21 22 23 24 Y Static 00 30 4F 82 64 5E Dynamic 00 E0 4C 69 60 84 Static 01 00 5E 7F FF FA Static 33 33 FF 88 64 5E yw Static 33 33 FF A8 00 64 Y Static A IDR RR RR RAR RAR RR RA T Auto Refresh L Figure 4 13 3 MAC Address Table Status Navigating the MAC Table
259. f columns which are Object Description e Port The port number for which the status applies Click the port number to see the status for this particular port e Users Each of the user modules has a column that shows whether that module has enabled Port Security or not A means that the corresponding user module is not enabled whereas a letter indicates that the user module abbreviated by that letter see Abbr has enabled port security e State Shows the current state of the port It can take one of four values Disabled No user modules are currently using the Port Security service Ready The Port Security service is in use by at least one user module and is awaiting frames from unknown MAC addresses to arrive Limit Reached The Port Security service is enabled by at least the Limit Control user module and that module has indicated that the limit is reached and no more MAC addresses should be taken in Shutdown The Port Security service is enabled by at least the Limit Control user module and that module has indicated that the limit is exceeded No MAC addresses can be learned on the port until it is administratively re opened on the Limit Control configuration Web page e MAC Count Current The two columns indicate the number of currently learned MAC addresses Limit forwarding as well as blocked and the maximum number of MAC addresses that can be learned on the port respectively If no user modules are enabled on the port the
260. f they were entering commands directly on the server console TFTP is an acronym for Trivial File Transfer Protocol It is transfer protocol that uses the User Datagram Protocol UDP and provides file writing and reading but it does not provides directory service and security features ToS is an acronym for Type of Service It is implemented as the IPv4 ToS priority control It is fully decoded to determine the priority from the 6 bit ToS field in the IP header The most significant 6 bits of the ToS field are fully decoded into 64 possibilities and the singular code that results is compared against the corresponding bit in the IPv4 ToS priority control bit 0 63 TLV is an acronym for Type Length Value A LLDP frame can contain multiple pieces of information Each of these pieces of information is known as TLV TKIP is an acronym for Temporal Key Integrity Protocol It used in WPA to replace WEP with a new encryption algorithm TKIP comprises the same encryption engine and RC4 algorithm defined for WEP The key used for encryption in TKIP is 128 bits and changes the key used for each packet UDP is an acronym for User Datagram Protocol It is a communications protocol that uses the Internet Protocol IP to exchange the messages between computers UDP is an alternative to the Transmission Control Protocol TCP that uses the Internet Protocol IP Unlike TCP UDP does not provide the service of dividing a message into packet datagram
261. for Polices and Shapers on this page The settings relate to the currently selected unit as reflected by the page header The screen Bandwidth Control in Figure 4 9 10 175 Rate Limit Configuration Policer Enabled e Rate Policer Unit Shaper Enabled Rate Shaper Unit E lt 5 lt E 4 ra 4 sl 4 lt x 4 si 4 313 lt aE lt ra ra 4 4 4 4 4 4 d 4 ad 4 A AA AAA 21 lt HE lt x ra ra wi 4 lt x lt lt x 4 4 22 lt HE lt ra ra dels 4 4 cle x EE lt a lt 4 4 3 lt lt A ee fefefefefefe ee el fe fe i 4 O d d d d d d d O d O d d k d d d d d d d d d O d a 4 Figure 4 9 10 Rate Limit Configuration Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Port The logical port for the settings contained in the same row e Policer Enabled Enable or disable the port policer The default value is Disabled e Policer Rate Configure the rate for the port policer The default value is 500 This value is restricted to 500 1000000 when the Policer Unit is kbps and it is restricted to 1 1000 when the Policer Unit is Mbps e Policer Unit Configure the unit of measure for the port policer rate as kbps or Mbps The default value is kbps e Shaper Enabled Enable or disable the port shaper The default value is Disabled 176 NS3550 24T 4S Use
262. function provides the Power Failure and Port Link Down Broken detection With both power input 1 and power input 2 installed and the check boxes of power 1 power 2 ticked the FAULT LED indicator will then be possible to light up when any one of the power failures occurs As for the Port Link Down Broken detection the FAULT LED indicator will light up when the port failure occurs certainly the check box beside the port must be ticked first Please refer to the segment of Wiring the Fault Alarm Contact for the failure detection The Configuration screen is shown in Figure 4 2 27 19 Fault alarm Control Configuration Fault Alarm Outp enable Record System Log Syslog SNMP Trap SMTP Port Fail _ Power Fail DC 1 DC 2 AC Power 1 2 3 4 5 6 F 3 1011 12 13 14 15 16 Port Alarm If 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 Figure 4 2 27 Windows File Selection Menu Popup The page includes the following fields Object Description e Enable Allows user to enable Fault Alarm function e Record Allows user to record alarm message to System log syslog or issues out via SNMP Trap or SMTP As default SNMP Trap and SMTP are disabled please enable them first if you want to issue alarm message via them e Action Allows user to monitor and alarm from port fail or power fail e Power Alarm Allows user to choose which power module want to be monitored e Port Alarm Allows user to choose which port want to be monitored Buttons Save
263. g transported in an Ethernet frame 455 FTP FTP is an acronym for File Transfer Protocol It is a transfer protocol that uses the Transmission Control Protocol TCP and provides file writing and reading It also provides directory service and security features Fast Leave HTTP HTTPS ICMP IGMP snooping Fast Leave processing allows the switch to remove an interface from the forwarding table entry without first sending out group specific queries to the interface The VLAN interface is pruned from the multicast tree for the multicast group specified in the original leave message Fast leave processing ensures optimal bandwidth management for all hosts on a switched network even when multiple multicast groups are in use simultaneously HTTP is an acronym for Hypertext Transfer Protocol It is a protocol that used to transfer or convey information on the World Wide Web WWW HTTP defines how messages are formatted and transmitted and what actions Web servers and browsers should take in response to various commands For example when you enter a URL in your browser this actually sends an HTTP command to the Web server directing it to fetch and transmit the requested Web page The other main standard that controls how the World Wide Web works is HTML which covers how Web pages are formatted and displayed Any Web server machine contains in addition to the Web page files it can serve an HTTP daemon a program that is designed t
264. ge Help Button Panel Display The web agent displays an image of the Managed Switch s ports The Mode can be set to display different information for the ports including Link up or Link down Clicking on the image of a port opens the Port Statistics page The port states are illustrated as follows State Disabled Down Link am RJ 45 Ports id ia SFP Ports 46 NS3550 24T 4S User Manual Main Menu Using the onboard web agent you can define system parameters manage and control the Managed Switch and all its ports or monitor network conditions Via the Web Management the administrator can setup the Managed Switch by select the functions those listed in the Main Function The screen is shown in Figure 4 1 5 Figure 4 1 5 NS3550 24T 4S Managed Switch Main Functions Menu 47 System Use the System menu items to display and configure basic administrative details of the Managed Switch Under System the following topics are provided to configure and view the system information This section has the following items System Information IP Configuration IPv6 Configuration Users Configuration Users Privilege Levels NTP Configuration UPnP DHCP Relay DHCP Relay Statistics CPU Load System Log Detailed Log Remote Syslog Web Firmware Upgrade TFTP Firmware Upgrade Configuration Backup Configuration Upload SMTP Configure Digital input output Fault Alarm Factory Default System Reboot The swit
265. ge includes the following fields Object e Delete e Security Model e Security Name e Group Name Buttons Add new meup SAVE Click to save changes sfault_user Figure 4 3 6 SNMPv3 Groups Configuration Page Screenshot Description Check to delete the entry It will be deleted during the next save Indicates the security model that this entry should belong to Possible security models are v1 Reserved for SNMPv1 v2c Reserved for SNMPv2c usm User based Security Model USM A string identifying the security name that this entry should belong to The allowed string length is 1 to 32 and the allowed content is the ASCII characters from 33 to 126 A string identifying the group name that this entry should belong to The allowed string length is 1 to 32 and the allowed content is the ASCII characters from 33 to 126 Click to add a new group entry Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values SNMPv3 Views Configuration Configure SNMPv3 views table on this page The entry index key is View Name and OID Subtree The SNMPv3 Views Configuration screen is shown in Figure 4 3 7 85 SNMPv3 Views Configuration View Type OID Subtree C default view included v included v Figure 4 3 7 SNMPv3 Views Configuration Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object e Delete e View Name e View Type e OID Subtree Buttons Add ne
266. ged Switch to function in Disable mode Disable The port operates in its normal VLAN mode This is the default MAN Port Configures IEEE 802 1Q tunneling QinQ for an uplink port to another device within the service provider network Customer Port Configures IEEE 802 1Q tunneling QinQ for a client access port to segregate and preserve customer VLAN IDs for traffic crossing the service provider network Set Out layer VLAN tag The Tag Protocol Identifier TPID specifies the ethertype of incoming packets on ether type a tunnel access port 802 1Q Tag 8100 VMAN Tag 88A8 Default 802 1Q Tag The port must be a member of the same VLAN as the Port VLAN ID Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 115 VLAN Membership Configuration a Adding Static Members to VLANs VLAN Index Use the VLAN Static Table to configure port members for the selected VLAN index The VLAN membership configuration for the selected the switch can be monitored and modified here Up to 255 VLANs are supported This page allows for adding and deleting VLANs as well as adding and deleting port members of each VLAN The VLAN Membership Configuration screen is shown in Figure 4 6 3 VLAN Membership Configuration start from VLAN with 20 entries per page Derete van vol a 2 3 4 5 6 7 e oieee 1 MMMM MM AM MM AE AE ME E Figure 4 6 3 VLAN Membership Configuration
267. gement information such as the number of error packets received by a network element Management information base MIB A MIB is a collection of managed objects residing in a virtual information store Collections of related managed objects are defined in specific MIB modules network management protocol A management protocol is used to convey management information between agents and NMSs SNMP is the Internet community s de facto standard management protocol SNMP Operations SNMP itself is a simple request response protocol NMSs can send multiple requests without receiving a response Get Allows the NMS to retrieve an object instance from the agent Set Allows the NMS to set values for object instances within an agent Trap Used by the agent to asynchronously inform the NMS of some event The SNMPv2 trap message is designed to replace the SNMPv1 trap message SNMP community An SNMP community is the group that devices and management stations running SNMP belong to It helps define where information is sent The community name is used to identify the group A SNMP device or agent may belong to more than one SNMP community It will not respond to requests from management stations that do not belong to one of its communities SNMP default communities are Write private Read public Use the SNMP Menu to display or configure the Managed Switch s SNMP function This section has the following items a System Configuration Configur
268. guration SWITCH gt security aaa tacacs 1 enable 192 168 0 20 12345678 49 Security AAA Statistics Description Show RADIUS statistics Syntax Security AAA Statistics lt server_index gt 371 Parameters The server index 1 5 default Show statistics for all servers Example Show RADIUS statistics SWITCH gt security aaa statistics Spanning Tree Protocol Command STP Configuration Description Show STP configuration Syntax STP Configuration Example Show STP configuration SWITCH gt stp cofiguration STP Configuration Protocol Version MSTP Max Age 20 Forward Delay 15 Tx Hold Count 6 Max Hop Count 20 STP Version Description Set or show the STP Bridge protocol version Syntax STP Version lt stp_version gt Parameters lt stp_version gt mstp rstp stp 3 2 NS3550 24T 4S User Manual Default Setting MSTP Example Set the STP Bridge protocol version SWITCH gt stp version rstp STP Tx Hold Description Set or show the STP Bridge Transmit Hold Count parameter Syntax STP Txhold lt holdcount gt Parameters lt holdcount gt STP Transmit Hold Count 1 10 Default Setting 6 Example Set STP Tx hold in 10 SWITCH gt stp txhold 10 STP MaxHops Description Set or show the MSTP Bridge Max Hop Count parameter Syntax STP MaxHops lt maxhops gt Parameters lt maxhops gt STP BPDU MaxHops 6 40
269. h Assign the access level of the Managed Switch the available options are Master Admin Master Viewer IT Admin IT Viewer Security Admin Security Viewer Assign password for the Managed Switch Input password again to confirm setting Press this button to take affect Delete the current user This button is not available for new configurations Add new user Once the new user is added the new user entry shown in the Users Configuration page 94 NS3550 24T 4S User Manual Users Configuration Username accesstevel edit Add New User Figure 4 2 6 User Configuration page screenshot After change the default password if you forget the password Please press the Reset button in the front panel of the Managed Switch over 10 seconds and then release the current setting includes VLAN will be lost and the Managed Switch will restore to the default mode The preset user priorities for each function is listed under the section titled Appendix B 55 Users Privilege Levels This page provides an overview of the privilege levels After setup completed please press Save button to take effect Please login web interface with new user name and password The screen is shown in Figure 4 2 7 Group Name Aggregation Diagnostics IGMP Snooping IF LLOP LLOP MED MAC Table WYR Maintenance Mirroring PoE Port Security Ports Private LA Ns Los SNMP security spanning Tree stack
270. h are not ICMP UDP TCP e Action Indicates the forwarding action of the ACE Permit Frames matching the ACE may be forwarded and learned Deny Frames matching the ACE are dropped e Rate Limiter Indicates the rate limiter number of the ACE The allowed range is 1 to 15 When Disabled is displayed the rate limiter operation is disabled e Port Copy Indicates the port copy operation of the ACE Frames matching the ACE are copied to the port number The allowed values are Disabled or a specific port number When the Disabled is displayed the port copy operation is disabled e Logging Indicates the logging operation of the ACE Possible values are Enabled Frames matching the ACE are stored in the System Log Disabled Frames matching the ACE are not logged Please note that the System Log memory size and logging rate is limited e Shutdown Indicates the port shut down operation of the ACE Possible values are Enabled If a frame matches the ACE the ingress port will be disabled Disabled Port shut down is disabled for the ACE e Counter The counter indicates the number of times the ACE was hit by a frame e Modification Buttons You can modify each ACE Access Control Entry in the table using the following buttons E Inserts a new ACE before the current row Edits the ACE row Moves the ACE up the list Moves the ACE down the list amp Deletes the ACE The lowest plus sign adds a new entry at the bottom
271. h occurs at regular intervals Retresh Click to refresh the page any changes made locally will be undone Access Control List Configuration This page shows the Access Control List ACL which is made up of the ACEs defined for this Managed Switch Each row describes the ACE that is defined a The maximum number of ACEs is 128 a Click on the lowest plus sign to add a newACE to the list The Access Control List Configuration screen is shown in Figure 4 10 2 Access Control List Configuration Ingress Port Frame Type Rate Limiter Port Copy Logging Shutdown Counter Figure 4 10 2 Access Control List Configuration Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Ingress Port Indicates the ingress port of the ACE Possible values are Any The ACE will match any ingress port Policy The ACE will match ingress ports with a specific policy Port The ACE will match a specific ingress port e Frame Type Indicates the frame type of the ACE Possible values are Any The ACE will match any frame type EType The ACE will match Ethernet Type frames ARP The ACE will match ARP RARP frames IPv4 The ACE will match all IPv4 frames IPv4 ICMP The ACE will match IPv4 frames with ICMP protocol IPv4 UDP The ACE will match IPv4 frames with UDP protocol IPv4 TCP The ACE will match IPv4 frames with TCP protocol 186 NS3550 24T 4S User Manual IPv4 Other The ACE will match IPv4 frames whic
272. h time and effort considerably less than before 19 How to Use This Manual This User Manual is structured as follows Section 2 INSTALLATION The section explains the functions of the Switch and how to physically install the Managed Switch Section 3 SWITCH MANAGEMENT The section contains the information about the software function of the Managed Switch Section 4 WEB CONFIGURATION The section explains how to manage the Managed Switch by Web interface Section 5 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE The section describes how to use the Command Line interface CLI Section 6 CLI CONFIGURATION The section explains how to manage the Managed Switch by Command Line interface Section 7 SWITCH OPERATION The chapter explains how to does the switch operation of the Managed Switch Section 8 TROUBSHOOTING The chapter explains how to trouble shooting of the Managed Switch Appendix A The section contains cable information of the Managed Switch 20 NS3550 24T 4S User Manual Product Features gt Physical Port NS3550 24T 4S 24 Port 10 100 1000Base T Gigabit Ethernet RJ 45 4 100 1000Base X SFP slots shared with Port 21 to Port 24 RS 232 DB9 console interface for Switch basic management and setup gt Industrial Conformance 36 to 72V DC redundant power with polarity reverse protect function 40 to 75 Degree C operating temperature IP 30 metal case 19 inch Rack mountable Relay alarm for port breakdown power failure Supports 6000 VDC Et
273. he Switch Figure 2 1 shows the front panel of the Managed Switch NS3550 24T 4S Front Panel 24 Port Gigabit Industrial Managed Switch Figure 2 1 NS3550 24T 4S Front Panel Mi Gigabit TP interface 10 100 1000Base T Copper RJ 45 Twist Pair Up to 100 meters Hi Gigabit SFP slots 1000Base SX LX mini GBIC slot SFP Small Factor Pluggable transceiver module From 550 meters Multi mode fiber up to 10 30 50 70 kilometers Single mode fiber Mi Console Port The console port is a DB9 RS 232 male serial port connector It is an interface for connecting a terminal directly Through the console port it provides rich diagnostic information includes IP Address setting factory reset port management link status and system setting Users can use the attached RS 232 cable in the package and connect to the console port on the device After the connection users can run any terminal emulation program Hyper Terminal ProComm Plus Telix Winterm etc to enter the startup screen of the device Mi Reset button On the left side of front panel the reset button is designed for rebooting the Managed Switch without a power cycle The following is the summary table of Reset button functions 26 NS3550 24T 4S User Manual Reset Button Pressed and Released Function lt 5 sec System reboot Reboot the Managed Switch Reset the Managed Switch to Factory Default configuration The Managed Switch will then reboot and load the default set
274. he clients and the server when they are not on the same subnet domain Disabled Disable NTP mode operation Allow select the time zone according to current location of switch Provide the NTP IPv4 or IPv6 address of this switch IPv6 address is in 128 bit records represented as eight fields of up to four hexadecimal digits with a colon separates each field For example fe80 215 c5ff fe03 4dc7 The symbol is a special syntax that can be used as a shorthand way of representing multiple 16 bit groups of contiguous zeros but it can only appear once It also used a following legally IPv4 address For example 192 1 2 34 Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values UPnP Configuration Configure UPnP on this page 58 NS3550 24T 4S User Manual UPnP is an acronym for Universal Plug and Play The goals of UPnP are to allow devices to connect seamlessly and to simplify the implementation of networks in the home data sharing communications and entertainment and in corporate environments for simplified installation of computer components The UPnP Configuration screen is shown in Figure 4 2 9 UPnP Configuration Figure 4 2 9 UPnP Configuration Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object e Mode e TTL e Advertising Duration Description Indicates the UPnP operation mode Possible modes are Enabled Enable UPnP mode operation Disabled Disa
275. hen a client is successfully authenticated the port transitions to the authorized state allowing all traffic for the client to flow normally 199 If a client that does not support 802 1X is connected to an unauthorized 802 1X port the switch requests the client s identity In this situation the client does not respond to the request the port remains in the unauthorized state and the client is not granted access to the network In contrast when an 802 1X enabled client connects to a port that is not running the 802 1X protocol the client initiates the authentication process by sending the EAPOL start frame When no response is received the client sends the request for a fixed number of times Because no response is received the client begins sending frames as if the port is in the authorized state If the client is successfully authenticated receives an Accept frame from the authentication server the port state changes to authorized and all frames from the authenticated client are allowed through the port If the authentication fails the port remains in the unauthorized state but authentication can be retried If the authentication server cannot be reached the switch can retransmit the request If no response is received from the server after the specified number of attempts authentication fails and network access is not granted When a client logs off it sends an EAPOL logoff message causing the switch port to transition to th
276. hernet ESD protection Free fall Shock and Vibration Stability FAN 1 Design gt Layer 2 Features Prevents packet loss with back pressure Half Duplex and IEEE 802 3x PAUSE frame flow control Full Duplex High performance of Store and Forward architecture broadcast storm control and runt CRC filtering eliminates erroneous packets to optimize the network bandwidth Storm Control support Broadcast Multicast Unknown Unicast Support VLAN IEEE 802 1Q Tagged VLAN Up to 255 VLANs groups out of 4094 VLAN IDs Provider Bridging VLAN Q in Q support IEEE 802 1ad Private VLAN Edge PVE Voice VLAN Support Spanning Tree Protocol STP IEEE 802 1D Spanning Tree Protocol RSTP IEEE 802 1w Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol MSTP IEEE 802 1s Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol spanning tree by VLAN BPDU Guard Support Link Aggregation 802 3ad Link Aggregation Control Protocol LACP Cisco ether channel Static Trunk Maximum 12 trunk groups up to 16 ports per trunk group Up to 32Gbps bandwidth Duplex Mode Provide Port Mirror many to 1 Port Mirroring to monitor the incoming or outgoing traffic on a particular port 21 gt Quality of Service gt Multicast gt Security Ingress Shaper and Egress Rate Limit per port bandwidth control 4 priority queues on all switch ports Traffic classification IEEE 802 1p CoS TOS DSCP IP Precedence of IPv4 IPv6 packets IP TCP UDP port num
277. high or 1 2 3 4 Default Setting high Example Set medium traffic class for voice VLAN SWITCH gt voice vian traffic class medium Voice VLAN OUI Add Description Add Voice VLAN OUI entry Modify OUI table will restart auto detect OUI process Syntax Voice VLAN OUI Add lt oui_addr gt lt description gt Parameters lt oui_addr gt OUI address xx xx xx lt description gt Entry description Use clear or to clear the string No blank or space characters are permitted as part of a contact only in CLI Example Add Voice VLAN OUI entry SWITCH gt voice vian oui add 00 11 22 test 428 NS3550 24T 4S User Manual Voice VLAN OUI Delete Description Delete Voice VLAN OUI entry Modify OUI table will restart auto detect OUI process Syntax Voice VLAN OUI Delete lt oui_addr gt Parameters lt oui_addr gt OUI address xx xx xx Example Delete Voice VLAN OUI entry SWITCH gt voice vian oui delete 00 11 22 Voice VLAN OUI Clear Description Clear Voice VLAN OUI entry Modify OUI table will restart auto detect OUI process Syntax Voice VLAN OUI Clear Example Clear Voice VLAN OUI entry SWITCH gt voice vian oui clear Voice VLAN OUI Look up Description Look up Voice VLAN OUI entry Syntax Voice VLAN OUI Look up lt oui_addr gt Parameters lt oui_addr gt OUI address xx xx xx default Show OUI address Example Look up Voice VLAN OUI entry SWITCH gt voice vian oui lo
278. his state is only reachable when more than one server is enabled The time interval measured in milliseconds between the most recent Response and the Request that matched it from the RADIUS accounting server The granularity of this measurement is 100 ms A value of 0 ms indicates that there hasn t been round trip communication with the server yet NS3550 24T 4S User Manual Windows Platform RADIUS Server Configuration Setup the RADIUS server and assign the client IP address to the Managed switch In this case field in the default IP Address of the Managed Switch with 192 168 0 100 And also make sure the shared secret key is as same as the one you had set at the Managed Switch s 802 1x system configuration 12345678 at this case 1 Configure the IP Address of remote RADIUS server and secret key Authentication Server Configuration Common Server Configuration seconds RADIUS Authentication Server Configuration IN E Figure 4 11 10 RADIUS Server Configuration Page Screenshot 2 Add New RADIUS Cleint on the Windows 2003 server 223 P Internet Authentication Service Joj xj File Action View Help e gt ame Be Internet Authentication Service Local H Remote Acce Mew RADIUS Client beg Remote Acce AT H E Connection R View a Friendly Mame Address Protocol CATest 192 166 0 5 RADIUS Refresh Export List Help Mew Client Figure 4 11 11 Windows Ser
279. iant client software such as that offered in the Microsoft Windows XP operating system The client is the supplicant in the IEEE 802 1X specification Authentication server performs the actual authentication of the client The authentication server validates the identity of the client and notifies the switch whether or not the client is authorized to access the LAN and switch services Because the switch acts as the proxy the authentication service is transparent to the client In this release the Remote Authentication Dial In User Service RADIUS security system with Extensible Authentication Protocol EAP extensions is the only supported authentication server it is available in Cisco Secure Access Control Server version 3 0 RADIUS operates in a client server model in which secure authentication information is exchanged between the RADIUS server and one or more RADIUS clients Switch 802 1X device controls the physical access to the network based on the authentication status of the client The switch acts as an intermediary proxy between the client and the authentication server requesting identity information from the client verifying that information with the authentication server and relaying a response to the client The switch includes the RADIUS client which is responsible for encapsulating and decapsulating the Extensible Authentication Protocol EAP frames and interacting with the authentication server When the switch receive
280. ic statistics for a specific switch port Use the port select box to select which switch port details to display The selected port belongs to the currently selected unit as reflected by the page header The displayed counters are the totals for receive and transmit the size counters for receive and transmit and the error counters for receive and transmit The Detailed Port Statistics screen is shown in Figure 4 4 3 Detailed Port Statistics Auto Refresh O Pot v Receive Total Transmit Total Rx Packets Tx Packets Rx Octets Tx Octets Rx Unicast Tx Unicast Rx Multicast Tx Multicast Rx Broadcast Tx Broadcast Rx Pause Tx Pause Receive Size Counters Rx 64 Bytes Tx 64 Bytes Rx 65 127 Bytes Tx 65 127 Bytes Rx 128 255 Bytes Tx 128 255 Bytes Rx 256 511 Bytes Tx 256 511 Bytes Rx 512 1023 Bytes Tx 512 1023 Bytes Rx 1024 1526 Bytes Tx 1024 1526 Bytes Rx 1527 Bytes Tx 1527 Bytes Receive Queue Counters Transmit Queue Counters Rx Low Tx Low Rx Normal O Tx Normal Rx Medium 0 Tx Medium Rx High 0 Tx High Receive Error Counters Transmit Error Counters Rx Drops Tx Drops O Rx CRC Alignment Tx Late Exc Coll Rx Undersize Rx Oversize Rx Fragments Rx Jabber Rx Filtered Figure 4 4 3 Detailed Port Statistics Port 1 Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Receive Total and Transmit Total Object Description e Rxand Tx Packets The number of received and transmitted good and bad packets e Rxand Tx Octet
281. ication BPDU s received transmitted on the port e Discarded Unknown eect of unknown Spanning Tree BPDU s received and discarded on the e Discarded Illegal number of illegal Spanning Tree BPDU s received and discarded on the port Buttons Retresh Click to refresh the page immediately Auto refresh Check this box to enable an automatic refresh of the page at regular intervals Clear Click to clear the information immediately Multicast IGMP Snooping The Internet Group Management Protocol IGMP lets host and routers share information about multicast groups memberships IGMP snooping is a switch feature that monitors the exchange of IGMP messages and copies them to the CPU for feature processing The overall purpose of IGMP Snooping is to limit the forwarding of multicast frames to only ports that are a member of the multicast group About the Internet Group Management Protocol IGMP Snooping Computers and network devices that want to receive multicast transmissions need to inform nearby routers that they will become members of a multicast group The Internet Group Management Protocol IGMP is used to communicate this information IGMP is also used to periodically check the multicast group for members that are no longer active In the case where there is more than one multicast router on a sub network one router is elected as the queried This router then keeps track of the membership of the multicast groups that
282. ics HTTP Receive 79 Allow 7 Discard HTTPS Receive 0 Allow O Discard SNMP Receive 0 Allow O Discard TELNET Receive 0 Allow O Discard SSH Receive O Allow O Discard Security Switch SNMP Configuration Description Show SNMP configuration Syntax Security Switch SNMP Configuration Example Show SNMP configuration SWITCH gt security switch snmp configuration SNMP Configuration Enabled 2C Read Community public Write Community private Trap Mode Disabled Trap Version 1 Trap Community public Trap Destination Trap IPv6 Destination Trap Authentication Failure Enabled Trap Link up and Link down Enabled Trap Inform Mode Enabled Trap Inform Timeout Seconds 1 Trap Inform Retry Times 5 Trap Probe Security Engine ID Enabled Trap Security Engine ID Trap Security Name None SNMPv3 Engine ID 800007e5017f000001 SNMPv3 Communities Table Idx Community Source IP Source Mask 318 Number of entries 2 SNMPv3 Users Table Idx Engine ID User Name 1 Local default_user Number of entries 1 SNMPv3 Groups Table Idx Model Security Name public vi private v2c public v2c private usm default_user Number of entries 5 SNMPv3 Views Table Idx View Name 1 default_view Number of entries 1 SNMPv3 Accesses Table Idx Group Name 1 default_ro_group 2 default_rw_group Number of entries 2 Security Switch SNMP Mode Description Set or show the SNMP
283. icy Description Set or show LLDP MED port polcies Syntax LLDPMED port policies lt port_list gt lt policy_list gt Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports lt policy_list gt List of policies to delete LLDPMED Coordinates Description Set or show LLDP MED Location Syntax 407 LLDPMED Coordinates latitude longitude altitude north south west east meters floor coordinate_ value Parameters latitude Latitude 0 to 90 degress with max 4 digits Positive numbers are north of the equator and negative numbers are south of the equator longitude Longitude 0 to 180 degress with max 4 digits Positive values are East of the prime meridian and negative numbers are West of the prime meridian altitude Altitude Meters or floors with maximum 4 digits default Show coordinate location configuration north south west east meters floor North North Valid for latitude South South Valid for latitude West West Valid for longitude East East Valid for longitude Meters Meters Valid for altitude Floor Floor Valid for altitude Ildpmed Coordinate value coordinate_value lldpmed Coordinate value LLDPMED Datum Description Set or show LLDP MED Coordinates map datum Syntax LLDPMED Datum wgs84 nad83_navd88 nad83_mllw Parameters wgs84 nad83_navd88 nad83_mllw wgs84 WGS84 nad83_navd88 NAD83_NAVD88 nad83_mllw NAD83_MLLW
284. icy for the voice signaling than for the voice media Guest Voice to support a separate limited feature set voice service for guest users and visitors with their own IP Telephony handsets and other similar appliances supporting interactive voice services Guest Voice Signaling for use in network topologies that require a different policy for the guest voice signaling than for the guest voice media Softphone Voice for use by softphone applications on typical data centric devices such as PCs or laptops Video Conferencing for use by dedicated Video Conferencing equipment and other similar appliances supporting real time interactive video audio services Streaming Video for use by broadcast or multicast based video content distribution and other similar applications supporting streaming video services that require specific network policy treatment Video applications relying on TCP with buffering would not be an intended use of this application type Video Signaling for use in network topologies that require a separate policy for the video signaling than for the video media Policy Unknown The network policy for the specified application type is currently unknown NOOB WDN 264 NS3550 24T 4S User Manual Defined The network policy is defined e TAG TAG is indicating whether the specified application type is using a tagged or an untagged VLAN Can be Tagged ot Untagged Untagged The device is using an untagged frame for
285. idirectional in the two ends of a protection group as defined in G 8031 Using multiple ports in parallel is to increase the link speed beyond the limits of a port and to increase the redundancy for higher availability Also Port Aggregation Link Aggregation ARP is an acronym for Address Resolution Protocol It is a protocol that used to convert an IP address into a physical address such as an Ethernet address ARP allows a host to communicate with other hosts when only the Internet address of its neighbors is known Before using IP the host sends a broadcast ARP request containing the Internet address of the desired destination system ARP Inspection is a secure feature Several types of attacks can be launched against a host or devices connected to Layer 2 networks by poisoning the ARP caches This feature is used to block such attacks Only valid ARP requests and responses can go through the switch device Auto negotiation is the process where two different devices establish the mode of operation and the speed settings that can be shared by those devices for a link C CC CC is an acronym for Continuity Check It is a MEP functionality that is able to detect loss of continuity in a network by transmitting CCM frames to a peer MEP CCM is an acronym for Continuity Check Message It is a OAM frame transmitted from a MEP to it s peer MEP and used to implement CC functionality 453 CDP DEI DES DHCP
286. ients are in the receive VLANs and the multicast server is in the source VLAN Multicast routing has to be disabled when MVR is enabled Refer to the configuration guide at Understanding Multicast VLAN Registration for more information on MVR MVR is typically used for IPTV like services and is therefore usually only available on enterprise level switches Many manufacturers provide support for MVR on their high end switches The main reason for using MVR is to save bandwidth by preventing duplicate multicast streams being sent in the core network instead the stream s are received on the MVR VLAN and forwarded to the VLANs where hosts have requested it them This page provides MVR related configuration The MVR Configuration screen is shown in Figure 4 8 10 159 MVR Configuration Disabled v Port Configuration Port Mode Type Immediate Leave i z 10 12 1 Disati 1 15 1 17 1 1 x gt z z 2 Figure 4 8 10 MVR Configuration Page Screenshot ANN 4 The page includes the following fields Object Description e MVR Mode Enable Disable the Global MVR 160 NS3550 24T 4S User Manual e VLAN ID Specify the Multicast VLAN ID e Mode Enable MVR on the port e Type Specify the MVR port type on the port e Immediate Leave Enable the fast leave on the port Buttons Save Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values MVR Status This
287. ies is 3 for the given level start from ID with 20 entries per page Into 1970 01 01 Thu 00 00 01 A0000 Switch just made a cold boot Into 1970 01 01 Thu 00 00 04 0000 Link up on switch 1 port 1 Info 1970 01 01 Thu 00 00 04 0000 Link up on switch 1 port 16 Figure 4 2 14 System Log Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e ID The ID gt 1 of the system logging entry e Level The level of system logging entry The following level types are supported Info Information level of the system log Warning Warning level of the system log Error Error level of the system log All All levels e Time The time of the system log entry e Message The message of the system logging entry Buttons Auto refresh i i Check this box to enable an automatic refresh of the page at regular intervals Retresh Click to refresh the page any changes made locally will be undone Clear Clear all statistics Hide Hide the statistics Download ald Download the statistics kee Updates the system log entries starting from the first available entry ID Updates the system log entries ending at the last entry currently displayed wt g Updates the system log entries starting from the last entry currently displayed 65 a Updates the system log entries ending at the last available entry ID Detailed Log The switch system detailed log information is provided here The
288. if EAPOL Seen Port Configuration The RADIUS Assigned QoS Enabled checkbox provides a quick way to globally enable disable RADIUS server assigned QoS Class functionality When checked the individual ports ditto setting determines whether RADIUS assigned QoS Class is enabled for that port When unchecked RADIUS server assigned QoS Class is disabled for all ports RADIUS assigned VLAN provides a means to centrally control the VLAN on which a successfully authenticated supplicant is placed on the switch Incoming traffic will be classified to and switched on the RADIUS assigned VLAN The RADIUS server must be configured to transmit special RADIUS attributes to take advantage of this feature see RADIUS Assigned VLAN Enabled below for a detailed description The RADIUS Assigned VLAN Enabled checkbox provides a quick way to globally enable disable RADIUS server assigned VLAN functionality When checked the individual port s ditto setting determines whether RADIUS assigned VLAN is enabled for that port When unchecked RADIUS server assigned VLAN is disabled for all ports A Guest VLAN is a special VLAN typically with limited network access on which 802 1X unaware clients are placed after a network administrator defined timeout The switch follows a set of rules for entering and leaving the Guest VLAN as listed below The Guest VLAN Enabled checkbox provides a quick way to globally enable disable Guest VLAN functionality When check
289. iguration SWITCH gt security network acl configuration ACL Configuration mo b o o o o i o a Permit Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled 390 Permit Permit Permit Permit Permit Permit Permit Permit mudo o o b o ee Rate Limiter Rate 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Number of ACEs 0 Security Network ACL Description Action Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Set or show the ACL port default action Syntax Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled 0 746 NS3550 24T 4S User Manual Security Network ACL Action lt port_list gt permit deny lt rate_limiter gt lt
290. iguration It is allowed to configure the Managed Switch to authenticate users logging into the system for management access using local authentication methods such as telnet and Web browser The latest UTC Managed Switch provides totally six different security levels in 3 groups for local user management Group Access SecurityLevel Access Master Admin Refer to Appendix B IT Admin IT Security Security Admin Security Viewer This web page provide user configuration for switch management access level the web screen is shown in Figure 4 2 4 appears 92 NS3550 24T 4S User Manual Users Configuration username cess Level edit Add New User Figure 4 2 4 User Configuration Interface Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Username Access Level Edit Add New User Description Display Username of the Managed Switch Display the access level of the Managed Switch Provide edit current specific user setting Provide add new user setting of the Managed Switch the web screen is shown in Figure 4 2 5 appears 53 Add Edit User This page configures a user add edit or delete user Add User Figure 4 2 5 Add New User Configuration Interface Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object User Name Access Level Assign Change Password Reconfirm Password Apply Delete User Description Assign Username for the Managed Switc
291. ill be detected and the switch can automatically take action by disabling the port and sending a trap message lt source MAC address VLAN gt pair for frames received on the port Note that you can also manually add secure addresses to the port using the Static Address Table The selected port will stop learning The MAC addresses already in the address table will be retained and will not age out Any other device that attempts to use the port will be prevented from accessing the switch The MAC Table Learning screen is shown in Figure 4 13 4 251 MAC Table Learning Port Members Disable OO OO0C0000000 Secure OQ OOO 000000 0 O O Figure 4 13 4 MAC Table Learning Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Auto Learning is done automatically as soon as a frame with unknown SMAC is received e Disable No learning is done e Secure Only static MAC entries are learned all other frames are dropped Make sure that the link used for managing the switch is added to the Static Mac Table before changing to secure learning mode otherwise the management link is lost and can only be restored by using another non secure port or by connecting to the switch via the serial interface Buttons Save Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values Dynamic ARP Inspection Table Entries in the Dynamic ARP Inspection Table are shown on
292. imilar applications supporting streaming video services that require specific network policy treatment Video applications relying on TCP with buffering would not be an intended use of this application type Video Signaling conditional for use in network topologies that require a separate policy for the video signaling than for the video media This application type should not be advertised if all the same network policies apply as those advertised in the Video Conferencing application policy Tag indicating whether the specified application type is using a tagged or an untagged VLAN Untagged indicates that the device is using an untagged frame format and as such does not include a tag header as defined by IEEE 802 1Q 2003 In this case both the VLAN ID and the Layer 2 priority fields are ignored and only the DSCP value has relevance Tagged indicates that the device is using the IEEE 802 1Q tagged frame format and that both the VLAN ID and the Layer 2 priority values are being used as well as the DSCP value The tagged format includes an additional field known as the tag header The tagged frame format also includes priority tagged frames as defined by IEEE 802 1Q 2003 VLAN identifier VID for the port as defined in IEEE 802 1Q 2003 L2 Priority is the Layer 2 priority to be used for the specified application type L2 Priority may specify one of eight priority levels 0 through 7 as defined by IEEE 802 1D 2004 A value
293. in VLAN 1 and the switch does not remove or insert VLAN tags VLAN aware switching This is based on the IEEE 802 1Q standard All ports are VLAN aware Ports connected to VLAN aware switches are members of multiple VLANs and transmit tagged frames Other ports are members of one VLAN set up with this Port VLAN ID and transmit untagged frames Provider switching This is also known as Q in Q switching Ports connected to subscribers are VLAN unaware members of one VLAN and set up with this unique Port VLAN ID Ports connected to the service provider are VLAN aware members of multiple VLANs and set up to tag all frames Untagged frames received on a subscriber port are forwarded to the provider port with a single VLAN tag Tagged frames received on a subscriber port are forwarded to the provider port with a double VLAN tag VLAN ID is a 12 bit field specifying the VLAN to which the frame belongs Voice VLAN Voice VLAN is VLAN configured specially for voice traffic By adding the ports with voice devices attached to voice VLAN we can perform QoS related configuration for voice data ensuring the transmission priority of voice traffic and voice quality 466 WEP WiFi WPA NS3550 24T 4S User Manual WEP is an acronym for Wired Equivalent Privacy WEP is a deprecated algorithm to secure IEEE 802 11 wireless networks Wireless network broadcast messages using radio so are more susceptible to eavesdropping than wired networks
294. ing Auto Refresh L Od 00 32 05 Figure 4 7 11 STP Port Status Page Screenshot 146 NS3550 24T 4S User Manual The page includes the following fields Object Description e Port The switch port number of the logical STP port e CIST Role The current STP port role of the ICST port The port role can be one of the following values AlternatePort BackupPort RootPort DesignatedPort e State The current STP port state of the CIST port The port state can be one of the following values Disabled Blocking Learning Forwarding Non STP e Uptime The time since the bridge port was last initialized Buttons Retresh Click to refresh the page immediately nuunnoa Auto refresh Check this box to enable an automatic refresh of the page at regular intervals Port Statistics This page displays the STP port statistics counters for port physical ports in the currently selected switch The STP Port Statistics screen is shown in Figure 4 7 12 STP Statistics Port 1 1 3571 0 0 T 0 0 0 0 0 0 iB 10534 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Auto Refresh Figure 4 7 12 STP Statistics Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields 147 Object Description e Port The switch port number of the logical RSTP port e RSTP The number of RSTP Configuration BPDU s received transmitted on the port e STP bs number of legacy STP Configuration BPDU s received transmitted on the ort e TCN The number of legacy Topology Change Notif
295. ion Please check the VLAN settings trunk settings or port enabled disabled status MM Performance is bad Solution Check the full duplex status of the Ethernet Switch If the Ethernet Switch is set to full duplex and the partner is set to half duplex then the performance will be poor Please also check the in out rate of the port HM Why the Switch doesn t connect to the network Solution 1 Check the LNK ACT LED on the switch 2 Try another port on the Switch 3 Make sure the cable is installed properly 4 Make sure the cable is the right type 5 Turn off the power After a while turn on power again MM 100Base TX port link LED is lit but the traffic is irregular Solution Check that the attached device is not set to dedicate full duplex Some devices use a physical or software switch to change duplex modes Auto negotiation may not recognize this type of full duplex setting HM Switch does not power up Solution 1 AC power cord not inserted or faulty 2 Check that the AC power cord is inserted correctly 3 Replace the power cord if the cord is inserted correctly check that the AC power source is working by connecting a different device in place of the switch 446 NS3550 24T 4S User Manual 4 If that device works refer to the next step 5 If that device does not work check the AC power W ifthe IP Address has been changed or the admin password forgeotten To reset the IP address to the default IP Address
296. ion Processing Standard Hash algorithms compute a fixed length digital representation known as a message digest of an input data sequence the message of any length A shaper can limit the bandwidth of transmitted frames It is located after the ingress queues SMTP is an acronym for Simple Mail Transfer Protocol It is a text based protocol that uses the Transmission Control Protocol TCP and provides a mail service modeled on the FTP file transfer service SMTP transfers mail messages between systems and notifications regarding incoming mail SNMP is an acronym for Simple Network Management Protocol It is part of the Transmission Control Protocol Internet Protocol TCP IP protocol for network management SNMP allow diverse network objects to participate in a network management architecture It enables network management systems to learn network problems by receiving traps or change notices from network devices implementing SNMP SNTP is an acronym for Simple Network Time Protocol a network protocol for synchronizing the clocks of computer systems SNTP uses UDP datagrams as transport layer 463 Service Set Identifier is a name used to identify the particular 802 11 wireless LANs to which a user wants to attach A client device will receive broadcast messages from all access points within range advertising their SSIDs and can choose one to connect to base on pre configuration or by displaying a list of SSIDs in range and as
297. is detected by a MEP and is indicating lost connectivity in the network Can be used as switch criteria by EPS Switching of frames is based upon the DMAC address contained in the frame The switch builds up a table that maps MAC addresses to switch ports for knowing which ports the frames should go to based upon the DMAC address in the frame This table contains both static and dynamic entries The static entries are configured by the network administrator if the administrator wants to do a fixed mapping between the DMAC address and switch ports The frames also contain a MAC address SMAC address which shows the MAC address of the equipment sending the frame The SMAC address is used by the switch to automatically update the MAC table with these dynamic MAC 458 NS3550 24T 4S User Manual addresses Dynamic entries are removed from the MAC table if there is not frame with the corresponding SMAC address have been seen after a configurable age time MEP is an acronym for Maintenance Entity Endpoint and is an endpoint in a Maintenance Entity Group ITU T Y 1731 MD5 is an acronym for Message Digest algorithm 5 MD5 is a message digest algorithm used cryptographic hash function with a 128 bit hash value lt was designed by Ron Rivest in 1991 MD5 is officially defined in RFC 1321 The MD5 Message Digest Algorithm For debugging network problems or monitoring network traffic the switch system can be configured to mirror fra
298. is enabled but IP communication is not yet up and running Ready The server is enabled IP communication is up and running and the RADIUS module is ready to accept accounting attempts Dead X seconds left Accounting attempts were made to this server but it did not reply within the configured timeout The server has temporarily been disabled but will get re enabled when the dead time expires The number of seconds left before this occurs is displayed in parentheses This state is only reachable when more than one server is enabled Click to refresh the page immediately 218 NS3550 24T 4S User Manual RADIUS Details This page provides detailed statistics for a particular RADIUS server The RADIUS Authentication Accounting for Server Overview screen is shown in Figure 4 11 9 RADIUS Authentication Statistics for Server 1 0 0 0 0 1812 Auto Refresh LJ Receive Packets Transmit Packets Access Accepts Access Requests Access Rejects Access Retransmissions Access Challenges Pending Requests Malformed Access Responses Timeouts Bad Authenticators Unknown Types Packets Dropped Other Info State Disable Round Trip Time O ms RADIUS Accounting Statistics for Server 1 0 0 0 0 1813 Receive Packets Transmit Packets Responses U Requests Malformed Responses 0 Retransmissions Bad Authenticators U Pending Requests 0 Timeouts Unknown Types Packets Dropped 0 Other Info State Disable Round Trip Time O ms
299. istics for a specific switch port running EAPOL based IEEE 802 1X authentication For MAC based ports it shows selected backend server RADIUS Authentication Server statistics only Use the port select box to select which port details to be displayed The Network Access Statistics screen is shown in Figure 4 11 6 Network Access Statistics Port 1 Auto refresh L Port State Force Authorized Globally Disabled Figure 4 11 6 Network Access Statistics Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Port State Object Description e Admin State The port s current administrative state Refer to NAS Admin State for a description of possible values e Port State The current state of the port Refer to NAS Port State for a description of the individual states e QoS Class The QoS class assigned by the RADIUS server The field is blank if no QoS class is assigned e Port VLAN ID The VLAN ID that NAS has put the port in The field is blank if the Port VLAN ID is not overridden by NAS If the VLAN ID is assigned by the RADIUS server RADIUS assigned is appended to the VLAN ID Read more about RADIUS assigned VLANs here If the port is moved to the Guest VLAN Guest is appended to the VLAN ID Read more about Guest VLANs here 210 Port Counters Object e EAPOL Counters e Backend Server Counters Description NS3550 24T 4S User Manual These supplicant frame counters are available for the following administrati
300. itch Packets are forwarded only between ports that are designated for the same VLAN Untagged VLANs can be used to manually isolate user groups or subnets 110 VLAN Basic Information NS3550 24T 4S User Manual The VLAN Basic Information page displays basic information on the VLAN type supported by the Managed Switch The VLAN Basic Information screen is shown in Figure 4 6 1 VLAN Basic Information YLAN Basic Information Mode IEEE 802 10 Maximum YLARN ID 4094 Maximum Number of Supported VLANs 255 Current Number of VLANs 1 VLAN Learning PL Configurable P ID Tagging Yes Figure 4 6 1 VLAN Basic Information Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object e Mode e Maximum VLAN ID e Maximum Number of Supported VLANs e Current number of VLANs e VLAN Learning e Configurable PVID Tagging Description Display the current VLAN mode used by this Managed Switch Port Based E IEEE 802 1Q VLAN Maximum VLAN ID recognized by this Managed Switch Maximum number of VLANs that can be configured on this Managed Switch Display the current number of VLANs Display the VLAN learning mode The Managed Switch supports IVL IVL Independent vlan learning Indicates whether or not configurable PVID tagging is implemented 111 VLAN Port Configuration This page is used for configuring the Managed Switch port VLAN The VLAN per Port Configuration page contains fields for managing ports that are
301. itch There are no EAPOL frames involved in this authentication and therefore MAC based Authentication has nothing to do with the 802 1X standard The advantage of MAC based authentication over 802 1X is that several clients can be connected to the same port e g through a 3rd party switch or a hub and still require individual authentication and that the clients don t need special supplicant software 196 NS3550 24T 4S User Manual to authenticate The disadvantage is that MAC addresses can be spoofed by malicious users equipment whose MAC address is a valid RADIUS user can be used by anyone and only the MD5 Challenge method is supported The 802 1X and MAC Based Authentication configuration consists of two sections a system and a port wide Overview of User Authentication It is allowed to configure the Managed Switch to authenticate users logging into the system for management access using local or remote authentication methods such as telnet and Web browser This Managed Switch provides secure network management access using the following options Remote Authentication Dial in User Service RADIUS E Terminal Access Controller Access Control System Plus TACACS Local user name and Priviledge Level control RADIUS and TACACS are logon authentication protocols that use software running on a central server to control access to RADIUS aware or TACACS aware devices on the network An authentication server contains a database
302. k connector on the rear panel of the NS3550 24T 4S is used for Digital Input and Digital Output Please follow the steps below to insert wire il The NS3550 24T 4S offers two DI and DO groups 1 and 2 are DI groups 3 and 4 are DO groups and 5 is GND ground The 6 pin is unassigned DI DO GND DC POWER ON DIO DI1 DOO DO1 GND GND A CAUTION Please refer to user s manual before connect the DC wire O DC Input Range 36V 72V DC LI D OFF DC 2 Fault DC 1 Figure 2 11 Wiring the Redundant Power Inputs 2 Tighten the wire clamp screws for preventing the wires from loosing 12 3 4 5 6 DIO DI1 DOO DO1 GND GND Figure 2 12 6 Pin Terminal Block DI DO Wiring Input 3 There are two Digital Input groups for you to monitor two different devices The following topology shows how to wire DIO and DI1 The required voltage of 2 digital input groups is 30V DC maximum current is 8mA maximum The required voltage of 2 digital output groups is 30V DC maximum current is 200mA maximum 35 Door Open Detector DC POWER ON d CAUTION DC input Range 3564 24 DC LU LJ m Fa a Ke 1 DIT GND Window Open Detector Figure 2 13 Wires DIO and DI1 to Open Detector 4 There are two Digital Output groups for you to be notified of if the NS3550 24T 4S port fails or power fails and issues a high or low signal to external device The following topology shows how to wire DOO and DO1 Alarm 1 WIL
303. king the user to select one wikipedia SSH is an acronym for Secure SHell It is a network protocol that allows data to be exchanged using a secure channel between two networked devices The encryption used by SSH provides confidentiality and integrity of data over an insecure network The goal of SSH was to replace the earlier rlogin TELNET and rsh protocols which did not provide strong authentication or guarantee confidentiality Wikipedia SSM In SyncE this is an abbreviation for Synchronization Status Message and is containing a QL indication Spanning Tree Protocol is an OSI layer 2 protocol which ensures a loop free topology for any bridged LAN The original STP protocol is now obsoleted by RSTP SyncE Is an abbreviation for Synchronous Ethernet This functionality is used to make a network clock frequency synchronized Not to be confused with real time clock synchronized IEEE 1588 T TACACS TACACS is an acronym for Terminal Acess Controller Access Control System Plus It is a networking protocol which provides access control for routers network access servers and other networked computing devices via one or more centralized servers TACACS provides separate authentication authorization and accounting services Tag Priority is a 3 bit field storing the priority level for the 802 1Q frame TCP is an acronym for Transmission Control Protocol It is a communications protocol that uses the Internet Protocol
304. l forward this packet to the port where this destination address is located according to the information from address table But if the destination address is located at the same port with this packet comes in then this packet will be filtered Thereby increasing the network throughput and availability Store and Forward Store and Forward is one type of packet forwarding techniques A Store and Forward Ethernet Switching stores the incoming frame in an internal buffer do the complete error checking before transmission Therefore no error packets occurrence it is the best choice when a network needs efficiency and stability The Ethernet Switch scans the destination address from the packet header searches the routing table pro vided for the incoming port and forwards the packet only if required The fast forwarding makes the switch attractive for connecting servers directly to the network thereby increasing throughput and availability How ever the switch is most commonly used to segment existence hubs which nearly always improves overall performance An Ethernet Switching can be easily configured in any Ethernet network environment to signifi cantly boost bandwidth using conventional cabling and adapters Due to the learning function of the Ethernet switching the source address and corresponding port number of each incoming and outgoing packet are stored in a routing table This information is subsequently used to filter packets whose destinatio
305. l port 10 5 QoS QCL Add Description Add or modify QoS Control Entry QCE If the QCE ID parameter lt qce_id gt is specified and an entry with this QCE ID already exists the QCE will be modified Otherwise a new QCE will be added If the QCE ID is not specified the next available QCE ID will be used If the next QCE ID parameter lt qce_id_next gt is specified the QCE will be placed before this QCE in the list If the next QCE ID is not specified the QCE will be placed last in the list Syntax QoS QCL Add lt qcl_id gt lt qce_id gt lt qce_id_next gt etype lt etype gt vid lt vid gt port lt udp_tcp_port gt dscp lt dscp gt tos lt tos_list gt tag_prio lt tag_prio_list gt lt class gt Parameters lt qcl_id gt QCLID lt qce_id gt QCE ID 1 24 lt qce_id_next gt Next QCE ID 1 24 etype Ethernet Type keyword lt etype gt Ethernet Type vid VLAN ID keyword lt vid gt VLAN ID 1 4095 port UDP TCP port keyword lt udp_tcp_port gt Source or destination UDP TCP port 0 65535 dscp IP DSCP keyword lt dscp gt IP DSCP 0 63 tos IP ToS keyword lt tos_list gt IP ToS list 0 7 tag_prio VLAN tag priority keyword lt tag_prio_list gt VLAN tag priority list 0 7 lt class gt Traffic class low normal medium high or 1 2 3 4 412 QoS QCL Delete Description Delete QCE Syntax QoS QCL Delete lt qcl_id gt lt qce_id gt Parameters lt qcl_id
306. l_seen gt parameters will not be unused Syntax Security Network NAS Guest_VLAN global lt port_list gt enable disable lt vid gt lt reauth_max gt lt allow_if_eapol_seen gt Parameters global Select the global Guest VLAN setting lt port_list gt Select the per port Guest VLAN setting default Show current per port Guest VLAN enabledness enable disable enable Enable Guest VLAN either globally or on one or more ports disable Disable Guest VLAN either globally or on one or more ports default Show current Guest VLAN enabledness lt vid gt Guest VLAN ID used when entering the Guest VLAN Use the global keyword to change it default Show current Guest VLAN ID lt reauth_max gt The value can only be set if you use the global keyword in the beginning of the command The number of times a Request Identity EAPOL frame is sent without reasponse before considering entering the Guest VLAN default Show current Maximum Reauth Count value lt allow_if_eapol_seen gt The value can only be set if you use the global keyword in the beginning of the command disable The Guest VLAN can only be entered if no EAPOL frames have been received on a port for the lifetime of the port enable The Guest VLAN can be entered even if an EAPOL frame has been received during the lifetime of the port default Show current setting Default Setting 348 NS3550 24T 4S User Manual disable Example Enable NAS gues
307. le IPv6 autoconfig function SWITCH gt ip ipv6 autoconfig enable IPv6 Setup Description Set or show the IPv6 setup Syntax IP IPv6 Setup lt ipv6_addr gt lt ipv6_prefix gt lt ipv6_router gt lt vid gt Parameters lt ipv6_addr gt IPv6 address is in 128 bit records represented as eight fields of up to four hexadecimal digits with a colon separates each field For example four hexadecimal digits with a colon separates each field For example fe80 215 c5ff fe03 4dc7 The symbol is a special syntax that can be used as a shorthand way of representing multiple 16 bit groups of contiguous zeros but it can only appear once It also used a following legally IPv4 address For example 192 1 2 34 lt ipv6_prefix gt IPv6 subnet mask default Show IPv6 prefix lt ipv6_router gt Pv6 router default Show IPv6 router IPv6 address is in 128 bit records represented as eight fields of up to four hexadecimal digits with a colon separates each field For example fe80 215 c5ff fe03 4dc7 The symbol is a special syntax that can be used as a shorthand way of representing multiple 16 bit groups of contiguous zeros but it can only appear once It also used a following legally IPv4 address For example 192 1 2 34 lt vid gt VLAN ID 1 4095 default Show VLAN ID Default Setting IPv6 AUTOCONFIG mode Disabled IPv6 Link Local Address fe80 230 4fff fe24 4d1 IPv6 Address 192 168 0 100 IPv
308. led Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled 426 NS3550 24T 4S User Manual Voice VLAN Mode Description Set or show the Voice VLAN mode We must disable MSTP feature before we enable Voice VLAN It can avoid the conflict of ingress filter Syntax Voice VLAN Mode enable disable Parameters enable Enable Voice VLAN mode disable Disable Voice VLAN mode default Show flow Voice VLAN mode Default Setting disable Example Enable the Voice VLAN mode SWITCH gt voice vian mode enable Voice VLAN ID Description Set or show Voice VLAN ID Syntax Voice VLAN ID lt vid gt Parameters lt vid gt VLAN ID 1 4095 Default Setting 1000 Example Set ID 2 for Voice VLAN ID SWITCH gt voice vlan id 2 Voice VLAN Agetime Description Set or show Voice VLAN age time 427 Syntax Voice VLAN Agetime lt age_time gt Parameters lt age_time gt MAC address age time 10 10000000 default Show age time Default Setting 86400sec Example Set Voice VLAN age time in 100sec SWITCH gt voice valn agetime 100 Voice VLAN Traffic Class Description Set or show Voice VLAN ID Syntax Voice VLAN Traffic Class lt class gt Parameters lt class gt Traffic class low normal medium
309. list gt Port list or all default All ports enable Enable all power control disable Disable all power control actiphy Enable ActiPHY power control dynamic Enable Dynamic power control Default Setting Enable Example Disable port power function for port1 4 SWITCH gt port power 1 4 disable Port SFP Description 293 Show SFP port information Syntax Port SFP lt port_list gt Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports Example Show SFP information for port21 24 SWITCH gt port sfp Speed Wave Length nm Distance m 1000Base LX 1000 Base 1310 10000 1000Base LX 1000 Base 1310 10000 Port Excessive Description Set or show the port excessive collision mode Syntax Port Excessive lt port_list gt discard restart Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports discard Discard frame after 16 collisions restart Restart backoff algorithm after 16 collisions default Show mode Default Setting Discard Example SWITCH gt port excessive 1 restart Port Statistics Description Show port statistics Syntax Port Statistics lt port_list gt lt command gt up down Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports 294 lt command gt The command parameter takes the following values clear Clear port statistics packets Show packet statistics bytes Show byte statistics errors
310. ll enabled user modules must unanimously agree on allowing the MAC address to forward If only one chooses to block it it will be blocked until that user module decides otherwise The status page is divided into two sections one with a legend of user modules and one with the actual port status The Port Security Status screen is shown in Figure 4 12 6 237 Port Security Status Auto Refresh LJ User Module Legend User Module Name abbr Limit Control 902 1 DHCP Snooping Voice WLAN Port Status MAC Count Port State Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled 1 E 3 4 sl 6 E o y 0 11 12 13 14 15 16 i 16 4 10 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 13 20 21 Alf 23 24 Figure 4 12 6 Port Security Status Screen Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields User Module Legend The legend shows all user modules that may request Port Security services Object e User Module Name Description The full name of a module that may request Port Security services 238 NS3550 24T 4S User Manual e Abbr A one letter abbreviation of the user module This is used in the Users column in the port status table Port Status The table has one row for each port on the selected switch in the switch and a number o
311. lly Some relevant terms Tagging The act of putting 802 1Q VLAN information into the header of a packet Untagging The act of stripping 802 1Q VLAN information out of the packet header HM 802 1Q VLAN Tags The figure below shows the 802 1Q VLAN tag There are four additional octets inserted after the source MAC address Their presence is indicated by a value of 0x8100 in the Ether Type field When a packet s Ether Type field is equal to 0x8100 the packet carries the IEEE 802 1Q 802 1p tag The tag is contained in the following two octets and consists of 3 bits of user priority 1 bit of Canonical Format Identifier CFI used for encapsulating Token Ring packets so they can be carried across Ethernet backbones and 12 bits of VLAN ID VID The 3 bits of user priority are used by 802 1p The VID is the VLAN identifier and is used by the 802 1Q standard Because the VID is 12 bits long 4094 unique VLAN can be identified The tag is inserted into the packet header making the entire packet longer by 4 octets All of the information originally contained in 108 NS3550 24T 4S User Manual the packet is retained 802 1Q Tag User Priority VLAN ID VID 3 bits 1 bits 12 bits TPID Tag Protocol Identifier TCI Tag Control Information 2 bytes 2 bytes Source VLAN TAG Ethernet Data FCS Address Address Type 6 bytes 6 bytes 4 bytes 2 bytes 46 1500 bytes 4 bytes The Ether Type and VLAN ID are inserted after the MAC source address but b
312. lt Main Page Now you can use the Web management interface to continue the switch management or manage the Managed Switch by Web interface The Switch Menu on the left of the web page let you access all the commands and statistics the Managed Switch provides 1 It is recommended to use Internet Explore 7 0 or above to access Managed Switch Since the changed IP address take effect immediately after you click on the Save button you need to use the new IP address to access the Web interface For security reason please change and memorize the new password after this first setup 4 The Switch only accepts command in lowercase letters in the web interface 45 Main Web Page The Managed Switch provides a Web based browser interface for configuring and managing it This interface allows you to access the Managed Switch using the Web browser of your choice This chapter describes how to use the Managed Switch s Web browser interface to configure and manage it Main Functions Menu Copper Port Link Status SFP Port Link Status 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 EA a 22 24 oo E a 1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 17 19 21 23 23 E ifs NS3550 24T 4S Welcome to IFS Transmission Main Screen NS3550 24T 4S 24 Port Gigabit Ethernet Industrial Managed Switch OS 4 shared SFP 40 75 Degree C MAC Address Table HARDE RE Interlogix A UTC Fire amp Security Company All rights reserved Figure 4 1 4 Main Pa
313. lt enable gt Enable digital input1 2 function lt disable gt Disable digital input1 2 function default Set or show digital input output fault alarm 1 2 status Example Enable power alarm configuration SWITCH gt dido fault_pwr_alr dc1 enable SWITCH gt dido fault_pwr_alr dc2 enable SWITCH gt dido fault_pwr_alr ac enable 443 SWITCH OPERATION Address Table The Switch is implemented with an address table This address table composed of many entries Each entry is used to store the address information of some node in network including MAC address port no etc This in formation comes from the learning process of Ethernet Switch Learning When one packet comes in from any port the Switch will record the source address port no And the other related information in address table This information will be used to decide either forwarding or filtering for future packets Forwarding amp Filtering When one packet comes from some port of the Ethernet Switching it will also check the destination address besides the source address learning The Ethernet Switching will lookup the address table for the destination address If not found this packet will be forwarded to all the other ports except the port which this packet comes in And these ports will transmit this packet to the network it connected If found and the destination address is located at different port from this packet comes in the Ethernet Switching wil
314. lt vid gt VLAN ID 1 4095 lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports Default Setting 1 Example Add port17 to port24 in VLAN10 SWITCH gt vlan add 10 17 24 VLAN Delete Description Delete VLAN entry Syntax VLAN Delete lt vid gt Parameters lt vid gt VLAN ID 1 4095 Example Delete port17 to port24 in VLAN10 SWITCH gt vlan delete 10 VLAN Look up Description Look up VLAN entry Syntax VLAN Look up lt vid gt combined static nas mvr voice_vian all 304 Parameters lt vid gt VLAN ID 1 4095 default Show all VLANs combined Shows All the Combined VLAN database static Shows the VLAN entries configured by the administrator nas Shows the VLANs configured by NAS mvr Shows the VLANs configured by MVR voice _vlan Shows the VLANs configured by Voice VLAN all Shows all VLANs configuration Example Show VLAN status SWITCH gt vlan lookup NS3550 24T 4S User Manual VLAN Status Description VLAN Port Configuration Status Syntax VLAN Status lt port_list gt combined static nas mvr voice_vlan mstp all conflicts Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports combined combined VLAN Users configuration static static port configuration nas NAS port configuration mvr MVR port configuration voice vlan Voice VLAN port configuration mstp MSTP port configuration all All VLAN Users configuration default co
315. ludes the following fields Object e Port e Admin State e Port State e Last Source e Last ID Description The switch port number Click to navigate to detailed NAS statistics for this port The port s current administrative state Refer to NAS Admin State for a description of possible values The current state of the port Refer to NAS Port State for a description of the individual states The source MAC address carried in the most recently received EAPOL frame for EAPOL based authentication and the most recently received frame from a new client for MAC based authentication The user name supplicant identity carried in the most recently received Response Identity EAPOL frame for EAPOL based authentication and the source MAC address from the most recently received frame from a new client for MAC based authentication 209 e Port VLAN ID The VLAN ID that NAS has put the port in The field is blank if the Port VLAN ID is not overridden by NAS If the VLAN ID is assigned by the RADIUS server RADIUS assigned is appended to the VLAN ID Read more about RADIUS assigned VLANs here If the port is moved to the Guest VLAN Guest is appended to the VLAN ID Read more about Guest VLANs here Buttons Retresh Glick to refresh the page immediately Auto refresh Check this box to enable an automatic refresh of the page at regular intervals Network Access Statistics This page provides detailed NAS stat
316. lue 11 packets received and transmitted The number of lease unknown option 53 with value 12 packets received and transmitted The number of lease active option 53 with value 13 packets received and transmitted Auto refresh Check this box to enable an automatic refresh of the page at regular intervals Retresh Click to refresh the page immediately Clear Clears the counters for the selected port IP Source Guard Configuration IP Source Guard is a secure feature used to restrict IP traffic on DHCP snooping untrusted ports by filtering traffic based on the DHCP Snooping Table or manually configured IP Source Bindings It helps prevent IP spoofing attacks when a host tries to spoof and use the IP address of another host This page provides IP Source Guard related configuration The IP Source Guard Configuration screen is shown in Figure 4 12 10 243 IP Source Guard Configuration COIE Port Mode Configuration Port Mode Max Dynamic Clients i z z z 7 a 10 1 1 1 i 5 6 17 1 1 x 21 z 23 2 lt lt lt lt lt lt lt 4 lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt 4 4 IAEA E lt Figure 4 12 10 IP Source Guard Configuration Screen Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Mode of IP Source Enable the Global IP Source Guard or disable the Global IP Source Guard All Gua
317. m TFTP server Syntax Config Load lt ip_server gt lt file_name gt check Parameters lt ip_server gt TFTP server IP address a b c d lt file_name gt Configuration file name check Check configuration file only default Check and apply file Firmware Command Firmware Load Description Load new firmware from TFTP server Syntax Firmware Load lt ip_addr_string gt lt file_name gt Parameters lt ip_addr_string gt IP host address a b c d or a host name string lt file name gt Firmware file name 419 Firmware IPv6 Load Description Load new firmware from IPv6 TFTP server Syntax Firmware IPv6 Load lt ipv6_server gt lt file_ name gt Parameters lt ipv6_server gt TF TP server IPv6 address PnP Command UPnP Configuration Description Show UPnP configuration Syntax UPnP Configuration Example Show UPnP configuration SWITCH gt upnp configuration UPnP Configuration UPnP Mode Disabled UPnP TTL 4 UPnP Advertising Duration 100 UPnP Mode Description Set or show the UPnP mode Syntax UPnP Mode enable disable Parameters enable Enable UPnP disable Disable UPnP default Show UPnP mode Default Setting disable Example 420 NS3550 24T 4S User Manual Enable the UPnP mode SWITCH gt upnp mode enable UPnP TTL Description Set or show the TTL value of the IP header in SSDP messages Syntax UPnP TTL lt ttl gt Parameters
318. m m m a a a e 802 1Q VLAN Trunking a VLAN 2 VLAN 3 PC 1 Untagged PC 4 Untagged P a DIE EEE ES HS See See eee eee eee eee eee eee eee oa aa oaa ea a a ee d ee eee eee eee ee ee ee ee ee ee ee ee Mu e e e A se ee A e A A ESE HS SS SSS ee Setup steps 1 Create VLAN Group Set VLAN Group 1 Default VLAN with VID VLAN ID 1 Add two VLANs VLAN 2 and VLAN 3 VLAN Group 2 with VID 2 VLAN Group 3 with VID 3 2 Assign VLAN Member VLAN 2 Port 1 Port 2 and Port 3 127 VLAN 3 Port 4 Port 5 and Port 6 VLAN 1 All other ports Port 7 Port 24 About the VLAN ports connect to the hosts please refer to 4 6 10 1 examples The following steps will focus on the VLAN Trunk port configuration 1 2 O Specify Port 8 to be the 802 1Q VLAN Trunk port Assign Port 8 to both VLAN 2 and VLAN 3 at the VLAN Member configuration page Define a VLAN 1 as a Public Area that overlapping with both VLAN 2 members and VLAN 3 members Assign the VLAN Trunk Port to be the member of each VLAN which wants to be aggregated At this sample add Port 8 to be VLAN 2 and VLAN 3 member port The screen is shown in Figure 4 6 12 VLAN Membership Configuration Start fram LAK with 20 entries per page Refresh ATA rem 7 pater ven Tele of oraza Figure 4 6 12 VLAN Overlap Port Setting amp VLAN 1 The Public Area Member Assign Specify Port 8 to be the 802 1Q VLAN Trunk port
319. managed and Fiber Ethernet application in Industrial network Extend Operating Temperature From 40 to 75 Degree C Robust Industrial Protection IP30 metal case and 19 rack mountable design Ethernet Protection 6KV DC ESD protection Power Redundant 1 2 RPS design supports and dual 36 72V DC power input TOY F F TY Redundant Ethernet Network STP RSTP and MSTP to greatly improve redundant data backup for links and guarantee network resilience 18 NS3550 24T 4S User Manual Es Flexible Fiber uplink capability Compatible with 1000Base SX LX and 100Base FX SFP transceiver Layer 2 Layer 4 Full functioned Managed Switch for Building Automation Networking The NS3550 24T 4S Industrial Managed Ethernet Switch is ideal for applications in the factory data centers and distributions It provides advanced Layer 2 to Layer 4 data switching and redundancy Quality of Service traffic control network access control and authentication and Secure Management features to protect customer s industrial network connectivity with reliable switching recovery capability that is suitable for implementing fault tolerant and mesh network architectures Cost effective I Pv6 Managed Gigabit Switch solution for industrial Nowadays lots of electronic products or mobile devices can browse the Internet which means the need of IP Address increases However the current IPv4 network infrastructure is not capable enough to provide IP Address to each single user
320. mat and as such does not include a tag header as defined by IEEE 802 1Q 2003 Tagged The device is using the IEEE 802 1Q tagged frame format e VLAN ID VLAN ID is the VLAN identifier VID for the port as defined in IEEE 802 1Q 2003 A value of 1 through 4094 is used to define a valid VLAN ID A value of 0 Priority Tagged is used if the device is using priority tagged frames as defined by IEEE 802 1Q 2003 meaning that only the IEEE 802 1D priority level is significant and the default PVID of the ingress port is used instead e Priority Priority is the Layer 2 priority to be used for the specified application type One of eight priority levels 0 through 7 e DSCP DSCP is the DSCP value to be used to provide Diffserv node behavior for the specified application type as defined in IETF RFC 2474 Contain one of 64 code point values 0 through 63 Buttons Refresh Click to refresh the page immediately Auto refresh Check this box to enable an automatic refresh of the page at regular intervals Neighbor This page provides a status overview for all LLDP neighbors The displayed table contains a row for each port on which an LLDP neighbor is detected The LLDP Neighbor Information screen is shown in Figure 4 14 4 The columns hold the following information LLDP Neighbor Information Local Port Chassis ID Remote Port ID System Name Port Description System Capabilities Management Address No LLDP neighbor information foun
321. mber packets that dropped received packets with relay agent information option Buttons Auto refresh Check this box to enable an automatic refresh of the page at regular intervals Retresh Click to refresh the page any changes made locally will be undone Clear Clear all statistics 63 CPU Load This page displays the CPU load using a SVG graph The load is measured as averaged over the last 100ms 1sec and 10 seconds intervals The last 120 samles are graphed and the last numbers are displayed as text as well In order to display the SVG graph your browser must support the SVG format Consult the SVG Wiki for more information on browser support Specifically at the time of writing Microsoft Internet Explorer will need to have a plugin installed to support SVG The CPU Load screen is shown in Figure 4 2 13 CPU Load Auto refresh 100ms 3 1sec 1 10sec 1 all numbers running average 9 90 20 NWN Wg aa AS uy VA DITEDO N A ANI lr Figure 4 2 13 CPU Load Page Screenshot g L Buttons Auto refresh i i Check this box to enable an automatic refresh of the page at regular intervals If your browser can not display this chart please download Adobe SVG tool and install it in your computer 64 NS3550 24T 4S User Manual System Log The switch system log information is provided here The System Log screen is shown in Figure 4 2 14 system Log Information The total number of entr
322. mbined VLAN Users configuration Default Setting Promiscous Example Show VLAN configuration of port10 SWITCH gt status 1 Port VLAN User Aware PVID Frame Type Ing Filter Tx Tag UVID Conflicts 1 Static Enabled 1 All Disabled Untag This 1 305 No No Voice VLAN No MSTP No Combined Enabled 1 All Disabled Untag This 1 No Private VLAN Configuration Command PVLAN Configuration Description Show Private VLAN configuration Syntax PVLAN Configuration lt port_list gt Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports Example Show private VLAN configuration SWITCH gt pvlan configuration Private VLAN Configuration Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled PVLAN ID Ports 306 NS3550 24T 4S User Manual PVLAN Add Description Add or modify Private VLAN entry Syntax PVLAN Add lt pvlan_id gt lt port_list gt Parameters lt pvlan_id gt Private VLAN ID lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports Example Add port17 to port24 in PVLAN10 SWITCH gt pvlan add 10 17 24 PVLAN Delete Description Delete Private VLAN entry Syntax PVLAN Delete lt pvlan_id gt Parameters lt pvlan_id gt Private VLAN ID Example Delete PVLAN10 SWITCH gt
323. means aggregations lt path_cost gt STP port path cost 1 200000000 or auto Default auto Example Set MSTI7 in port SWITCH gt stp msti port cost 7 1 MSTI Port Path Cost MST7 1 Auto STP MSTI Port Priority Description Set or show the STP CIST MSTI port priority 386 NS3550 24T 4S User Manual Syntax STP Msti Port Priority lt msti gt lt port_list gt lt priority gt Parameters lt msti gt STP bridge instance no 0 7 CIST 0 MSTI1 1 lt port_list gt Port list or all Port zero means aggregations lt priority gt STP port priority 0 16 32 48 224 240 Default 128 Multicast Configuration Command IGMP Configuration Description Show IGMP snooping configuration Syntax IGMP Configuration lt port_list gt Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports Example Show IGMP snooping configuration SWITCH gt igmp configuration IGMP Mode Description Set or show the IGMP snooping mode Syntax IGMP Mode enable disable Parameters enable Enable IGMP snooping 387 disable Disable IGMP snooping default Show IGMP snooping mode Default Setting Disabled Example Enable IGMP mode SWITCH gt igmp mode enable IGMP Leave Proxy Description Set or show the mode of IGMP Leave Proxy Syntax IGMP Leave Proxy enable disable Parameters enable Enable IGMP Leave Proxy disa
324. mes from multiple ports to a mirror port In this context mirroring a frame is the same as copying the frame Both incoming source and outgoing destination frames can be mirrored to the mirror port N NAS is an acronym for Network Access Server The NAS is meant to act as a gateway to guard access to a protected source A client connects to the NAS and the NAS connects to another resource asking whether the client s supplied credentials are valid Based on the answer the NAS then allows or disallows access to the protected resource An example of a NAS implementation is IEEE 802 1X NetBIOS is an acronym for Network Basic Input Output System It is a program that allows applications on separate computers to communicate within a Local Area Network LAN and it is not supported on a Wide Area Network WAN The NetBIOS giving each computer in the network both a NetBIOS name and an IP address corresponding to a different host name provides the session and transport services described in the Open Systems Interconnection OSI model NFS is an acronym for Network File System It allows hosts to mount partitions on a remote system and use them as though they are local file systems NFS allows the system administrator to store resources in a central location on the network providing authorized users continuous access to them which means NFS supports sharing of files printers and other resources as persistent storage ov
325. mode default Show MVR port type Default Setting receive Example Set source type for MVR port type of port 1 SWITCH gt mvr port type 1 source MVR Immediate Leave Description Set or show MVR port state about immediate leave Syntax MVR Immediate Leave lt port_list gt enable disable Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports enable Enable Immediate leave mode 424 NS3550 24T 4S User Manual disable Disable Immediate leave mode default Show MVR Immediate leave mode Default Setting disable Example Enable MVR port state about immediate leave for port 1 SWITCH gt mvr immediate leave 1 enable 425 Voice VLAN Command Voice VLAN Configuration Description Show Voice VLAN configuration Syntax Voice VLAN Configuration Example Show Voice VLAN configuration SWITCH gt voice vian configuration Voice VLAN Configuration Disabled 1000 Voice VLAN Age Time seconds 86400 Voice VLAN Traffic Class High Voice VLAN OUI Table IFS phones Cisco phones H3C phones Philips and NEC AG phones Pingtel phones Polycom phones 3Com phones Siemens AG phones Voice VLAN Port Configuration Port Mode Security Discovery Protocol Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disab
326. mp fastleave 1 enable IGMP Throttling Description Set or show the IGMP port throttling status Syntax IGMP Throttling lt port_list gt limit group number Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports 0 No limit 1 10 Group learn limit default Show IGMP Port Throttling Default Setting unlimited 390 NS3550 24T 4S User Manual Example Set the IGMP port throttling status for port 1 SWITCH gt igmp throttling 1 10 IGMP Filtering Description Set or show the IGMP port group filtering list Syntax IGMP Filtering lt port_list gt add del group addr Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports add Add new port group filtering entry del Del existing port group filtering entry default Show IGMP port group filtering list IP multicast group address a b c d Default Setting No filtering Example Set the IGMP port group filtering list for port 1 SWITCH gt igmp filtering 1 add 239 0 0 1 IGMP Router Description Set or show the IGMP snooping router port mode Syntax IGMP Router lt port_list gt enable disable Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports enable Enable IGMP router port disable Disable IGMP router port default Show IGMP router port mode 391 Default Setting disable Example Enable IGMP snooping function for port1 4 SWITCH gt igmp router 1 4 en
327. mple Delete Group2 SWITCH gt aggr delete 2 Aggregation Look up Description Look up link aggregation Syntax Aggr Look up lt aggr_id gt Parameters lt aggr_id gt Aggregation ID global 1 2 local 3 14 394 NS3550 24T 4S User Manual Example Show aggregation status SWITCH gt aggr lookup 1 Aggr ID Name Type Ports GLAG1 Static 1 4 ggregation Mode Description Set or show the link aggregation traffic distribution mode Syntax Aggr Mode smac dmaclip port enable disable Parameters smac Source MAC address dmac Destination MAC address ip Source and destination IP address port Source and destination UDP TCP port enable Enable field in traffic distribution disable Disable field in traffic distribution Default Setting SMAC Enabled DMAC Disabled IP Enabled Port Enabled Example Disable SMAC mode SWITCH gt Aggr mode smac disable 395 Link Aggregation Control Protocol Command LACP Configuration Description Show LACP configuration Syntax LACP Configuration lt port_list gt Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports Example Show LACP configuration SWITCH gt lacp configuration Port Mode Key Role Disabled Auto Active Disabled Auto Active Disabled Auto Active Disabled Auto Active Disabled Auto Active Disabled Auto Active Disabled Auto Active Disabled Auto Active Disabled Auto Active Disabled
328. n Syntax do_act firstisecond port power enable disable Parameters lt first gt Digital input output 1 lt second gt Digital input output 2 default Set or show digital input output first 1 second 2 select lt port gt port fail lt power gt power fail default Set or show digital output fault alarm 1 2 action lt enable gt Enable digital input1 2 function lt disable gt Disable digital input1 2 function default Set or show digital input output fault alarm 1 2 status Example Set digital output action SWITCH gt dido do_act first port enable SWITCH gt dido do_act first power enable Do_en Description Set or show the system digital output1 2 Syntax do_en first second enable disable hightolow lowtohigh Parameters lt first gt Digital input output 1 lt second gt Digital input output 2 default Set or show digital input output first 1 second 2 select lt enable gt Enable digital input1 2 function lt disable gt Disable digital input1 2 function default Set or show digital input output fault alarm 1 2 status lt hightolow gt Trigger gt high to low 439 lt lowtohigh gt Trigger gt low to high default Set or show digital input output 1 2 trigger Example Enable digital output function and set trigger condition SWITCH gt dido do_en first enable hightolow Do_port_alr Description Set or show the system digital output1 2 port ala
329. n address is on the same segment as the source address This confines network traffic to its respective domain and reduce the overall load on the network The Switch performs Store and forward therefore no error packets occur More reliably it reduces the re transmission rate No packet loss will occur 444 NS3550 24T 4S User Manual Auto Negotiation The STP ports on the Switch have built in Auto negotiation This technology automatically sets the best possible bandwidth when a connection is established with another network device usually at Power On or Reset This is done by detect the modes and speeds at the second of both device is connected and capable of both 10Base T and 100Base TX devices can connect with the port in either Half or Full Duplex mode If attached device is 100Base TX port will set to 10Mbps no auto negotiation 10Mbps 10Mbps with auto negotiation 10 20Mbps 10Base T Full Duplex 100Mbps no auto negotiation 100Mbps 100Mbps with auto negotiation 100 200Mbps 100Base T X Full Duplex 445 TROUBLE SHOOTING This chapter contains information to help you solve problems If the Ethernet Switch is not functioning properly make sure the Ethernet Switch was set up according to instructions in this manual MW The Link LED is not lit Solution Check the cable connection and remove duplex mode of the Ethernet Switch HM Some stations cannot talk to other stations located on the other port Solut
330. n aggregation or clear the radio button to remove the port from the aggregation By default no ports belong to any aggregation group Buttons Save Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 100 NS3550 24T 4S User Manual LACP Configuration Link Aggregation Control Protocol LACP LACP LAG negotiate Aggregated Port links with other LACP ports located on a different device LACP allows switches connected to each other to discover automatically whether any ports are member of the same LAG This page allows the user to inspect the current LACP port configurations and possibly change them as well The LACP port settings relate to the currently selected unit as reflected by the page header The LACP Port Configuration screen is shown in Figure 4 5 4 LACP Port Configuration L 4 5 4 3 4 A Eb NIE JE pl 315 ce a poe AA 4 414 AA 41 4 14 ce a 4 oo Oo w mM me 0 mn 4 4 4 JABE a3 T lt eee re o AA AAA o ss m 4 F 4 4 F 4 lt EE 4 5 4 poe dh E px E px i z O O O O O E O O LA O E O a O O NES O E O a O O O O O mz O O O O O po O O O O a Ce a E Figure 4 5 4 LACP Port Configuration Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object e Port e LACP Enabled e Key e Rol
331. n preferred because you can remain connected and monitor the system during system reboots Also certain error messages are sent to the serial port regardless of the interface through which the associated action was initiated A Macintosh or PC attachment can use any terminal emulation program for connecting to the terminal serial port A workstation attachment under UNIX can use an emulator such as TIP 217 Telnet Login The Managed Switch also supports telnet for remote management The switch asks for user name and password for remote login when using telnet please use admin for username amp password TEST HyperTerminal i f ioi xl le Edit View Call Transfer Help Welcome to Command Line Interface Port Numbers P aa ar ee caos ces ct a sis a 1 21 41 61 81 1101121161161 1181201221241 1221 1241 ELE 91 51 71 1 91111191151 1171191211291 1211 1291 test A heed ae ee l Username admin Password Login 1n progress SH1TCHS gt _ 278 NS3550 24T 4S User Manual Command Line Mode The CLI groups all the commands in appropriate modes according to the nature of the command A sample of the CLI command modes are described below Each of the command modes supports specific software commands Command Groups System System settings and reset options IP IP configuration and Ping Port Port management MAC MAC address table VLAN Virtual LAN PVLAN Private VLAN Security Security m
332. nNfiguratiON oooccccoonncnccoonnnonoccnnononononnncnnononnnnnnnnrnnnnnrnnnnnnrnnonnrnrnnnrrnnrnnnrrnnnnnnrnnnnancinnnas 342 Security Network NAS MOJE masse ofits cst sick Gees wide esd aah gd ead iencee eed ascites Sadia ae 343 SEGCUIILY INCLWORKINAS Slate 2 A A A inland A 343 Security Network NAS Reauthentication ccoooccccoconnncccoconoconcnnocononcnnnonononcnnononcnnonnnnnnnnrnnonnnrnnnnorannnnnnarannnnns 344 Security Network NAS ReauthPeriod cccccccssscccceseecceeececceuseecsececsueeecseseeseueeesseeeessuuseesenecessesageeesseseeesagss 345 Security Network NAS EapolTiMe out cccccseeccccsseecceececceececceececseeeessuseeseeeeeseeeessuuseeseueeesssaeueessseeessages 345 Security Network NAS AGC tin 6 csi AA A ted aneve asides 346 Security Network NAS Holmes de 346 Security Network NAS RADIUS QS oocccoocccccccccccocccnnococonocononnnonnnnnnonnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnonnnnnnnas 347 Security Network NAS RADIUS VEAN us a ias 347 security Network NAS Guest VEAN as 348 Security Network NAS AUMentCale sai tada 349 Security Network NAS STatiStiCS oooccccococococconococononcccoconononnnconannnnnnnnnnnnnnnnonnnnnonnnnnnnnnrnnnnnnnnnrenannnnnnananinnns 349 Security Network ACL Configuration cccccccssececsesececeseecceuseeceeececsegeeecsuseesseaseecseneeessaeeeseueeseessegeeesseneeeseass 350 Security Network ACE ACI usara A O Salsas 351 Security NeworkAGL P
333. nclude retransmissions The number of RADIUS packets retransmitted to the RADIUS accounting server The number of RADIUS packets destined for the server that have not yet timed out or received a response This variable is incremented when a Request is sent and decremented due to receipt of a Response timeout or retransmission The number of accounting timeouts to the server After a timeout the client may retry to the same server send to a different server or give up A retry to the same server is counted as a retransmit as well as a timeout A send to a different server is counted as a Request as well as a timeout This section contains information about the state of the server and the latest round trip time Name State Round Trip Time RFC4670 Name radiusAccClientExtRo undTrip Time 222 Description Shows the state of the server It takes one of the following values Disabled The selected server is disabled Not Ready The server is enabled but IP communication is not yet up and running Ready The server is enabled IP communication is up and run and the RADIUS module is ready to accept accounting attempts Dead X seconds left Accounting attempts were made to this server but it did not reply within the configured timeout The server has temporarily been disabled but will get re enabled when the dead time expires The number of seconds left before this occurs is displayed in parentheses T
334. nconnncnnnnnnnnnonannnonnnnnnnnnnnonnnenaninnns 324 Security Switch SNMP Trap LiNk Up occococcccocncccccnconcnccocnnconnnonnnnnnncnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnonnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnas 324 Security Switch SNMP Trap Inform Mode 28 ii 325 Security Switch SNMP Trap Inform TIMEOUt ci ds cda 326 Security Switch SNMP Trap Inform Retry Times ooccccocnccccnccccnnccccnccncnnnnonnnnncnonnnnnonnnnnncnnnnrnnnnnnnnnncnonnennnenaninnos 326 Security Switch SNMP Trap Probe Security Engine ID c oooncccccoccnnccoccnccnnconononcnnononnnnonnrononnnnnnononcnnonananinnnnos 327 Security Switch SNMP Trap Security Engine ID oocccccocconococnncccoconoconconoconcncononononnnronononcnnononnnnnnonanannnnns 327 Security Switch SNMP Trap Security Name ccooccccccccccocnccccnnccncnccncononnnononnnnncnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnrnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnennnenaninnos 328 Security SWIC ONMP ENGINED aioe carcass aia da 328 Security Switch SNMP Community Add cccccccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeaeeeeeseeeeeeseeeeessaeseesseeeeesageeeeesseeeeesaees 328 Security Switch SNMP Community Delete coooccccococonoconconocononconononononconoconcnnnnnnnnnnnronononcnnornnnnnnnonananennns 329 Security Switch SNMP Community LOOK Up cccccsecceseecceececaececeseeceaeeecaeeesaueeceaeeeaeeesageeseueeseaeeeseaeeesseeesaes 329 Security SWITCH SNMP USC Add all ido 330 Security Switch SNMP User Delete oo
335. nd revert to previously saved values VLAN Configuration Each page shows up to 999 entries from the VLAN table default being 20 selected through the entries per page input field When first visited the web page will show the first 20 entries from the beginning of the VLAN Table The first displayed will be the one with the lowest VLAN ID found in the VLAN Table The VLAN input fields allow the user to select the starting point in the VLAN Table The IGMP Snooping VLAN Configuration screen is shown in Figure 4 8 7 ISMP Snooping VLAN Configuration start from WLAN with entries per page VLAN ID IGMP Querier Se Figure 4 8 7 IGMP Snooping VLAN Configuration Page Screenshot a The page includes the following fields Object Description e VLANID The VLAN ID of the entry e IGMP Snooping Enable Enable the per VLAN IGMP Snooping Only up to 64 VLANs can be selected e IGMP Querier Enable the IGMP Querier in the VLAN The Querier will send out if no Query received in 255 seconds after IGMP Querier Enabled Each Querier s interval is 125 second and it will stop act as an IGMP Querier if received any Querier from 155 other devices Buttons Refresh Refreshes the displayed table starting from the VLAN input fields ke Updates the table starting from the first entry in the VLAN Table i e the entry with the lowest VLAN ID gt gt gt Updates the table starting with the entry after the last entry cu
336. nfiguration Description Show PoE configuration Syntax Show PoE Show Port Configuration Description Show port configuration Syntax Show port Show Private VLAN Configuration Description Show up Private VLAN configuration Syntax Show pvlan 435 NS3550 24T 4S User Manual Show QoS Configuration Description Show QoS Configuration Syntax Show QoS Show SNMP Configuration Description Show SNMP configuration Syntax Show SNMP Show System Configuration Description Show system configuration Syntax Show system Show VLAN Configuration Description Show VLAN configuration Syntax Show vian Show STP Configuration Description Show up STP Port configuration Syntax Show STP 436 DIDO Command Di_act Description Digital input fuction and action configuration Syntax di_act firstisecond 1 2 3 4 enable disable Parameters lt first gt Digital input output 1 lt second gt Digital input output 2 default Set or show digital input output first 1 second 2 select lt 1 gt System Log lt 2 gt Syslog lt 3 gt SNMP Trap lt 4 gt SMTP default set or show digital input 1 2 action lt enable gt Enable digital input1 2 function lt disable gt Disable digital input1 2 function default Set or show digital input output fault alarm 1 2 status Example Enable Digital input 1 and enable acion to System log SWITCH gt dido di_act
337. nfiguration gt These tags are mandatory and must be present at the beginning of the file Section tags lt platform gt lt global gt and lt switch gt The platform section must be the first section tag and this section must include the correct platform ID and version The global section is optional and includes configuration that is not related to specific switch ports The switch section is optional and includes configuration that is related to specific switch ports Module tags lt ip gt lt mac gt lt port gt etc These tags identify a module controlling specific parts of the configuration Group tags lt port_table gt lt vlan_table gt etc These tags identify a group of parameters typically a table Parameter tags lt mode gt lt entry gt etc These tags identify parameters for the specific section module and group The lt entry gt tag is used for table entries Configuration parameters are represented as attribute values When saving the configuration from the switch the entire configuration including syntax descriptions is included in the file The file may then be modified using an editor and loaded to a switch The example is as below shows ismall configuration file only including configuration of the MAC address age time and the learning mode per port When loading this file only the included parameters will be changed This means that the age time will be set to 200 and the learn mode will be set to aut
338. ng group and replaces it with the new multicast group The IGMP Snooping Port Group Filtering Configuration screen is shown in Figure 4 8 8 ISMP Snooping Port Group Filtering Configuration Figure 4 8 8 IGMP Snooping Port Group Filtering Configuration Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields 156 NS3550 24T 4S User Manual Object Description e Delete Check to delete the entry It will be deleted during the next save e Port The logical port for the settings e Filtering Group The IP Multicast Group that will be filtered Ww H S Oo Check to delete the entry Add new Filtering troup Click to add a new entry to the Group Filtering table Save Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values IGMP Snooping Status This page provides IGMP Snooping status The status relate to the currently selected unit as reflected by the page header The IGMP Snooping Status screen is shown in Figure 4 8 9 157 IGMP Snooping Status Auto Refresh O Statistics LAN ID Querier Status 1 Reports Receive 2 Reports Receive 3 Reports Receive 2 Leave Receive IGMP Groups Port Members TA rm cano erws klepe _No IGMP groups OOOO No IGMP groups Router Port Figure 4 8 9 IGMP Snooping Status Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e VLAN ID The VLAN ID of the entry e
339. ng higher speed links to a port that has a higher number than the current root port can cause a root port change STP Port States The BPDUs take some time to pass through a network This propagation delay can result in topology changes where a port that transitioned directly from a Blocking state to a Forwarding state could create temporary data loops Ports must wait for new network topology information to propagate throughout the network before starting to forward packets They must also wait for the packet lifetime to expire for BPDU packets that were forwarded based on the old topology The forward delay timer is used to allow the network topology to stabilize after a topology change In addition STP specifies a series of states a port must transition through to further ensure that a stable network topology is created after a topology change Each port on a switch using STP exists is in one of the following five states a Blocking the port is blocked from forwarding or receiving packets Listening the port is waiting to receive BPDU packets that may tell the port to go back to the blocking state Learning the port is adding addresses to its forwarding database but not yet forwarding packets Forwarding the port is forwarding packets Disabled the port only responds to network management messages and must return to the blocking state first A port transitions from one state to another as follows From initialization switch b
340. nges made locally and revert to previously saved values 245 ARP Inspection ARP Inspection is a secure feature Several types of attacks can be launched against a host or devices connected to Layer 2 networks by poisoning the ARP caches This feature is used to block such attacks Only valid ARP requests and responses can go through DUT This page provides ARP Inspection related configuration The ARP Inspection Configuration screen is shown in Figure 4 12 12 ARP Inspection Configuration Mode Disable y Port Mode Configuration Ollollolo lolo lee lo MEE EA E E ERES SEI EI 41 4 4 4 ANA NAAA 1 1 12 Ds 13 Drake 14 Disable 15 Disable 16 Disable 17 Disable lo Disable 4 4 1 2 3 i 5 a Di E a 3 0 1 Pa hi O wD pl g T 4 PI Py E to bo ollo IES 115 4 FJ 4 Figure 4 12 12 ARP Inspection Configuration Screen Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Mode of ARP Enable the Global ARP Inspection or disable the Global ARP Inspection Inspection 246 NS3550 24T 4S User Manual Configuration e Port Mode Defines the ports on which ARP Inspection is enabled ARP Inspection is only Configuration enabled on this given port when both Global Mode and Port Mode on a given port are enabled Buttons save Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved
341. nm 1310nm Before connect the other Managed Switches workstation or Media Converter l 10km 10km 20km 20km 60km 60km 9 5 4 9 5 4 9 1 9 5 3 9 5 3 2 3 2 3 0 5 0 5 9 3 9 3 8 2 8 2 0 5 0 5 11 11 15 15 24 24 O 50 C O 50 C O 50 C O 50 C O 50 C O 50 C We recommend using IFS SFPs on the Managed Switch If you insert a SFP transceiver that is not supported the Managed Switch will not recognize it Make sure both sides use the same type of SFP transceiver for example 1000Base SX to 1000Base SX 1000Base LX to 1000Base LX Check the fiber optic cable type match the SFP transceiver model gt To connect to 1000Base SX SFP transceiver use the Multi mode fiber cable with one side must be male duplex LC connector type gt Toconnectto 1000Base LX SFP transceiver use the Single mode fiber cable with one side must be male duplex LC connector type 32 A N NS3550 24T 4S User Manual Connect the fiber cable Attach the duplex LC connector on the network cable into the SFP transceiver Connect the other end of the cable to a device switches with SFP installed fiber NIC on a workstation or a Media Converter Check the LNK ACT LED of the SFP slot on the front of the Managed Switch Ensure that the SFP transceiver is operating correctly Check the Link mode of the SFP port if the link failed Remove the transceiver mo
342. nment Firmware upload download via HTTP TFTP DHCP Relay and Option 82 User Privilege levels control NTP Network Time Protocol Link Layer Discovery Protocol LLDP Protocol Cable Diagnostic technology provides the mechanism to detect and report potential cabling issues Reset button for system reboot or reset to factory default IFS Smart Discovery Utility for deploy management ICMPv6 gt Redundant Power System 36 72V DC Dual power redundant Active active redundant power failure protection Mi Backup of catastrophic power failure on one supply Mi Fault tolerance and resilience gt Digital Input Digital Output M 2 Digital Input DI Mi 2 Digital Output DO Mi Integrate sensors into auto alarm system M Transfer alarm to IP network via email and SNMP trap 23 Product Specification Hardware Specification Copper Ports 24 10 100 1000Base T RJ 45 Auto MDI MDI X ports Ta 4 1000Base SX LX BX SFP interfaces shared with Port 21 to Port 24 SSE LNT BAS Compatible with 100Base FX SEP Console Port 1 x RS 232 DB9 serial port 115200 8 N 1 Switch Processing Scheme Store and Forward Switch Fabric 48Gbps non blocking IEEE 802 3x Pause Frame for Full Duplex Back pressure for Half Duplex gt 10 seconds Factory Default Wwe w Power Consumption Max 30 Watts 102 BTU AC Power Requirement DC 36V DC 0 75A Range 36V 72V DC ESD Protection 6KV DC 2 Digital Input DI Level 0 24 2 1V 0 1
343. nooping statistics Example Show DHCP snooping statistics of port 1 SWITCH gt security network dhcp snooping statistics 1 Port 1 Statistics Rx Discover O Tx Discover Rx Offer O Tx Offer O Tx Request O Tx Decline O Tx ACK O Tx NAK O Tx Release Rx Inform O Tx Inform Rx Lease Query O Tx Lease Query Rx Lease Unassigned 0 Tx Lease Unassigned Rx Lease Unknown O Tx Lease Unknown 361 Rx Lease Active O Tx Lease Active 0 Security Network IP Source Guard Configuration Description Show IP source guard configuration Syntax Security Network IP Source Guard Configuration Example Show IP source guard configuration SWITCH gt security network ip source guard configuration IP Source guard Configuration IP Source Guard Mode Disabled Port Port Mode Dynamic Entry Limit Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled unlimited unlimited unlimited unlimited unlimited unlimited unlimited unlimited unlimited unlimited unlimited unlimited unlimited unlimited unlimited unlimited unlimited unlimited unlimited unlimited unlimited unlimited unlimited unlimited IP Source Guard Entry Table 362 NS3550 24T 4S User Manual Security Network IP Source Guard Mode Description Set or
344. ns For networked UPnP devices gt gt Other Places E Desktop ad Entire Network e My Computer 3 My Documents Backup 5 011 Ta Printers and Faxes E Details Figure 4 2 10 UPnP devices shows on Windows My Network Places DHCP Relay Configure DHCP Relay on this page DHCP Relay is used to forward and to transfer DHCP messages between the clients and the server when they are not on the same subnet domain The DHCP option 82 enables a DHCP relay agent to insert specific information into DHCP request packet when forwarding client DHCP packets to a DHCP server and remove the specific information from a DHCP reply packets when forwarding server DHCP packets to a DHCP client The DHCP server can use this information to implement IP address or other assignment policies Specifically the option works by setting two sub options Circuit ID option 1 Remote ID option2 The Circuit ID sub option is supposed to include information specific to which circuit the request came in on The Remote ID sub option was designed to carry information relating to the remote host end of the circuit 60 NS3550 24T 4S User Manual The definition of Circuit ID in the switch is 4 bytes in length and the format is vlan_id module _id port_no The parameter of vlan_id is the first two bytes represent the VLAN ID The parameter of module_ id is the third byte for the module ID The parameter of port_no is the fourth byte and
345. nsceiver to from any SFP port without a need to shut the power down SFPs and fiber cables are plugged in as shown in Figure 2 7 MGB SXILXA gt 1000Base SX LX LC Fiber Figure 2 7 Plug in the SFP Transceiver 31 Approved IFS SFP Transceivers IFS Managed Switch supports both Single mode and Multi mode SFP transceiver Please refer to below chart as well as the IFS website for the latest compatible SFP modules Fast 100Mbps 100Base FX S20 2MLC 2 25 2MLC 2 100Base LX S20 2SLC 20 S25 2SLC 20 100Base FX 100Base FX 100Base LX 100Base LX 20 1SLC A 20 100Base BX20 U 20 1SLC B 20 100Base BX20 D Gigabit 1000Mbps Part No 30 RJ Copper RJ45 1000Base SX T S30 2MLC S35 2MLC S30 2MLC 2 SFP 1000T 1000Base SX 1000Base SX 1000Base Sx2 1000Base LX LHX ZX Fiber Type Connector Mult mode MultlLmode Single mode Single mode Single mode Single mode Fiber Type Copper Multl mode Multl mode Multl mode LC LC LC LC LC LC Connector LC LC LC 1310nm 1310nm 1310nm 1310nm 1310nm 1550nm TX Wavelength TX RX Wavelength Wavelength 1310nm 1310nm 1310nm 1310nm 1550nm 1310nm RX Wavelength 850nm 850nm 1310nm 850nm 850nm 1310nm Max Distance 100m 220rrv550m 220rrv550m 2km Max Power Distance dBm 2km 20 14 2km 20 14 20km 15 8 20km 15 8 20km 14 8 20km 14 8 Power RX Sen
346. nterval seconds Valid values are restricted to 2 10 256 NS3550 24T 4S User Manual times TTL in seconds is based on the following rule Transmission Interval Holdtime Multiplier lt 65536 Therefore the default TTL is 4 30 120 seconds e Tx Delay If some configuration is changed e g the IP address a new LLDP frame is transmitted but the time between the LLDP frames will always be at least the value of Tx Delay seconds Tx Delay cannot be larger than 1 4 of the Tx Interval value Valid values are restricted to 1 8192 seconds This attribute must comply with the rule 4 Delay Interval lt Transmission Interval e Tx Reinit When a port is disabled LLDP is disabled or the switch is rebooted a LLDP shutdown frame is transmitted to the neighboring units signaling that the LLDP information isn t valid anymore Tx Reinit controls the amount of seconds between the shutdown frame and a new LLDP initialization Valid values are restricted to 1 10 seconds LLDP Port Configuration The LLDP port settings relate to the currently selected unit as reflected by the page header Object Description e Port The switch port number of the logical LLDP port e Mode Select LLDP mode Rx only The switch will not send out LLDP information but LLDP information from neighbor units is analyzed Tx only The switch will drop LLDP information received from neighbors but will send out LLDP information Disabled The switch will not send
347. ntry index key are Engine ID and User Name The SNMPv3 Users Configuration screen is shown in Figure 4 3 5 83 SNMPv3 Users Configuration Delete User Security Authentication Authentication Privacy Privacy Mame Level Protocol Password Protocol Passv ord o0000 es01 00001 default_user MoAuth HoP rm Mone Mone Mone Mone Figure 4 3 5 SNMPv3 Users Configuration Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Delete Check to delete the entry It will be deleted during the next save e Engine ID An octet string identifying the engine ID that this entry should belong to The string must contain an even number between 10 and 64 hexadecimal digits but all zeros and all F s are not allowed e User Name A string identifying the user name that this entry should belong to The allowed string length is 1 to 32 and the allowed content is the ASCII characters from 33 to 126 e Security Level Indicates the security model that this entry should belong to Possible security models are NoAuth NoPriv None authentication and none privacy Auth NoPriv Authentication and none privacy Auth Priv Authentication and privacy The value of security level cannot be modified if entry already exist That means must first ensure that the value is set correctly e Authentication Indicates the authentication protocol that this entry should belong to Possible Protocol authentication protocol are None None auth
348. number of MAC addresses 1 8192 default Show all addresses lt mac_addr gt First MAC address xx xx xx xx xx xx default MAC address zero lt vid gt First VLAN ID 1 4095 default 1 Example Show all of MAC table SWITCH gt mac dump Type VID MAC Address 1 9c f6 1a XX XX XX 1 1 09c f6 1a XX XX XX None CPU 33 33 ff 24 04 d1 None CPU 1 33 33 ff a8 00 64 None CPU Dynamic 1 40 61 86 04 18 69 10 Static 1 ff ff ff ff ff ff 1 24 CPU MAC Statistics Description Show MAC address table statistics Syntax MAC Statistics lt port_list gt Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports Example Set all of MAC statistics SWITCH gt mac statistics Port Dynamic Addresses 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 299 Total Dynamic Addresses 1 Total Static Addresses 5 MAC Flush Description Flush all learned entries Syntax MAC Flush VLAN Configuration Command VLAN Configuration Description Show VLAN configuration Syntax VLAN Configuration lt port_list gt Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports Example Show VLAN status of port1 SWITCH gt vlan configuration 1 VLAN Configuration Mode IEEE 802 10 Port PVID IngrFilter FrameType LinkType Q in Q Mode Eth type UnTag Disable N A 300 VLAV PVID Description Set or show the port VLAN ID Syntax VLAN PVID lt port_list gt lt vid gt
349. o wait for HTTP requests and handle them when they arrive The Web browser is an HTTP client sending requests to server machines An HTTP client initiates a request by establishing a Transmission Control Protocol TCP connection to a particular port on a remote host port 80 by default An HTTP server listening on that port waits for the client to send a request message HTTPS is an acronym for Hypertext Transfer Protocol over Secure Socket Layer It is used to indicate a secure HTTP connection HTTPS provide authentication and encrypted communication and is widely used on the World Wide Web for security sensitive communication such as payment transactions and corporate logons HTTPS is really just the use of Netscape s Secure Socket Layer SSL as a sublayer under its regular HTTP application layering HTTPS uses port 443 instead of HTTP port 80 in its interactions with the lower layer TCP IP SSL uses a 40 bit key size for the RC4 stream encryption algorithm which is considered an adequate degree of encryption for commercial exchange ICMP is an acronym for Internet Control Message Protocol It is a protocol that generated the error response diagnostic 456 NS3550 24T 4S User Manual or routing purposes ICMP messages generally contain information about routing difficulties or simple exchanges such as time stamp or echo transactions For example the PING command uses ICMP to test an Internet connection IEEE 802 1X IGMP
350. occcccoccocococoncccoconoconcnnoconcnconnnonononcnnononrnnnnnnnnnnnnrnnnrnnrrrnnnrnnnnnnnanannnnns 330 Security Switch SNMP User Changekey o ee ee dd 331 Security Switch SNMPUser Look UP A ee a 331 SECUN SWItChoNIMP GrOUD AGG cias e ent beets 332 Security Switch SNMP Group Delete oocccoccccccccccccncconcnococncnnnnnoonnnonocnnonnnonnnnnnnnnnnnnrnnnnnnnnnnnnnonnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnos 332 Securty Switeh SNMP Group LOOK Ud ee NA 333 Security Switch MP View ACC ana cos pio el eb 333 Security Switch SNMP View Delete eL 334 Security Switch SNMP View LOOK UP ccccceccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeesseeeeeseaeeeeseeeessaeeeesaeeeseeseeeeesaaeeeesaaes 334 Security Switch SNMP ACCESS Adi ee da e e A th do 335 Security Switch SNMP Access Delete cocoooococococoncococonoconconononnnconononononcnnononnnnononnnnnnnrnnnrnnrnnnnonannnnenananinnns 335 Security Switch SNMP Access LOOK UD ica ii 336 Security Network PSEC SWilChiiicstinticania il td lt 336 STAN A A a NI a Nr eos 337 security Network Limit CONMGUPALION iii ii xe 338 A eaccned setae a bane scesene peel ae ee ate 339 NS3550 24T 4S User Manual Security Network LITE AAI Oise sec clas eats O eee a heat 339 Security Nelwork binitAgetlMei aia E T 340 Security Network LIMH POr ianea A A ii ET AS 340 Security NetWork CIm EOE cit AS A AA EATA 341 Security Network EIMI ACIO userre it A A AS AA A A 341 Security Network Limit ROODE si ibid 342 Security Network NAS Co
351. of hosts or servers permitted or denied to use the service ACL can generally be configured to control inbound traffic and in this context they are similar to firewalls ACE is an acronym for Access Control Entry It describes access permission associated with a particular ACE ID There are three ACE frame types Ethernet Type ARP and IPv4 and two ACE actions permit and deny The ACE also contains many detailed different parameter options that are available for individual application Access Control List Status This page shows the ACL status by different ACL users Each row describes the ACE that is defined It is a conflict if a specific ACE is not applied to the hardware due to hardware limitations The Voice VLAN OUI Table screen is shown in Figure 4 10 1 ACL Status Comin Y Autorettesh E User Ingress Port Frame Type Rate Limiter Port Copy CPU Once Conflict Mo entries Figure 4 10 1 Voice VLAN OUI Table Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e User Indicates the ACL user e Ingress Port Indicates the ingress port of the ACE Possible values are Any The ACE will match any ingress port Policy The ACE will match ingress ports with a specific policy Port The ACE will match a specific ingress port e Frame Type Indicates the frame type of the ACE Possible values are Any The ACE will match any frame type EType The ACE will match Ethernet Type frames Note that an Ethernet
352. of the ACE listings Buttons Auto refresh Check this box to refresh the page automatically Automatic refresh occurs at regular intervals _Refesh Click to refresh the page any changes made locally will be undone q Click to clear the counters owe All Click to remove all ACEs ACE Configuration Configure an ACE Access Control Entry on this page An ACE consists of several parameters These parameters vary according to the frame type that you select First select the ingress port for the ACE and then select the frame type Different parameter options are displayed depending on the frame type that you selected The ACE Configuration screen is shown in Figure 4 10 3 187 Frame Type Any Any v ACE Configuration MAC Parameters VLAN Parameters DMAC Filter Any VLAN ID Filter Any Any Y Figure 4 10 3 ACE Configuration Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object e Ingress Port e Frame Type e Action e Rate Limiter e Port Copy e Logging e Shutdown e Counter E MAC Parameters Description Select the ingress port for which this ACE applies Any The ACE applies to any port Port n The ACE applies to this port number where n is the number of the switch port Policy n The ACE applies to this policy number where n can range from 1 through 8 Select the frame type for this ACE Any Any frame can match this ACE Ethernet Type Only Ethernet Type f
353. okup 429 Voice VLAN Port Mode Description Set or show the Voice VLAN port mode When the port mode isn t disabled we must disable MSTP feature before we enable Voice VLAN It can avoid the conflict of ingress filter Syntax Voice VLAN Port Mode lt port_list gt disable auto force Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports disable Disjoin from Voice VLAN auto Enable auto detect mode It detects whether there is VoIP phone attached on the specific port and configure the Voice VLAN members automatically force Forced join to Voice VLAN default Show Voice VLAN port mode Default Setting disable Example Set auto mode for port 1 4 of Voice VLAN port mode SWITCH gt voice vian port mode 1 4 auto Voice VLAN Security Description Set or show the Voice VLAN port security mode When the function is enabled all non telephone MAC address in Voice VLAN will be blocked 10 seconds Syntax Voice VLAN Security lt port_list gt enable disable Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports enable Enable Voice VLAN security mode disable Disable Voice VLAN security mode default Show flow Voice VLAN security mode Default Setting disable Example Enable the Voice VLAN port security mode for port 1 4 430 NS3550 24T 4S User Manual SWITCH gt voice vian security 1 4 enable SMTP Command SMTP Configuration Description Shows SMTP configure Syn
354. ol is a special syntax that can be used as a shorthand way of representing multiple 16 bit groups of contiguous zeros but it can only appear once It also used a following legally 91 IPv4 address For example 192 1 2 34 e Prefix Provide the IPv6 Prefix of this switch The allowed range is through 128 e Router Provide the IPv6 gateway address of this switch IPv6 address is in 128 bit records represented as eight fields of up to four hexadecimal digits with a colon separate each field For example fe80 215 c5ff fe03 4dc7 The symbol is a special syntax that can be used as a shorthand way of representing multiple 16 bit groups of contiguous zeros but it can only appear once It also used a following legally IPv4 address For example 192 1 2 34 Provide the IPv6 SNTP Server address of this switch IPv6 address is in 128 bit records represented as eight fields of up to four hexadecimal digits with a colon separate each field For example fe80 215 c5ff fe03 4dc7 The symbol is a special syntax that can be used as a shorthand way of representing multiple 16 bit groups of contiguous zeros but it can only appear once It also used a following legally IPv4 address For example 192 1 2 34 e VLAN ID Provide the managed VLAN ID The allowed range is 1 through 4095 Buttons Save Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values Users Conf
355. oli blico 352 Security NeworAGL Rat a a Sear a eadiets aeticawexidecseudees 352 SECU NewWworkAGL Add ui a boxe a a a E a 353 Sec nty Network ACL Delete A E E a et ees been shee icles 354 Security Network ACE LOO UD rasane a a is 355 Security Network ACL Clear cafes 0s sic cence cer seeacxouaseeoeceaseees 355 SECUMILY INGIWOFK ACL Stali sac A A A A eR 355 Security Network DHCP Relay Configuration ccccccccsssceccessceccesseccseseecceececseuseecsaeeessueceeseaecessegeeesssegeeeseaes 356 Security Network DACP Relay MOd Grusel a ieee aE E 356 Security Network DHCP Relay Server cccccccsecccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeee cesses eeeseeeeeeseeeeeeseeeeessaueeessaeeesssseeeeesaeeeeesaees 357 Security Network DHCP Relay Information Mode ccccccseeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeesseeeeesseeeeesaeeeesaeeeessneeeesaees 357 Security Network DHCP Relay Information PoliCY oooccccooccococonnnconoconoconconncnncononanononnrononnronononnnnnnonanennnnas 358 Security Network DHCP Relay Statistics tii 359 Security Network DHCP Snooping Configuration ccccccccccseeeeeseeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeseeeeeesaeeesseeesseeeeeeseaeeeesaees 359 Security Network DHCP Snooping Mode cccccccsseccceescecceeseecceueeecaeeceeseusecesauseessueeeesaueseeseueeessaueeeessagseesages 360 Security Network DHCP Snooping Port Mode ccccccssscecceeseeccesecccceececceescecceseessuseceseuseeeseueeessegeeesseseeessages 3
356. omain Figure 4 11 21 230 NS3550 24T 4S User Manual Security This section is to control the access of the Managed Switch and includes the user access and management control The Security page contains links to the following main topics a Port Limit Control Access Management HTTPs SSH DHCP Snooping IP Source Guard ARP Inspection Port Limit Control This page allows you to configure the Port Security Limit Control system and port settings Limit Control allows for limiting the number of users on a given port A user is identified by a MAC address and VLAN ID If Limit Control is enabled on a port the limit specifies the maximum number of users on the port If this number is exceeded an action is taken The action can be one of four different as described below The Limit Control module is one of a range of modules that utilizes a lower layer module the Port Security module which manages MAC addresses learned on the port The Limit Control configuration consists of two sections a system and a port wide The Port Limit Control Configuration screen is shown in Figure 4 12 1 231 Port Limit Control Configuration Aging Enabled Aging Period seconds Port Configuration EE EE a E n lt a ES n lt olfelfelfel allallo 4 4 14 14 4 A a lt a lt its its Dis a lt EEE EE EE lt 4 Action Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disa
357. omatic Save Configuration 1 Press the Save Configuration button to save the current configuration in manager workstation The following screens in Figure 4 2 22 amp 4 2 23 appear 71 File Download Security Warning x Do you want to open or save this file Name 1 sml Content length_379575erver_ WebServer Type amp ML Document 37 0KB From 192 168 0 120 som swe ie potentially harn your computer IF you do not trust the source do nat D While files from the Internet can be useful this file type can open or save this software whats the risk Figure 4 2 22 File Download Screen 2 Chose the file save path in management workstation Save As hy Recent Documents Desktop My O ocuments as My Computer File name ong srr Mu Network Save az hype All Files Ww Cancel Figure 4 2 23 File Save Screen 12 NS3550 24T 4S User Manual Configuration Upload This function allows backup and reload the current configuration of the Managed Switch to the local management station The Configuration Upload screen is shown in Figure 4 2 24 Configuration Upload Browse Uplead Bose Figure 4 2 24 Configuration Upload Page Screenshot Configuration Upload 1 Click the configuration The Configuration screen is shown in Figure 4 2 25 button of the main page the system would pop up the file selection menu to choose saved Choose file Look ir B Config B
358. on is get from the SFP module Different vendors SFP modules might shows different speed information e Wave Length nm Display the wavelength of current SFP module the wavelength value is get from the SFP module Use this column to check if the wavelength values of two nodes are the matched while the fiber connection is failed e Distance m Display the supports distance of current SFP module the distance value is get from the SFP module Buttons Auto refresh Check this box to enable an automatic refresh of the page at regular intervals 93 Retesh J Click to refresh the page immediately Port Mirroring Configuration Configure port Mirroring on this page This function provide to monitoring network traffic that forwards a copy of each incoming or outgoing packet from one port of a network Switch to another port where the packet can be studied It enables the manager to keep close track of switch performance and alter it if necessary e To debug network problems selected traffic can be copied or mirrored to a mirror port where a frame analyzer can be attached to analyze the frame flow e The Managed Switch can unobtrusively mirror traffic from any port to a monitor port You can then attach a protocol analyzer or RMON probe to this port to perform traffic analysis and verify connection integrity Port Mirroring UP Link Lo Y HHHH e Al Source Port Me uw Target Port Monitor Client With Ethereal or Sniffer Pro
359. onal flag to indicate that this user using SHA authentication protocol lt auth_password gt A string identifying the authentication pass phrase des An optional flag to indicate that this user using DES privacy protocol privacy protocol should belong to lt priv_password gt A string identifying the privacy pass phrase Example Add SNMPv3 user entry SWITCH gt security switch snmp user add 800007e5017f000003 admin_snmpv3 md5 12345678 des abcdefgh Security Switch SNMP User Delete Description Delete SNMPv3 user entry 330 NS3550 24T 4S User Manual Syntax Security Switch SNMP User Delete lt index gt Parameters lt index gt entry index 1 64 Example Delete SNMPv3 user entry SWITCH gt security switch snmp user delete 1 Security Switch SNMP User Changekey Description Change SNMPv3 user password Syntax Security Switch SNMP User Changekey lt engineid gt lt user_name gt lt auth_password gt lt priv_password gt Parameters lt engineid gt Engine ID the format may not be all zeros or all fFH and is restricted to 5 32 octet string lt user_name gt A string identifying the user name that this entry should belong to lt auth_password gt A string identifying the authentication pass phrase lt priv_password gt A string identifying the privacy pass phrase Example Delete SNMPv3 user entry SWITCH gt security switch snmp user changekey 800007e5017f000003 admin_snmpv3 87654321 1234
360. onanonononcnnnnnnnnnornnnnnnnrnnnrnnrnnnnnnnnnnnnrnnnnnrnnrnnnrnnnnnrnnnnnnnns 235 AETR S A cece ade eats teases ee tee ce asta steu tee ee soe ace ease taken eee E eee a 236 A 236 PORES ecunty Stats ataco 237 A A sen Pete ents eee e E E 239 PNAC SIMO O DING nr A ance ca ten eign 240 NS3550 24T 4S User Manual DACSPSACOpINO asta 242 IP Source Guard CONTIGUA ON ita diario 243 Source Guard Static Ta Dle oa egos 245 ARP IIS OC CIO a ad 246 ARP Inspeccion Static Ta Dle ner s A E Sueeed sede eee 247 Address Table dd a a le 248 MAC Address Table Configuration aa 248 Static MAC Table COnfQuravlOny casio ct oasits cc 25ce desist secidiee envied ode do 249 MAG Address Table St rita idilio 249 MAC Table LS a e o a ld e ee eee 251 DYNAMIC ARP INSDCCHOM aDeSe Noia 252 Dynamic IPSOurce Guard Table essa asa 254 DP na da 255 Link Layer Discovery Protocol ui odios 255 LLDP COMIGO ON eia a a a a a a pont wea ateceas Gacaten sid contorkiew agrees 255 EEDPMED SoOntIguralON EEE E E aces ec ee ee 258 ELST FIV IN ND Ole pth riada cecie puse cielos 263 a cee O O dagen ota reewnnasecetatarusnateaten senanet 265 OM Stat SU CS ven isa ccnsan tases cess coaaatean a a dea Soa desaeta T 266 NOIWORK DION OSO A A Ad 269 AI a a e tt IE el la ARO cs 269 IPVO PINO POE ooo o A ada otinmeancaad 270 Remote PINO Odd ri io ed 271 Sable ACO SCS tania a e a a R 273 COMMAND LINE INTE REA CE vezcsccecescvcscceteveteseceseiencsencosvessuecusanecuiauasstessvcuetesens
361. one applications on typical data centric devices such as PCs or laptops This class of endpoints frequently does not support multiple VLANs if at all and are typically configured to use an untagged VLAN or a single tagged data specific VLAN video_conferencing Video Conferencing is for use by dedicated Video Conferencing equipment and other similar appliances supporting real time interactive video audio services streaming_video Streaming Video is for use by broadcast or multicast based video content distribution and other similar applications supporting streaming video services that require specific network policy treatment Video applications relying on TCP with buffering would not be an intended use of this application type video _ signaling Video Signaling conditional for use in network topologies that require a separate policy for the video signaling than for the video media tagged The device is using tagged frames unragged The device is using untagged frames lt vlan_id gt VLAN id lt I2_priority gt This field may specify one of eight priority levels 0 through 7 as defined by IEEE 802 1D 2004 3 lt dscp gt This field shall contain the DSCP value to be used to provide Diffserv node behavior for the specified application type as defined in IETF RFC 2474 5 This 6 bit field may contain one of 64 code point values 0 through 63 A value of 0 represents use of the default DSCP value as defined in RFC 2475 LLDPMED Port Pol
362. ong the path that will carry this traffic to the same VLAN s either manually or dynamically using GVRP However if you want a port on this switch to participate in one or more VLANs but none of the intermediate network devices nor the host at the other end of the connection supports VLANs then you should add this port to the VLAN as an untagged port VLAN tagged frames can pass through VLAN aware or VLAN unaware network interconnection devices but the VLAN tags should be stripped off before passing it on to any end node host that does not support VLAN tagging Mi VLAN Classification When the switch receives a frame it classifies the frame in one of two ways If the frame is untagged the switch assigns the frame to an associated VLAN based on the default VLAN ID of the receiving port But if the frame is tagged the switch uses the tagged VLAN ID to identify the port broadcast domain of the frame HM Port Overlapping Port overlapping can be used to allow access to commonly shared network resources among different VLAN groups such as file servers or printers Note that if you implement VLANs which do not overlap but still need to communicate you can connect them by enabled routing on this switch Mi Untagged VLANs Untagged or static VLANs are typically used to reduce broadcast traffic and to increase security A group of network users assigned to a VLAN form a broadcast domain that is separate from other VLANs configured on the sw
363. ononnnnononnnnnnnrnnononcnnnnnnrnnnnnnrnnnnnnnoos 127 eA 8 BLAM 1 Fe LI arora eR Er Pl SOO RO AO PO ROY eR OT eC ne ee ee 128 PANIAGUA ai 131 a AA gg E caren aaed al wae Meterieaead tienes daecuasiado lena Seed ouarninneigeadnt e 131 STP Brdge Ontur OM oda 137 ll AAA O A nn e OR eee EN ee a ee eee eo ee 139 CISD POM CONGU AUON oie eecectee cd sceeasaencaecees atiet aeeada des sedate ocetncn E 139 MS ToL SPV AVES Sessa a ee tata arene ac sata aa ns par aaa oia 142 NWS TAC OMMOUPAU ON uc ii 143 MST MPOHS COntIqura lOs ii Ren 144 PONSA A A 146 Hei AAA A TO gaaatarclencanet at ad miter auibcud e ae betsauns added a a aa ese etme 147 MUI Sissi A AA AA A AA AAA AAA AAA AD 148 IGMP SNOODING rasni a a E e o LS 148 IGMP SMOO PING Contigua 153 IGMP Port Related Configuration cccccccssscccceseecceesceccesececseneeeceuscecseeeesseeeesseseeesaueceeseeeessusseeeesseeessageeessenseesaaes 153 MEAN CONAGUA IIA a dl A 155 POM Stupid sii de ore tected 156 IOMP SOO PINGO LAU cor e ao 157 MYR CGONTIgUra lO iaa dice 159 MYR Stats ct io o od o dao od a e a A O e ao o 161 QuUallly OF SEVICE it e il e delo dl 163 Understand COS aaa N 163 MCE COnmaurauOn Wizard acc 164 o eee A een ee eee ee eee ee ee 165 Set up Typical Network Application Rules oocccoocccccccccoccncoccncconnnoncnnnoncnonnnnonnnnnnnnnonnnnnonnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnonnnnoncnnnos 166 Setup TOS Precedence MappinG cin ea ee Er ao eh ha cit 169 Set up VLAN Tag Priority Map
364. ons to allow a user to update the Managed Switch firmware from the TFTP server in the network Before updating make sure you have your TFTP server ready and the firmware image is on the TFTP server The TFTP Firmware Upgrade screen is shown in Figure 4 2 20 TFTP Firmware Upgrade TFTP Server IP Firmware File Name Figure 4 2 20 TFTP Firmware Update Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e TFTP Server IP Fill in your TFTP server IP address e Firmware File Name The name of firmware image Maximum length 24 characters Buttons Click to upgrade firmware 1 DO NOT Turn OFF Power the Managed Switch until the update progress is complete 2 Do not quit the Firmware Upgrade page without press the OK button after the image was loaded or the system won t apply to the new firmware User has to repeat the firmware upgrade processes again 70 NS3550 24T 4S User Manual Configuration Backup This function allows backup and reload the current configuration of the Managed Switch to the local management station The Configuration Backup screen is shown in Figure 4 2 21 Configuration Backup Save condlenaton save condeuwaton except IF Address Figure 4 2 21 Configuration Backup Page Screenshot You can save view or load the switch configuration The configuration file is in XML format with a hierarchy of tags Header tags lt xml version 1 0 gt and lt co
365. oot to blocking From blocking to listening or to disabled From listening to learning or to disabled From learning to forwarding or to disabled From forwarding to disabled From disabled to blocking 132 NS3550 24T 4S User Manual Switch Blocking Disable Listening Learning Forwarding Figure 4 7 1 STP Port State Transitions You can modify each port state by using management software When you enable STP every port on every switch in the network goes through the blocking state and then transitions through the states of listening and learning at power up If properly configured each port stabilizes to the forwarding or blocking state No packets except BPDUs are forwarded from or received by STP enabled ports until the forwarding state is enabled for that port 2 STP Parameters STP Operation Levels The Switch allows for two levels of operation the switch level and the port level The switch level forms a spanning tree consisting of links between one or more switches The port level constructs a spanning tree consisting of groups of one or more ports The STP operates in much the same way for both levels On the switch level STP calculates the Bridge Identifier for each switch and then sets the Root Bridge hy and the Designated Bridges On the port level STP sets the Root Port and the Designated Ports Note 133 The following are the user configurable STP parameters for the switch level
366. or South of the equator Longitude SHOULD be normalized to within 0 180 degrees with a maximum of 4 digits It is possible to specify the direction to either East of the prime meridian or West of the prime meridian Altitude SHOULD be normalized to within 32767 to 32767 with a maximum of 4 digits It is possible to select between two altitude types floors or meters Meters Representing meters of Altitude defined by the vertical datum specified Floors Representing altitude in a form more relevant in buildings which have different floor to floor dimensions An altitude 0 0 is meaningful even outside a building and represents ground level at the given latitude and longitude Inside a building 0 0 represents the floor level associated with ground level at the main entrance The Map Datum used for the coordinates given in this Option WGS84 Geographical 3D World Geodesic System 1984 CRS Code 4327 Prime Meridian Name Greenwich NAD83 NAVD88 North American Datum 1983 CRS Code 4269 Prime Meridian Name Greenwich The associated vertical datum is the North American Vertical Datum of 1988 NAVD88 This datum pair is to be used when referencing locations on land not near tidal water which would use Datum NAD83 MLLW NAD83 MLLW North American Datum 1983 CRS Code 4269 Prime Meridian Name Greenwich The associated vertical datum is Mean Lower Low Water 259 Civic Address Location MLLW This datum pair is to be used when
367. or device information Syntax LLDP Info lt port_list gt Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports 403 LLDP CDP Aware Description Set or show if discovery information from received CDP Cisco Discovery Protocol frames is added to the LLDP neighbor table Syntax LLDP cdp_aware lt port_list gt enable disable Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports enable Enable CDP awareness CDP discovery information is added to the LLDP neighbor table disable Disable CDP awareness default Show CDP awareness configuration Default Setting disable Example Enable CDP aware finction for port1 4 SWITCH gt lldp cdp_aware 1 4 enable LLDPMED Command LLDPMED Configuration Description Show LLDP MED configuration Syntax LLDPMED Configuration lt port_list gt Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports Example Show LLDP MED configuration of port1 4 SWITCH gt IIdpmed configuration 1 4 LLDP MED Configuration Fast Start Repeast Count 4 Location Coordinates Latitude 0 0000 North Longitude 0 0000 East Altitude 0 0000 meter s Map datum WGS84 Civic Address Location Port Policies 404 NS3550 24T 4S User Manual LLDPMED Civic Description Set or show LLDP MED Civic Address Location Syntax LLDPMED Civic country state county city district block street leading_street_direction trailing s
368. ork ARP Inspection Status Description Show ARP inspection static and dynamic entries Syntax Security Network ARP Inspection Status lt port_list gt Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports Example Show ARP inspection static and dynamic entries SWITCH gt security network arp inspection status 367 Security AAA Configuration Description Show Auth configuration Syntax Security AAA Configuration Example Show Auth configuration SWITCH gt security aaa configuration AAA Configuration Server Timeout 15 seconds Server Dead Time 300 seconds RADIUS Authentication Server Configuration Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled RADIUS Accounting Server Configuration Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Security AAA Timeout Description Set or show server timeout 368 NS3550 24T 4S User Manual Syntax Security AAA Timeout lt timeout gt Parameters lt timeout gt Server response timeout 3 3600 seconds default Show server timeout configuration Default Setting 15 Example Set 30sec for server timeout swtcHi gt security aaa timeout 30 Security AAA Deadtime Description Set or show server dead time Syntax Security AAA Deadtime lt dead_time gt Parameters lt dead_time gt Time that a server is considered dead if it doesn t answer a
369. ot The page includes the following fields Object Description e QCL Select a QCL to display a table that lists all the QCEs for that particular QCL e QCE Type Specifies which frame field the QCE processes to determine the QoS class of the frame The following QCE types are supported Ethernet Type The Ethernet Type field If frame is tagged this is the Ethernet 171 e Type Value e Traffic Class e Modification Buttons Type that follows the tag header VLAN ID VLAN ID Only applicable if the frame is VLAN tagged TCP UDP Port IPv4 TCP UDP source destination port DSCP IPv4 and IPv6 DSCP ToS The 3 precedence bit in the ToS byte of the IPv4 IPv6 header also known as DS field Tag Priority User Priority Only applicable if the frame is VLAN tagged or priority tagged Indicates the value according to its QCE type Ethernet Type The field shows the Ethernet Type value VLAN ID The field shows the VLAN ID TCP UDP Port The field shows the TCP UDP port range DSCP The field shows the IPv4 IPv6 DSCP value The QoS class associated with the QCE You can modify each QCE in the table using the following buttons Dl Inserts a new QCE before the current row Edits the QCE Moves the QCE up the list Moves the QCE down the list Es Deletes the QCE D The lowest plus sign adds a new entry at the bottom of the list of QCL QoS Control Entry Configuration Configure a new QoS Control Entry on
370. out LLDP information and will drop LLDP information received from neighbors Enabled The switch will send out LLDP information and will analyze LLDP information received from neighbors e CDP Aware Select CDP awareness The CDP operation is restricted to decoding incoming CDP frames The switch doesn t transmit CDP frames CDP frames are only decoded if LLDP for the port is enabled Only CDP TLVs that can be mapped into a corresponding field in the LLDP neighbors table are decoded All other TLVs are discarded Unrecognized CDP TLVs and discarded CDP frame are not shown in the LLDP statistic Only CDP TLVs are mapped into LLDP neighbors table as shown below CDP TLV Device ID is mapped into the LLDP Chassis ID field CDP TLV Address is mapped into the LLDP Management Address field The CDP address TLV can contain multiple addresses but only the first address is shown in the LLDP neighbors table CDP TLV Port ID is mapped into the LLDP Port ID field CDP TLV Version and Platform is mapped into the LLDP System Description field Both the CDP and LLDP supports system capabilities but the CDP capabilities cover capabilities that are not part of the LLDP These capabilities are shown as others in the LLDP neighbors table If all ports have CDP awareness disabled the switch forwards CDP frames received from neighbor devices If at least one port has CDP awareness enabled all CDP frames are terminated by the switch Note When C
371. oyed on a separate VLAN for ease of deployment and enhanced security by isolation from data applications Voice Signaling conditional for use in network topologies that require a different policy for the voice signaling than for the voice media This application type should not be advertised if all the same network policies apply as those advertised in the Voice application policy Guest Voice support a separate limited feature set voice service for guest users and visitors with their own IP Telephony handsets and other similar appliances supporting interactive voice services Guest Voice Signaling conditional for use in network topologies that require a different policy for the guest voice signaling than for the guest voice media This application type should not be advertised if all the same network policies apply as those advertised in the Guest Voice application policy Softphone Voice for use by softphone applications on typical data centric devices such as PCs or laptops This class of endpoints frequently does not support multiple VLANs if at all and are typically configured to use an untagged VLAN or a single tagged data specific VLAN When a network policy is defined for use with an untagged VLAN see Tagged flag below then the L2 priority field is ignored and only the DSCP value has relevance Video Conferencing Streaming Video for use by broadcast or multicast based video content distribution and other s
372. p Shows the status by DHCP upnp Shows the status by UPnP arp_inspection Shows the status by ARP Inspection Ip _ source_guard Shows the status by IP Source Guard conflicts Shows all conflict status default Shows the combined status Example Show ACL status SWITCH gt security network acl status Security Network DHCP Relay Configuration Description Show DHCP relay configuration Syntax Security Network DHCP Relay Configuration Example Show DHCP relay configuration SWITCH gt security network dhcp relay configuration DHCP Relay Configuration DHCP Relay Mode Disabled DHCP Relay Server NULL DHCP Relay Information Mode Disabled DHCP Relay Information Policy replace Security Network DHCP Relay Mode Description Set or show the DHCP relay mode Syntax Security Network DHCP Relay Mode enable disable Parameters 356 NS3550 24T 4S User Manual enable Enable DHCP relaly mode When enable DHCP relay mode operation the agent forward and to transfer DHCP messages between the clients and the server when they are not on the same subnet domain And the DHCP broadcast message won t flood for security considered disable Disable DHCP relaly mode default Show flow DHCP relaly mode Default Setting disable Example Enable DHCP relay mode SWITCH gt security network dhcp relay mode enable Security Network DHCP Relay Server Description Show or set DHCP relay ser
373. p the traffic class mapping to the precedence part of Tos 3 bits when receing IPyv4 lPvb packets Set up VLAN Tag Priority Mapping set up the traffic class mapping to the user priority value 3 bits when receiving WLAN tagged packets To continue click Next Hert Figure 4 9 1 Welcome to the QCL Configuration Wizard Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Set up Port Policies Group ports into several types according to different QCL policies e Set up Typical Network Set up the specific QCL for different typical network application quality control Application Rules e Setup ToS Precedence Set up the traffic class mapping to the precedence part of ToS 3 bits when Mapping receiving IPv4 IPv6 packets e Set up VLAN Tag Set up the traffic class mapping to the User Priority value 3 bits when receiving Priority Mapping VLAN tagged packets Buttons Next Click to continue the wizard 164 NS3550 24T 4S User Manual Set up Policy Rules Group ports into several types which according to different QCL policies The settings relate to the currently selected unit as reflected by the page header The screen is shown in Figure 4 9 2 Set up Policy Rules Group ports into several types according to different QCL policies P0000000000000000000000 P0000000000000000000000 3 P0000000000000000000000 P0000000000000000000000 P0000000000000000000000 8 000000000000000
374. per page input field When first visited the web page will show the first 20 entries from the beginning of the Dynamic IP Source Guard Table The Start from port address VLAN IP address and IP mask input fields allow the user to select the starting point in the Dynamic IP Source Guard Table Clicking the Refresh button will update the displayed table starting from that or the closest next Dynamic IP Source Guard Table match In addition the two input fields will upon a Refresh button click assume the value of the first displayed entry allowing for continuous refresh with the same start address The gt gt will use the last entry of the currently displayed as a basis for the next lookup When the end is reached the text No more entries is shown in the displayed table Use the lt lt button to start over The page includes the following fields Object Description e Port The port number for which the status applies Click the port number to see the status for this particular port e VLAN ID The VLAN ID of the entry e MAC address The MAC address of the entry e IP Address The IP address of the entry Buttons Auto refresh Check this box to enable an automatic refresh of the page at regular intervals Refresh Refreshes the displayed table starting from the Start from MAC address and VLAN input fields Clear Flushes all dynamic entries 254 NS3550 24T 4S User Manual ke
375. pressed the user will have to re login the WEB interface about 60 seconds later The System Reboot screen is shown in Figure 4 2 29 system Reboot Are you sure to perform System Reboot Figure 4 2 29 System Reboot Page Screenshot Buttons ves Click to reboot the system No Click to return the Port State page without reboot the system 78 NS3550 24T 4S User Manual Simple Network Management Protocol SNMP Overview The Simple Network Management Protocol SNMP is an application layer protocol that facilitates the exchange of management information between network devices It is part of the Transmission Control Protocol Internet Protocol TCP IP protocol suite SNMP enables network administrators to manage network performance find and solve network problems and plan for network growth An SNMP managed network consists of three key components Network management stations NMSs SNMP agents Management information base MIB and network management protocol Network management stations NMSs Sometimes called consoles these devices execute management applications that monitor and control network elements Physically NMSs are usually engineering workstation caliber computers with fast CPUs megapixel color displays substantial memory and abundant disk space At least one NMS must be present in each managed environment Agents Agents are software modules that reside in network elements They collect and store mana
376. pvlan delete 10 PVLAN Look up Description Look up Private VLAN entry Syntax PVLAN Look up lt pvlan_id gt Parameters lt pvlan_id gt Private VLAN ID Example Look up PVLAN SWITCH gt lookup PVLAN ID Ports 307 PVLAN Isolate Description Set or show the port isolation mode Syntax PVLAN Isolate lt port_list gt enable disable Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports enable Enable port isolation disable Disable port isolation default Show port isolation port list Default Setting Promiscous Example Enable isolate for port10 SWITCH gt pvlan isolate 10 enable Security Command Security Switch User Configuration Description Show users configuration Syntax Security Switch Users Configuration Default Setting 15 15 Example Enable isolate for port10 SWITCH gt security switch user configuration Users Configuration 308 NS3550 24T 4S User Manual Security Switch User Add Description Add or modify users entry Syntax Security Switch Users Add lt user_name gt lt password gt lt privilege_level gt Parameters lt user_name gt A string identifying the user name that this entry should belong to lt password gt The password for this user name Use clear or as null string lt privilege_level gt User privilege level 1 15 Example Add new user username test password test amp privilege 1
377. r Manual Configure the rate for the port shaper The default value is 500 This value is restricted to 500 1000000 when the Policer Unit is kbps and it is restricted to 1 1000 when the Policer Unit is Mbps e Shaper Unit Configure the unit of measure for the port shaper rate as kbps or Mbps The default value is kbps e Shaper Rate Storm Control Configuration Storm control for the switch is configured on this page There three types of storm rate control a Unicast storm rate control E Multicast storm rate control E Broadcast storm rate control The rate is 2 n where n is equal to or less than 15 or No Limit The unit of the rate can be either pps packets per second or kpps kilopackets per second The configuration indicates the permitted packet rate for unicast multicast or broadcast traffic across the switch The Storm Control Configuration screen is shown in Figure 4 9 11 storm Control Configuration Frame Type Rate Unicast Multicast Broadcast Figure 4 9 11 Storm Control Configuration Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Frame Type The settings in a particular row apply to the frame type listed here unicast multicast broadcast e Status Enable or disable the storm control status for the given frame type e Rate The rate unit is packet per second pps configure the rate as 1 2 4 8 16 32 64 128 256 512 1K 2K 4K 8K 16K 32K 64K 12
378. r Shaper Mode Weight Disabled Disabled Strict 1 2 4 8 Low Disabled Disabled Strict 1 2 4 8 Low Disabled Disabled Strict 1 2 4 8 Low Disabled Disabled Strict 1 2 4 8 QoS Classes Description Set or show the number of traffic classes Syntax QoS Classes lt class gt Parameters lt class gt Number of traffic classes 1 2 or 4 Default Setting 4 Example Set QoS classes 2 SWITCH gt qos classes 2 410 NS3550 24T 4S User Manual QoS Default Description Set or show the default port priority Syntax QoS Default lt port_list gt lt class gt Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports lt class gt Traffic class low normal medium high or 1 2 3 4 Default Setting Low Example Set high priority for port5 SWITCH gt qos default 5 high QoS Tag Priority Description Set or show the port VLAN tag priority Syntax QoS Tagprio lt port_list gt lt tag_prio gt Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports lt tag_prio gt VLAN tag priority 0 7 Default Setting 0 Example Set priority7 for port 3 SWITCH gt qos tagprio 3 7 QoS QCL Port Description Set or show the port QCL ID Syntax QoS QCL Port lt port_list gt lt qcl_id gt 411 Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports lt qcl_id gt QCLID Default Setting 1 Example Set QCL ID5 for port10 SWITCH gt qos qc
379. r are using or how many information exchange frames are needed for a particular method The switch simply encapsulates the EAP part of the frame into the relevant type EAPOL or RADIUS and forwards it When authentication is complete the RADIUS server sends a special packet containing a success or failure indication Besides forwarding this decision to the supplicant the switch uses it to open up or block traffic on the switch port connected to the supplicant Note Suppose two backend servers are enabled and that the server timeout is configured to X seconds using the AAA configuration page and suppose that the first server in the list is currently down but not considered dead Now if the supplicant retransmits EAPOL Start frames at a rate faster than X seconds then it will never get authenticated because the switch will cancel on going backend authentication server requests whenever it receives a new EAPOL Start frame from the supplicant And since the server hasn t yet failed because the X seconds haven t expired the same server will be contacted upon the next backend authentication server request from the switch This scenario will loop forever Therefore the server timeout should be smaller than the supplicant s EAPOL Start frame retransmission rate Single 802 1X In port based 802 1X authentication once a supplicant is successfully authenticated on a port the whole port is opened for network traffic This allows other clients
380. r port RADIUS assigned QoS setting default Show current per port RADIUS assigned QoS enabledness enable Enable RADIUS assigned QoS either globally or on one or more ports disable Disable RADIUS assigned QoS either globally or on one or more ports default Show current RADIUS assigned QoS enabledness Default Setting disable Example Enable NAS RADIUS QoS SWITCH gt security network nas radius_qos enable Security Network NAS RADIUS _VLAN Description Set or show either global enabledness use the global keyword or per port enabledness of RADIUS assigned VLAN Syntax Security Network NAS RADIUS_VLAN global lt port_list gt enable disable Parameters global Select the global RADIUS assigned VLAN setting lt port_list gt Select the per port RADIUS assigned VLAN setting default Show current per port RADIUS assigned VLAN enabledness enable Enable RADIUS assigned VLAN either globally or on one or more ports 347 disable Disable RADIUS assigned VLAN either globally or on one or more ports default Show current RADIUS assigned VLAN enabledness Default Setting disable Example Enable NAS RADIUS VLAN SWITCH gt security network nas radius_vlan enable Security Network NAS Guest_VLAN Description Set or show either global enabledness and parameters use the global keyword or per port enabledness of Guest VLAN Unless the global keyword is used the lt reauth_max gt and lt allow_if_eapo
381. rames can match this ACE ARP Only ARP frames can match this ACE IPv4 Only IPv4 frames can match this ACE Specify the action to take with a frame that hits this ACE Permit The frame that hits this ACE is granted permission for the ACE operation Deny The frame that hits this ACE is dropped Specify the rate limiter in number of base units The allowed range is 1 to 15 Disabled indicates that the rate limiter operation is disabled Frames that hit the ACE are copied to the port number specified here The allowed range is the same as the switch port number range Disabled indicates that the port copy operation is disabled Specify the logging operation of the ACE The allowed values are Enabled Frames matching the ACE are stored in the System Log Disabled Frames matching the ACE are not logged Please note that the System Log memory size and logging rate is limited Specify the port shut down operation of the ACE The allowed values are Enabled If a frame matches the ACE the ingress port will be disabled Disabled Port shut down is disabled for the ACE The counter indicates the number of times the ACE was hit by a frame 188 Object e SMAC Filter e SMAC Value e DMAC Filter e DMAC Value m VLAN Parameters Object e VLAN ID Filter e VLAN ID e Tag Priority rey ARP Parameters NS3550 24T 4S User Manual Description Only displayed when the frame type is Ethernet Type or ARP Specify the source
382. ration a f i E 4 a AENEA 4 4 4 1 2 3 4 5 Tms E Fi g Te v a 3 lt aa AAA ES ANA NATA 3 2 i a 2 lt a f i Sa Figure 4 12 8 DHCP Snooping Configuration Screen Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Snooping Mode Indicates the DHCP snooping mode operation Possible modes are Enabled Enable DHCP snooping mode operation When enabled DHCP snooping the requested DHCP messages will be forwarded to trusted ports and only allowed reply packets from trusted ports Disabled Disable DHCP snooping mode operation e Port Mode Indicates the DHCP snooping port mode Possible port modes are Trusted Configures the port as trusted sources of the DHCP message Untrusted Configures the port as untrusted sources of the DHCP message Buttons Save Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values DHCP Snooping Statistics This page provides statistics for DHCP snooping The statistics only counter packet under DHCP snooping mode is enabled and relay mode is disabled And it doesn t count the DHCP packets for system DHCP client The DHCP Snooping Port Statistics screen is shown in Figure 4 12 9 DHCP Snooping Port Statistics Port 1 Auto Refresh L Receive Packets Transmit Packets Rx Discover Tx Discover Rx Offer Tx Offer Rx Request Tx Request Rx Decline Tx Decline Rx ACK Tx AC
383. rd Configuration configured ACEs will be lost when the mode is enabled e Port Mode Specify IP Source Guard is enabled on which ports Only when both Global Mode Configuration and Port Mode on a given port are enabled IP Source Guard is enabled on this given port 244 NS3550 24T 4S User Manual Specify the maximum number of dynamic clients can be learned on given ports This value can be 0 1 2 and unlimited If the port mode is enabled and the value of max dynamic client is equal 0 it means only allow the IP packets forwarding that are matched in static entries on the specific port e Max Dynamic Clients Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values IP Source Guard Static Table This page provides Static IP Source Guard Table The Static IP Source Guard Table screen is shown in Figure 4 12 11 Static IP Source Guard Table Add new entry Figure 4 12 11 Static IP Source Guard Table Screen Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Delete Check to delete the entry It will be deleted during the next save e Port The logical port for the settings e VLAN ID The VLAN ID for the settings e IP Address Allowed Source IP address e IP Mask It can be used for calculating the allowed network with IP address Buttons Add new entry Click to add a new entry Save Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any cha
384. re This page facilitates a SMTP Configure the switch The SMTP Configure screen is shown in Figure 4 2 17 67 SMTP Configuration SMTP Server fplanetoomiw lt 128 Digits SMTP Authentication Enable Authentication User Name lt 4 Digits Authentication Password 21 Digits SMTP Mode Enable E mail Subject lt b4 Digits E mail 1 To lt 120 Digits E mail 2 To lt 128 Digits The page includes the following fields Object e SMTP Mode e SMTP Server e SMTP Port e SMTP Authentication e Authentication User Name e Authentication Password e E mail From e E mail Subject e E mail 1 To e E mail 2 To Buttons Figure 4 2 17 Web Firmware Upgrade Page Screenshot Description Controls whether SMTP is enabled on this switch Type the SMTP server name or the IP address of the SMTP server Set port number of SMTP service Controls whether SMTP authentication is enabled If authentication is required when an e mail is sent Type the user name for the SMTP server if Authentication is Enable Type the password for the SMTP server if Authentication is Enable Type the sender s E mail address This address is used for reply e mails Type the subject title of the e mail Type the receiver s e mail address est Send a test mail to mail server to check this account is available or not save Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previousl
385. request 0 3600 seconds default Show server dead time configuration Default Setting 300 Example Set 1000sec for server dead time SWITCH gt security aaa deadtime 1000 Security AAA RADIUS Description Set or show RADIUS authentication server setup 369 Syntax Security AAA RADIUS lt server_index gt enable disable lt ip addr_string gt lt secret gt lt server_port gt Parameters The server index 1 5 default Show RADIUS authentication server configuration enable Enable RADIUS authentication server disable Disable RADIUS authentication server default Show RADIUS server mode lt ip_addr_string gt IP host address a b c d or a host name string lt secret gt Secret shared with external authentication server Set to empty secret please use two quotes To use spaces in secret enquote the secret Quotes in the secret are not allowed lt server_port gt Server UDP port Use O to use the default RADIUS port 1812 Example Set RADIUS authentication server configuration SWITCH gt security aaa radius 1 enable 192 168 0 20 12345678 1812 Security AAA ACCT_RADIUS Description Set or show RADIUS accounting server setup Syntax Security AAA ACCT RADIUS lt server_index gt enable disable lt ip_addr_string gt lt secret gt lt server_port gt Parameters The server index 1 5 default Show RADIUS accounting server configuration enable Enable RADIUS
386. ress of the DNS Server in dotted decimal notation e DNS Proxy When DNS proxy is enabled DUT will relay DNS requests to the current configured DNS server on DUT and reply as a DNS resolver to the client device on the network Buttons Save Click to save changes _Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values Renew Renew Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values IPv6 Configuration Configure the switch managed IPv6 information on this page The Configured column is used to view or change the IPv6 configuration The Current column is used to show the active IPv6 configuration The screen is shown in Figure 4 2 3 IPv6 Configuration Auto Configuration C E 21942 168 0 100 a Link Local Address fe8D 230 4ff fe2d 4d1 VLAN ID Figure 4 2 3 IPv6 Configuration Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Auto Configuration Enable IPv6 auto configuration by checking this box If fails the configured IPv6 address is zero The router may delay responding to a router solicitation for a few seconds the total time needed to complete auto configuration can be significantly longer e Address Provide the IPv6 address of this switch IPv6 address is in 128 bit records represented as eight fields of up to four hexadecimal digits with a colon separate each field For example fe80 215 c5ff fe03 4dc7 The symb
387. retaining e mail on the server and for organizing it in folders on the server IMAP can be thought of as a remote file server POP and IMAP deal with the receiving of e mail and are not to be confused with the Simple Mail Transfer Protocol SMTP You send e mail with SMTP and a mail handler receives it on your recipient s behalf Then the mail is read using POP or IMAP IMAP4 and POP3 are the two most prevalent Internet standard protocols for e mail retrieval Virtually all modern e mail clients and servers support both PPPoE is an acronym for Point to Point Protocol over Ethernet It is a network protocol for encapsulating Point to Point Protocol PPP frames inside Ethernet frames It is used mainly with ADSL services where individual users connect to the ADSL transceiver modem over Ethernet and in plain Metro Ethernet networks Wikipedia In a private VLAN communication between ports in that private VLAN is not permitted A VLAN can be configured as a private VLAN PTP is an acronym for Precision Time Protocol a network protocol for synchronizing the clocks of computer systems O 461 QCE is an acronym for QoS Control Entry It describes QoS class associated with a particular QCE ID There are six QCE frame types Ethernet Type VLAN UDP TCP Port DSCP TOS and Tag Priority Frames can be classified by one of 4 different QoS classes Low Normal Medium and High for individual application QCL is an ac
388. reviously saved values Network Access Server Configuration This page allows you to configure the IEEE 802 1X and MAC based authentication system and port settings The IEEE 802 1X standard defines a port based access control procedure that prevents unauthorized access to a network by requiring users to first submit credentials for authentication One or more central servers the backend servers determine whether the user is allowed access to the network These backend RADIUS servers are configured on the Configuration gt Security gt AAA page The IEEE802 1X standard defines port based operation but non standard variants overcome security limitations as shall be explored below MAC based authentication allows for authentication of more than one user on the same port and doesn t require the user to have special 802 1X supplicant software installed on his system The switch uses the user s MAC address to authenticate against the backend server Intruders can create counterfeit MAC addresses which makes MAC based authentication less secure than 802 1X authentication The NAS configuration consists of two sections a system and a port wide The Network Access Server Configuration screen is shown in Figure 4 11 4 201 Network Access Server Configuration Reauthentication Enabled Reauthentication Period seconds EAPOL Timeout seconds Age Period seconds seconds Guest YLAN ID Max Reauth Count Allow Guest VLAN if EAPOL Seen Forc
389. rg 3 north america pool ntp org 288 NS3550 24T 4S User Manual 4 asia pool ntp org 5 oOceania pool ntp org IP NTP Mode Description Set or show the NTP mode Syntax IP NTP Mode enable disable Parameters enable Enable NTP mode disable Disable NTP mode default Show NTP mode Default Setting disable Example Enable NTP mode SWITCH gt ip ntp mode enable IP NTP Server Add Description Add NTP server entry Syntax IP NTP Server Add lt server_index gt lt ip_addr_string gt Parameters lt server_index gt The server index 1 5 lt ip_addr_string gt IP host address a b c d or a host name string Example To add NTP server SWITCH gt ip ntp server add 1 60 249 136 151 IP NTP Server IPv6 Add Description Add NTP server IPv6 entry Syntax IP NTP Server lpv6 Add lt server_index gt lt server_ipv6 gt 289 Parameters lt server_index gt The server index 1 5 lt server_ipv6 gt IPv6 server address IPv6 address is in 128 bit records represented as eight fields of up to four hexadecimal digits with a colon separate each field For example fe80 215 c5ff fe03 4dc7 The symbol is a special syntax that can be used as a shorthand way of representing multiple 16 bit groups of contiguous zeros but it can only appear once It also used a following legally IPv4 address For example 192 1 2 34 Example To add IPv6 NTP server SWITCH gt ip ntp server ipv6 a
390. riv snmpv3_view snmpv3_view Security Switch SNMP Access Delete Description Delete SNMPv3 access entry Syntax Security Switch SNMP Access Delete lt index gt Parameters lt index gt entry index 1 64 335 Example Delete SNMPv3 access entry SWITCH gt security switch snmp access delete 3 Security Switch SNMP Access Look up Description Look up SNMPv3 access entry Syntax Security Switch SNMP Access Look up lt index gt Parameters lt index gt entry index 1 64 Example Look up SNMPv3 access entry SWITCH gt security switch snmp access lookup Idx Group Name Model Level 1 default_ro_group any NoAuth NoPriv 2 default_rw_group any NoAuth NoPriv Number of entries 2 Security Network Psec Switch Description Show Port Security status Syntax Security Network Psec Switch lt port_list gt Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports Default Setting 800007e5017f000001 336 Example Show port security status SWITCH gt security network psec switch Users L Limit Control 8 802 1X D DHCP Snooping V Voice VLAN Port Users State MAC Cnt No users No users No users No users No users No users No users No users No users No users No users No users No users No users No users No users No users No users No users No users No users No users No users No users oooocooocooocoooon nn oonon LALAO0O0oOoDODO
391. rm Syntax dido do_port_alr firstisecond lt port_list gt Parameters lt first gt Digital input output 1 lt second gt Digital input output 2 default Set or show digital input output first 1 second 2 select lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports Example Set digital output port alarm SWITCH gt dido do_port_alr first all SWITCH gt dido do_port_alr first 1 3 5 SWITCH gt dido do_port_alr first 1 10 Do_pwr_alr Description Set or show the system digital output1 2 power alarm Syntax dido do_pwr_alr firstisecond dc1 dc2 ac enable disable Parameters lt first gt Digital input output 1 lt second gt Digital input output 2 default Set or show digital input output first 1 second 2 select lt dc1 gt DC power 1 440 NS3550 24T 4S User Manual lt dc2 gt DC power 2 lt ac gt AC power default Set or show digital output fault alarm 1 2 power_fail lt enable gt Enable digital input1 2 function lt disable gt Disable digital input1 2 function default Set or show digital input output fault alarm 1 2 status Example Enable power alarm configuration SWITCH gt dido do_pwr_alr first dc1 enable SWITCH gt dido do_pwr_alr first dc2 enable SWITCH gt dido do_pwr_alr first ac enable fault_act Description Set or show the system fault alarm action Syntax dido fault_act port power enable disable Parameters lt port gt port f
392. rmance Regulation Compliance Safety IEEE 802 3 10Base T IEEE 802 3u 100Base T X 100Base FX IEEE 802 3z Gigabit SX LX IEEE 802 3ab Gigabit 1000T IEEE 802 3x Flow Control and Back pressure IEEE 802 3ad Port trunk with LACP IEEE 802 1D Spanning tree protocol Standards Compliance IEEE 802 1w Rapid Spanning tree protocol IEEE 802 1s Multiple Spanning tree protocol IEEE 802 1p Class of service IEEE 802 1Q VLAN Tagging IEEE 802 1x Port Authentication Network Control IEEE 802 1ab LLDP RFC 768 UDP RFC 793 TFTP RFC 791 IP RFC 792 ICMP RFC 2068 HTTP RFC 1112 IGMP version 1 RFC 2236 IGMP version 2 IEC60068 2 32 Free fall Stability IEC60068 2 27 Shock IEC60068 2 6 Vibration Environment i Temperature 40 75 Degree C for DC power input Operating l pps l Relative Humidity 5 95 non condensing Temperature 40 85 Degree C Storage l o l Relative Humidity 5 95 non condensing 25 INSTALLATION This section describes the hardware features and installation of the Managed Switch on the desktop or rack mount For easier management and control of the Managed Switch familiarize yourself with its display indicators and ports Front panel illustrations in this chapter display the unit LED indicators Before connecting any network device to the Managed Switch please read this chapter completely Hardware Description Switch Front Panel The unit front panel provides a simple interface monitoring t
393. rompt Description Set the CLI prompt string Syntax System Prompt lt prompt gt Parameters lt prompt gt CLI prompt string Default Setting SWITCH Example To change CLI title Switch gt system prompt NS3550 24T 4S IGSW 24040T gt System Reboot Description Reboot the system Syntax System Reboot Example To reboot device without changing any of the settings Switch gt system reboot System Restore Default Description Restore factory default configuration Syntax System Restore Default keep_ ip Parameters keep_ip Keep IP configuration default Restore full configuration Example To restore default value but not reset IP address Switch gt system restore default keep_ip 282 NS3550 24T 4S User Manual System Load Description Show current CPU load 100ms 1s and 10s running average in percent zero is idle Syntax System Load Example To show current CPU load Switch gt system load Load average 100ms 1s 10s 1 1 1 System Log Description Show or clear the system log Syntax System Log lt log_id gt all info warning error clear Parameters lt log_id gt System log ID or range default All entries all Show all levels default info Show informations warning Show warnings error Show errors clear Clear log Example To show system log Switch gt system log Number of entries Message DC1 Power OFF AC Power OFF Switch j
394. ronym for QoS Control List It is the list table of QCEs containing QoS control entries that classify to a specific QoS class on specific traffic objects Each accessible traffic object contains an identifier to its QCL The privileges determine specific traffic object to specific QoS class QL In SyncE this is the Quality Level of a given clock source This is received on a port in a SSM indicating the quality of the clock received in the port QoS is an acronym for Quality of Service It is a method to guarantee a bandwidth relationship between individual applications or protocols A communications network transports a multitude of applications and data including high quality video and delay sensitive data such as real time voice Networks must provide secure predictable measurable and sometimes guaranteed services Achieving the required QoS becomes the secret to a successful end to end business solution Therefore QoS is the set of techniques to manage network resources R RARP RARP is an acronym for Reverse Address Resolution Protocol It is a protocol that is used to obtain an IP address for a given hardware address such as an Ethernet address RARP is the complement of ARP RADIUS is an acronym for Remote_Authentication Dial In User Service It is a networking protocol that provides centralized access authorization and accounting management for people or computers to connect and use a network service
395. rowser to HTTPS during HTTPS mode enabled Syntax Security Switch HTTPS Redirect enable disable Parameters enable Enable HTTPs redirect disable Disable HTTPs redirect default Show HTTPs redirect mode Default Setting disable Example Enable HTTPs redirect function SWITCH gt security switch https redirect enable Security Switch Access Configuration Description Show access management configuration Syntax Security Switch Access Configuration Example Show access management configuration SWITCH gt security switch access configuration Access Mgmt Configuration System Access Mode Disabled System Access number of entries 0 Security Switch Access Mode Description Set or show the access management mode Syntax Security Switch Access Mode enable disable 314 NS3550 24T 4S User Manual Parameters enable Enable access management disable Disable access management default Show access management mode Default Setting disable Example Enable access management function SWITCH gt security switch access mode enable Security Switch Access Add Description Add access management entry Syntax Security Switch Access Add lt access_id gt lt start_ip_addr gt lt end_ip_addr gt web snmpltelnet Parameters lt access_id gt entry index 1 16 lt start_ip_addr gt Start IP address a b c d lt end_ip_addr gt End IP address a b c d web
396. rrently displayed Save Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values Port Group Filtering In certain switch applications the administrator may want to control the multicast services that are available to end user For example is about IP TV service based on a specific subscription plan The IGMP filtering feature fulfills this requirement by restricting access to specified multicast services on a switch port and IGMP throttling limits the number of simultaneous multicast groups a port can join IGMP filtering enables you to assign a profile to a switch port that specifies multicast groups that are permitted or denied on the port An IGMP filter profile can contain one or more or a range of multicast addresses but only one profile can be assigned to a port When enabled IGMP join reports received on the port are checked against the filter profile If a requested multicast group is permitted the IGMP join report is forwarded as normal If a requested multicast group is denied the IGMP join report is dropped IGMP throttling sets a maximum number of multicast groups that a port can join at the same time When the maximum number of groups is reached on a port the switch can take one of two actions either deny or replace If the action is set to deny any new IGMP join reports will be dropped If the action is set to replace the switch randomly removes an existi
397. rs enable Enable ARP Inspection disable Disable ARP Inspection Default Setting disable Example Enable ARP inspection mode SWITCH gt security network arp inspection mode enable Security Network ARP Inspection Port Mode Description Set or show the ARP Inspection port mode Syntax Security Network ARP Inspection Port Mode lt port_list gt enable disable Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports enable Enable ARP Inspection port disable Disable ARP Inspection port default Show ARP Inspection port mode Default Setting Disable Example Enable the ARP inspection mode of port 1 SWITCH gt security network arp inspection port mode 1 366 NS3550 24T 4S User Manual Security Network ARP Inspection Entry Description Add or delete ARP inspection static entry Syntax Security Network ARP Inspection Entry lt port_list gt add delete lt vid gt lt allowed_mac gt lt allowed_ip gt Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports add Add new port ARP inspection static entry delete Delete existing port ARP inspection static entry lt vid gt VLAN ID 1 4095 lt allowed_mac gt MAC address xx xx xx xx xx xx MAC address allowed for doing ARP request lt allowed_ip gt IP address a b c d IP address allowed for doing ARP request Default Setting 300 Example Add ARP inspection static entry Security Netw
398. rs will appear These fields are explained later in this help file UDP Select UDP to filter IPv4 UDP protocol frames Extra fields for defining UDP parameters will appear These fields are explained later in this help file TCP Select TCP to filter IPv4 TCP protocol frames Extra fields for defining TCP parameters will appear These fields are explained later in this help file When Specific is selected for the IP protocol value you can enter a specific value The allowed range is 0 to 255 A frame that hits this ACE matches this IP protocol value Specify the Time to Live settings for this ACE zero lPv4 frames with a Time to Live field greater than zero must not be able to match this entry non zero Pv4 frames with a Time to Live field greater than zero must be able to match this entry Any Any value is allowed don t care Specify the fragment offset settings for this ACE This involves the settings for the More Fragments MF bit and the Fragment Offset FRAG OFFSET field for an IPv4 frame No Pv4 frames where the MF bit is set or the FRAG OFFSET field is greater than 190 e IP Option e SIP Filter e SIP Address e SIP Mask e DIP Filter e DIP Address e DIP Mask E ICMP Parameters Object e ICMP Type Filter e ICMP Type Value e ICMP Code Filter e ICMP Code Value a TCP UDP Parameters Object e TCP UDP Source Filter e TCP UDP Source No NS3550 24T 4S User Manual zero must not be able to m
399. ry settings and STP will automatically assign root bridges ports and block loop connections Influencing STP to choose a particular switch as the root bridge using the Priority setting or influencing STP to choose a particular port to block using the Port Priority and Port Cost settings is however relatively straight forward 135 A LAN1 gt Port cost 200 000 A C Bridge ID 15 Port cost 20 000 Port cost 20 000 Port cost 20 000 Port cost 20 000 B c Bridge ID 30 Bridge ID 20 Port cost 200 000 Port cost 200 000 Port cost 200 000 A LAN 2 gt A LAN 3 3 gt Figure 4 7 2 Before Applying the STA Rules In this example only the default STP values are used A C Root Bridge Designated Port Designated Port Root Port Root Port Cl Designated Bridge aJt _ AN LAN3 _ gt Figure 4 7 3 After Applying the STA Rules 136 NS3550 24T 4S User Manual The switch with the lowest Bridge ID switch C was elected the root bridge and the ports were selected to give a high port cost between switches B and C The two optional Gigabit ports default port cost 20 000 on switch A are connected to one optional Gigabit port on both switch B and C The redundant link between switch B and C is deliberately chosen as a 100 Mbps Fast Ethernet link default port cost 200 000 Gigabit ports could be us
400. s e AdminEdge Controls whether the operEdge flag should start as beeing set or cleared The initial operEdge state when a port is initialized e AutoEdge Controls whether the bridge should enable automatic edge detection on the bridge port This allows operEdge to be derived from whether BPDU s are received on the port or not e Restricted Role If enabled causes the port not to be selected as Root Port for the CIST or any MSTI even if it has the best spanning tree priority vector Such a port will be selected as an Alternate Port after the Root Port has been selected If set it can cause lack of spanning tree connectivity It can be set by a network administrator to prevent bridges external to a core region of the network influencing the spanning tree active topology possibly because those bridges are not under the full control of the administrator This feature is also Known as Root Guard e Restricted TCN If enabled causes the port not to propagate received topology change notifications and topology changes to other ports If set it can cause temporary loss of connectivity after changes in a spanning trees active topology as a result of persistent incorrectly learned station location information It is set by a network administrator to prevent bridges external to a core region of the network causing address flushing in that region possibly because those bridges are not under the full control of the administrator or is the physical link stat
401. s mal v Tag Priority3 Class Nomad v Figure 4 9 6 Set up VLAN Tag Priority Mapping Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e QCLID Select the QCL ID to which this QCE applies e VLAN Priority Class Select a traffic class of Low Normal Medium or High to apply to the QCE Buttons Ancel Wizard Click to cancel the wizard Back Click to go back to the previous wizard step 170 Hegt NS3550 24T 4S User Manual Click to continue the wizard The QCL configuration wizard is finished and the new configuration is ready for use QoS Control List Configuration mam OCE Type Type Value Traffic Class i Tag Priority QoS Control List Configuration This page lists the QCEs for a given QCL 4 different QoS classes classified Frameswhich are Low Normal Medium and High The classification is controlled by QoS assigned to each port A QCL consists of an ordered list of up to 12 QCEs Each QCE can be used to classify certain frames to a specific QoS class This classification can be based on parameters such as VLAN ID UDP TCP port IPv4 IPv6 DSCP or Tag Priority Frames not matching any of the QCEs are classified to the default QoS Class for the port The QoS Control List Configuration screen is shown in Figure 4 9 7 QoS Control List Configuration CA OCE Type Type Yalue Traffic Class Figure 4 9 7 QoS Control List Configuration Page Screensh
402. s and UDP doesn t provide reassembling and sequencing of the packets This means that the application program that uses UDP must be able to make sure that the entire message has arrived and is in the right order Network applications that want to save processing time because they have very small data units to exchange may prefer UDP to TCP 465 UPnP UDP provides two services not provided by the IP layer It provides port numbers to help distinguish different user requests and optionally a checksum capability to verify that the data arrived intact Common network applications that use UDP include the Domain Name System DNS streaming media applications such as IPTV Voice over IP VoIP and Trivial File Transfer Protocol TFTP UPnP is an acronym for Universal Plug and Play The goals of UPnP are to allow devices to connect seamlessly and to simplify the implementation of networks in the home data sharing communications and entertainment and in corporate environments for simplified installation of computer components User Priority V VLAN VLAN ID User Priority is a 3 bit field storing the priority level for the 802 1Q frame Virtual LAN is a method to restrict communication between switch ports VLANs can be used for the following applications VLAN unaware switching This is the default configuration All ports are VLAN unaware with Port VLAN ID 1 and members of VLAN 1 This means that MAC addresses are learned
403. s Clients The situation forces the ISP to build up the IPv6 Internet Protocol version 6 network infrastructure speedily To fulfill the demand IFS releases the IPv6 management Gigabit Ethernet Switch It supports both IPv4 and IPv6 management functions It can work with original network structure IPv4 and also support the new network structure IPv6 in the future With easy and friendly management interfaces and plenty of management functions included the NS3550 24T 4S Managed Switch is the best choice for you to build the IPv6 FTTx edge service and for Industrial to connect with IPv6 network DC Redundant Power to ensure continuous operation IFS NS3550 24T 4S is equipped with an additional DC 36 72V power supply unit for redundant power supply installation Redundant Power Systems are specifically designed to handle the demands of high tech facilities requiring the highest power integrity Furthermore with the 36 72V DC power supply implemented the NS3550 24T 4S can be applied as the telecom level device that could be located at the electronic room Powerful Security The Managed Switch offers comprehensive Access Control List ACL for enforcing security to the edge Its protection mechanisms also comprise of port based 802 1x and MAC based user and device authentication The port security is effective in limit the numbers of clients pass through so that network administrators can now construct highly secured corporate networks wit
404. s EAPOL frames and relays them to the authentication server the Ethernet header is stripped and the remaining EAP frame is re encapsulated in the RADIUS format The EAP frames are not modified or examined during encapsulation and the authentication server must support EAP within the native frame format When the switch receives frames from the authentication server the server s frame header is removed leaving the EAP frame which is then encapsulated for Ethernet and sent to the client 198 NS3550 24T 4S User Manual A Authentication Initiation and Message Exchange The switch or the client can initiate authentication If you enable authentication on a port by using the dot1x port control auto interface configuration command the switch must initiate authentication when it determines that the port link state transitions from down to up It then sends an EAP request identity frame to the client to request its identity typically the switch sends an initial identity request frame followed by one or more requests for authentication information Upon receipt of the frame the client responds with an EAP response identity frame However if during bootup the client does not receive an EAP request identity frame from the switch the client can initiate authentication by sending an EAPOL start frame which prompts the switch to request the client s identity If 802 1X is not enabled or supported on the network access device any EAPOL frames from the
405. s The number of received and transmitted good and bad bytes Includes FCS but excludes framing bits e Rxand Tx Unicast The number of received and transmitted good and bad unicast packets 91 e Rx and Tx Multicast e Rx and Tx Broadcast e Rx and Tx Pause The number of received and transmitted good and bad multicast packets The number of received and transmitted good and bad broadcast packets A count of the MAC Control frames received or transmitted on this port that have an opcode indicating a PAUSE operation Receive and Transmit Size Counters The number of received and transmitted good and bad packets split into categories based on their respective frame sizes Receive and Transmit Queue Counters The number of received and transmitted packet is per input and output queue Receive Error Counters Object e Rx Drops e Rx CRC Alignment e Rx Undersize e Rx Oversize e Rx Fragments e Rx Jabber e Rx Filtered Transmit Error Counters Object e Tx Drops e Tx Late Exc Coll Buttons Retresh Description The number of frames dropped due to lack of receives buffers or egress congestion The number of frames received with CRC or alignment errors The number of short frames received with valid CRC The number of long frames received with valid CRC The number of short frames received with invalid CRC The number of long frames received with invalid CRC The number of received fram
406. s an index to the eight QoS Class values in the QCE Key Configure the values according to the QCE type you select Ethernet Type The allowed values for this type range from 0x600 1536 to OXFFFF 65535 VLAN ID The allowed values for this type range from 1 to 4095 TCP UDP Port Range Specify whether there is a range or a specific port number The port range allowed is from 0 to 65535 DSCP The allowed range is 0 to 63 ToS or Tag Priority do not have type value settings Select a traffic class of Low Normal Medium or High to apply to the QCE If the QCE type is ToS or Tag Priority there are 8 rows of traffic class that can be configured for each priority Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values Cancel Return to the previous page Port QoS Configuration This page allows you to configure QoS settings for each port e Frames can be classified by 4 different QoS classes are Low Normal Medium and High e The classification is controlled by a QCL that is assigned to each port e AQCL consists of an ordered list of up to 12 QCEs e Each QCE can be used to classify certain frames to a specific QoS class e This classification can be based on parameters such as VLAN ID UDP TCP port IPv4 IPv6 DSCP or Tag Priority e Frames not matching any of the QCEs are classified to the default QoS class for the port e The settings relate to the currently selected unit as reflected
407. s on the port are transmitted The Rx and Tx settings are determined by the result of the last Auto Negotiation Check the configured column to use flow control This setting is related to the setting for Configured Link Speed Enter the maximum frame size allowed for the switch port including FCS The allowed range is 1518 bytes to 9600 bytes Configure port transmit collision behavior Discard Discard frame after 16 collisions default Restart Restart back off algorithm after 16 collisions The Usage column shows the current percentage of the power consumption per port The Configured column allows for changing the power savings mode parameters per port Disabled All power savings mechanisms disabled ActiPHY Link down power savings enabled Dynamic Link up power savings enabled Enabled Link up and link down power savings enabled When set each port to run at 100M Full 100M Half 10M Full and 10M Half speed modes The Auto MDIX function will disable Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values Retresh Click to refresh the page Any changes made locally will be undone 89 Port Statistics Overview This page provides an overview of general traffic statistics for all switch ports The ports belong to the currently selected unit as reflected by the page header The Port Statistics Overview screen is shown in Figure 4 4 2 Port Statistics Overview 0 0 0 0 1 E 3
408. s the following fields Object Description e Port The port where you are requesting Cable Diagnostics e Cable Status Port Port number Pair The status of the cable pair Length The length in meters of the cable pair Buttons Start Click to run the diagnostics 274 NS3550 24T 4S User Manual COMMAND LINE INTERFACE Accessing the CLI When accessing the management interface for the switch over a direct connection to the server s console port or via a Telnet connection the switch can be managed by entering command keywords and parameters at the prompt Using the switch s command line interface CLI is very similar to entering commands on a UNIX system This chapter describes how to use the Command Line Interface CLI Logon to the Console Once the terminal has connected to the device power on the Managed Switch the terminal will display that it is running testing procedures Then the following message asks the login username amp password The factory default password as following and the login screen is shown in Figure 5 1 Username admin Password admin m COM1 115200baud Tera Term T File Edit Setup Control Window Resize Help Commands may be abbreviated e g po co instead of port configuration SHITCH gt system reboot System will reboot in a few seconds SWITCH gt Bootloader v1 06 RAM HxGBbOBHH BxXB40BODGAD FLASH BxsS0BB0B0B0B Ox8HS000068 128 blocks of 0x00020000
409. scription Ping IP address ICMP echo Syntax IP Ping lt ip_adar_string gt lt ping_length gt Parameters lt ip_addr_string gt IP host address a b c d or a host name string lt ping length gt Ping data length 8 1400 excluding MAC IP and ICMP headers Example SWITCH gt ip ping 192 168 0 21 PING server 192 168 0 21 60 bytes from 192 168 0 21 icmp_seq 0 time 0ms 60 bytes from 192 168 0 21 icmp_seq 1 time 0ms 60 bytes from 192 168 0 21 icmp_seq 2 time 0ms 60 bytes from 192 168 0 21 icmp_seq 3 time 10ms 60 bytes from 192 168 0 21 icmp_seq 4 time 0ms Sent 5 packets received 5 OK 0 bad 285 IP DNS Description Set or show the DNS server address Syntax IP DNS lt ip_addr gt Parameters lt ip_addr gt IP address a b c d default Show IP address Default Setting 0 0 0 0 Example Set DNS IP address SWITCH gt ip dns 168 95 1 1 IP DNS Proxy Description Set or show the IP DNS Proxy mode Syntax IP DNS_Proxy enable disable Parameters enable Enable DNS Proxy disable Disable DNS Proxy Default Setting disable Example Enable DNS proxy function SWITCH gt ip dns_proxy enable IPv6 AUTOCINFIG Description Set or show the IPv6 AUTOCONFIG mode Syntax IP IPv6 AUTOCONFIG enable disable Parameters 286 NS3550 24T 4S User Manual enable Enable IPv6 AUTOCONFIG mode disable Disable IPv6 AUTOCONFIG mode Default Setting disable Example Enab
410. se The design of WPA is based on a Draft 3 of the IEEE 802 111 standard Wikipedia WPA Radius WPS WTR WPA Radius is an acronym for Wi Fi Protected Access Radius 802 1X authentication server WPA was designed to enhance the security of wireless networks There are two flavors of WPA enterprise and personal Enterprise is meant for use with an IEEE 802 1X authentication server which distributes different keys to each user Personal WPA utilizes less scalable pre shared key PSK mode where every allowed computer is given the same passphrase In PSK mode security depends on the strength and secrecy of the passphrase The design of WPA is based on a Draft 3 of the IEEE 802 111 standard Wikipedia WPS is an acronym for Wi Fi Protected Setup It is a standard for easy and secure establishment of a wireless home network The goal of the WPS protocol is to simplify the process of connecting any home device to the wireless network Wikipedia WTR is an acronym for Wait To Restore This is the time a fail on a resource has to be not active before restoration back to this previously failing resource is done 467
411. ser Manual Disabled Disable access management mode operation Check to delete the entry It will be deleted during the next save Indicates the start IP address for the access management entry Indicates the end IP address for the access management entry Indicates the host can access the switch from HTTP HTTPS interface that the host IP address matched the entry Indicates the host can access the switch from SNMP interface that the host IP address matched the entry Indicates the host can access the switch from TELNET SSH interface that the host IP address matched the entry Click to add a new access management entry _Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values Access Management Statistics This page provides statistics for access management The Access Management Statistics screen is shown in Figure 4 12 3 Access Management Statistics Receive Packets Allow Packets Discard Packets 0 O 0 Auto Refresh Figure 4 12 3 Access Management Statistics Overview Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object e Interface e Receive Packets e Allow Packets Description The interface that allowed remote host can access the switch The received packets number from the interface under access management mode is enabled The allowed packets number from the interface under access management mode is enabled 235 e Discard Packets The discarded packets n
412. seucanucsavecesaneds 275 Accessing Me Colina aniod 275 LOJON tone Console a E e 275 A A ae ee 276 WOINGE LOGIN autista 278 Command Line MOS ssi ee a E e E 279 System Command AAA aveeds kev asinavi enemies ea 279 System COMMGUPAUOM sepe5 acs satan AA A A ioe A A A O 279 System Name ia id dia 280 SEO o A A a O A A ee ee Caner 280 SV SIC MOC ANON a ia 281 System MMC ZOMG id ee ieee 281 A eo ne eee See eee ae 282 Ss A ee eee eae ne 282 System Restore Default cccccccesscccceseecceececcesececseuseeceuceeceececseueeessegeeessececssueceeseuseeseeeeeeessueeeesegeeesseseeesaaes 282 SIM e o a Ne ee er Oe ere eee eee 283 A ies sae a eee ee ee 283 NP CONTIN AING sr te ac aces acca a ees ee eden tse 284 P GOMMGUPALIONM ci checte tr ntc 284 DROP eE E E A 284 PA OS e e EE A ac cts O 285 IRPINO it AA A 285 A A E 286 o Ramee et eka ts em Ree ete aC a aC A en Ce eee ee ee en ee 286 PYOAUTOCINES ii 286 IPVO Set A O OI 287 A ce ats a na a ete ete Pasa esd candace ode se eee a ocean A eta ues 288 LIN TA 6 Or FIG ALON o scaect ees soegeaesdalaceepadcodia EOE 288 TTS BL a1 616 estr ld daa 289 PIN TPS ever Addis li E A 289 EINTPSenveriPYo Add nera ad sida 289 PINTO Server Dele dada 290 Port Management Com Man siciliana noto a 291 FOR CONIQUIA O Nro atari Sct a oa here dida liinda concen 291 A cae cae cee we eee rage S aaa eae ne ct a de ae oan aes 291 OM FIOW GC ON Ol sd ia aaa 292 OAS tc ai tri la ons ect eo tment 292 FOV I
413. show IP source guard mode Syntax Security Network IP Source Guard Mode enable disable Parameters enable Enable IP Source Guard disable Disable IP Source Guard Default Setting disable Example Enable IP source guard mode SWITCH gt security network ip source guard mode enable Security Network IP Source Guard Port Mode Description Set or show the IP Source Guard port mode Syntax Security Network IP Source Guard Port Mode lt port_list gt enable disable Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports enable Enable IP Source Guard port disable Disable IP Source Guard port default Show IP Source Guard port mode Default Setting disable Example Enable IP source guard port mode for port1 4 363 SWITCH gt security network ip source guard port mode 1 4 enable Security Network IP Source Guard Limit Description Set or show the IP Source Guard port limitation for dynamic entries Syntax Security Network IP Source Guard limit lt port_list gt lt dynamic_entry_limit gt unlimited Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports lt dynamic_entry_limit gt unlimited dynamic entry limit 0 2 or unlimited Default Setting unlimited Example Set IP source guard limit SWITCH gt security network ip source guard 1 1 Security Network IP Source Guard Entry Description Add or delete IP source guard static entr
414. statistics Syntax STP Port Statistics lt port_list gt 384 NS3550 24T 4S User Manual Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports Example Show STP port statistics SWITCH gt stp port statistics Port Rx MSTP Tx MSTP Rx RSTP Tx RSTP Rx STP Tx STP Rx TCN Tx TCN Rx Ill Rx Unk STP Port Mcheck Description Set the STP mCheck Migration Check variable for ports Syntax STP Port Mcheck lt port_list gt Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports Example Set the STP mCheck Migration Check variable for port 1 SWITCH gt stp port mcheck 1 STP MSTI Port Configuration Description Show the STP CIST MSTI port configuration Syntax STP Msti Port Configuration lt msti gt lt port_list gt Parameters lt msti gt STP bridge instance no 0 7 CIST 0 MSTI1 1 lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports Default auto 385 Example Set MSTI2 in port1 2 SWITCH gt stp msti port configuration 2 1 2 MSTI Port Path Cost Priority MST2 Aggr Auto 128 MSTI Port Path Cost Priority MST2 1 Auto MST2 2 Auto 128 STP MSTI Port Cost Description Set or show the STP CIST MSTI port path cost Syntax STP Msti Port Cost lt msti gt lt port_list gt lt path_cost gt Parameters lt msti gt STP bridge instance no 0 7 CIST 0 MSTI1 1 lt port_list gt Port list or all Port zero
415. suueeesseeeeseuecessegeeessseesssasesessegeeesseeseesaass 314 SOCUMLY SS WILE ACCESS A oc aces a oe eth NI o a eae eae do 315 Security SwitchAccess IP v6 AO aaa eee S 315 SECUN WILCM ACCESS LIC ICU assy sca ce ton e cecab ado tando 316 Secutiby SWItGh ACCESS LOOK UD etica daa ac 317 DECUMLY SWIC ACCESS ICA sosirii rrt cationes torre aa plisadas 317 Security Switch Access Statistics coooocccconncoconnnocnncconnnoonnnnonnnnnornnononnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnenaninnns 317 Security Switch SNMP Configuration a2 ces eee ee a ete 318 Security Switch SNMP Mode xe 319 SECUN SWCD Nis 320 Security Switch SNMP Read Community ooccccccncnnconcnncnnncncnnncnnnnnncnnonnncnnnnnnrnnonnrnnnnnnrnnrnnnrnnnnnnrnrrnnrnrrnnnnnnnnnancnnnnas 320 Security Switch SNMP Write Community ooocccccocnnncconnncccoconoconcnnononnnconnonononrnnoronnnnnrnnnnnnnnrnnornnrnnonnnnnnnonananennns 321 Security Switch SNMP Trap Mode suit eo dias 321 Security Switch SNMP Trap VersiOn so esaiasiea in ataco 322 Security Switch SNMP Trap Community occooccccccccccccncoccncnncncnncnonncnnonnnnnonnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnrnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnennnnnnnnnnns 322 Security Switch SNMP Trap Destination seende di 323 Security Switch SNMP Trap IPv6 Destination occccoccccccnccccnccncncconnnnnocnnoncnonnnnnnnnnnonnrnonnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnonnnenaninnos 323 Security Switch SNMP Trap Authentication Failure ooccoocccccncnccccnccccnnnonnn
416. t VLAN This Managed Switch supports the following VLAN features E Up to 255 VLANs based on the IEEE 802 1Q standard Distributed VLAN learning across multiple switches using explicit or implicit tagging and GVRP protocol Port overlapping allowing a port to participate in multiple VLANs End stations can belong to multiple VLANs Passing traffic between VLAN aware and VLAN unaware devices Priority tagging E IEEE 802 1Q Standard IEEE 802 1Q tagged VLAN are implemented on the Switch 802 1Q VLAN require tagging which enables them to span the entire network assuming all switches on the network are IEEE 802 1Q compliant VLAN allow a network to be segmented in order to reduce the size of broadcast domains All packets entering a VLAN will only be forwarded to the stations over IEEE 802 1Q enabled switches that are members of that VLAN and this includes broadcast multicast and unicast packets from unknown sources VLAN can also provide a level of security to your network IEEE 802 1Q VLAN will only deliver packets between stations that are members of the VLAN Any port can be configured as either tagging or untagging The untagging feature of IEEE 802 1Q VLAN allows VLAN to work with legacy switches that don t recognize VLAN tags in packet headers m The tagging feature allows VLAN to span multiple 802 1Q compliant switches through a single physical connection and allows Spanning Tree to be enabled on all ports and work norma
417. t VLAN SWITCH gt security network nas guest_vlan enable Security Network NAS Authenticate Description Refresh restart 802 1X authentication process Syntax Security Network NAS Authenticate lt port_list gt now Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports now Force reauthentication immediately Example Start NAS authentication now for port 1 SWITCH gt security network nas authenticate 1 now Security Network NAS Statistics Description Show or clear 802 1X statistics Syntax Security Network NAS Statistics lt port_list gt clear eapol radius Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports clear Clear statistics eapol Show EAPOL statistics radius Show Backend Server statistics default Show all statistics Example 349 Show 802 1X statistics in port 1 SWITCH gt security network nas statistics 1 Port 1 EAPOL Statistics Rx Total Rx Response Id Rx Response Rx Invalid Length 0 Tx Total O Tx Request ld O Tx Request 0 0 Port 1 Backend Server Statistics Rx Access Challenges Rx Other Requests Rx Auth Successes Rx Auth Failures O Tx Responses 0 0 Security Network ACL Configuration Description Show ACL Configuration Syntax Security Network ACL Configuration lt port_list gt Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports Example Show ACL Conf
418. t the hassle of manually assigning it a unique IP address DHCP Relay DHCP Relay is used to forward and to transfer DHCP messages between the clients and the server when they are not on the same subnet domain The DHCP option 82 enables a DHCP relay agent to insert specific information into a DHCP request packets when forwarding client DHCP packets to a DHCP server and remove the specific information from a DHCP reply packets when forwarding server DHCP packets to a DHCP client The DHCP server can use this information to implement IP address or other assignment policies Specifically the option works by setting two sub options Circuit ID option 1 and Remote ID option2 The Circuit ID sub option is supposed to include information specific to which circuit the request came in on The Remote ID sub option was designed to carry information relating to the remote host end of the circuit 454 NS3550 24T 4S User Manual The definition of Circuit ID in the switch is 4 bytes in length and the format is vlan_id module_id port_no The parameter of vlan_id is the first two bytes represent the VLAN ID The parameter of port_no is the fourth byte and it means the port number The Remote ID is 6 bytes in length and the value is equal the DHCP relay agents MAC address DHCP Snooping is used to block intruder on the untrusted ports of the switch device when it tries to intervene by injecting a bogus DHCP reply packet to a legitima
419. tage is that MAC addresses can be spoofed by malicious users equipment whose MAC address is a valid RADIUS user can be used by anyone Also only the MD5 Challenge method is supported The maximum number of clients that can be attached to a port can be limited using the Port Security Limit Control functionality When RADIUS Assigned QoS is both globally enabled and enabled checked for a given port the switch reacts to QoS Class information carried in the RADIUS Access Accept packet transmitted by the RADIUS server when a supplicant is successfully authenticated If present and valid traffic received on the supplicant s port will be classified to the given QoS Class If re authentication fails or the RADIUS Access Accept packet no longer carries a QoS Class or it s invalid or the supplicant is otherwise no longer present on the port the port s QoS Class is immediately reverted to the original QoS Class which may be changed by the administrator in the meanwhile without affecting the RADIUS assigned This option is only available for single client modes i e e Port based 802 1X e Single 802 1X RADIUS attributes used in identifying a QoS Class Refer to the written documentation for a description of the RADIUS attributes needed in order to successfully identify a QoS Class The User Priority Table attribute defined in RFC4675 forms the basis for identifying the QoS Class in an Access Accept packet Only the first occurrence of the attribu
420. tagq this Untagq this Untagq this Untagq this Untagq this Untagq this Untagq this Untaq this Untag this n ee ee m ee m A m a m a am a am a m a m a am A m Auto Re esh E Figure 4 6 5 VLAN Port Status for User Static Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Port The logical port for the settings contained in the same row e PVID Shows the VLAN identifier for that port The allowed values are 1 through 4095 The default value is 1 118 NS3550 24T 4S User Manual e VLAN Aware Show the VLAN Awareness for the port If VLAN awareness is enabled the tag is removed from tagged frames received on the port VLAN tagged frames are classified to the VLAN ID in the tag If VLAN awareness is disabled all frames are classified to the Port VLAN ID and tags are not removed e Ingress Filtering Show the ingress filtering for a port This parameter affects VLAN ingress processing If ingress filtering is enabled and the ingress port is not a member of the classified VLAN of the frame the frame is discarded e Frame Type Shows whether the port accepts all frames or only tagged frames This parameter affects VLAN ingress processing If the port only accepts tagged frames untagged frames received on that port are discarded e Tx Tag Shows egress filtering frame status whether tagged or untagged e UVID Shows UVID untagged VLAN ID Port s UVID determines the packet s behavior at the egress side
421. tax SMTP Configuration Default Setting disable SMTP Mode Description Enable or disable SMTP configure Syntax SMTP Mode enable disable Parameters enable Enable SMTP mode disable Disable SMTP mode default Show SMTP mode Default Setting disable SMTP Server Description Set or show SMTP server configure Syntax SMTP Server lt server gt lt port gt Parameters lt server gt SMTP server address lt port gt SMTP server port Default Setting disable 431 SMTP Auth Description Enable or disable SMTP authentication configure Syntax SMTP Auth enable disable Parameters enable Enable SMTP Authentication disable Disable SMTP Authentication default Show SMTP Authentication Default Setting disable SMTP Auth_user Description Set or show up SMTP authentication user name configure Syntax SMTP Auth_user lt auth_user_text gt Parameters lt auth_user_text gt SMTP Authentication User Name Default Setting disable SMTP Auth_pass Description Set or show up SMTP authentication password configure Syntax SMTP Auth_pass lt auth_pass_text gt Parameters lt auth_pass_text gt SMTP Authentication Password Default Setting disable SMTP Mailfrom Description Set or show SMTP e mail from configure Syntax 432 SMTP Mailfrom lt mailfrom_text gt Parameters lt mailfrom_text gt SMTP E mail From address Default Setting disabl
422. te conversation between the DHCP client and server DNS is an acronym for Domain Name System It stores and associates many types of information with domain names Most importantly DNS translates human friendly domain names and computer hostnames into computer friendly IP addresses For example the domain name www example com might translate to 192 168 0 1 DoS is an acronym for Denial of Service In a denial of service DoS attack an attacker attempts to prevent legitimate users from accessing information or services By targeting at network sites or network connection an attacker may be able to prevent network users from accessing email web sites online accounts banking etc or other services that rely on the affected computer Dotted Decimal Notation refers to a method of writing IP addresses using decimal numbers and dots as separators between octets An IPv4 dotted decimal address has the form x y z w where x y z and w are decimal numbers between 0 and 255 DSCP is an acronym for Differentiated Services Code Point It is a field in the header of IP packets for packet classification purposes E EEE is an abbreviation for Energy Efficient Ethernet defined in IEEE 802 3az EPS is an abbreviation for Ethernet Protection Switching defined in ITU T G8031 Ethernet Type or EtherType is a field in the Ethernet MAC header defined by the Ethernet networking standard It is used to indicate which protocol is bein
423. te in the packet will be considered and to be valid it must follow this rule All 8 octets in the attribute s value must be identical and consist of ASCII characters in the range 0 3 which translates into the desired QoS Class in the range 0 3 When RADIUS Assigned VLAN is both globally enabled and enabled checked for a given port the switch reacts to VLAN ID information carried in the RADIUS Access Accept packet transmitted by the RADIUS server when a supplicant is successfully authenticated If 206 e Guest VLAN Enabled NS3550 24T 4S User Manual present and valid the port s Port VLAN ID will be changed to this VLAN ID the port will be set to be a member of that VLAN ID and the port will be forced into VLAN unaware mode Once assigned all traffic arriving on the port will be classified and switched on the RADIUS assigned VLAN ID If re authentication fails or the RADIUS Access Accept packet no longer carries a VLAN ID or it s invalid or the supplicant is otherwise no longer present on the port the port s VLAN ID is immediately reverted to the original VLAN ID which may be changed by the administrator in the meanwhile without affecting the RADIUS assigned This option is only available for single client modes i e e Port based 802 1X e Single 802 1X For trouble shooting VLAN assignments use the Monitor VLANs gt VLAN Membership and VLAN Port pages These pages show which modules have temporarily o
424. te limiter 17 24 enable 1000 QoS Shaper Description Set or show the port shaper Syntax QoS Shaper lt port_list gt enable disable lt bit_rate gt 414 NS3550 24T 4S User Manual Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports enable Enable shaper disable Disable shaper default Show shaper mode lt bit_rate gt Rate in 1000 bits per second 500 1000000 kbps Default Setting Disabled 500kbps Example Set 1000kbps shaper for port 9 16 SWITCH gt qos shaper 9 16 enable 1000 QoS Storm Unicast Description Set or show the unicast storm rate limiter Syntax QoS Storm Unicast enable disable lt packet_rate gt Parameters enable Enable unicast storm control disable Disable unicast storm control lt packet_rate gt Rate in pps 1 2 4 512 1k 2k 4k 1024k Default Setting Disabled 1pps Example Enable unicast storm rate limiter in 1kpps SWITCH gt qos storm unicast enable 1k QoS Strom Multicast Description Set or show the multicast storm rate limiter Syntax QoS Storm Multicast enable disable lt packet_rate gt Parameters enable Enable multicast storm control disable Disable multicast storm control 415 lt packet_rate gt Rate in pps 1 2 4 512 1k 2k 4k 1024k Default Setting Disabled 1pps Example Enable multicast storm rate limiter in 1kpps SWITCH gt qos storm multicast enable 1k QoS
425. the same server is counted as a retransmit as well as a timeout A send to a different server is counted as a Request as well as a timeout This section contains information about the state of the server and the latest round trip time Name RFC4668 Name State Round Trip radiusAuthClient Time ExtRoundTrip Tim e Description Shows the state of the server It takes one of the following values Disabled The selected server is disabled Not Ready The server is enabled but IP communication is not yet up and running Ready The server is enabled IP communication is up and run and the RADIUS module is ready to accept access attempts Dead X seconds left Access attempts were made to this server but it did not reply within the configured timeout The server has temporarily been disabled but will get re enabled when the dead time expires The number of seconds left before this occurs is displayed in parentheses This state is only reachable when more than one server is enabled The time interval measured in milliseconds between the most recent Access Reply Access Challenge and the Access Request that matched it from the RADIUS authentication server The granularity of this measurement is 100 ms A value of O ms indicates that there hasn t been round trip communication with the server yet The statistics map closely to those specified in RFC4670 RADIUS Accounting Client MIB Use the server select box to switch be
426. timeout gt Parameters lt timeout gt SNMP trap inform timeout 0 2147 seconds default Show SNMP trap inform timeout Default Setting 1 Example Set SNMP trap inform timeout in 20sec SWITCH gt security switch snmp trap inform timeout 20 Security Switch SNMP Trap Inform Retry Times Description Set to or show up the SNMP trap information retry times Syntax Security Switch SNMP Trap Inform Retry Times lt retries gt Parameters lt retries gt SNMP trap inform retransmited times 0 255 default Show SNMP trap inform retry times Default Setting 5 Example Set SNMP trap inform retry times in 10 SWITCH gt security switch snmp trap inform retry times 10 326 NS3550 24T 4S User Manual Security Switch SNMP Trap Probe Security Engine ID Description Show SNMP trap security engine ID probe mode Syntax Security Switch SNMP Trap Probe Security Engine ID enable disable Parameters enable Enable SNMP trap security engine ID probe disable Disable SNMP trap security engine ID probe default Show SNMP trap security engine ID probe mode Default Setting enable Example Disable SNMP trap probe security engine ID SWITCH gt security switch snmp trap probe security engine id disable Security Switch SNMP Trap Security Engine ID Description Set or show SNMP trap security engine ID Syntax Security Switch SNMP Trap Security Engine ID lt engineid gt Parameters
427. tings You can change these settings if desired after you log on This management method is often preferred because you can remain connected and monitor the system during system reboots Also certain error messages are sent to the serial port regardless of 40 NS3550 24T 4S User Manual the interface through which the associated action was initiated A Macintosh or PC attachment can use any terminal emulation program for connecting to the terminal serial port A workstation attachment under UNIX can use an emulator such as TIP Web Management The Managed Switch offers management features that allow users to manage the Managed Switch from anywhere on the network through a standard browser such as Microsoft Internet Explorer After you set up your IP address for the switch you can access the Managed Switch s Web interface applications directly in your Web browser by entering the IP address of the Managed Switch Managed Swibch PCE Warkeratian with LE Browser 1 4 YUTP arde IP Address 197 168 0 100 IP Address 192 166 0 x Figure 3 3 Web Management Diagram You can then use your Web browser to list and manage the Managed Switch configuration parameters from one central location just as if you were directly connected to the Managed Switch s console port Web Management requires either Microsoft Internet Explorer 6 0 or later Safari or Mozilla Firefox 1 5 or later 6 A 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 Proa 22
428. tings as below Default Username admin Default Password admin Default IP address 192 168 0 100 Subnet mask 255 255 255 0 Default Gateway 192 168 0 254 gt 5 sec Factory Default LED Indications The front panel LEDs indicates instant status of port links data activity and system power helps monitor and troubleshoot when needed Figure 2 2 shows the LED indications of these Managed Switch NS3550 24T 4S LED indication E NS3550 24T 4S ifs Console JE Cae 115200 N 8 1 Reset PWR 17 19 a OA ACT 10 100 Wo Mon Figure 2 2 NS3550 24T 4S LED Panel M System LED Color Function DC1 Green Illuminates to indicate that the Switch is powered on by DC1 input DC2 Green Illuminates to indicate that the Switch is powered on by DC2 input Fault Green Illuminates to indicate that Switch AC DC or port has failed Illuminates to indicate that the Switch is powered on Blink to indicate the System is running under booting procedure 27 10 100 1000Base T interfaces Color Function lluminates To indicate the link through that port is successfully established with speed 1000Mbps Blink To indicate that the switch is actively sending or receiving data over that port If L10 100 NK ACT LED light gt indicates that the port is operating at 10Mbps or 100Mbps If LNK ACT LED Off gt indicate that the port is link down Illuminates To indicate the link through that port is successf
429. tomatically updates the MAC table with these dynamic MAC addresses Dynamic entries are removed from the MAC table if there is no frame with the corresponding SMAC address has been seen after a configurable age time MAC Address Table Configuration The MAC Address Table is configured on this page Set timeouts for entries in the dynamic MAC Table and configure the static MAC table here The MAC Address Table Configuration screen is shown in Figure 4 13 1 MAC Address Table Configuration Disable Automatic Aging Figure 4 13 1 MAC Address Table Configuration Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Disable Automatic Enables disables the the automatic aging of dynamic entries Aging e Aging Time The time after which a learned entry is discarded By default dynamic entries are removed from the MAC after 300 seconds This removal is also called aging Range 10 10000000 seconds Default 300 seconds Buttons Save Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 248 NS3550 24T 4S User Manual Static MAC Table Configuration The static entries in the MAC table are shown in this table The static MAC table can contains up to 64 entries The MAC table is sorted first by VLAN ID and then by MAC address The Static MAC Table Configuration screen is shown in Figure 4 13 2 Static MAC Table Configuration mac portmem EA Del
430. treet_suffix str_suf house no jhouse_no_s uffix iandmark additional_info name zip_code building apartment floor room_number place_type postal_ com_namelp_o_ box additional_ code lt civic_value gt Parameters country Country state National subdivisions state caton region province prefecture county County parish gun JP district IN city City townchip shi JP district City division borough city district ward chou JP block Neighborhood block street Street leading_street direction Leading street direction trailing street_suffix Trailing street suffix str_suf Street Suffix house_no House Number house_no_ suffix House number suffix landmark Landmark or vanity address additional_ info Additional location information name Bame residence and office occupant zip code Postal zip code building Building structure apartment Unit apartment suite floor Floor room_number Room number place_type Placetype postal_com_name Postal community name p_o box Post office box P O Box additional_ code Addtional code default Show Civic Address Location configuration lt civic_value gt lldpmed The value for the Civic Address Location entry 405 LLDPMED ECS Description Set or show LLDP MED Emergency Call Service Syntax LLDPMED ecs lt ecs_value gt Parameters lt ecs_value gt lldpmed The value for the Emergency Call Service LLDPMED Policy Delete
431. tween the backend servers to show details for Object e Packet Counters Description RADIUS accounting server packet counter There are five received and four transmitted counters Direction Name Rx Responses Rx Malformed Responses Rx Bad Authenticators Rx Unknown Types 221 RFC4670 Name radiusAccClientExt Responses Description The number of RADIUS packets valid or invalid received from the server radiusAccClientExt The number of malformed MalformedRespons RADIUS packets received es from the server Malformed packets include packets with an invalid length Bad authenticators or or unknown types are not included as malformed access responses radiusAcctClientExt The number of RADIUS BadAuthenticators packets containing invalid authenticators received from the server The number of RADIUS packets of unknown types that were received from the server radiusAccClientExt UnknownTypes e Other Info Rx TA Tx Tx Tx Packets Dropped Requests Retransmissions Pending Requests Timeouts radiusAccClientExt PacketsDropped radiusAccClientExt Requests radiusAccClientExt Retransmissions radiusAccClientExt PendingRequests radiusAccClientExt Timeouts on the accounting port The number of RADIUS packets that were received from the server on the accounting port and dropped for some other reason The number of RADIUS packets sent to the server This does not i
432. ully established with speed 10Mbps or 100Mbps LED 1000 LNK ACT 10 100 Blink To indicate that the switch is actively sending or receiving data over that port Orange LNK ACT Off If 1000 LNK ACT LED light gt indicates that the port is operating at 1000Mbps If 1000 LNK ACT LED Off gt indicates that the port is link down HM 1000Base SX LX SFP interfaces Shared Port 21 Port 24 Function Lights To indicate the link through that SFP port is successfully established eee Off To indicate that the SFP port is link down Switch Rear Panel The rear panel of the Managed Switch indicates an AC inlet power socket which works with an input power range from 50 60Hz Figure 2 3 shows the rear panel of this Managed Switch NS3550 24T 4S Rear Panel As CAUTION Figure 2 3 Rear Panel of the NS3550 24T 4S 1 The device requires a power connection to operate If your networks should active all the time please consider using UPS Uninterrupted Power Supply for your device It will prevent you from network data loss or network downtime 2 For additional protection against unregulated voltage or current surges you may also want to consider surge suppression as part of your installation 28 NS3550 24T 4S User Manual Install the Switch This section describes how to install your Managed Switch and make connections to the Managed Switch Please read the following topics and perform the procedures
433. ultiCast IP Source Guard is a secure feature used to restrict IP traffic on DHCP snooping untrusted ports by filtering traffic based on the DHCP Snooping Table or manually configured IP Source Bindings It helps prevent IP spoofing attacks when a host tries to spoof and use the IP address of another host LACP is an IEEE 802 3ad standard protocol The Link Aggregation Control Protocol allows bundling several physical ports together to form a single logical port LLDP is an IEEE 802 1ab standard protocol The Link Layer Discovery Protocol LLDP specified in this standard allows stations attached to an IEEE 802 LAN to advertise to other stations attached to the same IEEE 802 LAN the major capabilities provided by the system incorporating that station the management address or addresses of the entity or entities that provide management of those capabilities and the identification of the stations point of attachment to the IEEE 802 LAN required by those management entity or entities The information distributed via this protocol is stored by its recipients in a standard Management Information Base MIB making it possible for the information to be accessed by a Network Management System NMS using a management protocol such as the Simple Network Management Protocol SNMP LLDP MED is an extendsion of IEEE 802 1ab and is defined by the telecommunication industry association TIA 1057 LOC is an acronym for Loss Of Connectivity and
434. umber from the interface under access management mode is enabled Buttons Auto refresh Check this box to enable an automatic refresh of the page at regular intervals Refresh Click to refresh the page immediately Clear Clear all statistics HTTPs Configure HTTPS on this page The HTTPS Configuration screen is shown in Figure 4 12 4 HTTPS Configuration ee oo Figure 4 12 4 HTTPS Configuration Screen Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Mode Indicates the HTTPS mode operation Possible modes are Enabled Enable HTTPS mode operation Disabled Disable HTTPS mode operation e Automatic Redirect Indicates the HTTPS redirect mode operation Automatic redirect web browser to HTTPS during HTTPS mode enabled Possible modes are Enabled Enable HTTPS redirect mode operation Disabled Disable HTTPS redirect mode operation Buttons Save Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values SSH Configure SSH on this page This page shows the Port Security status Port Security is a module with no direct configuration Configuration comes indirectly from the user modules When a user module has enabled port security on a port the port is set up for software based learning In this mode frames from unknown MAC addresses are passed on to the port security module which in turn asks all user modules whether to
435. ust made a cold boot 4 Info 1970 01 01 Thu 00 00 04 0000 Link up on port 15 283 IP Command IP Configuration Description Show IP configuration Syntax IP Configuration Example Show IP configuration Switch gt ip configuration IP Configuration DHCP Client Disabled 192 168 0 100 255 255 255 0 192 168 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 DNS Proxy Disabled IPv6 AUTOCONFIG mode Disabled IPv6 Link Local Address fe80 230 4fff fe24 4d1 IPv6 Address 192 168 0 100 IPv6 Prefix 96 IPv6 Router e IPv6 VLAN ID a IP DHCP Description Set or show the DHCP client mode Syntax IP DHCP enable disable Parameters enable Enable or renew DHCP client disable Disable DHCP client Default Setting Disable Example Disable DHCP sever SWITCH gt ip dhcp disable 284 NS3550 24T 4S User Manual IP Setup Description Set or show the IP setup Syntax IP Setup lt ip_addr gt lt ip_mask gt lt ip_router gt lt vid gt Parameters lt ip_addr gt IP address a b c d default Show IP address lt ip_mask gt IP subnet mask a b c d default Show IP mask lt ip_router gt IP router a b c d default Show IP router lt vid gt VLAN ID 1 4095 default Show VLAN ID Default Setting IP Address 192 168 0 100 IP Mask 255 255 255 0 IP Router 192 168 0 1 DNS Server 0 0 0 0 VLAN ID 1 Example Set IP address SWITCH gt ip setup 192 168 0 100 255 255 255 0 IP Ping De
436. uthentication fails for one or the other reason the client will remain in the unauthenticated state for Hold Time seconds 213 e Last Authentication Shows the date and time of the last authentication of the client Successful as well as unsuccessful Buttons Auto refresh Check this box to enable an automatic refresh of the page at regular intervals Retresh Glick to refresh the page immediately ciar This button is available in the following modes e Force Authorized e Force Unauthorized e Port based 802 1X e Single 802 1X Click to clear the counters for the selected port Clear ALL This button is available in the following modes e Multi 802 1X e MAC based Auth X Click to clear both the port counters and all of the attached client s counters The Last Client will not be cleared however Clear This This button is available in the following modes e Multi 802 1X e MAC based Auth X Click to clear only the currently selected client s counters Authentication Server Configuration This page allows you to configure the Authentication Servers The Authentication Server Configuration screen is shown in Figure 4 11 7 214 NS3550 24T 4S User Manual Authentication Server Configuration Common Server Configuration RADIUS Authentication Server Configuration ORO pet et AS FF 2 G FF 2 A q AA RADIUS Accounting Server Configuration a EEE A e ET e o EE A IE A Y E o
437. values ARP Inspection Static Table This page provides Static ARP Inspection Table The Static ARP Inspection Table screen is shown in Figure 4 12 13 static ARP Inspection Table VLAN ID MAC Address IP Address Add new entry Figure 4 12 13 Static ARP Inspection TableScreen Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Delete Check to delete the entry It will be deleted during the next save e Port The logical port for the settings e VLAN ID The VLAN ID for the settings e MAC Address Allowed Source MAC address in ARP request packets e IP Address Allowed Source IP address in ARP request packets Buttons Add new enty Click to add a new entry Save Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 247 Address Table Switching of frames is based upon the DMAC address contained in the frame The Managed Switch builds up a table that maps MAC addresses to switch ports for knowing which ports the frames should go to based upon the DMAC address in the frame This table contains both static and dynamic entries The static entries are configured by the network administrator if the administrator wants to do a fixed mapping between the DMAC address and switch ports The frames also contain a MAC address SMAC address which shows the MAC address of the equipment sending the frame The SMAC address is used by the switch that au
438. ve states Force Authorized Force Unauthorized Port based 802 1X Single 802 1X Multi 802 1X Direction Name Rx Total Rx Response ID Rx Responses Rx Start Rx Logoff Rx Invalid Type Rx Invalid Length TX Total TX Request ID TX Requests IEEE Name dot1xAuthEapolFrames Rx dot1xAuthEapolRespld FramesRx dot1xAuthEapolRespFr amesRx dot1xAuthEapolStartFra mesRx dot1xAuthEapolLogoffFr amesRx dot1 xAuthInvalidEapolF ramesRx dot1xAuthEapLengthErr orFramesRx dot1xAuthEapolFrames Tx dot1xAuthEapolRegldFr amesTx dot1xAuthEapolRegqFra mesTx Description The number of valid EAPOL frames of any type that have been received by the switch The number of valid EAPOL Response Identity frames that have been received by the switch The number of valid EAPOL response frames other than Response Identity frames that have been received by the switch The number of EAPOL Start frames that have been received by the switch The number of valid EAPOL Logoff frames that have been received by the switch The number of EAPOL frames that have been received by the switch in which the frame type is not recognized The number of EAPOL frames that have been received by the switch in which the Packet Body Length field is invalid The number of EAPOL frames of any type that has been transmitted by the switch The number of EAPOL Request Identity frames that have been transmitted by the switch
439. ver Syntax Security Network DHCP Relay Server lt ip_addr gt Parameters lt ip_addr gt IP address a b c d default Show IP address Default Setting null Example Set DHCP relay server in 192 168 0 20 SWITCH gt security network dhcp relay server 192 168 0 20 Security Network DHCP Relay Information Mode Description Set or show DHCP relay agent information option mode When enable DHCP relay information mode operation the agent insert specific information option 82 into a DHCP 397 message when forwarding to DHCP server and remote it from a DHCP message when transferring to DHCP client It only works under DHCP relay operation mode enabled Syntax Security Network DHCP Relay Information Mode enable disable Parameters enable Enable DHCP relay agent information option mode disable Disable DHCP relay agent information option mode default Show DHCP relay agent information option mode Default Setting disable Example Enable DHCP relay agent information option mode SWITCH gt security network dhcp relay information mode enable Security Network DHCP Relay Information Policy Description Set or show the DHCP relay mode When enable DHCP relay information mode operation if agent received a DHCP message that already contains relay agent information It will enforce the policy Syntax Security Network DHCP Relay Information Policy replace keep drop Parameters replace
440. ver add new RADIUS Client Setting 3 Assign the client IP address to the Managed switch xj Name and Address Type a friendly name and either an IP Address or DNS name for the client Friendly name je02 1 Managed Switch Chent address IP or ONS f 32 169 0 700 Verity Back Lancel Figure 4 11 12 Windows Server RADIUS Server setting 224 NS3550 24T 4S User Manual 4 The shared secret key should be as same as the key configured on the Managed Switch New RADIUS Client RADIUS Standard HNNAN Figure 4 11 13 Windows Server RADIUS Server Setting 225 5 Configure ports attribute of 802 1X the same as 802 1X Port Configuration RADIUS Assigned RADIUS Assigned Guest Admin State aes En Enabled VLAN Enabled YLAN Enabled Pot State EE Port based 802 1X pO LS Port based 802 1X Globally Disabled Scauthenticate Reimnitialz 2 Porthased 02 1 S 5 s Globally Disabled Reauthenticate Reinitialize Figure 4 11 14 802 1x Port Configuration 6 Create user data The establishment of the user data needs to be created on the Radius Server PC For example the Radius Server founded on Win2003 Server and then AED Ld pa Security Shortcut to Active Directory Domains and Trusts Confiqur ati Network Active Directory Sites and Services Active Directory Users and Computers Certification Authority Agminisiraior Cluster Administrator
441. verridden the current Port VLAN configuration RADIUS attributes used in identifying a VLAN ID RFC2868 and RFC3580 form the basis for the attributes used in identifying a VLAN ID in an Access Accept packet The following criteria are used The Tunnel Medium Type Tunnel Type and Tunnel Private Group ID attributes must all be present at least once in the Access Accept packet The switch looks for the first set of these attributes that have the same Tag value and fulfil the following requirements if Tag 0 is used the Tunnel Private Group ID does not need to include a Tag Value of Tunnel Medium Type must be set to IEEE 802 ordinal 6 Value of Tunnel Type must be set to VLAN ordinal 13 Value of Tunnel Private Group ID must be a string of ASCII chars in the range 0 9 which is interpreted as a decimal string representing the VLAN ID Leading 0 s are discarded The final value must be in the range 1 4095 When Guest VLAN is both globally enabled and enabled checked for a given port the switch considers moving the port into the Guest VLAN according to the rules outlined below This option is only available for EAPOL based modes e e Port based 802 1X e Single 802 1X e Multi 802 1X For trouble shooting VLAN assignments use the Monitor gt VLANs gt VLAN Membership and VLAN Port pages These pages show which modules have temporarily overridden the current Port VLAN configuration Guest VLAN Op
442. w the max number of MAC addresses that can be learned on this set of ports Syntax Security Network Limit Limit lt port_list gt lt limit gt Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports lt limit gt Max number of MAC addresses on this port default Show current limit Default Setting 4 Example Set limit in 5 SWITCH gt security network limit limit 1 24 5 Security Network Limit Action Description Set or show the action involved with exceeding the limit Syntax Security Network Limit Action lt port_list gt none trap shut trap_ shut Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports none trap shut trap_ shut Action to be taken in case the number of MAC addresses exceeds the limit none Don t do anything trap Send an SNMP trap shut Shutdown the port trap_ shut Send an SNMP trap and shutdown the port 341 default Show current action Default Setting none Example Set trap mode for limit action for port 1 SWITCH gt security network limit action 1 trap Security Network Limit Reopen Description Reopen one or more ports whose limit is exceeded and shut down Syntax Security Network Limit Reopen lt port_list gt Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports Example Reopen port 1 SWITCH gt security network limit reopen 1 Security Network NAS Configuration Description
443. w view Save Click to save changes Description Check to delete the entry It will be deleted during the next save A string identifying the view name that this entry should belong to The allowed string length is 1 to 32 and the allowed content is the ASCII characters from 33 to 126 Indicates the view type that this entry should belong to Possible view type are included An optional flag to indicate that this view subtree should be included excluded An optional flag to indicate that this view subtree should be excluded General if a view entry s view type is excluded it should be exist another view entry which view type is included and it s OID subtree overstep the excluded view entry The OID defining the root of the subtree to add to the named view The allowed OID length is 1 to 128 The allowed string content is digital number or asterisk Click to add a new view entry Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values SNMPv3 Accesses Configuration Configure SNMPv3 accesses table on this page The entry index key is Group Name Security Model and Security Level The SNMPv3 Accesses Configuration screen is shown in Figure 4 3 8 86 L default to group NS3550 24T 4S User Manual SNMPv3 Accesses Configuration Security Model Security Level Read View Name Write View Name any No4uth NoPriw default rw group The page includes the following fields
444. x should contain the following items Check the contents of your package for following parts M The Managed Switch x1 M User s Manual CD x1 M Quick Installation Guide x1 M 19 Rack Mount Accessory Kit x1 M Power Cord x1 M Rubber Feet X4 M RS 232 DB9 Male Console Cable x1 If any of these are missing or damaged please contact your dealer immediately if possible retain the original carton and packaging material in case of a need to return the product for repair replacement Product Description Environmentally Hardened Design for Industrial Networks The IFS NS3550 24T 4S is an environmentally hardened Industrial Managed Ethernet Switch with high Port density Gigabit Fiber link capability and 19 rack mountable design It is specifically designed to operate stable in electrically harsh and the toughest environment with extended operating temperature ranges The NS3550 24T 4S is equipped with advanced management functions and provides 24 10 100 1000Base T copper ports and 4 shared 1000Base S LX SFP slots delivered in a rugged strong case It is capable of providing non blocking switch fabric and wire speed throughput as high as 48 Gbps in the temperature range from 40 to 75 Degree C without any packet loss and CRC error which greatly simplifies the tasks of upgrading the industrial and building automation LAN for adopting to increasing bandwidth demands of IP video surveillance The NS3550 24T 4S is the most reliable choice for highly
445. ximum Hop Count e Transmit Hold Count Advanced Settings Object e Edge Port BPDU Filtering e Edge Port BPDU Guard e Port Error Recovery e Port Error Recovery Timeout Click to save changes Description The STP protocol version setting Valid values are STP RSTP and MSTP The delay used by STP Bridges to transition Root and Designated Ports to Forwarding used in STP compatible mode Valid values are in the range 4 to 30 seconds Default 15 Minimum The higher of 4 or Max Message Age 2 1 Maximum 30 The maximum age of the information transmitted by the Bridge when it is the Root Bridge Valid values are in the range 6 to 200 seconds Default 20 Minimum The higher of 6 or 2 x Hello Time 1 Maximum The lower of 40 or 2 x Forward Delay 1 This defines the initial value of remaining Hops for MSTI information generated at the boundary of an MSTI region It defines how many bridges a root bridge can distribute its BPDU information Valid values are in the range 6 to 40 hops The number of BPDU s a bridge port can send per second When exceeded transmission of the next BPDU will be delayed Valid values are in the range 1 to 10 BPDU s per second Description Control whether a port configures explicitly as Edge will transmit and receive BPDUs Control whether a port configures explicitly as Edge will disable itself upon reception of a BPDU The port will enter the error disabled state
446. y Syntax Security Network IP Source Guard Entry lt port_list gt add delete lt vid gt lt allowed_ip gt lt ip mask gt Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports add Add new port IP source guard static entry delete Delete existing port IP source guard static entry lt vid gt VLAN ID 1 4095 lt allowed_ip gt IP address a b c d IP address allowed for doing ARP request lt ip_mask gt IP mask a b c d IP mask for allowed IP address 364 NS3550 24T 4S User Manual Example Add IP source guard static entry SWITCH gt security network ip source guard entry 1 add 1 192 168 0 20 255 255 255 0 Security Network IP Source Guard Status Description Show IP source guard static and dynamic entries Syntax Security Network IP Source Guard Status lt port_list gt Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports Example Show IP source guard static and dynamic entries SWITCH gt security network ip source guard status Security Network ARP Inspection Configuration Description Show ARP inspection configuration Syntax Security Network ARP Inspection Configuration Example Show ARP inspection configuration SWITCH gt security network arp inspection configuration Security Network ARP Inspection Mode Description Set or show ARP inspection mode 365 Syntax Security Network ARP Inspection Mode enable disable Paramete
447. y Network ARP Inspection Status o cccoccccccccccocnccccnnononononnnononnnonnnnonnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnaninnos 367 Security AAA CONIQUIA Ossa dd dida 368 SECUTILY ARA MEDU ss e Ls 368 Security AAA Deadtime viii A A Reta 369 SECU ARA RAD US a o o an o o e o a 369 Security AARAGC I RADIUS cae 370 SECUN AAA TACACS Gamer the tent ner o er Et arse Re PM eee o ti nh eee Sanne ee le eee erent entre rare 371 o ssa Sites se teal Bee tess Ad tie see stad aie nt nae se an eet namaste aa etnae st dates cued Soh Bastaeeca ae sauebions 371 Spanning Tree Protocol COMMANG rsin iia 372 SS Ol MOU PAU I etssita nn sanen ities dane canta eas uend eaetioas dees eae uramcenaan 372 STE VEO io lt iia 372 SA 6 Smear entre te aR erie eso Te Pen COE ee ne re en ere ee eee eee 373 SA A A A A ede ade te tee 373 SIP MIAGE ee ae ias 375 S at gh 200 gt by a no De NS A Oe eee ee ee 375 SEPA GINO caida EE a 376 SB a FIle gee ete ree er ee ete er tee ee eat ne ee ene et ee ee ne Ree eee Re eee rere 376 STP BS ap idas 377 STP RECOV iS 377 SPP SUAS ud ii aii 378 SIAM iS 378 STE MS TIM ii is 379 STPAMS TA e A A A A E 380 STR POR CONTIGUA ION tibia 380 STP PROM MOJE o os 380 STP PODES te 381 S TP Ont AUTO da a li lt need nase 382 A ere ee ee eee ee oe eo 382 STP RO RES 1 610 a a cen een noe Ren a loci 383 SIP POPU TROS UCL Ici eta teas ease Sh ead ow Scien ca ewe aca A a rita 383 SEP POM DOCG Uae a cers ni ects nce vcs Seca ee eed e
448. y saved values 68 NS3550 24T 4S User Manual Web Firmware Upgrade This page facilitates an update of the firmware controlling the switch The Web Firmware Upgrade screen is shown in Figure 4 2 18 Firmware Upgrade Browse Uplead Brose J Figure 4 2 18 Web Firmware Upgrade Page Screenshot To open Firmware Upgrade screen perform the folling 1 Click System gt Web Firmware Upgrade 2 The Firmware Upgrade screen is displayed as in Figure 4 2 18 Browse 3 Click the button of the main page the system would pop up the file selection menu to choose firmware 4 Select the firmware file then click the Software Upload Progress would show the file upload status 5 Once the software be loaded to the system successfully the following screen The system will load the new software after reboot Firmware Upgrade in progess The uploaded firmware image is being transferred to flash The system will reboot after the Upgrade Until then do not reset or power off the device Y Completed Figure 4 2 19 Software successfully Loaded Notice Screen DO NOT Power OFF the Managed Switch until the update progress is complete Do not quit the Firmware Upgrade page without pressing the OK button after the image be loaded Or the system won t apply the new firmware User has to repeat the firmware upgrade processes again 69 TFTP Firmware Upgrade The Firmware Upgrade page provides the functi
449. z f 4 dy al ory al ql al ae ql al ql al ae dy al dy al hal lt hal lt A wt w lt wt 4 hat wat lt lt 4 lt lt 4 E lt Figure 4 9 13 DSCP Remarking Configuration Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object e Port e DSCP Remarking Mode e DSCP Queue Mapping Description The logical port for the settings contained in the same row 4 Cod Cod Cod Cod Cod Cod Cad Cod Cod Cod Cod Cod od Cod Cod Cod Cod Cod Cod Cod Cod Cod hal xs wt wt wt wt E lt hal hal wt wt 4s wt wt hall hail 4 lt wt wt wt 4 s wt wt wt wt wt wt lt If the QoS remarking mode is set to enabled it should be with this DSCP remarking correction function according to RFC2474 on this port Configure the mapping table between the queue and its DSCP value that is used for DSCP remarking if the DSCP value of incoming packets is not specified in RCF2474 Best Effort DSCP 0 CS1 DSCP 8 CS2 DSCP 16 CS3 DSCP 24 CS4 DSCP 32 180 NS3550 24T 4S User Manual CS5 DSCP 40 CS6 DSCP 48 CS7 DSCP 56 Expedite Forward DSCP 46 Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values Voice VLAN Configuration The Voice VLAN feature enables the voice traffic

IFS NS3550-24T/4S User Manual - Surveillance

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents